Introduction
Introduction
This manual is designed primarily for use by trained technicians in a properly equipped workshop. However, it contains enough detail and basic information to make it useful to the owner who desires to perform his own basic maintenance and repair work. The work can only be carried out if the owner has the necessary hand and special service tools to complete the job.
A basic knowledge of mechanics, including the proper use of tools and workshop procedures is necessary in order to carry out maintenance and repair work satisfactorily. Whenever the owner has insufficient experience or doubts regarding his ability to do the work, an authorised Triumph dealer must undertake all adjustments, maintenance, and repair work.
In order to perform the work efficiently and to avoid costly mistakes, read the text and thoroughly familiarise yourself with procedures before starting work.
All work should be performed with great care and in a clean working area with adequate lighting.
Always use the correct special service tools or equipment specified. Under no circumstances use makeshift tools or equipment since the use of substitutes may adversely affect safe operation.
Where accurate measurements are required, they can only be made using calibrated, precision instruments.
For the duration of the warranty period, an authorised Triumph dealer must perform all repairs and scheduled maintenance.
To maximise the life of your motorcycle:
Accurately follow the maintenance requirements of the periodic maintenance chart in the Service Manual.
Do not allow problems to develop. Investigate unusual noises and changes in the riding characteristics of the motorcycle. Rectify all problems as soon as possible (immediately if safety related).
Use only genuine Triumph parts as listed in the electronic parts catalogue (EPC).
Follow the procedures in this manual carefully and completely. Do not take short cuts.
Keep complete records of all maintenance and repairs with dates and any new parts installed.
Use only approved lubricants, as specified in the Owner's Handbook, in the maintenance of the motorcycle.
How to use this manual
To assist in the use of this manual, the section title is given at the top.
Each major section starts with a contents page, listing the information contained in the section.
The individual steps comprising repair operations are to be followed in the sequence in which they appear.
Adjustment and repair operations include reference to service tool numbers and the associated illustration depicts the tool.
Where usage is not obvious, the tool is shown in use.
Adjustment and repair operations also include reference to wear limits, relevant data, torque figures, specialist information and useful assembly details.
Dangers, Warnings, Cautions and Notices
Particularly important information is presented in the following form:
Noise Control System
Owners are warned that the law may prohibit:
The removal or rendering inoperative by any person other than for purposes of maintenance, repair or replacement, of any device or element of design incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of noise control prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use and,
the use of the vehicle after such device or element of design has been removed or rendered inoperative by any person.
Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are the acts listed below:
Removal of, or puncturing the muffler, baffles, header pipes or any other component which conducts exhaust gases.
Removal of, or puncturing of any part of the intake system.
Lack of proper maintenance.
Replacing any moving parts of the vehicle, or parts of the exhaust or intake system, with parts other than those specified by the manufacturer.
References
References to the left hand or right hand side given in this manual are made when viewing the motorcycle from the rear.
Operations covered in this manual do not always include reference to testing the motorcycle after repair. It is essential that work is inspected and tested after completion and, if necessary, a road test of the motorcycle is carried out particularly where safety related items are concerned.
Dimensions
The dimensions quoted are to design engineering specification with service limits where applicable.
During the period of running-in from new, certain adjustments may vary from the specification figures given in this manual. These will be reset by the dealer at the 600 mile/1000 km service, and thereafter should be maintained at the figures specified in this manual.
Repairs and Replacements
Before removal and disassembly, thoroughly clean the motorcycle. Any dirt entering the engine or other parts will work as an abrasive and shorten the life of the motorcycle. Particular attention should be paid when installing a new part, that any dust or metal filings are cleared from the immediate area.
Force
Common sense should dictate how much force is necessary in assembly and disassembly. If a part seems especially difficult to remove or install, stop and examine what may be causing the problem. Never lever a component as this will cause damage both to the component itself and to the surface being levered against.
Whenever tapping to aid removal of an item is necessary, tap lightly using a hide or plastic faced mallet.
Edges
Watch for sharp edges, especially during engine disassembly and assembly. Protect the hands with industrial quality gloves.
When replacement parts are required, it is essential that only genuine Triumph parts are used.
Safety features and corrosion prevention treatments embodied in the motorcycle may be impaired if parts other than genuine Triumph parts are fitted. In certain territories, legislation prohibits the fitting of parts not to the manufacturer's specification.
Fixings
Locking devices, where specified, must be fitted.
If the efficiency of a locking device is impaired during removal it must be renewed.
Micro-encapsulated and patch locked fixings must always be replaced if disturbed.
Where necessary, the text in this manual will indicate where such a fixing is used.
An encapsulated fixing can be identified by the diameter of threads is encompassed by the locking agent.
A patch locked fixing can be identified by a coloured section of thread which is treated with a locking agent.
|
Tightening Procedures
Generally, when installing a part with several bolts, nuts or screws, they should all be started in their holes and tightened to a snug fit, evenly and in a cross pattern. This is to avoid distortion of the part and/or gas or oil leakage. Conversely, bolts, nuts, or screws, should all be loosened (in sequence if specified) by about a quarter of a turn and then removed.
Where there is a tightening sequence specified in this Service Manual, the bolts, nuts, or screws must be tightened in the order and by the method indicated.
Torque wrench setting figures given in this manual must be observed. The torque tools used must be of accurate calibration.
Torque Tolerance
Torque | Tolerance |
0 Nm to 25 Nm | +/- 10% |
26 Nm to 100 Nm | +10% -0% |
101 Nm to 200 Nm | +10% -0% |
Locking devices, where specified, must be fitted. If the efficiency of a locking device is impaired during removal it must be renewed.
This applies particularly to micro-encapsulated and patch locked fixings which must always be replaced if disturbed.
Where necessary, the text in this manual will indicate where such a fixing is used.
Use of Crow Foot Spanner Adapters with Torque Wrenches
The use of a crow foot spanner adapter will effectively lengthen the lever arm of a torque wrench. The amount of torque applied to a fastener is increased as the torque wrench lever arm is extended, therefore the torque wrench setting must be adjusted in order to achieve the correct tightening torque.
Before tightening a fixing using a crow foot spanner adapter, measure the normal length of the torque wrench from the centre of the drive square to the centre of the handle (dimension L1). Fit the crow foot spanner adapter to the torque wrench as shown below. Measure the extended length of the torque wrench from the centre of the crow foot spanner head to the centre of the handle (dimension L2).
Use the following formula to calculate the correct torque wrench setting to achieve the required tightening torque.
M1 = M2 x L1 / L2 | Example |
M2 is the required tightening torque to be applied | 90 Nm |
L1 is the normal length of the torque wrench, measured from the centre of the drive square to the centre of the handle | 300 mm |
L2 is the extended length of the torque wrench, measured from the centre of the crow foot spanner head to the centre of the handle | 325 mm |
M1 is the calculated torque wrench setting | 83 Nm |
Using a Micrometer
Calibration
The thimble is fixed to the spindle so that both components turn together.
The sleeve is fixed to one end of the frame. It has graduations and an index line to aid the reading of the graduations on the thimble.
|
Measuring
- Hold the micrometer frame and place the item to be measured between the anvil and spindle.
- Using the ratchet adjuster, close the spindle until the ratchet freely clicks.
- Lock the thimble using the locking device.
Micrometer frame
Sleeve
Thimble
Ratchet adjuster
Locking device
Spindle
Anvil
Component Serviceability
Premature wear of a surface finish should be visually checked for:
Abrasive wear;
Corrosion and oxidation;
Erosive wear;
Fretting;
Surface fatigue.
Examples
Taper - to become gradually smaller toward one end.
Wear - the continuing loss of material from the surface of a solid body.
Ovality - the difference between the maximum and minimum dimensions of the overall diameter.
The following illustration measures a crankshaft as an example.
|
General Information
Ignition System Safety Precautions
Warning ignition system high voltage
Warning Pacemaker Devices and Ignition System High Voltage
Dangerous Substances
Warning Dangerous Substances
Third Party Products
Fluoroelastomers
Oils
Health Protection Precautions
Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils.
Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable.
Do not put oily rags in pockets.
Overalls must be cleaned regularly. Discard heavily soiled clothing and oil impregnated footwear.
First aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds. Always be aware of who your nearest First Aider is and where the medical facilities are kept.
Use barrier creams, applying before each work period to protect the skin from the effects of oil and grease and to aid removal of the same after completing work.
Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help). Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed.
Do not use petrol, kerosene, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinners or solvents for cleaning skin.
If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay.
Where practicable, degrease components prior to handling.
Environmental Protection Precautions
Burning of used engine oil in small space heaters or boilers can be recommended only for units of approved design. If in doubt, check with the appropriate local authority and/or manufacturer of the approved appliance.
Dispose of used oil and used filters through authorised waste disposal contractors, to licensed waste disposal sites, or to the waste oil reclamation trade. If in doubt, contact your local authority for advice on disposal facilities.
Brakes
Warning Brakes - Hygroscopic plus list of other wngs
Warning Brakes - Depleted Brake Fluid Levels
Warning Brakes - Mineral based grease
Warning Brakes - Clean and lubricate internal brake components with DOT 4 fluid
Safety Instructions
Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Jacking and Lifting
Precautions Against Damage
Avoid spilling brake fluid or battery acid on any part of the bodywork. Wash spillages off with water immediately.
Disconnect the battery earth lead before starting work, see ELECTRICAL PRECAUTIONS.
Always use the recommended service tool where specified.
Protect exposed bearing and sealing surfaces, and screw threads from damage.
Coolant
Cleaning Components
A high flashpoint solvent is recommended to reduce fire hazard.
Always follow container directions regarding the use of any solvent.
Always use the recommended cleaning agent or equivalent.
Do not use degreasing equipment for components containing items which could be damaged by the use of this process. Whenever possible, clean components and the area surrounding them before removal. Always observe scrupulous cleanliness when cleaning dismantled components.
Lubrication
The majority of engine wear occurs while the engine is warming up and before all the rubbing surfaces have an adequate lubrication film. During assembly, oil or grease (whichever is more suitable) should be applied to any rubbing surface, which has lost its lubrication film. Old grease and dirty oil should be cleaned off. This is because used lubricants will have lost some lubrication qualities and may contain abrasive foreign particles.
Use recommended lubricants. Some oils and greases in particular should be used only in certain applications and may be harmful if used in an application for which they are not intended. This manual makes reference to molybdenum disulphide grease in the assembly of certain engine and chassis parts. Always check manufacturer recommendations before using such special lubricants.
Joints and Joint Faces
Assemble joints dry unless otherwise specified in this manual.
If gaskets and/or jointing compound is recommended for use; remove all traces of old jointing material prior to reassembly. Do not use a tool which will damage the joint faces and smooth out any scratches or burrs on the joint faces using an oil stone. Do not allow dirt or jointing material to enter any tapped holes.
Gaskets, O-rings
Do not reuse a gasket or O-ring once it has been in service. The mating surfaces around the gasket should be free of foreign matter and perfectly smooth to avoid oil or compression leaks.
Liquid Gasket, Non-permanent Locking Agent
Follow manufacturer's directions for cleaning and preparing surfaces where these compounds will be used. Apply sparingly as excessive amounts of sealer may block engine oil passages and cause serious damage.
Prior to reassembly, blow through any pipes, channels or crevices with compressed air.
Screw Threads
Metric threads to ISO standard are used.
Damaged nuts, bolts and screws must always be discarded.
Castellated nuts must not be loosened back to accept a split pin, except in those recommended cases when this forms part of an adjustment.
Do not allow oil or grease to enter blind threaded holes. The hydraulic action on screwing in the bolt or stud could split the housing.
Always tighten a nut or bolt to the recommended torque figure. Damaged or corroded threads can affect the torque reading.
Unless specified, threaded fixings must always be fitted dry (no lubrication).
Locking Devices
Always release locking tabs and fit new locking washers. Do not reuse locking tabs.
Fitting a Split Pin
Always fit new split pins of the correct size for the hole in the bolt or stud. Do not loosen back castle nuts when fitting a split pin, except in those recommended cases when this forms part of an adjustment.
Always fit new roll pins of an interference fit in the hole.
Circlips, Retaining Rings
Replace any circlips and retaining rings that are removed. Removal weakens and deforms circlips causing looseness in the circlip groove. When installing circlips and retaining rings, take care to compress or expand them only enough to install them.
Always use the correct replacement circlip as recommended in the Triumph parts catalogue.
Self-Locking Nuts
Self-locking nuts can be reused, provided resistance can be felt when the locking portion passes over the thread of the bolt or stud.
DO NOT reuse self-locking nuts in critical locations, e.g. suspension components. Always use the correct replacement self-locking nut.
Encapsulated Bolts
An encapsulated bolt can be identified by a coloured section of thread which is treated with a locking agent.
Unless a specified repair procedure states otherwise, encapsulated bolts cannot be reused and MUST be replaced if disturbed or removed.
Oil and Grease Seals
Replace any oil or grease seals that are removed. Removal will cause damage to an oil seal which, if reused, would cause an oil leak.
Ensure the surface on which the new seal is to run is free of burrs or scratches. Renew the component if the original sealing surface cannot be completely restored.
Protect the seal from any surface which could cause damage over which it has to pass when being fitted. Use a protective sleeve or tape to cover the relevant surface and avoid touching the sealing lip.
Lubricate the sealing lips with a recommended lubricant. This will help to prevent damage in initial use. On dual lipped seals, smear the area between the lips with appropriate grease.
When pressing in a seal which has manufacturer's marks, press in with the marks facing out.
Seals must be pressed into place using a suitable driver. Use of improper tools will damage the seal.
Press
A part installed using a press or driver, such as a wheel bearing, should first be coated with oil or grease on its outer or inner circumference so that it will locate smoothly.
Ball Bearing
When installing a ball bearing, the bearing race which is an interference fit should be pushed by a suitable driver. This prevents severe stress or damage to the load carrying components. Press a ball bearing until it touches the shoulder in the bore or on the shaft.
With the sealing lip facing the lubricant, press or drift a seal to the depth of its housing, if the housing is shouldered, or flush with the face of the housing where no shoulder is provided.
Motorcycle Inspection after an Accident, Collision or Fall
Warning Maintenance - Motorcycle in Accident/Fall
If the motorcycle is involved in an accident, collision or fall, it must be carefully inspected and repaired before being used again.
Damage may not be obvious. Even apparently minor damage may conceal more serious concerns, inspect all signs of damage carefully.
Items such as fairings, bodywork, engine covers and other components may require removal prior to inspection.
Damaged components may require removal from the motorcycle for further inspection or measurement to fully assess the extent of any damage.
Below is a non-exhaustive list of areas that should be inspected when assessing accident damage.
Check wheel alignment for signs of a damaged or twisted main frame or damaged suspension.
Check the main frame for any damage including twisting or cracking of materials or welds.
Check front forks for any bending.
Check wheels for any tyre, rim or spoke damage. Tyre removal may be required.
Check for damage to extremities (levers, mirrors, handlebars and end weights, footrests (including bank angle indicators), silencers, etc).
Check the functionality of all controls, throttle, clutch, brakes, gear selection, electronic functionality.
Check lighting, braking and indicator functionality (if fitted).
Check for any fluid leaks (engine oil, final drive oil, fuel, coolant, brake fluids).
Check for bodywork damage.
Check for correct torque or damage (including bolt bending) of fasteners including frame to engine bolts, brake calliper bolts, wheel axle bolts, fork pinch bolts.
Check for any stored Diangostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Clear the DTCs and check if the DTC reappears. Investigate the component giving rise to the DTC.
Chassis Bearing Lubrication
General
For a bearing to be serviceable for its anticipated life span it must be checked, adjusted and lubricated at regular intervals, as specified in the service schedules given in the Owner’s Handbook and this Service Manual.
A correctly lubricated bearing will have a film of lubrication that separates the moving parts, disperses heat and protects the bearing surfaces from corrosion.
New Bearings
New bearings are typically protected with an oil preservative to prevent corrosion etc. during storage. This is NOT the lubrication for the bearing but DOES NOT need to be washed off prior to assembly and in-service lubrication.
When lubricating a new bearing with grease the following steps should be taken:
- Do not clean off the oil preservative.
- Grease must be forced between the roller elements and the roller cage.
- Rotate the bearing to ensure that the grease is distributed over the entire circumference of the internal parts.
- Any excess grease should be smeared on the outside of the rollers.
Lubrication and Checks While Servicing a Bearing
- Disassemble parts as necessary to access the bearing.
- Inspect the old grease covering the bearing, looking for signs of bearing damage, i.e. flakes or specks of metal.
- Remove the old grease.
- Check the bearing for smooth operation and visually check for corrosion, dents and flaking in the bearing race, rollers or cage. Replace if necessary.
Several common bearing types and the lubrication procedures for each are identified below:
Sealed Bearings |
Taper Bearings |
- Grease must be forced between the inner race and the roller carrier.
- Rotate the bearing to ensure that the grease is distributed over the entire circumference of the internal parts.
- Any excess grease should be smeared on the outside of the rollers.
Angular Contact and Ball Bearing |
- Grease the bearing races and the ball bearing carrier.
- Rotate the bearing to ensure that the grease is distributed over the entire circumference of the internal parts.
Needle Roller Bearings |
- Coat the needle rollers with grease.
- Ensure the needle rollers turn so that the grease is distributed over the entire circumference of the internal parts.
- Assemble the parts, adjust and check as necessary.
Metal Bushes
- Disassemble the parts as necessary to access the bush.
- Remove the old grease.
- Apply fresh grease to the metal bush.
Fuel Handling Precautions
General
The following information provides basic precautions which must be observed if petrol (gasoline) is to be handled safely. It also outlines other areas of risk which must not be ignored. This information is issued for basic guidance only and, if in doubt, appropriate enquiries should be made to your local Fire Officer.
Petrol – Gasoline
When petrol (gasoline) evaporates it produces 150 times its own volume in vapour which when diluted with air becomes a readily ignitable mixture. The vapour is heavier than air and will always fall to the lowest level. It can readily be distributed throughout any indoor environment by air currents, consequently, even a small spillage of petrol (gasoline) is potentially very dangerous.
Warning Petrol Handling
Warninig petrol related components
Warning Fuel Draining/Refill
Fuel Tank Removal
Fuel tanks should have a PETROL (GASOLINE) VAPOUR warning label attached to them as soon as they are removed from the vehicle. In all cases, they must be stored in a secured, marked area.
Chassis Repairs
Warning Motorcycle involved in an accident
Electrical Precautions
The following guidelines are intended to ensure the safety of the operator whilst preventing damage to the electrical and electronic components fitted to the motorcycle. Where necessary, specific precautions are detailed in the relevant sections of this manual which should be referred to prior to commencing repair operations.
Equipment - Prior to commencing any test procedure on the motorcycle ensure that the relevant test equipment is working correctly and any harness or connectors are in good condition, in particular mains leads and plugs.
High Voltage Circuits - Whenever disconnecting live H.T. circuits always use insulated pliers. Exercise caution when measuring the voltage on the coil terminals while the engine is running. High voltage spikes can occur on these terminals.
Connectors and Harness - The engine of a motorcycle is a particularly hostile environment for electrical components and connectors. Always ensure these items are dry and oil-free before disconnecting and connecting test equipment. Never force connectors apart either by using tools or by pulling on the wiring itself. Always ensure locking mechanisms are disengaged before removal and note the orientation to enable correct reconnection. Ensure that any protective covers and substances are replaced if disturbed.
Having confirmed a component to be faulty, switch off the ignition and disconnect the battery negative (black) lead first. Remove the component and support the disconnected harness. When replacing the component keep oily hands away from electrical connection areas and push connectors home until any locking mechanism becomes fully engaged.
Battery Disconnecting
Before disconnecting the battery, switch off all electrical equipment.
Always ensure that battery leads are routed correctly and are not close to any potential chafing points.
Disciplines
Switch off the ignition prior to making any connection or disconnection in the system. An electrical surge can be caused by disconnecting 'live' connections which can damage electronic components.
Ensure hands and work surfaces are clean and free of grease, swarf, etc. as grease collects dirt which can cause tracking or high-resistance contacts.
Prior to commencing any test, and periodically during any test, touch a good earth to discharge body static. This is because some electronic components are vulnerable to static electricity.
Electrical Wires
All the electrical wires are either single-colour or two-colour and, with only a few exceptions, must be connected to wires of the same colour. On any of the two-colour wires there is a greater amount of one colour and a lesser amount of a second colour. A two-colour wire is identified by first the primary colour and then the secondary colour. For example, a yellow wire with thin red stripes is referred to as a 'yellow/red' wire; it would be a 'red/yellow' wire if the colours were reversed to make red the main colour.
Glossary of Circuit Diagram Symbols
The following is a description of the symbols found in the circuit diagrams used in all Triumph Service Manuals.
Connector
This illustration is used to show all multiplug type electrical connectors on Triumph circuit diagrams. The numbers in the box relate to the terminal numbers of the connector pins. On ECMs with two connectors, the number would be prefixed with the letters 'A' or 'B' to identify each connector. An additional number outside the box will identify the component.
Diode
An electrical one-way valve. Diodes allow current to flow in one direction but will not allow it to return. The arrow, which forms part of the diode symbol, indicates the direction of current flow.
Electromagnetic Winding (solenoid)
An electromagnetic winding (or solenoid) is used to convert an electrical current into a lateral movement. This can then be used to operate switches (as used in relays) or other components such as fuel injectors or secondary air injection solenoids.
Fuse
A fuse is a device which protects a circuit in the event of a fault. The fuse will 'blow' should a short circuit occur, protecting that circuit from further damage. The number next to the fuse on the circuit diagram indicates the position of the fuse in the fuse box.
Ground Point
This symbol is used to show ground points. This is the negative connection to either the frame or engine, and is a common cause of intermittent faults due to loose or corroded connections.
Lamp or Bulb
This symbol is used to show all types of light bulbs. The numbers in the box relate to the terminal numbers of the connector pins. An additional number outside the box will identify the component.
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
Triumph use LEDs for the alarm warning light, instrument illumination and warning lights, gear change lights and rear light/brake lights on various models.
Motor
An electric motor. This could be the starter motor or a motor within an actuator, for example within the ABS modulator.
Relay
A relay is effectively an electromagnetic switch. To close the relay contacts and complete the circuit, an electromagnet in the relay is energised which causes the relay contacts to close, making the circuit complete.
Relays are used when the electrical current is too great for a mechanical switch, usually when the switching must be done quickly to prevent arcing across the switch contacts. If a mechanical switch were used, the mechanical switch contacts would quickly burn away.
Resistor
A device placed in a cable to reduce a voltage or restrict the maximum current a device can draw.
Splice
A hard cable joint where two or more cables are joined in the wiring harness. A potential source of both open and short circuits.
Switches
A mechanical device for completing or breaking a circuit. There are three common types of switch: normally open, normally closed and changeover.
Electrical Testing
For any electrical system to work, electricity must be able to flow in a complete circuit from the power source (the battery) via the components and back to the battery. No circuit means no electrical flow. Once the power has left the positive side of the battery and run through the component it must then return to the battery on its negative side (this is called earth or ground). To save on wiring, connections and space, the negative side of the battery is connected directly to the frame or engine. Around the frame and engine will be various other ground points to which the wiring coming from components will be connected. In the case of the starter motor it bolts directly to the engine, which is bolted to the frame. Therefore the frame and engine also form part of the earth return path.
Ohm’s Law
The relationship between voltage, current and resistance is defined by Ohm’s Law.
The potential of a battery is measured in volts (V).
The flow of current in a circuit (I) is measured in amperes.
The power rating of a consumer is measured in watts (W).
The resistance (R) of a circuit is measured in Ohms.
Ohm’s law, for practical work can be described as -
Power is calculated by multiplying Volts x Amps -
By transposing either of these formulae, the value of any unit can be calculated if the other two values are known.
For example, if a battery of 12 V is connected to a bulb of 60 W:
the current flowing in the circuit can be calculated by using -
the bulb resistance can be calculated by using -
To use either of the following triangles, put your finger over the value you want to find. Multiply the remaining values if side by side, or divide if one is over the other.
Basic Electrical Circuits
Basic Circuit Diagram
In the above circuit an electrical reservoir (the battery) is connected via a cable to a terminal on the controlling device (the switch) whose contacts are either open or closed. The other terminal on the switch is connected via a cable to the consumer (the bulb), and the other side of the bulb filament is connected to ground (earth) by another cable. The ground point is usually a part of the frame or engine, to which the battery negative terminal is also connected.
When the switch contacts are open (as shown in the diagram), the circuit is broken and no current flows. When the switch contacts are closed, the circuit is made and current flows from the battery positive terminal through the switch contacts and bulb filament to ground. The frame completes the circuit to the battery negative terminal and the bulb illuminates.
Although some circuits on the circuit diagram may at first seem more complicated, it will generally be found that they can be broken down into sections which do not differ greatly from the basic circuit above.
Circuit Diagrams
Circuit diagrams are created to provide a 'picture' of the electrical system and to identify the route taken by each individual wire through the system, in order to identify which components it feeds and which connectors the wire runs through. Circuit diagrams are an essential tool for fault finding, as it is possible to locate start and finish points for a circuit without having to manually trace the wire through the motorcycle itself. Circuit diagrams may look confusing at first but when they are studied closely they soon become logical.
Circuit diagrams also depict the inner workings of a switch housing (i.e. which wire connects to which when a switch is turned from one position to another) so that a test of that switch can be made using the wire terminals in the connector instead of disassembling the switch itself.
More information can be found in Circuit Diagrams, in the Electrical section of the Service Manual.
Tracing Circuits
The following is a description of two types of common electrical failures, and some of the methods which may be used to find them.
Open Circuit
A break in an electrical circuit - current cannot flow. Usually caused by a break in a wire or cable or by a loose connection. Open circuits can often be intermittent, making diagnosis difficult.
Short Circuit
A 'short cut' in an electrical circuit - current bypasses the intended circuit, either to ground or to another, different circuit. Often caused by failure of the cable insulation due to chafing or trapping of the wire. There are two different types of short circuit - short to ground and short to battery Voltage.
A short to ground means that the current is going to ground before it reaches the component it is supposed to feed. These are often caused by chafing of the harness to the frame or wires trapped between a bolted component, and will often blow the fuse on that circuit.
A short to battery voltage (12 Volts) is caused by a live power supply wire contacting an adjacent cable. Note that it is also possible for a 5 Volt sensor reference voltage to short to an adjacent circuit, which can also cause electrical failures and DTCs (Diagnostic Trouble Code) to be stored.
When tracing a wire that is suspect, carefully check the circuit diagram before starting. Remember:
a wire may diverge at a splice and go off to feed other circuits. If these circuits are working, check for wiring faults from the splice onwards.
the circuit diagram is not an accurate guide to the actual location of the parts when fitted on the motorcycle. It is a schematic diagram of the circuits.
particularly where engine management items are concerned, the circuit is only completed by the ECM. If the ECM is not connected, the circuit may register as open.
To Check Continuity:
In the example below, the ground circuit continuity is being tested from the battery to the frame.
Locate each end of the wire.
Set the Digital Multi Meter (DMM) to resistance check Ohms.
Probe each end of the wire.
If there is continuity, the meter will usually bleep or register the resistance of the cable.
A high resistance figure could indicate a dirty or corroded connection.
If there is a break in the wire, the meter will not bleep or register a resistance.
By probing the wire in various places, the position of a high resistance or break in the wire (open circuit) can be narrowed down until it is found.
To Measure Voltage:
In the example below, the circuit voltage is being measured at the bulb positive (+) terminal.
Turn the circuit to be tested 'ON'.
Set the Digital Multi Meter (DMM) to Voltage Check (V). Ensure the multi meter is set to DC Volts for direct current circuits (most circuits) or AC Volts for alternating current circuits (typically alternator output voltage tests).
Set the range of the DMM to the range best suited to the voltage of the circuit being tested (typically 20 Volts for most DMMs). Refer to the DMM manufacturers instructions.
Connect the black (ground) lead of the DMM to a reliable ground connection (usually the battery or frame ground).
Locate the positive terminal of the wire or component to be tested.
Connect the red (positive) lead of the DMM to the positive terminal.
Read the voltage from meter.
Splices
Splices are probably the most common cause of wiring faults after connectors. Splices are made where two or more wires come together and diverge in different directions, usually to feed a different circuit.
To locate a splice, it is necessary to peel back the insulation and examine the splice for its integrity. The most common fault is where one of the wires at the joint has come adrift usually causing the circuit it feeds or grounds to become 'dead'.
Switches
To check a switch, set the multimeter to resistance/continuity and probe the two pins that form a closed circuit when the switch is pushed. If the switch is working correctly, the resistance should register or the meter will bleep.
Relays
All relay cases have a circuit path engraved on them showing the circuit path across the electromagnet and the switch. Before making any checks, first note the pin designations, current paths, and whether or not there is a diode in either circuit path.
Make continuity checks across the electromagnet first, usually from pin 86 (positive) to pin 85 (negative). If a diode appears in the circuit use the diode check on the multimeter (Volts scale) in the direction of current flow. If there is no diode, use the resistance check facility. An open circuit or unusually high resistance value indicates a faulty relay.
To check the switch side, apply a 12 Volt supply between pins 86 and 85. With the supply connected, the relay should be heard to click and there should be continuity between pins 30 and 87. An open circuit indicates a faulty relay.
CAN (Controller Area Networking)
CAN (sometimes called CANbus) is a protocol for data communication between Electronic Control Modules (ECMs) and other components. Each component on the network is connected by a single pair of twisted wires (or bus) which are used for the transmission of vehicle sensor data. By using CAN, the overall number of system sensors, and the amount of cabling required to allow components to communicate with each other is greatly reduced.
This saves cost, weight and space, and makes the system more reliable, as the physical number of wires and connections is reduced.
CAN works by components sending and/or receiving 'packets' of information (such as engine speed or fuel consumption information) onto the network bus (note that the network must be free of data before any ECM is allowed to transmit). This data is given a priority according to its importance (for example 'engine speed' may have a higher priority than 'low fuel level'), so that even if two ECMs send data at the same time, high priority information is always sent first. Lower priority data is then resent after the high priority data has been received by all components on the network.
The receiving ECM confirms the data has been received correctly and that the data is valid, and this information is then used by the ECM as necessary. Specific data not required by an ECM will still be received and acknowledged as correct but then disregarded. For example: if an ECM does not require 'clutch switch position' information, this data packet would be ignored.
This allows for a very high speed system of communication, which is also very reliable. If one ECM fails or the transmit is corrupted, or otherwise incorrect messages are transmitted, none of the other ECMs on the network will be affected. Then, after a certain time that ECM will be prevented from transmitting further messages until the fault is rectified. This stops the ECM from clogging the network with incorrect data and preventing other messages from getting through. The fault would then be reported by a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).
Triumph currently uses CAN for communication between the following:
Engine ECM
Instruments
ABS ECM
Immobiliser or Chassis ECM
Diagnostic connector
Inertial Measurement Unit (if fitted)
Audio system (if fitted)
Electronic steering lock (if fitted)
LED Headlights (if fitted).
Bluetooth module (if fitted)
Suspension ECM (if fitted)
Blind spot radar (if fitted)
LIN (Local Interconnect Network)
LIN (Local Interconnect Network) is a serial network protocol used for communication between components in vehicles. The bus is a single master/multiple slave bus that uses a single wire to transmit data.
By using LIN, the amount of cabling required to allow components to communicate with each other is greatly reduced. This saves cost, weight and space, and makes the system more reliable, as the physical number of wires and connections is reduced.
The instruments use some of this data internally and also broadcasts it on the CANbus (Controller Area Networking) for use on the motorcycle as necessary.
Information (such as headlight main beam) is being requested continuously by the Instruments, once a confirmation of the request is recognised the instruments will react accordingly.
|
Example
Pressing the headlight main beam button on the switch housing (left hand handlebar) confirms to the instruments that headlight main beam is required.
The instruments confirm the data has been received correctly and that the data is valid.
Once confirmed the headlight main beam is switched on.
Triumph currently uses LIN on certain models for communication between the instruments and the following components:
Fog light button
Heated seat
Dip beam/Daytime running lights (DRL) switch (if equipped)
Mode button
Turn signal switch
Joystick button
Horn button
High beam button
Service Tools
Service Tools and Garage Equipment
Special service tools have been developed to facilitate removal, dismantling and assembly of certain mechanical components in a practical manner without causing damage. Some operations in this service manual cannot be carried out without the aid of the relevant service tools. Where this is the case, the tools required will be described during the procedure.
Special Service Tools
Special Service Tools - LG1; LGX; LL1
T3880001 - Fuel Pressure Gauge | T3880003 - Front Fork Seal Installer |
T3880023 - 50 mm Socket | T3880027 - Chain Link Tool Kit (RK final drive chain) |
T3880053 - Wheel Bearing Extraction Kit | T3880065 - Bearing Installer |
T3880067 - Fork Spring Compressor | T3880070 - Bearing Installer |
T3880085 - Fork Piston Holder | T3880101 - Extractor, Cylinder Liners |
T3880104 - Swinging Arm Adjuster Wrench | T3880105 - Torque Angle Gauge |
T3880123 - Extension Cable | T3880147 - Radiator and Cap Tester Kit |
T3880160 - Fork Oil Filler/Evacuator | T3880166 - Wrench, Engine Mounting Adjuster |
T3880171 - Fork Holding Tool | T3880172 - Pulser Ring Alignment Tool |
T3880174 - Alternator Housing Puller | T3880207 - Hose Clip Pliers |
T3880215 - Fork Seal Cleaner, 35-45 mm forks | T3880307 - Clutch Anti-rotation Jig |
T3880313 - Oil Filter Wrench | T3880315 - Extractor, Cylinder Liner |
T3880367 - Wrench, Damper Cylinder, 33mm | T3880368 - Bearing Installer |
T3880375 - Alternator Rotor Holder | T3880601 - Camshaft Timing Pin |
T3880607 - Camshaft Timing Tensioner | T3880609 - Timing Torque Limiter |
T3880642 - Fork Seal Guide/Protector | T3880640 - Camshaft Timing Plate |
T3880750 - Headstock Service Tool | BatteryMate Battery Charger - See Latest Parts Catalogue for Part Number Information |
Specifications
Specification
Dimensions, Weights, and Performance
Specifications - Refer to web site for weights and performance
A list of model specific dimensions, weights and performance figures is available from your authorised Triumph dealer, or on the Internet at www.triumph.co.uk. |
Engine
Engine Specifications LG1/LL1/LGX
Engine Configuration | 3 cylinder 12 valve DOHC |
Arrangement | Transverse in-line |
Displacement | 659.3 cc |
Bore x Stroke | 74 x 51.1 mm |
Compression Ratio | 11.95:1 |
Cylinder numbering | Left to right (no.3 adjacent to camshaft drive) |
Cylinder Sequence | Number 1 at left |
Firing order | 1 2 3 |
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX
Valve Head Diameter | Inlet | 30.50 mm |
Exhaust | 24.20 mm | |
Valve Lift | Inlet | 8.50 mm |
Exhaust | 7.36 mm | |
Valve Stem Diameter | Inlet | 3.975-3.990 mm |
Service Limit | 3.965 mm | |
Valve Stem Diameter | Exhaust | 3.965-3.980 mm |
Service Limit | 3.955 mm | |
Valve Guide Bore Diameter | Inlet | 4.000 - 4.015 mm |
Service Limit | 4.043 mm | |
Valve Guide Bore Diameter | Exhaust | 4.000 - 4.015 mm |
Service Limit | 4.043 mm | |
Valve Stem to Guide Clearance | Inlet | 0.010-0.040 mm |
Service Limit | 0.078 mm | |
Valve Stem to Guide Clearance | Exhaust | 0.020-0.050 mm |
Service Limit | 0.088 mm | |
Valve Seat Width (in head) | Inlet | 1.20 mm |
Service Limit | 1.50 mm | |
Valve Seat Width (in head) | Exhaust | 1.00 mm |
Service Limit | 1.70 mm | |
Valve Seat Width (valve) | Inlet | 0.990-1.838 mm |
Exhaust | 1.065-1.918 mm | |
Valve Seat Angle | 45° | |
Inlet/Exhaust Valve Spring Load and Length | 508 N +/- 25 N @27.5 mm | |
Valve Clearance | Inlet | 0.10 - 0.20 mm |
Exhaust | 0.325 - 0.375 mm | |
Valve Bucket Diameter | Inlet | 25.385 - 25.399 mm |
Service Limit | 25.375 mm | |
Valve Bucket Diameter | Exhaust | 25.385 - 25.399 mm |
Service Limit | 25.375 mm | |
Valve Bucket Bore Diameter | Inlet | 25.421 - 25.431 mm |
Service Limit | 25.449 mm | |
Valve Bucket Bore Diameter | Exhaust | 25.421 - 25.431 mm |
Service Limit | 25.449 mm |
Camshafts
Camshafts Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX
Camshaft Timing | Inlet | Open = 3° BTDC (@1 mm lift) |
Close = 34° ABDC (@1 mm lift) | ||
Duration | 217° (@1 mm lift) | |
Exhaust | Open = 27° BBDC (@1 mm lift) | |
Close = 2° BTDC (@1 mm lift) | ||
Duration | 205° (@1 mm lift) | |
Camshaft Journal Diameter | 23.940 - 23.960 mm | |
Camshaft Journal Clearance | 0.040 - 0.081 mm | |
Service Limit | 0.17 mm | |
Camshaft Journal Bore Diameter | 24.000 - 24.021 mm | |
Camshaft End Float | 0.23 - 0.33 mm | |
Service Limit | 0.40 mm | |
Camshaft Run-out | 0.15 mm max. |
Clutch and Primary Drive
Clutch and Primary Drive Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX
Primary Drive Type | Gear |
Reduction Ratio | 1.854:1 (76/41) |
Clutch Type | Wet multi-plate, slip assist |
Number of Friction Plates | 7 |
Plate Flatness | Within 0.1 mm |
Friction Plate Thickness | 3.80 mm |
Service Limit | 3.62 mm |
Clutch Pack Height | 38.90 mm |
Clutch Actuation Method | Cable |
Cable Free Play (at lever) | 2-3 mm |
Balancer
Balancer Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX
End Float | 0.68 mm |
Pistons
Pistons Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX
Cylinder Bore Diameter | 74.040-74.058 mm |
Service Limit | 74.11 mm |
Piston Diameter (at 90° to gudgeon pin) | 73.974-73.990 mm |
Service Limit | 73.930 mm |
Piston Ring to Groove Clearances | |
Top | 0.02-0.06 mm |
Service Limit | 0.075 mm |
Second | 0.30-0.45 mm |
Service Limit | 0.075 mm |
Piston Ring End Gaps | |
Top | 0.15-0.30 mm |
Service Limit | 0.42 mm |
Second | 0.30-0.45 mm |
Service Limit | 0.57 mm |
Oil | 0.20-0.70 mm |
Service Limit | 0.84 mm |
Gudgeon Pin Bore Diameter in Piston | 16.994-17.001 mm |
Service Limit | 17.030 mm |
Gudgeon Pin Diameter | 16.984-16.989 mm |
Service Limit | 16.970 mm |
Connecting Rods
Connecting Rods - LG1; LL1; LGX
Connecting Rod Small End Diameter | 17.014-17.027 mm |
Service Limit | 17.037 mm |
Connecting Rod Big End Side Clearance | 0.15-0.30 mm |
Service Limit | 0.50 mm |
Crankshaft
Crankshaft Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX
Crankshaft Big End Journal Diameter | 32.994-33.010 mm |
Service Limit | 32.950 mm |
Crankshaft Big End Bearing Clearance | 0.032-0.064 mm |
Service Limit | 0.070 mm |
Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Diameter | 32.972-32.988 mm |
Service Limit | 32.948 mm |
Crankshaft Main Bearing Clearance | 0.020-0.046 mm |
Service Limit | 0.070 mm |
Crankshaft End Float | 0.15-0.30 mm |
Service Limit | 0.5 mm |
Crankshaft Run-out | 0.02 mm or less |
Service Limit | 0.05 mm |
Transmission
Transmission Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX
Type | 6 speed, constant mesh | |
Gear Ratios | 1st | 2.867:1 (43/15) |
2nd | 2.053:1 (39/19) | |
3rd | 1.565:1 (36/23) | |
4th | 1.286:1 (27/21) | |
5th | 1.107:1 (31/28) | |
6th | 0.967:1 (29/30) | |
Gear Selector Fork Thickness | 5.90-6.00 mm | |
Service Limit | 5.80 mm | |
Gear Selector Groove Width | 6.10-6.17 mm | |
Service Limit | 6.27 mm | |
Gear Selector Fork to Groove Clearance | 0.47 mm max |
Final Drive
Final Drive Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX
Final Drive | Chain |
Final Drive Ratio | 3.188:1 (51/16) |
Chain Type | DID520VM4 |
Number of Links | 120 |
20 Link Length | 319 mm |
Drive Chain Play | 43 - 55 mm |
Chain Lubrication | Triumph Performance chain lubricant |
Lubrication
Lubrication Specifications - LG1, LK1, LGX
Type | Pressure lubrication, wet sump |
Oil Capacity (dry fill) | 3.2 litres |
Oil Capacity (wet fill including filter) | 2.8 litres |
Oil Capacity (wet fill excluding filter) | 2.6 litres |
Recommended Oil Approval Rating | API SH (or higher) and JASO MA |
Viscosity | 10W/40 or 10W/50 |
Type | Fully or semi synthetic 10W/40 or 10W/50 motorcycle engine oil which meets specification API SN (or higher) and JASO MA2. Triumph Performance fully synthetic engine oil is recommended |
Oil pressure (in main gallery) | 30.0 lb/in² min. @80°C oil temperature @ 5,000 rpm |
Oil Pump Rotor Tip Clearance | 0.15 mm |
Service Limit | 0.20 mm |
Oil Pump Body Clearance | 0.15 - 0.22 mm |
Service Limit | 0.35 mm |
Oil Pump Rotor End Float | 0.04 - 0.09 mm |
Service Limit | 0.17 mm |
Ignition System
Ignition System Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX
Type | Digital inductive |
Electronic Rev Limiter | 10,500 rpm |
Primary Coil Resistance | 10 K Ohms +/- 15% |
Ignition Coil Type | Plug-top |
Spark Plug Type | NGK CR9EK |
Spark Plug Gap | 0.60-0.75 mm |
Fuel System
Fuel System Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX
Fuel Type | Unleaded, 91 RON (U.S. 87 CLC/AKI) |
Fuel Tank Capacity (motorcycle upright) | 14.4 litres |
Low Level Warning Lamp | 4 litres remaining |
Fuel Pump Type | Submerged electric |
Fuel Pressure (nominal) | 3.5 bar (50.8 lb/in²) |
Purge Control System | Electronic, via fuel system ECM |
Fuel Injection System
Fuel Injection System - LG1, LL1, LGX
Type | Electronic, sequential |
Idle Speed | 1300 rpm |
Injector Type | Twin jet, solenoid operated plate valve |
Throttle | Electronically controlled throttle body |
Control Sensors | Atmospheric air pressure, throttle position, twist grip position, coolant temperature, crankshaft position sensor, oxygen sensor, intake air temperature, gear position sensor, MAP, road speed (from ABS). |
Emissions Controls
Emissions Controls - LG1, LL1, LGX
Catalytic converter | 1 between Headers and Silencer |
Oxygen sensor | Heated, in front of Catalyst |
Evaporative Control | Activated carbon canister (certain markets only) |
Secondary Air Injection | Solenoid controlled, reed valve type |
Coolant System
Coolant System Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX
Anti-Freeze Type | Triumph D2053 OAT Coolant |
Freezing point | -35°C |
Cooling System Capacity | 2.20 litres |
Radiator Cap Opening Pressure | 1.1 bar |
Thermostat Opening Temperature | 71°C +/-2°C |
Cooling Fan Switch On Temperature | 103°C |
Temperature Gauge Sensor Resistance | 2.46 K Ohms +/-10% @ 20°C |
Suspension
Suspension Specs LG1 LGX
Front Fork Travel | 120 mm |
Recommended Fork Oil Grade | Showa SS47G |
Left Hand Fork Oil Level (fork fully compressed) | 125 mm |
Right Hand Fork Oil Level (fork fully compressed) | 115 mm |
Left Hand Fork Oil Volume (dry fill) | 560 cc |
Right Hand Fork Oil Volume (dry fill) | 475 cc |
Fork Pull Through (measured from the flat/machined surface on the underside of the upper yoke to the top of the fork outer tube) | 39.50 mm +/- 0.5 mm |
Rear Wheel Travel | 133.5 mm |
Frame
Frame Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX
Frame Type | Tubular steel perimeter frame |
Rake | 24.6° |
Trail | 107.3 mm |
Maximum Payload (rider, passenger, luggage and accessories) | 205 kg (452 lb) |
Brakes
Brakes Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX
Front Type | Two hydraulically actuated twin piston sliding calipers acting on twin discs |
Front Caliper Piston Diameter | 27 mm |
Front Disc Diameter | 310 mm |
Front Disc Thickness | 4.5 mm |
Service Limit | 4.0 mm |
Front Disc Run-out | 0.25 mm |
Front Master Cylinder Diameter | 14 mm |
Recommended Fluid | DOT 4 |
Rear Type | Hydraulically actuated single piston caliper, single disc |
Rear Caliper Piston Diameter | 27 mm |
Rear Disc Diameter | 255 mm |
Rear Disc Thickness | 5.5 mm |
Service Limit | 5.0 mm |
Rear Disc Run-out | 0.25 mm |
Rear Master Cylinder Diameter | 12.7 mm |
Recommended Fluid | DOT 4 |
Wheels and Tyres
Wheels and Tyres Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX
Front Wheel Size | MT 3.5 x 17 |
Front Tyre Size | 120/70 ZR17 58W |
Front Tyre Pressure | 2.34 bar (34 lb/in²) |
Recommended Front Tyre | A list of approved tyres specific to this model is available from your authorised Triumph dealer, or on the Internet at www.triumph.co.uk |
Front Wheel Rim Axial Run-out | 0.5 mm |
Front Wheel Rim Radial Run-out | 0.5 mm |
Rear Wheel Size | MT 5.5 x 17 |
Rear Tyre Size | 180/55 ZR17 73W |
Rear Tyre Pressure | 2.90 bar (42 lb/in²) |
Recommended Rear Tyres | A list of approved tyres specific to this model is available from your authorised Triumph dealer, or on the Internet at www.triumph.co.uk |
Rear Wheel Rim Axial Run-out | 0.5 mm |
Rear Wheel Rim Radial Run-out | 0.5 mm |
Electrical Equipment
Electrical Equipment Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX
Battery Type | YTX9-BS |
Battery Rating | 12 Volt - 8 Ah |
Alternator Rating | 14 Volt, 29 Amp at 5,000 rpm |
Fuses | See Fuse Identification |
Torque Wrench Settings
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Torques LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1
Application | Torque (Nm) | Notes |
---|---|---|
Camshaft cover to cylinder head | 10 Nm | See Camshaft Cover - Installation Apply Action Can AC-90 to the seals |
Camshaft drive chain tensioner to cylinder head | 8 Nm | |
Camshaft ladder to cylinder head | * | |
Camshaft sprocket to camshaft | 22 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Cylinder head bypass spigot | 15 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Cylinder head M6 fixings | 10 Nm | |
Exhaust stud to cylinder head | 10 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Secondary air injection valve covers to camshaft cover | 9 Nm | |
Sound suppression bolt | 12 Nm | |
Spark plug | 12 Nm | |
Timing torque limiter | 0.6 Nm |
Clutch
Clutch Torques LG1 LL1, LGX
Application | Torque (Nm) | Notes |
---|---|---|
Clutch cable bracket | 9 Nm | |
Clutch centre nut | 98 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed Fit new Belleville washer |
Clutch lever clamp bolts | 9 Nm | |
Clutch lever nut | 6 Nm | |
Clutch support plate to centre | 10 Nm | |
Clutch switch to switch housing | 2 Nm |
Balancer, Crankshaft and Crankcase
Balancer Torques LG1 LL1 LGX
Application | Torque (Nm) | Notes |
---|---|---|
Camshaft drive sprocket to crankshaft | 27 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Crankcase dry seal plug | 33 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Crankcase to crankcase fixings | * | |
Connecting rod big end bolts | * | |
Sprag clutch to crankshaft | 16 Nm |
Engine Covers
Engine Covers Torques LG1 LL1 LGX
Application | Torque (Nm) | Notes |
---|---|---|
Alternator cover to crankcase | 10 Nm | |
Balancer cover | 8 Nm | |
Camshaft cover to cylinder head | * | See Camshaft Cover - Installation Apply clean engine oil to the seal(s) |
Clutch cover to crankcase | 8 Nm | |
Engine breather cover to crankcase | 10 Nm | |
Front sprocket cover to crankcase | 9 Nm | |
Right hand side crankcase cover | 8 Nm | |
Sump to crankcase | 10 Nm | |
Sump plug | 25 Nm | Fit new sealing washer(s) |
Transmission
Transmission Torques LG1 LL1 LGX
Application | Torque (Nm) | Notes |
---|---|---|
Detent arm fixing | 12 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Detent wheel to selector drum | 12 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Front sprocket to output shaft nut | 85 Nm | |
Gear change clamp pinch bolt | 9 Nm | |
Gear change pedal bolt | 22 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Gear change rod lock nuts | 6 Nm | |
Input shaft bearing retainer | 12 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Input selector shaft retainer | 12 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Output selector shaft retainer | 12 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Selector drum bearing retaining screw | 12 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Spring abutment bolt | 15 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Lubrication System
Lubrication Torques LG1 LL1 LGX
Application | Torque (Nm) | Notes |
---|---|---|
Crankcase breather baffle plate | 9 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Oil breather drain pipe | 9 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Oil filter | 10 Nm | Apply clean engine oil to the seal(s) |
Oil filter adapter | 16 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Oil level dipstick | 1.2 Nm | |
Oil pick up pipe | 12 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Oil pressure relief valve | 15 Nm | Apply ThreeBond 1305 to the threads |
Oil pressure switch | 13 Nm | Fit new sealing washer(s) |
Oil pump drive chain retainer plate | 9 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Oil pump drive sprocket to oil pump | 12 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Oil pump to crankcase | 12 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Oil transfer pipe | 12 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Final Drive
Final Drive Torques LG1 LL1 LGX
Application | Torque (Nm) | Notes |
---|---|---|
Chain rubbing strip to swinging arm | 4 Nm | |
Drive chain adjuster nut | 3 Nm | |
Drive chain adjuster lock nut | 15 Nm | |
Rear sprocket to sprocket carrier | 55 Nm | |
Rear sprocket carrier stud | * | |
Rear hugger and chain guard moulding to swinging arm | 4 Nm |
Cooling System
Cooling Torques LG1 LGX
Application | Torque (Nm) | Notes |
---|---|---|
Coolant drain (on water pump outlet pipe) | 10 Nm | |
Coolant expansion tank | 3 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Coolant inlet to crankcase | 8 Nm | |
Coolant temperature sensor | 18 Nm | |
Cooling fan to radiator | 8.5 Nm | |
Radiator lower mounting bracket to coolant inlet cover bracket | 6 Nm | |
Radiator to frame upper | 9 Nm | |
Radiator to lower bracket | 6 Nm | |
Thermostat housing | 9 Nm | |
Water pump inlet pipe to crankcase | 12 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Water pump outlet pipe to crankcase | 12 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Fuel System, Exhaust System and Airbox
Fuel System Torques LG1 LGX
Application | Torque (Nm) | Notes |
---|---|---|
Air temperature sensor (inlet manifold) | 1 Nm | Apply ThreeBond 1360 to the threads |
Airbox front band clamp | 1.5 Nm | |
Airbox to frame | 6 Nm | |
Airbox upper to lower | 1.5 Nm | |
Ambient air pressure sensor | 3 Nm | |
Catalytic converter heat shield | 5 Nm | |
Crankshaft position sensor | 6 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Exhaust header to cylinder head | 15 Nm | |
Exhaust silencer to frame fixings | 19 Nm | |
Fall detection switch | 3 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Fuel pump mounting plate to fuel tank | 9 Nm | |
Fuel rail to inlet manifold | 4 Nm | |
Fuel tank to frame (pivot nut) | 8 Nm | |
Fuel tank front mounting fixings | 9 Nm | |
Fuel tank rear mounting bracket to frame | 12 Nm | |
Fuel tank bodywork fixings | 3 Nm | |
Gear position sensor | 5 Nm | |
Inlet manifold casting | 8 Nm | |
Inlet manifold moulding | 8 Nm | |
Immobiliser module | 1.5 Nm | |
Left hand switch housing | 2.5 Nm | |
MAP sensor | 5 Nm | |
Oxygen sensor | 25 Nm | |
Purge valve | 3 Nm | |
Right hand switch housing | 2.5 Nm | |
Silencer rear finisher | 5 Nm | |
Throttle body to intake manifold | 8 Nm | |
Twist grip housing | 2.5 Nm |
Front Suspension
Front Suspension Torques LG1 LGX
Application | Torque (Nm) | Notes |
---|---|---|
Fork top cap | 35 Nm | |
Handlebar clamp bolt | 26 Nm | |
Handlebar end weights | 3 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Headstock bearing adjuster and lock nut | * | |
Left hand grip | 3 Nm | |
Lower yoke pinch bolt | 22 Nm | |
Upper yoke centre nut | 90 Nm | |
Upper yoke pinch bolt | 26 Nm |
Rear Suspension
Rear Suspension Torques LG1 LGX
Application | Torque (Nm) | Notes |
---|---|---|
Drag link to drop link | 48 Nm | |
Drag link to frame | 48 Nm | |
Drive chain rubbing strip | 4 Nm | |
Drive chain slack adjuster lock nut | 15 Nm | |
Rear hugger and drive chain guard moulding to swinging arm | 4 Nm | |
Rear suspension unit drop link to swinging arm | 48 Nm | |
Rear suspension unit lower mounting to drop link | 48 Nm | |
Rear suspension unit upper mounting | 48 Nm | |
Swinging arm pivot bolt adjuster | 6 Nm | |
Swinging arm pivot nut | 110 Nm |
Wheels
Wheels and Tyres Torques LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1
Application | Torque (Nm) | Notes |
---|---|---|
Fork to wheel spindle pinch bolts | 22 Nm | |
Front wheel spindle/axle bolt | 65 Nm | |
Rear wheel spindle lock nut | 110 Nm | Make sure the wheel spindle is fully inserted before tightening the lock nut. |
Sprocket carrier stud | * |
Front Brakes
Front Brake Torques LG1 LL1 LGX
Application | Torque (Nm) | Notes |
---|---|---|
Brake caliper to front fork | 21 Nm | |
Brake hose to front caliper | 25 Nm | Fit new sealing washer(s) |
Brake hose to front master cylinder | 25 Nm | Fit new sealing washer(s) |
Brake lever pivot bolt | 1 Nm | |
Brake lever pivot bolt lock nut | 6 Nm | |
Brake master cylinder reservoir cap fixings | 1.5 Nm | |
Brake pad retaining pin | 18 Nm | |
Caliper bleed screw | 6 Nm | |
Front brake disc to wheel | 22 Nm | Fit new if loosened or removed |
Front brake master cylinder to handlebar | 12 Nm | |
Front brake switch bracket | 2 Nm |
Rear Brakes
Rear Brakes Torques LG1 LGX
Application | Torque (Nm) | Notes |
---|---|---|
Brake caliper bleed screw | 6 Nm | |
Brake caliper to carrier (external hex fixing) | 29 Nm | |
Brake caliper to carrier (internal hex fixing) | 22 Nm | |
Brake disc to wheel | 22 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Brake hose to rear caliper | 25 Nm | Fit new sealing washer(s) |
Brake light switch bracket | 3 Nm | |
Brake master cylinder reservoir to frame | 3 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Brake master cylinder to frame | 16 Nm | |
Brake pad retaining pin | 18 Nm | |
Brake pedal pivot bolt | 22 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Master cylinder push rod lock nuts | 17 Nm | |
Return spring bracket | 3 Nm |
ABS System
ABS System torques LG1 LL1 LGX
Application | Torque (Nm) | Notes |
---|---|---|
ABS modulator bracket to frame | 9 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
ABS modulator to bracket | 9 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
ABS wheel speed sensors | 9 Nm | |
Brake line union to modulator | 25 Nm | Fit new sealing washer(s) |
Rear brake line protector moulding to alternator regulator/rectifier bracket | 9 Nm |
Frame, Footrests, Control Plates and Engine Mountings
Frame and Bodywork Torques LG1 LGX
Application | Torque (Nm) | Notes |
---|---|---|
Bank angle indicator | 9 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Battery tray front fixings | 5 Nm | |
Battery tray side fixings | 4 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Battery tray rear fixings | 3 Nm | |
Engine mounting bolts | 48 Nm | |
Frame adjusters | 3 Nm | |
Frame side covers | 3 Nm | |
Front control plate | 24 Nm | |
Front mudguard to front forks | 6 Nm | |
Front mudguard centre moulding | 1.5 Nm | |
Fuel tank bracket to frame | 12 Nm | |
Gear change bracket to frame | 24 Nm | |
Grab handle bolts - Applicable markets only | 24 Nm | |
Grab handle lower fixings - Applicable markets only | 9 Nm | |
Mirror | 17 Nm | |
Radiator cowls | 2.5 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Rear footrest hanger | 24 Nm | |
Rear bodywork bracket fixings | 12 Nm | |
Rear mudguard side arm to swinging arm | 32 Nm | |
Rear mudguard to side arm | 3 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Rear mudguard to rear light moulding | 6 Nm | |
Rear mudguard side arm harness cover plate | 1 Nm | |
Rear panels to rear undertray | 1 Nm | |
Rear undertray to frame | 3 Nm | |
Seat lock latch | 5 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Side panels | 3 Nm |
Electrical
Electrical Torques LG1 LGX
Application | Torque (Nm) | Notes |
---|---|---|
Alternator rotor to crankshaft | 120 Nm | |
Alternator stator to cover | 12 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Alternator cable bracket to cover | 6 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Alternator regulator/rectifier to bracket | 9 Nm | |
Alternator regulator/rectifier bracket to frame | 5 Nm | |
Battery terminal fixings | 4.5 Nm | |
Front direction indicator | 3 Nm | |
Immobiliser ECM | 1.5 Nm | |
Ignition switch | 16 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Instrument assembly | 3 Nm | |
Instruments bracket to upper yoke | 3 Nm | |
Headlight to headlight bracket | 3 Nm | |
Headlight rear cover | 3 Nm | |
Headlight pivot lock nut | 26 Nm | |
Horn | 9 Nm | |
Negative battery lead to ground lock nut | 10 Nm | |
Negative battery lead to ground stud | 4 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Main harness front connector bracket | 5 Nm | |
Rear direction indicator | 3 Nm | |
Rear licence plate light | 0.5 Nm | |
Rear light | 3 Nm | |
Side stand switch | 7 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Starter motor power lead connection | 3 Nm | |
Starter motor solenoid lead connection | 5 Nm | |
Starter motor to crankcase | 10 Nm |
Routings
Routings - Main Harness
Routings - ABS
Routings - Evaporative Hose Routing
Routings - Clutch Cable
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance - Legal Consideration Warning
Scheduled Maintenance - Main Section Warning
To maintain the motorcycle in a safe and reliable condition, the maintenance and adjustments outlined in this section must be carried out as specified in the schedule of daily checks, and also in line with the scheduled maintenance chart. The information that follows describes the procedures to follow when carrying out the daily checks and some simple maintenance and adjustment items.
Scheduled maintenance may be carried out in three ways; annual maintenance, mileage based maintenance or a combination of both, depending on the mileage the motorcycle travels each year.
Motorcycles travelling less than 10,000 miles (16,000 km) per year must be maintained annually. In addition to this, mileage based items require maintenance at their specified intervals, as the motorcycle reaches this mileage.
Motorcycles travelling approximately 10,000 miles (16,000 km) per year must have the annual maintenance and the specified mileage based items carried out together.
Motorcycles travelling more than 10,000 miles (16,000 km) per year must have the mileage based items maintained as the motorcycle reaches the specified mileage. In addition to this, annual based items will require maintenance at their specified annual intervals.
In all cases maintenance must be carried out at or before the specified maintenance intervals shown. For advice on which maintenance schedule is most suitable for your motorcycle, contact a competent person with the specialist knowledge and technical understanding of motorcycles, such as an authorised Triumph dealer.
Triumph Motorcycles cannot accept any responsibility for damage or injury resulting from incorrect maintenance or improper adjustment.
Service Symbol - Handbook
Service Symbol/General Warning Symbol
The service symbol will illuminate for five seconds after the motorcycle start up sequence as a reminder that a service is due in approximately 60 miles (100 km). The service symbol will illuminate permanently when the mileage is reached, it will remain permanently illuminated until the service interval is reset. We recommend the service interval is reset by a competent person with the specialist knowledge and technical understanding of motorcycles, such as an authorised Triumph dealer.
The general warning symbol will flash if an ABS or engine management fault has occurred and the ABS and/or MIL warning lights are illuminated. The fault must be checked and rectified by a competent person with the specialist knowledge and technical understanding of motorcycles, such as an authorised Triumph dealer.
Scheduled Maintenance Table
Operation Description | Odometer Reading in Miles (Km) or time period, whichever comes first | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Every | First Service | Annual Service | Mileage Based Service | |||
600 (1000) six months | Year | 10,000 and 30,000 (16,000 and 48,000) | 20,000 (32,000) | 40,000 (64,000) | ||
Lubrication | ||||||
Engine and oil cooler - check for leaks | Day | • | • | • | • | • |
Engine oil - renew | - | • | • | • | • | • |
Engine oil filter - renew | - | • | • | • | • | • |
Fuel System and Engine Management | ||||||
Fuel system - check for leaks | Day | • | • | • | • | • |
Air filter - renew (replace more often if consistently riding in wet or dusty conditions) | - | - | - | • | • | • |
Spark plugs - renew | - | - | - | - | • | • |
Cooling System | ||||||
Cooling system - check for leaks | Day | • | • | • | • | • |
Coolant level - check/adjust | Day | • | • | • | • | • |
Cooling system - check coolant hoses for chafing, cracks or damage. Replace if necessary | - | • | • | • | • | • |
Coolant - renew - every 3 years, regardless of mileage* | Every 3 years, regardless of mileage | |||||
Engine | ||||||
Clutch - Check operation | Day | • | • | • | • | • |
Clutch cable - check function and adjust as necessary (models fitted with a cable clutch only) | Day | • | • | • | • | • |
Clutch lever pivot - clean/grease | - | - | • | • | • | • |
Valve clearances - check/adjust* | - | - | - | - | • | • |
Camshaft timing - check/adjust* | - | - | - | - | • | • |
Wheels and Tyres | ||||||
Wheels - inspect for damage | Day | • | • | • | • | • |
Tyre wear/tyre damage - check | Day | • | • | • | • | • |
Tyre pressures - check/adjust | Day | • | • | • | • | • |
Wheel bearings - check for wear/smooth operation | - | - | - | - | • | • |
Steering and Suspension | ||||||
Steering - check for free operation | Day | • | • | • | • | • |
Front and rear suspension - check for damage/leaks/smooth operation | Day | • | • | • | • | • |
Headstock bearings - check/adjust | - | - | - | - | • | • |
Rear suspension unit and linkage - lubricate (single rear suspension unit models only) | - | - | - | - | • | • |
Fork oil - renew | - | - | - | - | - | • |
Swinging arm spindle - lubricate | - | - | - | - | - | • |
Brakes | ||||||
Brake system - check operation | Day | • | • | • | • | • |
Brake pads - check wear levels* | Day | • | • | • | • | • |
Brake fluid levels - check | Day | • | • | • | • | • |
Brake fluid - renew - every 2 years, regardless of mileage* | Every 2 years, regardless of mileage | |||||
Final Drive | ||||||
Drive chain slack - check/adjust | Day | • | • | • | • | • |
Drive chain rubbing strip - check for wear, cracks or damage* | - | • | • | • | • | • |
Drive chain - wear check* | - | • | • | • | • | • |
Drive chain - lubricate | - | • | • | • | • | • |
Electrical | ||||||
Lights, instruments and electrical systems - check/adjust | Day | • | • | • | • | • |
General | ||||||
Bank angle indicators - check for wear* | Day | • | • | • | • | • |
Centre and/or side stand - check for wear/smooth operation | Day | • | • | • | • | • |
Instruments and engine ECM - check for latest calibration download using the Triumph diagnostic tool | - | • | • | • | • | • |
Autoscan - carry out a full Autoscan using the Triumph diagnostic tool (print a customer copy) | - | • | • | • | • | • |
Carry out all outstanding Service Bulletin and warranty work | - | • | • | • | • | • |
Carry out road test | - | • | • | • | • | • |
Complete the service record book and reset the service indicator (if fitted) | - | • | • | • | • | • |
Service Specifications
Service Specifications LG1; LGX; LL1
Engine Oil Type | Fully or semi synthetic 10W/40 or 10W/50 motorcycle engine oil which meets specification API SN (or higher) and JASO MA2. Triumph Performance fully synthetic engine oil is recommended |
Engine Oil Capacity (Wet Fill Including Filter) | 2.8 litres |
Spark Plug Type | NGK CR9EK |
Spark Plug Gap | 0.60-0.75 mm |
Coolant Type | Triumph D2053 OAT Coolant |
Coolant Capacity | 2.20 litres |
Clutch Lever Free Play | 2-3 mm |
Valve Clearances - Inlet | 0.10 - 0.20 mm |
Valve Clearances - Exhaust | 0.325 - 0.375 mm |
Front Tyre Pressure | 2.34 bar (34 lb/in²) |
Rear Tyre Pressure | 2.90 bar (42 lb/in²) |
Fork Oil Grade | Showa SS47G |
Fork Oil Level - Left Hand Fork | 125 mm |
Fork Oil Level - Right Hand Fork | 115 mm |
Fork Oil Volume - Left Hand Fork | 560 cc |
Fork Oil Volume - Right Hand Fork | 475 cc |
Front Fork Pull Through | 39.50 mm +/- 0.5 mm |
Front Brake Disc Maximum Run Out | 0.25 mm |
Rear Brake Disc Maximum Run Out | 0.25 mm |
Front Brake Disc Minimum Thickness | 4.0 mm |
Rear Brake Disc Minimum Thickness | 5.0 mm |
Brake Fluid Type | Triumph Performance DOT 4 brake fluid |
Front Brake Pad Minimum Thickness | 1.5 mm |
Rear Brake Pad Minimum Thickness | 1.5 mm |
Drive Chain Type | DID520VM4 |
Drive Chain Play Measurement | 43 - 55 mm |
Drive Chain 20 Link Limit | 319 mm |
Drive Chain Lubrication | Triumph Performance chain lubricant |
Bank Angle Indicator Service Limit | 15 mm |
Service Torque Wrench Settings
Service Torques LG1; LGX
Oil Filter | 10 Nm | Apply clean engine oil to the seal(s) |
Sump Plug | 25 Nm | Fit new sealing washer(s) |
Upper Airbox Fixings | 1.5 Nm | |
Spark Plugs | 12 Nm | |
Camshaft Cover | 10 Nm | See Camshaft Cover - Installation Apply clean engine oil to the seal(s) |
Front Wheel Spindle | 65 Nm | |
Front Wheel Spindle Pinch Bolts | 22 Nm | |
Upper Yoke Centre Nut | 90 Nm | |
Swinging Arm Spindle Nut | 110 Nm | |
Front Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir Cap | 1.5 Nm | |
Front Brake Hose to Caliper | 25 Nm | Fit new sealing washer(s) |
Front Brake Hose to Master Cylinder | 25 Nm | Fit new sealing washer(s) |
Front Brake Caliper | 21 Nm | |
Front Brake Caliper Bleed Screw | 6 Nm | |
Rear Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir | 3 Nm | Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed |
Rear Brake Hose to Master Cylinder | 25 Nm | Fit new sealing washer(s) |
Rear Brake Master Cylinder to Control Plate | 16 Nm | |
Rear Brake Pad Retaining Pins | 18 Nm | |
Rear Brake Caliper Bleed Screw | 6 Nm | |
Fuel Tank Bracket to Frame | 12 Nm | |
Fuel Tank Front Fixings | 9 Nm | |
Fuel Tank Rear Fixing | 3 Nm | |
Fuel Tank Rear Pivot Fixing | 8 Nm | |
Battery Terminals | 4.5 Nm |
Engine Check For Fluid Leaks
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Standard required:
All engine components must be free from fluid leaks.
Check:
Check the visible areas of the crankcase, cylinder head and transmission for fluid leaks.
Visually inspect the oil hoses (if fitted) for fluid leaks and signs of damage or chafing (where accessible).
Rectification if required:
A leaking or damaged component must be replaced.
Oil Level Inspection
In order for the engine, transmission, and clutch to function correctly, maintain the engine oil at the correct level, and change the oil and oil filter in accordance with scheduled maintenance requirements.
Warning - General - Contaminated Oil
- Start the engine and run at idle for approximately five minutes.
- Stop the engine, then wait for at least three minutes to allow the oil to settle.
- Remove the dipstick, wipe clean and screw fully home in the crankcase.
Filler
Dipstick
Dipstick location in crankcase
Upper marking
Lower marking
- Remove the dipstick.
- The oil level is indicated by lines on the dipstick. When full, the indicated oil level must be level with the upper marking on the dipstick.
- If the oil level is too low, remove the filler plug and add oil a little at a time through the filler plug hole in the clutch cover, until the correct level is reached.
- Once the correct level is reached, fit the dipstick and the filler plug.
Oil and Oil Filter Change
Warning - General - Prolonged or repeated contact with engine oil
Warning - Hot Engine oil
- Warm up the engine thoroughly, and then stop the engine and secure the motorcycle in an upright position on level ground.
- Place an oil pan beneath the engine.
- Remove the oil drain plug.
Oil filter
Oil drain plug
- Unscrew and remove the oil filter using service tool T3880313 - Oil Filter Wrench. Dispose of the old oil filter in an environmentally friendly way.
- Apply a smear of clean engine oil to the sealing ring of the new oil filter.
- Fit the oil filter and tighten to 10 Nm using T3880313 - Oil Filter Wrench.
- After the oil has completely drained out, fit a new sealing washer to the drain plug. Fit and tighten the plug to 25 Nm.
- Using a suitable funnel, fill the engine with a fully or semi synthetic 10W/40 or 10W/50 motorcycle engine oil which meets specification API SN (or higher) and JASO MA2. Triumph Performance fully synthetic engine oil is recommended.
- Start the engine and allow it to idle for a minimum of 30 seconds.
- Ensure that the low oil pressure warning light remains off and the oil pressure message is not visible in the instrument display screen.
- Stop the engine and check the oil level. Adjust if necessary.
Fuel/Evaporative System - Check For Leaks, Routing, Chafing and Security
Standard required:
Fuel/evaporative hoses must be secure and routed in such a way that they do not chafe against moving parts of the motorcycle.
Fuel/evaporative hoses must not be routed around sharp curves. This could cause restrictions in the flow of fuel.
Fuel/evaporative system components must be free from damage.
The fuel tank cap must be easy to open and close.
The fuel tank cap seal must be free from damage.
The fuel cap lock barrel and key (if fitted) must operate easily and smoothly.
Check:
Visually check fuel/evaporative system components for signs of fuel leakage.
Visually check fuel/evaporative system components for signs of damage.
Visually check fuel/evaporative system components for security (where accessible).
Check the operation of the fuel filler cap and lock (if fitted).
Visually inspect the fuel cap seal for signs of damage.
Rectification if required:
Fuel/evaporative leaks must be rectified.
Damaged fuel/evaporative system components must be replaced.
An incorrectly fitting fuel cap must be replaced.
MAP Sensor Drain Hose - Draining
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
The MAP sensor drain hose is to be drained every 10,000 miles.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
- Release the fixing, detach the MAP sensor from the bracket and disconnect the MAP sensor hose.
MAP sensor (Trident shown)
Fixing
MAP sensor hose
- Remove the swinging arm pivot cover from the left hand outrigger.
Swinging arm pivot cover (left hand side shown)
- Release the fixing, detach the retaining clips and remove the left hand outrigger cover.
Fixing
Retaining clips locations
Outrigger cover
Retaining clip grommet
- Remove the cable tie securing the drain hose to the frame.
- Remove the drain hose plug and connect a suitable vacuum device or syringe to extract any oil from the drain hose.
Cable tie
Drain hose plug
- When the oil is drained, refit the drain hose plug.
- Route the drain hose to the left hand side of the frame, as shown in the illustration below.
- Secure the drain pipe to the frame with a cable tie as shown in the illustration below.
Drain hose
Frame
Cable tie
- Fit the left hand outrigger cover and tighten the fixing to 3 Nm.
Fixing
Retaining clips location
Outrigger cover
Retaining clip grommet
- Refit the swinging arm pivot covers, using the alignment marks.
Alignment mark, outrigger cover
Alignment mark, pivot cover
L and R markings, shown for clarity
- Fit the MAP sensor hose to the MAP sensor.
- Fit the sensor to the bracket, tighten the fixing to 5 Nm.
MAP sensor (Trident shown)
Fixing
MAP sensor hose
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Battery - Installation
Seat - Installation
Air Filter Element - Renew
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Removal
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Fuel Tank - Remove L Series
- Remove the nine fixings and separate the airbox upper from the airbox.
Airbox upper
Fixings
- Remove the air filter from the airbox.
Air filter
Seal
Airbox
Installation
- Install the air filter into the airbox.
- Check the condition of the seal and, if necessary, replace.
Air filter
Seal
Airbox
- Fit the airbox upper to the airbox and secure with nine fixings. Tighten to 1.5 Nm.
Airbox upper
Fixings
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Spark Plugs - Renew
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Fuel Tank - Remove L Series
ABS Modulator - Removal LG1; LGX; LL1
Spark Plug Replace - LG1; LGX; LL1
- Detach the electrical connections from the ignition coils.
- Remove the ignition coils from the cylinder head.
- Using a suitable tool remove the spark plugs from the cylinder head.
- Fit new spark plugs and tighten to 12 Nm.
- Inspect the ignition coils seal for damage and replace if necessary.
- Refit the ignition coils and reconnect the ignition coils electrical connections.
- Install a flanged sleeve and new fixing and tighten to 9 Nm.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
ABS Modulator - Installation LG1; LGX; LL1
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Coolant System - Check For Fluid Leaks
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Caution - Cooling - Coolant Level Inspection (overheating)
All cooling system components must be free from fluid leaks.
Check the visible areas of the radiator heat exchanger/oil cooler (if fitted) for fluid leaks.
Visually inspect the coolant hoses for fluid leaks.
A leaking or damaged cooling system component must be replaced.
Coolant Level Inspection
- Position the motorcycle on level ground and in an upright position. The expansion tank can be viewed from the left hand side of the motorcycle, below and towards the rear of the fuel tank.
- Check the coolant level in the expansion tank. The coolant level must be between the MAX and MIN marks. If the coolant is below the minimum level, the coolant level must be adjusted.
Expansion tank cover
Expansion tank
MAX mark
MIN mark
Coolant Level Adjustment
- Allow the engine to cool.
- Remove the cap from the expansion tank and add coolant mixture through the filler opening until the level reaches the MAX mark. Refit the cap.
Expansion tank cap
Expansion tank cover
Expansion tank
MAX mark
MIN mark
Coolant Renew
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Warning - Cooling - Do not remove the expansion tank or coolant pressure cap when engine is hot
Allow the engine to cool for a minimum of 30 minutes.
Drain the coolant (see Coolant Replacement - Drainage).
Refill the coolant with Triumph D2053 OAT (see Coolant Replacement - Filling).
Clutch Cable - Check/adjust
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Standard required:
It should be possible to pull the clutch lever easily and smoothly towards the handlebar grip.
The clutch cable must be routed such that it does not chafe against moving parts of the motorcycle.
Clutch Free Play LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LJ2; LK2; LL1
When the clutch lever is released, check for correct clutch free play at the lever is as described in the Service Specifications.
Check:
Check the action of the clutch by pulling the clutch lever towards the handlebar grip in order to disengage the clutch.
Check that the clutch cable is correctly routed and free from sharp bends or twists along its length.
Check that the clutch lever returns to the fully forward position when released (allowing for the specified free-play).
Check the operation of the clutch lever span adjuster.
Rectification if required:
If necessary, adjust the clutch cable as described in the Owner’s Handbook.
If undue resistance is felt when pulling the clutch lever towards the handlebar grip, check that the clutch cable is correctly routed. Twists or sharp bends in the cable will result in increased friction between the inner and outer cables.
Valve Clearance Adjustment
- Remove the camshafts (see Camshaft - Removal).
- Remove the tappet bucket from the cylinder head.
- Remove the shim from the valve head.
Tappet bucket
Shim
- Measure the original shim, using a micrometer and select the appropriate new shim as required.
- Fit the new shim to the valve head.
- Lubricate the tappet bucket(s) with a 50/50 solution of engine oil and molybdenum disulphide grease.
- Refit the tappet bucket.
- Refit the camshafts (see Camshaft - Installation and Timing).
- Re-check all valve clearances.
- Repeat the procedure if the valves require further adjustment.
- Fit the camshaft cover (see Camshaft Cover - Installation).
Camshaft Timing Adjust
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
- Remove the spark plugs to reduce compression resistance when turning the engine.
- Using the bolt fitted to the end of the crankshaft, rotate the crankshaft clockwise (the normal direction of rotation). Stop rotation when the camshaft alignment marks are positioned outwards as shown below and the dot mark on the primary gear aligns with the line on the crankcase.
Camshaft alignment marks
Fixings
- Insert service tool T3880601 into the timing holes in the crankcase and crankshaft.
DOT alignment mark
Marker line
T3880601 - Camshaft Timing Pin
Timing hole in crankcase
- Evenly release the camshaft drive chain tensioner mounting bolts until the plungers spring tension has been released.
- Remove the tensioner and discard the O-ring and gasket.
Tensioner
Fixings
- Fit the service tool T3880607 using the original fixings and tighten to 8 Nm.
T3880607 - Camshaft Timing Tensioner
- Using the service tool T3880609 and a 6 mm Ball Ended Allen Key, tighten the service tool T3880607 to 0.6 Nm preset by the service tool T3880609.
T3880607 - Camshaft Timing Tensioner
T3880609 - Timing Torque Limiter
6 mm Ball Ended Allen Key
- Make sure there is no slack in the chain between the crankshaft and the sprockets.
- Loosen but do not remove the two accessible fixings.
Fixings
- Remove service tool T3880601 from the crankcase and crankshaft.
DOT alignment mark
Marker line
T3880601 - Camshaft Timing Pin
Timing hole in crankcase
- Using the bolt fitted to the end of the crankshaft, rotate the crankshaft 360° clockwise (the normal direction of rotation). Stop rotation when the camshaft alignment marks are positioned inwards as shown below and the dot mark on the primary gear aligns with the line on the crankcase.
- In addition to the crankshaft alignment mark, at TDC, the alignment marks on the camshaft bosses will point inwards.
Camshaft alignment marks
- Insert service tool T3880601 into the timing holes in the crankcase and crankshaft.
DOT alignment mark
Marker line
T3880601 - Camshaft Timing Pin
Timing hole in crankcase
- Loosen but do not remove the remaining two fixings.
Fixings
- Note the orientation of the camshaft ladder in relation to the cylinder head.
- Progressively release the fixings securing the camshaft ladder to the cylinder head in the sequence shown below.
- Remove the camshaft ladder, top pad, dowels and spark plug tower O-rings, noting their orientation for installation.
- Insert the service tool T3880640 into the camshaft slots as shown below.
T3880640 - Camshaft Timing Plate
Camshaft slots
Removal screw
- Rotate both sprockets on the camshafts until the fixings are positioned centrally within the slots.
Elongated slots
Fixings
- Check that the chain is correctly located around the crankshaft, and both camshaft sprockets.
- Assemble the dowels, spark plug tower O-rings, camshaft ladder and top pad in the same location and orientation as prior to removal.
- Stage 1 - Fit and evenly tighten the fixings to 5 Nm, in the sequence shown below.
- Stage 2 - Fit and evenly tighten the fixings to 10 Nm, in the sequence shown below.
- Using the service tool T3880609 and a 6 mm Ball Ended Allen Key, tighten the service tool T3880607 to 0.6 Nm preset by the service tool T3880609.
T3880607 - Camshaft Timing Tensioner
T3880609 - Timing Torque Limiter
6 mm Ball Ended Allen Key
- Tighten the two accessible (uppermost) camshaft sprocket fixings to 22 Nm.
Uppermost fixings
- Remove the service tool T3880640 by rotating the removal screw clockwise as shown below.
T3880640 - Camshaft Timing Plate
Removal screw
- Remove service tool T3880601 from the crankcase and crankshaft.
DOT alignment mark
Marker line
T3880601 - Camshaft Timing Pin
Timing hole in crankcase
- Rotate the crankshaft until the remaining two fixings are accessible.
- Make sure there is no slack between the crankshaft and exhaust sprocket when the sprocket fixings are centrally located within the slotted holes and the alignment marks on the end of the camshaft journals are pointing inwards.
- Tighten the two remaining (uppermost) camshaft sprocket fixings to 22 Nm.
Uppermost fixings
- Check that the chain is correctly located around the crankshaft, and both camshaft sprockets.
- Set the hydraulic tensioner onto the first tooth of the ratchet (minimum extension) carry out the following:
- Hold the resister ring ends together and pull out the plunger.
Resister ring ends
Plunger
- Remove the spring.
Spring
- While holding the resister ring in place, pour out the engine oil into a suitable container.
- Make sure the resister ring is correctly located as shown in the illustration below.
Resister ring
- Refit the spring.
- Hold the resister ends together and insert the plunger into the tensioner housing.
- Place the tensioner in a soft jawed vice.
- While holding the resister ends together, use the vice to push the plunger through the resister ring until the groove for the snap ring aligns with the snap ring.
Resister ring
Plunger
Groove for snap ring
Snap ring
- When the groove aligns with the snap ring, release the resister ring and move one end of the snap ring into the groove. Slowly release the vice to ensure that the plunger is held in place.
Groove for snap ring
Snap ring
- Place a suitable wedge between the camshaft drive chain tensioner blade and crankcase, to hold the camshaft drive chain taut during removal of the service tool T3880607.
Wedge
Crankcase
Tensioner blade
- Release the tension on Camshaft Timing Tensioner T3880607and remove the T3880609 - Timing Torque Limiter .
T3880607 - Camshaft Timing Tensioner
T3880609 - Timing Torque Limiter
6 mm Ball Ended Allen Key
- Remove the T3880607 - Camshaft Timing Tensioner.
T3880607 - Camshaft Timing Tensioner
- Fit the timing chain tensioner, incorporating a new gasket and O-ring. Tighten the fixings to 8 Nm.
Tensioner
Fixings
- Remove the wedge from between the camshaft drive chain tensioner blade and crankcase.
- To release the hydraulic tensioner, rotate the crankshaft 1/4 of a turn anticlockwise using the bolt fitted to the end of the crankshaft. Then rotate the crankshaft clockwise two revolutions until the 'dot' mark on the primary gear aligns with the line on the crankcase.
- Insert the service tool T3880601 into the timing holes in the crankcase and crankshaft.
Dot mark
Marker line
T3880601 - Camshaft Timing Pin
Timing hole in crankcase
- Check that the timing marks are still approximately aligned (to check that the camshaft timing has not moved during service tool T3880607 removal).
- Remove the service tool T3880601.
Camshaft Ladder Fixing Release Sequence |
Camshaft Cover Fixings Tightening Sequence |
Camshaft Cover Fixings Tightening Sequence |
Camshaft Alignment Marks |
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Wheels - Check For Damage
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Alloy wheels - DP5, CF7; CM7; CM8; CR7; CR8; CT7; D34; D64; DD2; DD4; DP; DP2; DP3; DP4; DPA; DPZ; HA6; HB6; HD; HD2; HD4; HD5; HD6; HDA; HE7; HF7; HF8; HG7; HG8; HH7; HJ7; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LJ2; LK2; LL1; NN3; NN4; NN5; NN6; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PSB; PX1; PXB; PXC; PYB; TD1; TH1; YE1; YF1; YJ1; YK1; YL1; YM1; YN1
- Check the wheel rims for broken or damaged spokes.
- Check the wheel hubs for any visible signs of cracks, damage or deformation.
Wheel Bearings - Inspection
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Paddock stand (Unordered List)
Position the motorcycle on level ground and place on a paddock stand.
- Hold the wheel at the top and bottom and rock the wheel checking for movement when a force is applied.
- Check the wheel bearings spin smoothly with no signs of play.
- If the bearings do not spin smoothly or there is excessive play in the wheel bearings, replace all bearings in that wheel.
Bearing check |
Tyres - Check For Wear/Damage
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Warning - Tyre Safety Fragment
As the tyre tread wears down, the tyre becomes more susceptible to puncture and failure. It is estimated that 90% of all tyre failures occur during the last 10% of tread life (90% worn). It is false economy and unsafe to use tyres until they are worn to their minimum.
All tyres are fitted with tread wear indicators. When the tyre becomes worn down as far as the top of a tread wear indicator, the tyre is worn beyond its service life and must be replaced.
|
Attention must also be paid to the legal limits for tread wear, which differ from country to country. Tyres that have worn to the legal limit in the country or region in which the motorcycle is operated must be replaced, even if tread wear has not yet reached the level of the tread wear indicators.
Measure the depth of the tread with a depth gauge, and replace any tyre that has worn to, or beyond the minimum allowable tread depth.
Inspect tyres for cracks, splits and kerb damage. Always replace tyres that are suspected of having become damaged.
Damaged tyres must be replaced.
Tyre Pressures - Check/Adjust
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
- Remove the caps from the tyre valves.
- Position the tyre pressure gauge onto the end of the valve body making sure the tyre valve is in contact with the tyre inflator.
- Momentarily deflate the tyre to equalise the pressure in the tyre and the gauge.
- Check that the correct pressure is displayed on the gauge.
- If the air pressure is below the recommended setting, inflate the tyre until the correct pressure is achieved.
- If it is greater than the recommended setting, slowly deflate the tyre checking the gauge regularly until the correct reading is achieved.
Tyre Valve
Tyre gauge (valve connector)
Tyre gauge
- Repeat the process for the remaining tyre.
- Refit the caps to the tyre valves.
Steering Check
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
- Move the handlebars to left and right full lock while checking that the brake hose, clutch cable and electrical harnesses do not bind or that the steering feels tight or difficult to turn. Rectify as necessary.
Fork Inspection
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Examine each fork for any sign of damage or scratching of the slider surface or for oil leaks.
If any damage or oil leakage is found, strip and repair as described in this section or consult an authorised Triumph dealer.
Check for smooth operation of the forks as follows:
Place the motorcycle on level ground.
While holding the handlebars and applying the front brake, pump the forks up and down several times.
If roughness or excessive stiffness is detected, repair as described in the Front suspension section of this service manual or consult an authorised Triumph dealer.
Rear Suspension Unit - Inspection
Warning - Suspension - Contents under Pressure, Never Disassemble the RSU
RSU warning symbol and text
The rear suspension units are sealed units and do not have any internally user serviceable parts. |
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
- Clean all components and inspect for damage/wear to:
- Renew as necessary, see the following:
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Headstock Bearing - Inspection
- Examine the frame for any raised witness marks caused by the removal process. Remove any such marks with fine emery paper or a suitable file.
Headstock Bearings - Lubricate
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle Including locking devices
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Note to be used in service manual with stabilise warning
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Lower Yoke - Remove L Series
- Inspect the headstock bearings for damage/wear (see Headstock Bearing - Inspection).
- Lubricate the headstock bearings, using finger pressure, force five grammes of Triumph Performance RG2 grease (NLGI 2) or an equivalent heavy duty lithium based grease between the inner race and the carrier.
- Rotate the ball bearing to ensure that the grease is distributed over the entire circumference of the internal parts.
- Any excess grease should be smeared on the outside of the rollers.
Roller bearing
Inner carrier face
Outer carrier face
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Lower Yoke - Install L Series
Steering Head Bearing - Check
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Raise and support the front of the motorcycle.
- Hold the bottom end of the front fork outer tubes as illustrated and rock with a front-to-rear motion. If free play can be detected, the headstock bearings require adjustment.
Steering Head Bearing - Adjustment
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
- Raise and support the front of the motorcycle.
- Remove the fixings that attach the handlebar clamp to the upper yoke. Detach the clamp and release the handlebar.
- As an assembly, raise the handle bars until clear of the upper yoke. Rest the assembly forward of the steering stem such that access to the headstock top nut and the adjustment nuts is unrestricted. Ensure the master cylinder remains in an upright position.
- Loosen the upper yoke pinch bolts.
- Remove the upper yoke centre nut from the steering stem.
Upper yoke centre nut
- Ease the upper yoke and instrument assembly from the forks and support them while detached.
- Adjust the bearing free play as follows, using service tool T3880023 and service tool T3880750:
Adjuster nut
Lock nut
T3880023 - 50 mm Socket
T3880750 - Headstock Service Tool
Torque wrench
Adjuster nut
Lock nut
T3880023 - 50 mm Socket
Adjuster nut
Lock nut
T3880023 - 50 mm Socket
T3880750 - Headstock Service Tool
- Refit the upper yoke and instrument assembly to the forks.
- Fit the upper yoke centre nut and tighten to 90 Nm.
- Tighten the upper yoke pinch bolts to 26 Nm.
- Locate the handlebar assembly in the lower halves of the clamps. Fit the upper clamps and bolts.
- Rotate the handlebars so that the alignment mark on the handlebar aligns with the split line.
- Tighten the front clamp bolts to 26 Nm, then the rears.
Alignment mark
Split line
- Recheck the bearing adjustment (see Steering Head Bearing - Check).
Maintenance - Fork Oil Renew
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Drain the fork oil (see Fork Oil Change - Oil Draining).
Refill the fork with Showa SS47G oil (see Fork Oil Change - Oil Refilling).
Brake Master Cylinders - Inspection
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Inspect both the front and rear master cylinders for fluid leaks. Rectify as necessary.
Front Brake Wear inspection
Brake pads must be inspected in accordance with scheduled requirements and replaced if worn to, or beyond the minimum service thickness.
|
Minimum lining thickness |
---|
1.5 mm |
If the lining thickness of any pad is less than that specified in the table, replace all the pads on the wheel.
Warning - Brakes - Pad Friction Material
Warning - Brakes - Pad Carrier Plate Thickness
Brake pads for this model supplied by Triumph will have the carrier plate at the correct thickness. Always have replacement brake pads supplied and fitted by your Triumph dealer.
|
Rear Brake Wear inspection
If the lining thickness of any pad is less than that specified in the table, replace all the pads on the wheel.
Minimum lining thickness |
---|
1.5 mm |
Warning - Brakes - Pad Friction Material
Warning - Brakes - Pad Carrier Plate Thickness
Brake pads supplied by Triumph will have the carrier plate at the correct thickness. Always have replacement brake pads supplied and fitted by your Triumph dealer.
|
Front Brake Fluid Level Inspection
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Front brake fluid reservoir, upper level line
Lower level line
- The brake fluid level in the reservoirs must be kept between the upper and lower level lines (reservoir held horizontal).
- To inspect the fluid level, check the level of fluid visible in the window at the front of the reservoir body.
- To adjust the fluid level, release the screws and remove the cover.
- Noting its position, remove the sealing diaphragm.
- Fill the reservoir to the upper level line using new DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container.
- Refit the cover, ensuring that the diaphragm seal is correctly positioned between the cover and reservoir body.
- Tighten the cover retaining screws to 1.5 Nm.
Rear Brake Fluid Level Inspection
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
|
- The reservoir is visible from the right hand side of the motorcycle, forward of the silencer, below the rider’s seat.
- To inspect the fluid level, check the level of fluid visible in the reservoir. The fluid level must be kept between the upper and lower level lines (reservoir held horizontal).
- To adjust the fluid level, remove the reservoir cap and diaphragm seal. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line using new DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container.
- Refit the reservoir cap ensuring that the diaphragm seal is correctly fitted.
Brake Fluid - Renew
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Caution - Do not spill brake fluid
Front Brake Fluid
Note the original setting of the brake lever adjuster in order that it can be returned to the same position when the bleeding operation is complete. Set the brake lever adjuster to position No. 1.
|
- Turn the handlebars to bring the fluid reservoir to a level position.
Front reservoir upper level
Front reservoir lower level
Screws
- Remove the screws from the brake reservoir cover.
- Carefully remove the reservoir cover taking care not to spill any fluid.
- Check the condition of the sealing diaphragm for the reservoir. Replace if necessary.
- Remove the rubber cap from the bleed screw on the right hand caliper.
- Attach a transparent tube to the bleed screw.
Bleed screw
Bleed tube
Container
- Place the other end of the tube in a suitable receptacle containing new brake fluid. Keep the tube end below the level of fluid.
- Partially open the bleed screw.
- Get an assistant to slowly pull the brake lever to the handlebar and then slowly release the brake lever.
- Repeat step 9 until fresh brake fluid appears in the bleed tube.
- When fresh brake fluid is in the system, apply pressure to the brake lever, close the bleed screw and tighten it to 6 Nm.
- Remove the bleed tube and replace the bleed screw cap.
- Fill the reservoir to the upper level with new DOT 4 fluid.
- Repeat steps 5 to 13 for the other front brake caliper.
- When the brake fluid has been renewed, make sure the brake lever operation has a firm resistive feel to it, does not feel spongy and that the lever cannot be pulled directly back to the handlebar. Take remedial action as necessary.
- Refit the reservoir cap ensuring that the diaphragm seal is correctly positioned between the cap and the reservoir body. Tighten the fixings to 1.5 Nm.
Rear Brake Fluid
- Remove the cap from the rear bleed screw.
- Attach a transparent tube to the bleed screw.
Bleed screw
Spanner
Bleed tube
- Place the other end of the tube in a suitable receptacle containing new brake fluid.
- Unscrew and remove the rear brake reservoir cover taking care not to spill any fluid.
Rear reservoir cap
Rear reservoir upper level
Rear reservoir lower level
- Check the condition of the sealing diaphragm. Replace the diaphragm as necessary.
- Partially open the bleed screw.
- Get an assistant to slowly depress the brake pedal and then slowly release the brake lever.
- Repeat step 7 until fresh brake fluid appears in the bleed tube.
- When fresh brake fluid is in the system, apply pressure to the brake pedal, close the bleed screw and tighten it to 6 Nm.
- Remove the bleed tube and replace the bleed screw cap.
- Refit the reservoir cap ensuring that the diaphragm seal is correctly positioned between the cap and the reservoir body.
- Check the operation of the rear brake. Rectify as necessary.
Drive Chain Free Movement - Inspection
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Place the motorcycle on a level surface and hold it in an upright position with no weight on it.
- Rotate the rear wheel by pushing the motorcycle to find the position where the chain is tightest.
- Stretch the chain taut by applying pressure on the chain.
- Measure from the bottom of the swingarm to the centre of the chain pin, as shown in the illustration.
- The measurement must be in the range of 43 - 55 mm.
- If the measurement exceeds the range, then the chain needs to be adjusted, see Drive Chain Free Movement - Adjustment.
Drive Chain Free Movement - Adjustment
If the drive chain free movement measurement is incorrect, adjustments must be made as follows:
- Loosen the rear wheel spindle nut.
- Loosen the adjuster lock nut on both the left and right hand side drive chain adjusters.
Spindle adjuster
Rear wheel spindle nut
Adjuster nut
Adjuster lock nut
- Equally turn both the left and right hand adjuster nuts clockwise (A) to decrease drive chain free movement and anticlockwise (B) to increase drive chain free movement.
- Make sure the same adjuster marking is aligned with the spindle adjuster on both sides of the swinging arm.
Spindle adjuster (left hand side shown)
Adjuster markings
- Make sure that both the left and right hand adjuster nuts are set to the same measurement.
- Set the amount of drive chain free movement to 43 - 46 mm and tighten the rear wheel spindle nut to 110 Nm.
- Repeat the drive chain adjustment check. Readjust if necessary.
- Tighten both left and right hand side adjuster nuts to 3 Nm.
- Hold the adjuster nuts in place, and tighten the adjuster lock nuts to 15 Nm.
- Repeat the drive chain adjustment check. Readjust if necessary.
- Check the rear brake effectiveness. Rectify if necessary.
A. Clockwise direction B. Anticlockwise direction |
Brakes - Defective Warning
Drive Chain Rubbing Strip - Check
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Front Sprocket Cover - Remove L Series
- Inspect the drive chain rubbing strip, including the underside, for cracks, damage or excessive wear.
Drive chain rubbing strip
- If the drive chain rubbing strip needs replacing, see Drive Chain Rubbing Strip - Removal and Drive Chain Rubbing Strip - Installation.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Front Sprocket Cover - Install L Series
Drive Chain and Sprocket Wear Inspection
Drive Chain - Maintenance Warning
Notice Drive Chain - Worn Sprockets
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
L series chain guard removal SM only
Drive chain damage and wear inspections
Drive Chain Damage Inspection
- Rotate the rear wheel and inspect the drive chain for damaged rollers, loose pins and stiff links.
Stiff link
- If the drive chain has any damaged rollers, loose pins or stiff links, the drive chain must be replaced by a competent person with the specialist knowledge and technical understanding of motorcycles, such as an authorised Triumph dealer.
Drive Chain Wear Inspection
- Stretch the drive chain taut by hanging a 10 - 20 kg (20 - 40 lb) weight on the drive chain.
Measure across 20 links
Weight
- Measure the length of 20 links on the straight part of the drive chain from pin centre of the 1st pin to the pin centre of the 21st pin. Since the drive chain may wear unevenly, take measurements in several places.
- If the length exceeds the maximum service limit, the drive chain must be replaced. Refer to the Specifications section for the maximum service limit.
Sprockets Wear Inspection
- Rotate the rear wheel and inspect the sprockets for unevenly or excessively worn or damaged teeth.
- If there is any wear or damage, the drive chain and the sprockets must be replaced by a competent person with the specialist knowledge and technical understanding of motorcycles, such as an authorised Triumph dealer.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
L series chain guard install SM only
Final Drive Chain Lubrication
Lubrication is necessary every 200 miles (300 km) and also after riding in wet weather, on wet roads, or any time that the chain appears dry.
Use the special drive chain lubricant as recommended in the specification section.
Correct application is critical for drive chain lubrication. Apply the lubricant for one full drive chain revolution only, then leave for eight hours before riding. This allows the lubricant’s solvent (used to thin the oil) to evaporate and the oil to 'soak' into all parts of the drive chain. If the lubricant is applied and the motorcycle is ridden shortly afterwards, the lubricant is unlikely to reach all parts and the majority will be flung off and wasted. Applying excessive amounts is not helpful under any circumstances.
It should be noted that the lubricant is applied to the drive chain to lubricate its action across the sprockets. In an O-ring chain, external lubrication does not penetrate to the bushes and rollers as the O-ring seals prevents this from happening.
Check Lights, Instruments and Electrical Systems
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Check the instruments, lights and electrical systems for functionality. Rectify if necessary.
Bank Angle Indicators
- Inspect the bank angle indicators on the rider's footrests for wear. The bank angle indicators are worn out when 15 mm of the bank indicator remains.
Bank angle indicator
Latest Calibrations Check
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Check for the latest calibration download for the following using the Triumph Diagnostic Tool:
Instruments (if applicable)
Chassis ECM (if fitted)
Keyless ECM (if fitted)
Suspension ECM (if fitted)
Immobiliser (if fitted)
ABS ECM
Engine ECM
See the Triumph Diagnostic Tool User Guide for more information.
Autoscan
Actions required
Perform an Autoscan using the Triumph Diagnostic Software in accordance with the Triumph Diagnostic Tool User Guide.
Check
Check all results pass the Autoscan, and save the results.
Print a customer copy.
Additional Work
Standard required:
Check Triumph Online for all additional work required by relevant Triumph issued Service Bulletins, Recalls and Technical News Bulletins. These must be completed prior to the road test.
Road Test
Engine Cold Start Performance
Standard required:
The engine must start quickly and idle smoothly.
Action:
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
Start the engine and allow to idle.
ABS (anti-lock brake system) indicator light (models fitted with ABS only)
Standard required:
Refer to the Owner’s Handbook for further information regarding the ABS indicator light illumination sequence for the relevant model.
The ABS indicator light should flash on and off and continue to flash after engine start up until the motorcycle first reaches a speed exceeding 6 mph (10 km/h).
Clutch
Standard required:
The clutch should engage smoothly, without judder, slipping or noise.
Gear Change
Standard required:
Changing between gears must be smooth and easily accomplished.
Throttle Response
Standard required:
The engine should be quick to respond to any movement of the throttle.
There should be no pronounced misfires.
The idle speed must not change when the handlebars are turned from lock to lock.
Brakes
Standard required:
The brakes should have a firm, responsive feel.
The brakes should act smoothly and silently without judder.
Upon activation of the brakes, the motorcycle should come to rest without deviating from a straight line.
Instrument Panel
Standard required:
All instruments must operate correctly.
Check:
Check that the warning lights on the instruments operate correctly.
Steering and Suspension
Standard required:
The motorcycle should be easy to steer and should not pull to one side.
Cornering should be precise with the motorcycle leaning naturally into the corner and returning to the upright position upon exiting the corner.
The front and rear suspension operation should be smooth with no excessive stiffness, roughness or tight spots.
Check:
Check the correct action of the front suspension, including the damper action.
Check the correct action of the rear suspension, including the damper action.
Cruise Control (if fitted)
Standard required:
All cruise control switches must operate correctly. All functions and displays must operate as described in the Owner’s Handbook.
Check:
Once the relevant conditions have been met as described in the Owner’s Handbook, turn the cruise control ON and OFF.
Check the functionality of all following actions:
Cruise control function - all models except DS1 DSA DSB DSX
SET the speed
Resume the SET speed
Increase the SET speed
Decrease the SET speed
Throttle cancel - twist the throttle fully forward to cancel the cruise control
Brake cancel - make sure the cruise control is cancelled by use of the front brake, then the rear brake
Clutch cancel - make sure the cruise control is cancelled by pulling the clutch lever in
Gear change cancel - make sure the cruise control is cancelled when changing gear
Sixty second overtake cancel - make sure the cruise control is cancelled after increasing the speed with the throttle for more than sixty seconds.
Post Road Test
Cooling Fan Operation (liquid cooled engines only)
Standard required:
The fan should operate when the coolant temperature rises above normal operating temperature. It will stop automatically.
The blades of the cooling fan must not come into contact with the radiator or the guard which surrounds the cooling fan blades.
There must be no abnormal noises when the cooling fan is operating.
Action:
With the engine idling, allow the engine temperature to rise to above normal operating temperature.
Check:
Check the cooling fan for correct operation.
Action:
Switch off the engine.
Hot Start
Standard required:
The engine should start easily when at normal operating temperature and run smoothly at idle.
Action:
Switch off the engine (if running) and wait thirty seconds.
Start the engine and allow to idle.
Switch off the engine.
Engine
Standard required:
The engine must be free from fluid leaks.
Fuel System
Standard required:
The fuel system must be free from leaks.
Tyres
Standard required:
Front and rear tyres must be free from damage.
Bodywork
Standard required:
The motorcycle bodywork must be clean and free from damage.
Check:
Check the motorcycle bodywork for new damage.
Check the motorcycle bodywork for cleanliness.
Service Indicator and Service Maintenance Book
Reset the service indicator using the Triumph Diagnostic Tool.
See the Triumph Diagnostic Tool User Guide for more information.
Stamp and date the relevant section of the Service Record.
Engine Covers
Exploded View - Sump
Exploded View - Clutch Cover
Exploded View - Alternator Cover
Exploded View - Camshaft Cover
Exploded View - Front Sprocket Cover and Breather Cover
Exploded View - Crankcase Right Hand Cover and Balancer Cover
Sump - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Exhaust - Removal L Series
Warning - Engine Oil - Harmful to Humans
Caution Engine Oil - Heat
Drain the engine oil (see Oil and Oil Filter Change).
- Release the bolts securing the sump to the lower crankcase.
- Detach the sump and collect the water pump drain tube. Remove and discard the four drain tube O-rings.
Water pump drain tube
O-rings
- Remove and discard the sump gasket.
- If necessary, remove the oil transfer pipe, oil pick up pipe and breather drain pipe. Discard the fixings and the four O-rings.
- If necessary, remove the oil pressure relief valve.
Oil pressure relief valve
Oil transfer pipe
Fixings
Oil pick up pipe
Fixings
Oil breather drain pipe
Fixing
Sump Fixings Release Sequence |
Sump - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle Including locking devices
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Note to be used in service manual with stabilise warning
- If removed, refit the oil pressure relief valve. Tighten to 15 Nm.
- If removed, fit the oil transfer pipe incorporating new O-rings. Fit new fixings and tighten to 12 Nm.
- If removed, refit the oil pick up pipe incorporating a new O-ring. Fit new fixings and tighten to 12 Nm.
- If removed, refit the oil breather drain pipe incorporating a new O-ring. Fit a new fixing and tighten to 9 Nm.
Oil pressure relief valve
Oil transfer pipe
Fixings
Oil pick up pipe
Fixings
Oil breather drain pipe
Fixing
- Incorporating new O-rings, position the water pump drain tube to the oil pump.
Water pump drain tube
O-rings
- Incorporating a new sump gasket, position the sump to the lower crankcase.
- Tighten the sump fixings to 10 Nm in the sequence shown below.
- Re-tighten the fixings one and two to 10 Nm.
Sump Fixings Tightening Sequence |
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Exhaust - Installation L Series
Fill the engine with the correct grade of engine oil (see Oil and Oil Filter Change)
Battery - Install L Series
Start the engine and make sure that the low oil pressure warning light goes out shortly after starting
Stop the engine and check the engine oil level. Adjust if necessary (see Oil Level Inspection)
Seat - Install L Series
Clutch Cover - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
- Release the clutch cable from the actuating arm (see Clutch Cable - Removal).
- Place an oil catch tray beneath the clutch cover to collect any oil that may spill out during removal.
- Release the fixings that attach the clutch cover to the crankcases. Note the position of the copper washer for installation.
Clutch cover
Copper washer position
- Carefully withdraw the cover.
- Remove the gasket and clean the surfaces of the crankcase and the clutch cover using a lint free cloth.
Clutch Cover - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle Including locking devices
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Note to be used in service manual with stabilise warning
- Incorporating a new clutch cover gasket, position the clutch cover to the crankcase.
- Install the clutch cover fixings and the copper washer in the position noted during removal.
- Tighten the clutch cover fixings to 8 Nm in the sequence shown below.
- Re-tighten the fixings one and two to 8 Nm.
- Fit the clutch cable to the actuating arm (see Clutch Cable - Installation).
- Set the clutch adjustment (see Clutch Cable - Installation).
Clutch Cover Fixings Tightening Sequence |
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Alternator Cover - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Caution - Alternator rotor magnets finger injury SM
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Fuel Tank - Remove L Series
Airbox - Remove LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1; LL2
Throttle Body - RemoveLG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1; LL2
Front Sprocket Cover - Remove L Series
Coolant Expansion Tank - Removal L Series
- Disconnect the crankshaft position sensor from the sub harness. Route the harness back to the alternator cover.
Crankshaft position sensor connector
- Disconnect the grey connector from the regulator/rectifier. Route the harness back to the alternator cover.
Grey connector
Regulator/rectifier
- Place an oil catch tray beneath the alternator cover to collect any oil that may spill out on removal.
- Release the fixings securing the alternator cover to the crankcases, noting the position of the coolant expansion tank bracket.
Alternator cover
Fixings
- Withdraw the cover from the crankcase and discard the gasket.
Alternator Cover - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle Including locking devices
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Note to be used in service manual with stabilise warning
- Apply ThreeBond 1216E sealant to the grommet on the path shown below. The bead of sealant should extend around the grommet perimeter (including the underside) and be approximately 3.5 mm wide.
- Position the grommet to the alternator cover.
- Position a new gasket to the crankcase dowels then refit the alternator cover, refitting the coolant expansion tank bracket as noted during removal.
- Make sure a copper washer is fitted under fixing position 7 in the image below.
- Tighten the cover bolts to 10 Nm in the sequence shown below.
- Re-tighten the fixings one and two to 10 Nm.
- Route the alternator harness to the regulator/rectifier as noted for removal.
- Connect the grey connector to the regulator/rectifier.
- Route the crankshaft position sensor harness to the main harness as noted for removal.
- Connect the crankshaft position sensor the main harness.
Crankshaft position sensor connector
Alternator Cover Grommet Sealant Path |
Alternator Cover Fixings Tightening Sequence |
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Coolant Expansion Tank - Installation L Series
Front Sprocket Cover - Install L Series
Throttle Body - Install - LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1; LL2
Airbox - Install - LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Camshaft Cover - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Fuel Tank - Remove L Series
ABS Modulator - Removal LG1; LGX; LL1
SAI Valve - Removal L Series
SAI Reed Valves - Removal L Series
- Disconnect the electrical connections to the ignition coils and remove the coils.
- Lift the air deflector plate from the top of the camshaft cover and fold it forwards towards the radiator.
Camshaft cover
Air deflector
- Progressively release the camshaft cover fixings in the sequence shown below.
- Remove the camshaft cover from the engine.
- Remove the camshaft cover gasket. If necessary, recover the three dowels from the secondary air injection holes in the camshaft ladder (these may stay in the camshaft cover or gasket).
- Discard the camshaft cover gasket and bolt seals.
- Use a syringe or lint free cloth to remove any residual oil from the front of the cylinder head.
Camshaft Cover Fixings Release Sequence |
Camshaft Cover - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Refit the three dowels to the camshaft ladder.
Dowels
- Lubricate a new camshaft cover seal with Action Can AC-90.
- Fit the camshaft cover seal to the cylinder head.
Camshaft cover seal
Dowels
Plug tower seals
- Fit the camshaft cover.
- Lubricate the new camshaft cover screw seals with Action Can AC-90.
- Fit the camshaft cover screws and screw seals and tighten until finger tight.
- Tighten the camshaft cover fixings one to six in the sequence shown to 6 Nm.
- Re-tighten the camshaft cover fixings one to six in the sequence shown to 14 Nm.
- Refit the air deflector plate on top of the camshaft cover.
Camshaft cover
Air deflector
- Inspect the ignition coil seals for damage and replace if necessary.
- Fit the ignition coils and connect the electrical connectors.

Stage 1 |
Camshaft Cover Fixings Tightening Sequence |

Stage 2 |
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
SAI Reed Valves - Installation L Series
SAI Valve - Installation L Series
ABS Modulator - Installation LG1; LGX; LL1
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Front Sprocket Cover - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Caution - Drive Chain trapped fingers
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Front Sprocket Cover Remove LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2
- Remove the fixings securing the sprocket cover to the crankcase.
- Manoeuvre the evaporative drain hose upwards, noting its position for installation, and remove the front sprocket cover.
Front sprocket cover
Fixings
Breather hoses and harnesses
Evaporative canister drain hose
Front Sprocket Cover - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Caution - Drive Chain trapped fingers
Front Sprocket Cover Install LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2
- Fit the sprocket cover, ensuring that the breather hoses and harnesses are routed as noted for removal.
- Fit the sprocket cover fixings and evenly tighten to 9 Nm.
- Position the evaporative drain hose as noted during removal.
Front sprocket cover
Fixings
Breather hoses and harnesses
Evaporative canister drain hose
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Crankcase Right Hand Cover - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Caution Engine Oil - Heat
Warning - Engine Oil - Harmful to Humans
- Place an oil catch tray beneath the crankcase right hand cover to collect any oil that may spill out during removal.
- Release the eight fixings and remove the right hand crankcase cover. Discard the gasket.
Fixings
Copper washer
Crankcase Right Hand Cover - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle Including locking devices
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Note to be used in service manual with stabilise warning
- Fit a new gasket to the crankcase right hand cover.
- Fit the crankcase right hand cover with the copper washer in the position noted during removal.
- Tighten its fixings to 8 Nm in the sequence shown below.
- Re-tighten the fixings one and two to 8 Nm.
Crankcase Right Hand Cover Fixings Tightening Sequence |
Engine Breather Cover - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Fuel Tank - Remove L Series
Side Panels - Removal LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2
Airbox - Remove L Series
Airbox - Remove L Series
Throttle Body - Remove L Series
Inlet Manifold - Removal - LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1
Engine Breather Cover Removal - LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1
- Release the hose clip and detach the engine breather hose from the engine breather cover.
- Detach the harness from the two brackets mounted to the breather cover.
- Release the six fixings and remove the engine breather cover.
Engine breather cover
Fixings
Harness bracket
Harness bracket
Inlet manifold bracket
- Discard the gasket.
Engine Breather Cover - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle Including locking devices
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Note to be used in service manual with stabilise warning
Breather Cover Installation - LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1; LL2
- Fit a new engine breather cover gasket to the crankcase.
- Fit the engine breather cover, ensuring that the gasket remains in the correct position.
- Position the harness brackets and the inlet manifold bracket to the engine breather cover as noted during removal.
Engine breather cover
Fixings
Harness bracket
Harness bracket
Inlet manifold bracket
- Install the fixings to the engine breather cover and tighten to 10 Nm in the sequence shown.
- Re-tighten the fixings one and two to 10 Nm.
Engine Breather Cover fixings Tightening Sequence |
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Inlet Manifold - Install - LG1; LGX; LL1
Throttle Body - Install L Series
Airbox - Install L Series
Side Panels - Install LG1; LGX
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Balancer Cover - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Caution Engine Oil - Heat
Warning - Engine Oil - Harmful to Humans
Balancer Cover Remove LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2
- Place an oil catch tray beneath the balancer cover to collect any oil that may spill out on removal.
- Release the four fixings and remove the balancer cover. Discard the gasket.
Fixings
Balancer Cover - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle Including locking devices
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Note to be used in service manual with stabilise warning
Balancer Cover Install LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL2
- Fit a new gasket to the balancer cover.
- Fit the balancer cover and tighten its fixings to 8 Nm in the sequence shown below.
- Re-tighten the fixings one and two to 8 Nm.
Balancer Cover Fixings Tightening Sequence |
Cylinder Head
Exploded View - Cylinder Head
Exploded View - Camshaft, Camshaft Drive and Valves
Cylinder Head Description
The engine is fitted with an aluminium alloy cylinder head, which carries the camshafts, valves and spark plugs. The cylinder head is cast as a single entity and various components are permanently added after machining.
The camshafts run directly in the cylinder head without separate bearings. Valve clearances are adjusted by changing variable thickness shims which sit between the valve tappet bucket and the valves.
The camshafts are driven by a silent-type drive chain, via a sprocket bolted to each of the camshafts, using slotted holes. The use of slotted holes allows the camshaft timing to be adjusted very accurately, to compensate for manufacturing tolerances in the camshaft drive system.
The chain is guided by two blades and is tensioned by a hydraulic tensioner.
The hydraulic tensioner is fed oil via a gallery in the cylinder head. The combination of oil pressure and spring pressure pushes the plunger against the tensioner blade which tensions the camshaft drive chain. The hydraulic tensioner has an oil pressure relief valve located in the plunger that is set to open between 12-16 bar and when open sprays oil through a drilling in the tensioner blade onto the camshaft drive chain.
Oil is supplied to the cylinder head by a gallery in the crankcase. Once supplied to the head, the oil is distributed along internal drillings within the cylinder head casting and camshaft.
Single valve springs are used to close both the inlet valves and exhaust valves. These valve springs have close wound coils at one end to assist in the prevention of valve bounce at high engine speed and to give a smooth valve actuation. When assembling the cylinder head it is important that the close wound, colour coded ends of the springs are fitted downwards (towards the piston). Both the tip and seating face of the valves are hardened to give a long service life.
Due to the methods used to assemble the valve seat and valve guides to the head, these parts cannot be replaced.
Valve Clearances
Camshaft, valve, valve shim and valve seat wear affects the valve clearances. The effect of this wear is to change the gap between the camshaft and tappet bucket, causing engine noise and improper running. If the valve clearances become too small, permanent damage to the valve and valve seat will take place. If the valve clearance becomes too great, the engine will become noisy and will not run correctly.
Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Camshaft Cover - Remove L Series
Crankcase Right Hand Cover - Remove L Series
- Rotate the crankshaft clockwise (the normal direction of rotation), using the bolt fitted to the end of the crankshaft. Stop rotation when number 1 cylinder is at Top Dead Centre (TDC), that is when the dot mark on the primary gear aligns with the line on the crankcase.
- Insert service tool T3880601 into the timing holes in the crankcase and crankshaft.
DOT alignment mark
Marker line
T3880601 - Camshaft Timing Pin
Timing hole in crankcase
- In addition to the dot mark alignment, at TDC, the alignment marks on the camshaft bosses will point inwards.
Camshaft alignment marks
- Place a suitable wedge between the camshaft drive chain tensioner blade and crankcase, to hold the camshaft drive chain taut during removal of the tensioner.
- Evenly release the hydraulic tensioner mounting bolts until the plunger spring tension has been released.
- Remove the hydraulic tensioner and discard the O-ring and gasket.
Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner - Inspection
- Inspect the camshaft drive chain tensioner spring for damage and deformation. Renew as necessary.
- Inspect the tip of the camshaft drive chain tensioner plunger for wear and damage. Renew as necessary.
Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Check that the dot mark on the primary gear is still aligned with the line on the crankcase and the service tool T3880601 is installed. Ensure the crankshaft cannot rotate.
- Ensure that the wedge fitted earlier is still holding the camshaft drive chain tensioner blade in contact with the camshaft drive chain.
- Check that the camshaft alignment marks point inwards.
- To set the hydraulic tensioner onto the first tooth of the ratchet (minimum extension) carry out the following:
- Hold the resister ring ends together and pull out the plunger.
Resister ring ends
Plunger
- Remove the spring.
Spring
- While holding the resister ring in place, pour out the engine oil into a suitable container.
- Ensure the resister ring is correctly located as shown in the illustration below.
Resister ring
- Refit the spring.
- Hold the resister ends together and insert the plunger into the tensioner housing.
- Place the tensioner in a soft jawed vice.
- While holding the resister ends together, use the vice to push the plunger through the resister ring until the groove for the snap ring aligns with the snap ring.
Resister ring
Plunger
Groove for snap ring
Snap ring
- When the groove aligns with the snap ring, release the resister ring and move one end of the snap ring into the groove. Slowly release the vice to ensure that the plunger is held in place.
Groove for snap ring
Snap ring
- Fit a new O-ring and gasket to the hydraulic tensioner.
- Fit the tensioner to the cylinder head as noted for removal. Tighten the bolts to 8 Nm.
- Remove the wedge, taking care not to move or damage the tensioner blade.
- Remove the service tool T3880601.
- To release the hydraulic tensioner, rotate the crankshaft 1/4 of a turn anticlockwise using the bolt fitted to the end of the crankshaft. Then rotate the crankshaft clockwise two revolutions until the 'dot' mark on the primary gear aligns with the line on the crankcase.
- Check that there is tension in the camshaft drive chain and the timing marks at the camshaft sprockets are correctly aligned.
- Check that the tensioner plunger is correctly located in the middle of the camshaft drive chain tensioner blade when viewed from above.
- Rotate the engine through 4 full revolutions, and reset number 1 cylinder to TDC. Ensure that the dot mark on the primary gear aligns with the line on the crankcase.
Dot mark
Marker line
- Check that the camshaft timing marks point as illustrated below.
- Re-check the tensioner plunger location against the camshaft drive chain tensioner blade.
Camshaft Alignment Marks |
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Camshaft Cover - Install L Series
Crankcase Right Hand Cover - Install L Series
Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner Blade - Disassembly
- Release the clips and remove the pad.
Pad
Clip (one side shown)
- Detach the top hook from the tensioner blade.
Top hook
Tensioner blade
- Release the three side locating devices.
Locating devices
Facing blade
- Release the three hooks and remove the facing blade.
Hooks
Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner Blade and Rubbing Strip - Inspection
- Check the camshaft drive chain tensioner blade and rubbing strip for wear or damage. Renew if worn or damaged.
Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner Blade - Assembly
- Align the three hooks and fit the facing blade.
Hooks
- Align the three side locating devices.
Locating devices
Facing blade
- Attach the top hook to the tensioner blade.
Top hook
Tensioner blade
- Fit the pad and secure the clips..
Pad
Clip (one side shown)
Camshaft - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Camshaft Cover - Remove L Series
Crankcase Right Hand Cover - Remove L Series
- Remove the spark plugs to reduce compression resistance when turning the engine.
- Loosen the two camshaft sprocket fixings. Do not remove the fixings at this stage.
Fixings
- Rotate crankshaft until the remaining two fixings are accessible.
- Loosen the two remaining camshaft sprocket fixings. Do not remove the fixings at this stage.
- Evenly release the camshaft drive chain tensioner mounting bolts until the plunger spring tension has been released.
- Remove the tensioner and discard the O-ring and gasket.
- Note the orientation of the camshaft ladder in relation to the head.
- Progressively release the bolts securing the camshaft ladder to the head in the sequence shown below.
- Remove the camshaft ladder and top pad, and collect the dowels (if loose) and spark plug tower O-rings.
- Lift the camshaft drive chain from the inlet camshaft sprocket and remove the inlet camshaft.
- Lift the camshaft drive chain from the exhaust camshaft sprocket and remove the exhaust camshaft.
Camshaft drive chain
Inlet camshaft
- For the removal of the camshaft drive chain (see Camshaft Drive Chain - Removal).
- Rotate the crankshaft clockwise (the normal direction of rotation), using the bolt fitted to the end of the crankshaft. Stop rotation when number 1 cylinder is at Top Dead Centre (TDC), that is when the dot mark on the primary gear aligns with the line on the crankcase.
- Insert the service tool T3880601 into the timing holes in the crankcase and crankshaft.
Dot mark
Marker line
T3880601 - Camshaft Timing Pin
Timing hole in crankcase
- At this stage the camshafts and sprockets can be separated if required.
Camshaft Ladder Bolt Release Sequence |
Camshaft and Sprocket Identification
|
The same sprocket is used for both inlet and exhaust camshafts, and is attached to the camshaft using slotted bolt holes. The same holes are used when fitting the sprocket to either camshaft.
Note that the mark on the camshaft boss is not a timing mark, it is used as a visual aid during the timing adjustment procedure.
Accurate camshaft timing can only be obtained using the correct timing method and service tools as described on Camshaft - Installation and Timing in this chapter.
Camshaft and Bearing Cap Inspection
- Inspect the camshaft sprockets for damaged and worn teeth. Replace as necessary.
- Measure the camshaft journals with a micrometer. If any journal is outside the specified tolerance, replace the camshaft. For specifications refer to Camshafts.
Camshaft journal
- Examine all camshaft and camshaft bearing caps for excessive wear and damage.
- Check the journal-to-head clearances, using Plastigauge (Triumph part number 3880150-T0301) as follows:
- Calculate the journal clearance using the Plastigauge chart supplied with the Plastigauge kit.
- For specifications refer to Camshafts.
- If the clearance measured is within the specified tolerance, remove the cap/ladder and clean off all traces of Plastigauge. Assemble the camshafts (see Camshaft - Installation and Timing).
Measuring the Compressed Plastigauge |
Camshaft - Installation and Timing
- Check that the dot mark on the primary gear is still aligned with the line on the crankcase and the service tool T3880601 is installed. Ensure the crankshaft cannot rotate.
- Thoroughly clean the camshafts and journals. Inspect the ends of the camshafts for correct fitment of the sealing plugs. Lubricate the camshafts with clean engine oil before fitting to the head.
- If removed, refit the camshaft sprockets noting their orientation, and secure using the original bolts. DO NOT tighten the fixings at this stage; the sprockets must be free to rotate.
- Refit the camshaft drive chain and, if removed, the tensioner blade and rubbing strip (see Camshaft Drive Chain - Installation).
- Refit the exhaust camshaft to the cylinder head, hooking the camshaft drive chain over the sprocket as you do so.
- Ensure there is no slack between the crankshaft and exhaust sprocket when the sprocket fixings are centrally located within the slotted holes. Ensure alignment marks on the end of the camshaft journals are pointing inwards.
- Refit the inlet camshaft to the cylinder head, hooking the chain over the sprocket as you do so.
- Ensure the fixings on the inlet sprocket are also centrally located within the slotted holes when there is no slack between the exhaust and inlet sprockets. Ensure alignment marks on the end of the camshaft journals are pointing inwards.
- Check that the chain is correctly located around the crankshaft, and both camshaft sprockets.
- Rotate the camshafts until the alignment marks on the end of the camshaft journals are pointing inwards.
- Insert the service tool T3880640 into the camshaft slots, ensuring the removal screw is unscrewed fully, as shown below. Ensure that the tool is centrally located between the camshafts.
T3880640 - Camshaft Timing Plate
Camshaft slots
Removal screw
- Assemble the dowels, spark plug tower O-rings, camshaft ladder and top pad in the same location and orientation as prior to removal.
Camshaft Alignment Marks |
Stage 1
- Fit and evenly tighten the fixings to 5 Nm, in the sequence shown below.
Camshaft Cover Fixings Tightening Sequence |
Stage 2
- In the sequence shown above, tighten the bolts to 10 Nm.
- Fit the service tool T3880607 using the original fixings and tighten to 8 Nm.
T3880607 - Camshaft Timing Tensioner
- Using the service tool T3880609 and a 6 mm Ball Ended Allen Key, tighten the service tool T3880607 to 0.6 Nm preset by the service tool T3880609.
T3880607 - Camshaft Timing Tensioner
T3880609 - Timing Torque Limiter
6 mm Ball Ended Allen Key
- Tighten the two accessible (uppermost) camshaft sprocket fixings to 22 Nm.
Uppermost fixings
- Remove the service tool T3880601 by rotating the removal screw clockwise as shown below.
T3880640 - Camshaft Timing Plate
Removal screw
- Remove the service tool T3880601.
- Rotate the engine until the remaining two sprocket fixings are accessible.
- Tighten the two remaining camshaft sprocket fixings to 22 Nm.
- Place a suitable wedge between the camshaft drive chain tensioner blade and crankcase, to hold the camshaft drive chain taut during removal of the service tool T3880607.
- Release the tension on Camshaft Timing Tensioner T3880607 and remove it.
- Refit the timing chain tensioner, incorporating a new gasket and O-ring (see Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner - Installation).
- Rotate the crankshaft clockwise 2 complete turns, using the bolt fitted to the end of the crankshaft. Stop rotation when number 1 cylinder is at Top Dead Centre (TDC), that is when the dot mark on the primary gear aligns with the line on the crankcase.
- Insert the service tool T3880601 into the timing holes in the crankcase and crankshaft.
Dot mark
Marker line
T3880601 - Camshaft Timing Pin
Timing hole in crankcase
- Check that the timing marks are still approximately aligned (to check that the camshaft timing has not moved during service tool T3880607 removal).
- Remove the service tool T3880601.
- Check the valve clearances. Adjust as necessary (see Valve Clearance Measurement).
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Camshaft Cover - Install L Series
Crankcase Right Hand Cover - Install L Series
Valve Clearance Measurement
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Remove the camshaft cover (see Camshaft Cover - Removal).
- Remove the spark plugs to reduce compression resistance when turning the engine.
- Select a high gear and, using the rear wheel, turn the engine until a pair of camshaft lobes are positioned pointing away from the valves.
- Using feeler gauges, measure and record the clearances for this pair of valves only.
- Repeat the process until the valve clearances for all valves have been checked.
- Record the measured valve clearances on a chart similar to the example shown.
Typical Valve Clearance Chart
Inlet Valve No. | Gap Measured |
1 | as measured (mm) |
2 | as measured (mm) |
3 | as measured (mm) |
4 | as measured (mm) |
5 | as measured (mm) |
6 | as measured (mm) |
Exhaust Valve No. | Gap Measured |
1 | as measured (mm) |
2 | as measured (mm) |
3 | as measured (mm) |
4 | as measured (mm) |
5 | as measured (mm) |
6 | as measured (mm) |
Camshaft Drive Chain - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
- Remove the bolt from the centre of the camshaft drive chain housing in the cylinder head.
Centre bolt
- Raise the front camshaft drive chain rubbing blade and detach the camshaft drive chain from the crankshaft gear.
- The camshaft drive chain is removed from inside the head-space.
Camshaft Drive Chain - Inspection
Visual in-situ checks can also be made as follows:
- Check for significant blue discolouration of the drive chain plates indicating excessive heat build-up.
- Examine all pins for signs of rotation.
- Check for cracking or deep scratching of the drive chain plates.
- Check for severe wear of the inner plates as indicated in the diagram below.
For a more thorough check, proceed as follows:
- Remove the drive chain from the engine.
- Suspend the drive chain from a pin or hook with a 13 kg weight attached at the lower end.
- Measure across 23 links as shown in the diagram below. If the drive chain is within limits, the measurement should be no longer than 149.48 mm. Measurements beyond 149.48 mm indicate that the drive chain must be replaced.
- Check for severe wear of the inner surface of the outer plates at the side-contact points with the sprocket teeth.
- Check for signs of stiffness or kinking.
- Check for severe wear of the plates in the area shown below.
- If any of these symptoms are evident, the camshaft drive chain must be replaced.
Camshaft Drive Chain - Installation
- Fit the camshaft drive chain and locate the lower end around the crankshaft gear.
- Incorporating a new seal, refit the bolt to the centre of the camshaft drive chain housing in the cylinder head, tightening to 12 Nm.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Cylinder Head - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Engine - Remove - L Series
- Remove the camshaft drive chain tensioner blades.
- Note the position of all tappet buckets and shims such that they can be refitted in the same positions. Remove all the tappet buckets and shims.
Tappet bucket
Shim
- Disconnect the coolant bypass hose from the rear of the cylinder head.
- Release the screws securing the outside of the cylinder head to the upper crankcase.
Cylinder head to upper crankcase screws
- Progressively release the cylinder head bolts in the order shown below.
- Lightly tap the cylinder head with a rubber mallet to break the seal of the gasket.
- Remove the cylinder head. Discard the cylinder head gasket and the nuts and washers.
Cylinder Head Release Sequence |
Cylinder Head - Inspection
- Thoroughly clean the surface of the cylinder head and check for damage and/or pitting of the combustion chambers.
- Using a straight edge and feeler gauges, check the cylinder head face for warp, which could lead to gasket failure. Replace the cylinder head if warped beyond the flatness limit. For specifications refer to Cylinder Head.
Cylinder head
Straight edge
- Inspect the valve guides for damage or wear.
- If a valve guide is found to be worn beyond the service limit, the complete cylinder head must be renewed. For specifications refer to Cylinder Head.
- Check the camshaft drive chain rubbing blades. Renew if worn or damaged.
Cylinder Head - Installation
- Fit a new cylinder head gasket ensuring that the head to crankcase location dowels are correctly in place.
Cylinder head gasket
- Ensure that the cylinder head face is completely clean.
- Carefully lower the cylinder head over the camshaft drive chain and locate the head onto the dowels.
- Lubricate the threads on the bolts and the top surface of the hardened washer with clean engine oil.
- Fit new bolts and washers to the cylinder head as noted for removal and tighten until finger tight.
- The cylinder head bolts are tightened in four stages, in the sequence shown below. This is to ensure that the cylinder head gasket seals correctly to the head and crankcase.
Stage 1
Tighten the cylinder head bolts to 15 Nm, in the sequence shown below.
Cylinder Head Tightening Sequence |
Stage 2
Tighten the cylinder head bolts to 20 Nm, in the sequence shown above.
Stage 3
Fit the service tool T3880105 between the Torx socket and the drive handle and locate the Torx drive to the bolt. Pick an increment point on the torque turn gauge which aligns with a suitable reference point on the head.
Tighten the cylinder head bolts through 120° of bolt rotation as measured using the service tool T3880105, in the sequence shown above.
Stage 4
Tighten the cylinder head bolts to 40 Nm, in the sequence shown above.
- Fit the screws securing the side of the cylinder head to the crankcase and tighten to 10 Nm.
- Install the camshaft drive chain tensioner blades.
- Clean and lubricate the tappet buckets with a 50/50 solution of engine oil and molybdenum disulphide grease and refit the buckets and shims in the same locations from which they were removed.
Cylinder head to upper crankcase screws |
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Valves and Valve Stem Seals - Removal
- Remove each valve from the head using a valve spring compressor. The compressor must act on the valve spring retainer to allow removal of the valve collets.
- Once the collets are released, remove the following items:
Valve stem seal
Collets
Valve spring retainer
Valve spring
Valve spring base
Valve stem oil seal
Valve
Valve removal |
Cylinder Head Valve Guide Wear Check
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
- Position the valves so that the valve stem ends are level with the valve stem seal (the valves must remain in this position for the duration of the test).
Valve stem ends
Valve stem seals
- Complete each step below for each valve in the cylinder head.
- The valve should be gently rocked to one side of the valve guide in line with the camshaft.
- Secure a dial gauge to the cylinder head such that the clamping device will not damage any of the cylinder head surfaces.
- Position the dial gauge to the valve head on the opposite side to where the valve has made contact to the valve guide, as shown in the illustration below.
Dial gauge
Flat ended contact point
Direction valve rocked to valve guide
- Zero the dial gauge.
- Gently rock the valve to the opposite side of the valve guide in line with the camshaft and note the reading on the dial gauge.
- Repeat steps 3 to 7 but with the rocking of the valve head at 90° to the original measurement, as shown in image below. Note the reading on the dial.
Dial gauge
- The maximum movement of the valve in either direction must be less than 0.96 mm.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Valves and Valve Stem Seals - Installation
- Lubricate the valve stems with new engine oil which meets specification API SH (or higher) and JASO MA.
- Install the valve into the valve guide.
- Fit the valve stem seal over the valve stem and, using a suitable tool, press down fully until the seal is correctly seated over the valve guide.
- Install the valve spring over the valve stem. Ensure the close wound, colour coded ends of the springs are fitted downwards (towards the piston).
- Fit the valve spring retainer.
- Compress the valve spring ensuring that the spring is compressed squarely to prevent damage to the valve stem and cylinder head.
- Fit the valve collets ensuring correct collet location in the spring retainer and valve as the spring compressor is released.
Valve to Valve Guide Clearance
If the valve guides are worn beyond the service limit given below, the cylinder head must be replaced.
Valve Stem to Guide Clearance
Inlet | 0.010-0.040 mm |
Service limit | 0.078 mm |
Exhaust | 0.020-0.050 mm |
Service limit | 0.088 mm |
Valve Guides
If a valve guide is found to be worn beyond the service limit, the complete cylinder head must be renewed.
Clutch
Exploded View - Clutch Controls
Exploded View - Clutch
Clutch Cable - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Clutch Cable Remove LG1
- Detach the clutch cable retaining clip from the right hand headstock gusset.
- Loosen the cable lock nut and release the adjuster at the clutch cover end to give maximum play in the cable.
Clutch cable
Adjuster
- Release the clutch cable from the actuating arm by pushing the inner cable nipple through the arm and sliding the cable out of the slot. Detach the cable from the bracket.
Actuating arm
Inner cable nipple
- Align the cable adjuster and lever bracket slots.
- Pull in the clutch lever and turn the inner cable, anticlockwise through the slots in the adjuster and lock nut, until the cable can be detached from the lever by pushing downwards.
Cable adjuster/lever bracket slots
Cable release point
- Detach the two grommets from the radiator brackets and remove the clutch cable, noting the routing through the instruments bracket.
Grommets
Clutch cable
Clutch Cable - Inspection
- Check the inner cable for free movement through the outer cable.
- Examine the inner cable for frayed strands.
- Examine the two inner cable nipples for signs of looseness and damage. Replace the cable if necessary.
Clutch Cable - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Clutch Cable Install LG1
- Make sure the two grommets and retaining clip are fitted to the clutch cable.
- Feed the clutch cable through the radiator brackets and instruments bracket and position the clutch cable as noted during removal.
- Attach the inner cable to the clutch lever and actuating arm using a reversal of the removal process.
- Refit the outer cable to the adjuster bracket at the clutch end.
- Attach the clutch cable retaining clip to the right hand headstock gusset.
- Secure the two grommets to the radiator brackets.
- Turn the steering to full right hand lock.
- Set the lever adjuster to a point where an equal adjustment is possible in both directions.
- Set the adjuster at the clutch end to give a preliminary setting of 2 - 3 mm of free play as measured at the lever. Tighten the lock nut.
- Operate the clutch lever several times and recheck the amount of free play present.
- Set the final adjustment of the cable to give 2 - 3 mm of free play at the lever by turning the adjuster nut and lock nut at the lever end.
Clutch lever
Correct setting, 2 - 3 mm
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Clutch - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Clutch Cover - Remove L Series
- Release the three fixings evenly to ensure the stopper plate is released squarely. Remove the stopper plate, springs and pressure plate.
Fixings
Stopper plate
Spring seats
Springs
Pressure Plate
- Remove the pull rod and bearing from the clutch pressure plate.
Pull rod
Bearing
Clutch pressure plate
- Remove the clutch plates, anti-judder seat washers and springs, noting the orientation of the each component as they are removed.
- Engage second gear and lock the inner and outer clutch drums together using service tool T3880307 as shown below.
T3880307 - Clutch Anti-rotation Jig
- Release the clutch centre nut.
- Remove the centre nut, Belleville washer, plain washer, clutch inner drum and thrust washer.
- Discard both the Belleville washer and plain washer.
- Slide the bearing sleeve forward and backwards a maximum of 10 mm to allow the needle roller bearing to become dislodged.
- Remove the needle roller bearing from the clutch outer drum.
Bearing sleeve
Needle roller bearing
Shaft
- Slide the clutch outer drum away from the gearbox input shaft.
Friction Plate Inspection
Thickness
- Measure the thickness of the friction plate.
Clutch friction plate
- For the clutch friction plate thickness, refer to Clutch and Primary Drive.
Steel Plate Inspection
Bend/warp
Check all plates for bend and warp as follows:
- Place the plate being checked on a clean surface plate and attempt to pass a feeler gauge of the maximum service limit thickness between the steel plate and surface plate. If the feeler gauge can be passed beneath the steel plate at any point, renew the plates as a set.
Steel plate
Feeler gauge
Surface plate
- For specifications refer to Clutch and Primary Drive.
Clutch Pack Height
Clutch pack height introduction
The clutch pack height should only be measured if the friction plates and the steel plates have been replaced.
The clutch pack height is critical for a smooth operation of the gear change and needs to be measured prior to installation.
If used steel plates are being fitted, the clutch pack height measurement is not necessary, as the plates may not be worn to the service limit (and are therefore still serviceable), but could fall outside the clutch pack height tolerance when measured.
If building a new clutch pack, its height must be correct. To achieve this, build the new clutch pack with the following:
1 x new inner friction plate
1 x inner steel plate
6 x new friction plates
4 x steel plates, 2.0 mm thick
1 x outer steel plate, 2.3 mm thick.
1 x new outer friction plate
Friction plate and steel plate arrangement
- Arrange the new friction and new steel plates in a stack as shown below.
Friction plates
Inner friction plate
Inner steel plate
Steel plates, 2.0 mm thickness
Outer steel plate, 2.3 mm thickness
- Place the assembled clutch pack on a flat surface and measure its height as shown below.
Clutch pack height
- For the correct clutch pack height for this clutch assembly see Clutch and Primary Drive.
Clutch - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Visually check the oil pump drive chain is engaged with the drive gears.
- Position the clutch outer drum assembly to the input shaft and align the oil pump sprocket drive pegs with the corresponding holes in the rear of the clutch outer drum.
Clutch outer drum (rear view)
Oil pump sprocket drive pegs
Clutch outer drum sprocket drive holes
- While holding the clutch outer drum in position and ensuring correct engagement with the oil pump drive, refit the bearing.
Bearing sleeve
Needle roller bearing
Shaft
- Fit the thrust washer to the shaft.
- Fit the clutch inner drum.
- Fit the flat washer, a new Belleville washer (OUT mark facing outwards), and a new centre nut.
Thrust washer
Clutch inner drum
Flat washer
Belleville Washer OUT Mark
Centre nut
- Using service tool T3880307, lock the inner and outer drums together. Depress the rear brake pedal to prevent the engine rotating, and tighten the centre nut to 98 Nm.
- Remove service tool T3880307.
T3880307 - Clutch Anti-rotation Jig
- Disengage second gear and check for free rotation of the clutch inner drum.
- Using a suitable pin punch, stake the nut to the shaft.
- Coat all clutch friction plates in clean engine oil before fitting the friction plates, steel plates, anti-judder spring and anti-judder seat washer to the clutch basket in the same order and orientation as noted during removal.
Clutch outer drum
Clutch inner drum
Anti-judder seat washer
Anti-judder spring
Friction plate (inner)
Steel plate (inner)
Friction plates
Steel plates
Steel plate (outer)
Pressure plate
- Refit the clutch pull rod.
- Ensure that the spring seats are fitted into the pressure plate as noted for removal.
- Fit the pressure plate to the clutch centre, making sure the three raised teeth on the pressure plate align with the three missing teeth sections on the clutch centre, and the three raised teeth on the clutch centre align with the three missing teeth sections on the pressure plate.
Raised teeth
Missing teeth sections
Clutch pressure plate
- Rotate the clutch pressure plate in a clockwise direction until it comes into contact with the ramps on the clutch centre and the bolt holes align.
Clutch pressure plate
Alignment mark (1 of 3)
Bolt hole (1 of 3)
- Fit the springs and stopper plate. Install the fixings and tighten finger tight until resistance is felt against the springs on each fixing.
- Tighten the fixings to a maximum of three turns each in an alternating pattern. Continue until the stopper plate is fully down.
- Tighten the fixings to 5 Nm.
- Tighten the fixings to 10 Nm.
Fixings
Stopper plate
Spring seats
Springs
Pressure plate
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Clutch Cover - Install L Series
Crankcase, Crankshaft, Connecting Rods and Pistons
Exploded View - Crankcase
Exploded View - Crankshaft, Connecting Rods and Pistons
Crankcases - Disassembly
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Engine - Remove - L Series
Clutch - Remove L Series
Camshaft Cover - Remove L Series
Sump - Removal L Series
- Invert the engine to give access to the lower crankcase bolts.
- Release the lower crankcase bolts in the sequence shown in the diagram below. Note the position of the hardened washers under bolts 19 to 26.
- Separate the lower and upper crankcases ensuring that the three locating dowels remain in the upper crankcase.
Crankcase Bolt Release Sequence |
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Crankcases - Assembly
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
- Use high flash-point solvent to clean the crankcase mating faces. Wipe the surfaces clean with a lint-free cloth.
- Make sure that the transmission is in neutral.
- Make sure that the three locating dowels are in position in the upper crankcase.
Locating dowels
- Apply a thin bead of silicone sealant (at the factory, ThreeBond 1216E is used) to the lower crankcase mating faces.
- Install and lubricate the crankshaft bearing shells with a 50/50 solution of engine oil and molybdenum disulphide grease (see Connecting Rod Big End Journal Checking, Measuring and Bearing Selection before proceeding).
- Lubricate the crankshaft journals with clean engine oil.
- Fit the crankshaft (see Crankshaft - Installation).
- If removed, refit the balancer (see Balancer - Installation).
- Position the lower crankcase to the upper. An assistant may be required to support the crankcase during alignment.
- Fit the bolts into the lower crankcase and hand tighten until the bolt heads are near contact with the crankcase. Note the position of the hardened washers under bolts 1 to 8.
Sealant Areas |
Stage 1
- In the sequence shown below, tighten the crankcase bolts 9 to 26 to 12 Nm.
Crankcase Bolt 9 to 26 Tightening Sequence |
Stage 2
- In the sequence shown below, tighten the new crankcase bolts 1 to 8 to 10 Nm.
Crankcase Bolt 1 to 8 Tightening Sequence |
Stage 3
- In the sequence shown below, tighten the crankcase bolts 1 to 8 to 70° of bolt rotation using the service tool T3880105 :
Crankcase Bolt 1 to 8 Tightening Sequence |
T3880105 - Torque Angle Gauge |
Stage 4
- In the sequence shown below, tighten the crankcase bolts 14 to 19 to 32 Nm.
Crankcase Bolt 14 to 19 Tightening Sequence |
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Check for tight spots and rectify as necessary.
Sump - Install L Series
Camshaft Cover - Install L Series
Clutch - Install L Series
Engine - Install - L Series
Crankshaft - Removal
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Engine - Remove - L Series
- Release and remove the crankshaft from the upper crankcase.
- Remove the balancer (see Balancer - Removal).
Crankshaft - Installation
- Select and fit new main and big end bearing shells using the selection processes (see Crankshaft Main Bearing/Journal Checking, Measuring and Bearing Selection).
Big end shells
- Lubricate all bearings with a 50/50 solution of engine oil and molybdenum disulphide grease.
- Ensure that the crankshaft is clean, and that the oil ways within the crankshaft are clean and free from blockages and debris.
- Refit the balancer (see Balancer - Installation).
- Install the crankshaft ensuring that the crankshaft journals align with the big ends and that the crankshaft and balancer gear markings align as shown in the next illustration.
Balancer backlash and drive gear markings
Crankshaft markings
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Engine - Install - L Series
Connecting Rods - Removal
Connecting rods may be removed from the engine after first removing it from the frame. The cylinder head must be removed and the crankcase halves separated.
- Mark each big end cap and connecting rod to identify both items as a matched pair and to identify the correct orientation of the bearing cap to the connecting rod.
- Release the connecting rod bolts and remove the big end cap. Ensure that the bearing shell remains in place in the cap.
Big end cap
Connecting rod bolt
- Push the connecting rod up through the crankcase and collect the piston and connecting rod from the top.
- Label the assembly to identify the cylinder from which it was removed.
- Remove the liner using service tool T3880101 (see Cylinder Liner - Removal).
- Detach the piston from the connecting rod (see Pistons - Disassembly).
Connecting Rods - Installation
- Fit the piston onto the connecting rod (see Pistons - Assembly Piston Assembly).
- Apply silicone sealer to the liner-to-crankcase mating face (at the factory, ThreeBond 1216E is used).
Liner
Sealer area
- Fit the piston and connecting rod assembly into the liner from the bottom.
- Fit the liner into the crankcase ensuring that the arrow on the piston faces forward.
- The liners must be positioned such that they do not touch each other - it must be possible to pass a 0.1 mm feeler gauge between the centre liner and its adjacent liner on either side. If the liners touch at any point, rotate the liners until there is a minimum 0.1 mm clearance.
Liners
- Select the big end bearing shells (see Connecting Rod Big End Journal Checking, Measuring and Bearing Selection).
- Fit the bearing shells to the connecting rod and big end cap and lubricate with a 50/50 solution of engine oil and molybdenum disulphide grease.
- Align the connecting rod to the crankshaft and fit the big end cap.
Big end cap
Connecting rod bolt
- Lubricate the threads and under-head area of the new bolts with molybdenum disulphide grease. Tighten the bolts evenly and progressively in two stages as follows:
Arrowed: Liner-Piston Fitment |
Tighten to 14 Nm.
Tighten through 210° of bolt rotation as measured using service tool T3880105.
T3880105 - Torque Angle Gauge |
Connecting Rod Big End Journal Checking, Measuring and Bearing Selection
Connecting Rod Big End Bearing Selection/Crankshaft Journal Wear Check
- Measure the bearing and crankshaft journal clearance as follows.
Remove the big end cap from the journal to be checked.
Wipe the exposed areas of the crankshaft journal, and the bearing face inside the cap.
Apply a thin smear of grease to the journal and a small quantity of silicone release agent to the bearing.
Size a length of the Plastigauge to fit across the crankshaft journal. Fit the Plastigauge to the journal using the grease to hold the strip in place.
Lubricate the threads and under-head of the bolt with molybdenum disulphide grease. Refit the bearing and cap and tighten the big end bolts (see Connecting Rods - Installation).
Remove the big end cap from the journal being checked. Using the gauge provided with the Plastigauge kit, measure the width of the compressed Plastigauge.
Connecting Rod Big End Bearing/Crankshaft Journal Clearance
For specifications refer toCrankshaft.
Crankshaft Journal diameter
For specifications refer toCrankshaft.
Connecting Rod - Bearing Selection
Minor differences in crankshaft dimensions are compensated for by using selective bearings. For further information on bearing part number to colour cross-references, see the latest parts information.
- Select the correct big end bearing shell as follows:
Measure each crankshaft journal diameter.
Select the correct bearings by matching the information found with the chart below.
Big end bearing selection chart
Shell Colour | White | Red |
Connecting Rod Big End Bore Dia. | 36.009 36.000 | 36.009 36.000 |
Crankshaft Journal Dia. | 33.010 33.003 | 33.002 32.994 |
Running Clearance Range | 0.064 0.036 | 0.061 0.032 |
Running Clearance Nominal | 0.049 |
For instance:
Connecting Rod Big End Dia. 36.002
Crankshaft Journal Diameter 32.987
Required Bearing Red
- Install the new bearings in the connecting rod.
|
Crankshaft Main Bearing/Journal Checking, Measuring and Bearing Selection
Minor differences in crankshaft dimensions are compensated for by using selective bearings. For further information on bearing part number to colour cross-references, see the latest parts information.
Crankshaft Main Bearing/Journal Wear
Minor differences in crankshaft and crankcase dimensions are compensated for by using selective bearings. For further information on bearing part number to colour cross-references, see the latest parts catalogue information.
- Measure the bearing to crankshaft journal clearance as follows:
- Measure the bearing to crankshaft main journal clearance using Plastigauge (Triumph part number 3880150-T0301).
- Separate the crankcase halves (see Crankcases - Disassembly).
- Wipe the exposed areas of the crankshaft journal, and the bearing faces inside the crankcase halves.
- Apply a thin smear of grease to the journal and a small quantity of silicone release agent to the bearing.
- Trim a length of the Plastigauge to fit across the crankshaft journal.
- Fit the Plastigauge to the journal using the grease to hold the strip in place.
- Lubricate the threads and the face of the fixings with molybdenum disulphide grease.
- Refit the crankcase and tighten the original fixings (see Crankcases - Assembly).
- Release the fixings and remove the crankcase.
- Using the Plastigauge kit, measure the width of the compressed Plastigauge.
- For specifications refer toCrankshaft.
- If the clearance exceeds the service limit, measure the diameter of the crankshaft bearing journal.
Checking Crankshaft Journal Clearance using Plastigauge |
Main Bearing Selection
Select the bearings as follows:
- Measure and record the diameter of each crankshaft main bearing journal.
- Measure and record each main bearing bore diameter in the crankcase (bearings removed, crankcase halves assembled and all fixings fully torqued).
- Select and install the correct bearings by matching the information found in the Main Bearing Selection Chart.
- Install the new bearings.

For example: | |
---|---|
Crankcase Bore | 35.990 mm |
Crankshaft Journal Diameter | 32.978 mm |
Required Bearing | Blue |
Crankshaft End Float
Standard | 0.15-0.30 mm |
Service Limit | 0.5 mm |
Main Bearing Selection Chart
Crankcase Bore Diameter | Crankshaft Main Journal Diameter | ||||||||||||||||
32.972 | 32.973 | 32.974 | 32.975 | 32.976 | 32.977 | 32.978 | 32.979 | 32.980 | 32.981 | 32.982 | 32.983 | 32.984 | 32.985 | 32.986 | 32.987 | 32.988 | |
35.980 | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red |
35.981 | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red |
35.982 | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red |
35.983 | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red |
35.984 | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red |
35.985 | Green | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red |
35.986 | Green | Green | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red |
35.987 | Green | Green | Green | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red |
35.988 | Green | Green | Green | Green | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Red | Red | Red | Red | Red |
35.989 | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Red | Red | Red | Red |
35.990 | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Red | Red | Red |
35.991 | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Red | Red |
35.992 | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Red |
35.993 | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue |
35.994 | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue |
35.995 | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue |
35.996 | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue |
35.997 | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Blue | Blue | Blue | Blue |
35.998 | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Green | Blue | Blue | Blue |
For instance: | |
Crankcase Bore | 35.990 |
Crankshaft Journal Diameter | 32.978 |
Required Bearing | Blue |
Pistons - Disassembly
- Remove the liner, using the frame from service tool T3880315, and service tool T3880101 (see Cylinder Liner - Removal).
- Remove and discard the gudgeon pin circlip from one side of the piston.
- Remove the gudgeon pin by pushing the pin through the piston and rod toward the side from which the circlip was removed.
- Piston rings must be removed from the piston using hand pressure only. Do not overextend the piston rings during removal.
Removing the Gudgeon Pin Circlip |
Piston Wear Check
- Measure the piston outside diameter, 8 mm up from the bottom of the piston and at 90° to the direction of the gudgeon pin.
|
All Pistons | 73.974-73.990 mm |
Service limit | 73.930 mm |
Replace the piston if the measured diameter falls outside the specified limit.
Pistons - Assembly
- Clean the piston ring grooves and fit the piston rings to the piston.
- Fit the piston onto the connecting rod.
- Lubricate the piston, small end and gudgeon pin with a 50/50 solution of engine oil and molybdenum disulphide grease.
- Align the small end in the connecting rod with the gudgeon pin hole in the piston and fit the gudgeon pin.
- Fit new circlips on both sides of the gudgeon pin ensuring the circlips are correctly fitted in the grooves.
- The piston ring gaps must be arranged as shown in the diagram below.
Top ring
Second ring
First steel oil control ring
Oil control ring expander
Second steel oil control ring
- Fit the piston into the liner from below using a gentle rocking motion to engage the rings in the bore.
Piston Ring Identification |
Piston Rings/Ring Grooves
Check the pistons for uneven groove wear by visually inspecting the ring grooves.
If all the rings do not fit parallel to the groove upper and lower surfaces, the piston must be replaced.
Clean the piston ring grooves.
Fit the piston rings to the pistons. Check, using feeler gauges, for the correct clearance between the ring grooves and the rings. Replace the piston and rings if outside the specified limit.
Piston Ring to Ring Groove Clearance Check |
Piston Ring/Groove Clearance
Top ring | 0.02-0.06 mm |
Service limit | 0.075 mm |
Second | 0.02-0.06 mm |
Service limit | 0.075 mm |
Piston Ring Gap
- Place the piston ring inside the liner.
- Push the ring into the top of the cylinder, using the piston to hold the ring square with the inside of the bore. Continue to push the ring into the bore until the third groove of the piston is level with the cylinder top, around the full circumference of cylinder.
- Remove the piston and measure the gap between the ends of the piston ring using feeler gauges.
Aligning Piston Rings using the Piston |
Piston Ring End-Gap Tolerances
Top | 0.15-0.30 mm |
Service limit | 0.42 mm |
Second | 0.30-0.45 mm |
Service limit | 0.57 mm |
Oil Control | 0.20-0.70 mm |
Service limit | 0.84 mm |
Cylinder Liner - Removal
- Assemble the frame from service tool T3880315 to service tool T3880101 as shown below.
T3880315 - Extractor, Cylinder Liner
T3880101 - Extractor, Cylinder Liners
- Mark each liner to identify correct orientation and the cylinder number from which it has been removed.
Paint mark
- Turn the crankshaft until the piston in the liner to be removed is at the bottom of its stroke.
T3880315 - Extractor, Cylinder Liner and T3880101 - Extractor, Cylinder Liners
Extraction nut
Locking nut
- Check that the locking nut on service tool T3880101 is loose, then fully unscrew the extraction nut.
- Carefully fit the tool fully into the cylinder bore, positioning the tool legs on the crankcase. Turn the locking nut clockwise until the rubber sleeve on the tool tightly grips the bore of the liner.
- Check that the tool legs are positioned to allow withdrawal of the liner, then turn the extraction nut clockwise to extract the liner. Take care to ensure that the piston/connecting rod is not allowed to fall against the inside of the crankcase.
- Turn the locking nut anticlockwise to release the liner.
Cylinder Liner - Installation
- Thoroughly clean the liner removing all traces of old silicone sealer.
- Remove all traces of sealer from the crankcase bores.
- Apply silicone sealer to the liner to crankcase mating face (at the factory, ThreeBond 1216E is used).
- Fit each liner over the piston using a gentle rocking motion to allow compression of the piston rings.
Liner
Sealer area
Chamfer
- The liners must be positioned such that they do not touch each other - it must be possible to pass a 0.1 mm feeler gauge between the centre liner and its adjacent liner on either side. If the liners touch at any point, rotate the liners until there is a minimum 0.1 mm clearance.
Liners
- Continue fitting each liner in turn until all are fitted and sealed.
Cylinder Wear
Measure the inside diameter of each cylinder using an internal micrometer or similar accurate measuring equipment.
Cylinder bore diameter
Standard | 74.040-74.058 mm |
Service limit | 74.11 mm |
Test Position For Bore Wear Check (bore shown in section) |
- Measure the inside diameter 10 mm from the top of the bore as shown above.
- If the reading is outside the specified limits, replace the liner and piston as an assembly.
Balancer
Exploded View - Balancer
Balancer
The balancer is fitted to control 'pulsing' within the engine. Without any form of balancer, the engine would 'pulse' each time the crankshaft rotated. This 'pulsing' would be felt as a vibration which would amplify as the engine speed was increased.
The balancer has the effect of a pair of counterbalance weights which create an equal amount of energy in the opposite direction, and at the same time as that produced by the crankshaft, pistons and connecting rods. Because the opposing pulses occur at the same point of crankshaft rotation, and are of an equal magnitude, a state of equilibrium or balance is reached.
Balancer - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Separate the crankcase halves (see Crankcases - Disassembly).
- With the crankcase halves separated, lift out the balancer shaft complete with the shaft bearings/circlips.
Balancer shaft
Crankcase
- To remove the left hand bearing, slide the needle roller bearing and circlip from the shaft. Remove the circlip and bearing sleeve from the balancer shaft.
Balancer shaft
Needle roller bearing
Bearing sleeve
Circlip
Needle roller bearing circlip
- To remove the right hand bearing, remove the circlip and washer, and, using a press and press bars remove the bearing race from the shaft, ensuring the inner bearing race is supported. Note the orientation of the bearing prior to removal. DO NOT remove the drive gear from the shaft.
Balancer shaft
Circlip
Washer
Bearing
Balancer - Inspection
- Inspect all gears for chipped or missing teeth.
- Inspect all bearings for signs of overheating (blue discolouration), seized or damaged rollers, and any other damage.
- Inspect the gear teeth for overheating (blue discolouration).
Balancer - Installation
- Lubricate and fit the right hand bearing, washer and circlip to the shaft.
- Fit the left hand bearing sleeve and circlip to the balancer shaft.
Balancer shaft
Needle roller bearing
Bearing sleeve
Circlip
Needle roller bearing circlip
- Fit the needle roller bearing and circlip to the balancer shaft.
- Locate the balancer to the crankcase aligning the balancer gears and crankshaft as shown in the illustration below, while ensuring that the bearing circlips locate correctly in their corresponding grooves in the crankcase.
Balancer drive gear mark
Crankshaft marking
- Check that the balancer and crankshaft are correctly aligned before continuing to assemble the crankcase halves (see Crankcases - Assembly).
Transmission
Exploded View – Gear Selectors and Drum
Exploded View - Gear Change Lever
Exploded View - Input and Output Shafts
Gear Change Linkage - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Remove the wire clips retaining the gear change linkage upper and lower ball joints.
Ball joint
Wire clip
- Remove the gear change linkage.
- Remove the gear change clamp fixing.
Gear change clamp
Fixing
- Remove and discard the gear change pivot bolt.
Gear change pivot bolt
Gear change pedal
- Remove the gear change pedal and gear change clamp from the motorcycle, noting the position of the gear change clamp for installation.
Gear Change Linkage - Installation
Make sure the gear change rod length is set correctly (see Gear Change Rod Setting).
- Locate the gear change clamp to the gear selector shaft, as noted for removal. Tighten the fixing to 9 Nm.
- Install gear change pedal to the gear change bracket and tighten the new pivot bolt to 22 Nm.
- If required, attach the upper ball joint to the transmission linkage.
- If required, attach the lower ball joint to the gear change pedal.
- Refit the wire clips to retain the ball joints. Ensure the wire clips locate correctly in the ball joints before rotating the clips to lock in place.
Ball joint
Wire clip
Gear Change Rod Setting
Gear Rod Setting LG1
If the gear change linkage needs to be removed, ensure the setting dimension and alignment are as described below when refitting.
Make sure the alignment mark on the gear pedal crank lines up to the alignment mark on the gear change shaft
Ensure the distance between the flats of the ball joints is 242.5 mm as shown below.
The length of exposed thread at each end of the gear change rod should be equal.
Tighten the gear change rod lock nuts to 6 Nm.
Ensure the gear change mechanism is free to operate, without any excessive play.
Gear change rod setting dimension |
Gear Change Shaft - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Clutch - Remove L Series
- Remove the E-clip and washer from the gear pedal end of the gear change shaft.
Gear change shaft
E-clip
Washer
- Release the two fixings and remove the baffle plate from the crankcase breather. Discard the fixings.
Crankcase breather baffle plate
Fixings
- Withdraw the gear change shaft from the clutch end of the crankcase.
Gear change shaft
- Remove and discard the fixing securing the detent arm.
- Withdraw the detent arm complete with its flanged sleeve, spring and washer.
Detent arm
Fixing
Spring
Detent wheel
Gear Change Shaft - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Assemble the detent arm as noted during removal with a new fixing and place up to the crankcase.
Spring
Washer
Detent arm
Flanged sleeve
Fixing
- Hold the detent arm assembly in position and insert a new fixing. Start the thread and push the detent arm, using finger pressure only, to locate on the selector drum detent wheel.
- Make sure the detent arm remains correctly located on the detent wheel and the spring is correctly seated in the recess in the crankcase. Make sure the shoulder of the flanged sleeve is located in the bore of the detent arm and tighten the fixing to 12 Nm.
Detent arm
Fixing
Spring
Detent wheel
- Rotate the selector drum to the neutral position. Make sure that the detent arm locates in the raised profile in the detent wheel (neutral position).
Detent arm
Neutral position
- Using clean engine oil, lubricate the lip of the seal on the gear change shaft.
Gear change shaft seal
Gear change shaft bearing
- Lubricate both sides of the forks and slider plates of the selector mechanism on the gear change shaft with new engine oil which meets specification API SH (or higher) and JASO MA.
- Insert the gear change shaft into the crankcase. Gently push the gear pedal end of the shaft through the bearing and lip seal at the clutch side of the crankcase, and the sealed bearing, located at the gear pedal side of the crankcase.
Gear change shaft
Abutment bolt
Spring
- Make sure the gear change shaft fingers locate in the detent wheel/arm and the spring fits either side of the abutment bolt.
- Fit the washer and E-clip to the gear pedal end of the gear change shaft.
Gear change shaft
E-clip
Washer
- Refit the baffle plate with two new fixings and tighten to 9 Nm.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Clutch - Install L Series
Selector Forks and Drum - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Engine - Remove - L Series
Crankcases - Disassembly L Series
Remove the output shaft assembly (see Input and Output Shaft Assemblies - Removal)
- Remove and discard the two selector shaft fixings, noting the position of the washer and keeper plate. Note the position of the washer and keeper plate for installation.
Fixings
Selector drum and input selector shaft keeper plate
Output selector shaft retaining washer
- Slide the output selector shaft from the crankcase in the direction of the clutch. Collect the two selector forks as they are released by the selector shaft.
Output selector shaft
Sixth gear selector fork
Fifth gear selector fork
- Noting the position of the selector fork, remove the input selector shaft, leaving the selector fork in the gearbox.
Input selector shaft
Selector fork
- Withdraw the selector drum from within the crankcase.
Selector drum removal
- Collect the input shaft selector fork from the crankcase.
Selector Forks and Drum - Inspection
Inspect all bearings for damage or wear. Renew as necessary.
Inspect the selector forks and selector grooves for wear beyond the service limits. Renew the components as necessary.
Refer to the specifications table (see Transmission).
- Examine the gear change shaft seal for damage and/or wear. Replace the seal if damaged and/or worn.
Selector Forks and Drum - Installation
- Position the input shaft selector fork into the crankcase, locating the fork into the selector groove on the input shaft. Make sure the fork is fitted in the position noted during removal.
Input shaft selector fork
Input shaft
- Using clean engine oil, lubricate the selector drum bearings. Lubricate the selector drum tracks with new engine oil which meets specification API SH (or higher) and JASO MA.
- Position the selector drum into the crankcase.
Selector drum
- Rotate the selector drum and ensure a smooth movement. Rectify as necessary.
- Push the input selector shaft into the crankcase from the clutch end. As the shaft is inserted, locate the selector fork onto the shaft. Ensure the fork is fitted in the position noted during removal.
Input selector shaft
Selector fork
- Push the output selector shaft into the crankcase from the clutch end. As the shaft is inserted, locate the selector forks. Ensure the selector forks are fitted in the positions and orientation as noted during removal.
Output selector shaft
Sixth gear selector fork
Fifth gear selector fork
- Fit new fixings for the selector drum and input shaft keeper plates and output shaft retaining washer, making sure the washer and the keeper plate are fitted in the positions noted during removal. Tighten the fixings to 12 Nm.
Fixings
Selector drum and input selector shaft keeper plate
Output selector shaft retaining washer
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Crankcases - Assembly L Series
Engine - Install - L Series
Input and Output Shaft Assemblies - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Engine - Remove - L Series
Crankcases - Disassembly L Series
- Lift the output shaft from the upper crankcase, noting the orientation of each bearing, their circlips and dowels.
- Remove the selector shafts, forks and selector drum (see Selector Forks and Drum - Removal).
- Release the three fixings securing the input shaft bearing housing to the upper crankcase.
Fixings
Bearing housing
- Insert two M6 bolts into the two threaded holes at the periphery of the bearing housing. Evenly and progressively tighten both bolts to draw the bearing housing and input shaft from the crankcase.
Bearing housing
M6 threaded holes
Transmission oil tube
- If required, the transmission oil tube can now be removed. Remove and discard the three oil tube O-rings.
Input and Output Shaft Assemblies - Installation
- If removed, check the transmission oil tube for blockages and contamination. Carefully fit new O-rings to the transmission oil tube and insert the tube into the crankcase, ensuring the tag on the tube locates in the slot in the crankcase.
- Locate the input shaft to the upper crankcase, installing it through the aperture for the bearing housing.
- Align the fixing holes to the threaded holes in their crankcase and fit the bearing housing into the aperture, by hand, as deeply as possible.
- Using the old fixings, evenly and progressively tighten them to draw the bearing housing into the upper crankcase until fully home as noted for removal. Remove and discard the fixings.
Bearing housing
Fixings
M6 threaded holes
Transmission oil tube
- Install new fixings to the bearing housing and tighten to 12 Nm.
- Refit the selectors and shafts (see Selector Forks and Drum - Installation).
- Refit the output shaft to the crankcase ensuring the snap-ring locates in the corresponding groove in the crankcase, and the dowel locates in the slot in the upper crankcase.
- Ensure the output shaft seal aligns with its recess in the crankcase.
Groove in crankcase
Snap ring
Dowel
Seal
- Ensure the hole in the output shaft needle roller bearing outer race is positioned to locate onto the dowel provided in the upper crankcase.
Roller bearing
Dowel
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Crankcases - Assembly L Series
Engine - Install - L Series
Exploded View - Input Shaft
|
Input Shaft - Disassembly
Working from the opposite end to where the clutch assembly is fitted, dismantle the input shaft as follows:
- Slide off the plain thrust washer (1).
- Mark one side of second gear to denote its correct orientation. Remove second gear (2).
- Remove the splined lock washers (3 and 4).
- Mark one side of sixth gear to denote its correct orientation. Remove sixth gear (6), complete with the splined bush (5) which runs inside the gear.
- Note their orientation and remove the splined thrust washer (7) from in front of the circlip between sixth and third/fourth gear.
- Remove the circlip (8) from the shaft.
- Mark one side of the combined third/fourth gear to denote its correct orientation. Remove the combined third/fourth gear (9).
- Remove the circlip (10) from in front of fifth gear.
- Remove the splined thrust washer (11) adjacent to fifth gear.
- Mark one side of fifth gear to denote its correct orientation. Remove fifth gear (12), complete with the plain bush (13) which runs inside the gear.
- Support the bearing and housing (15 and 16) on press bars, then press the shaft (14) through the bearing and housing as shown below.
Press bars
Bearing/housing
- Support the outer circumference of the bearing housing on press bars, then press the bearing through the housing.
Pressing out the Bearing |
Input Shaft - Inspection
- Examine all gears, bearings and bushes and thrust washers for damage, distortion, chipped teeth and wear beyond the service limits. Replace all defective components and always use new circlips to assemble the shaft.
- Thoroughly clean the bearing housing and inspect for damage, scoring and cracks. Replace the housing if necessary.
Input Shaft - Assembly
- Support the housing on press bars as shown below and press the bearing fully into the housing in the direction of the arrow.
Bearing housing
Bearing
- Locate the bearing and housing to the input shaft. Carefully support the shaft on the press bed, and using a suitable sleeve over the input shaft to ensure the bearing is pressed only on the inner race, press the bearing onto the shaft.
Sleeve
Bearing/housing
Press bars
Input shaft
- Fit the plain bush (13) to the shaft.
- Fit fifth gear (12) to the input shaft as noted during disassembly, with the dog teeth pointing away from the input shaft bearing.
- Slide on the splined thrust washer (11).
- Fit a new circlip (10) to the input shaft ensuring that the clip is located in the circlip groove as shown below.
Fifth gear
Thrust washer
Circlip
- Fit the combined third/fourth gear (9) as noted during disassembly, with the larger gear facing toward fifth gear. Ensure that the oil hole in the input shaft DOES NOT align with the oil hole in the gear.
- Fit a new circlip (8) to the input shaft ensuring that the circlip is located in the circlip groove as shown below.
Sixth gear
Thrust washer
Circlip
- Fit the splined thrust washer (7) to the input shaft and slide up the shaft until in contact with the circlip.
- Fit the splined bush (5) from sixth gear. Ensure that the oil hole in the input shaft DOES NOT align with the oil hole on the shaft.
- Fit sixth gear (6) as noted during disassembly, with the dog teeth facing third/fourth gear.
- Fit the splined and lock washers (4 and 3), ensuring the tabs in the smaller washer (3) locate in the slots in the larger (4) washer.
Second gear
Large splined lock washer
Small splined lock washer
- Fit second gear (2) to the shaft as noted during disassembly.
- Fit the plain thrust washer (1) adjacent to second gear.
Exploded View - Output Shaft
|
Output Shaft - Disassembly
Working from the opposite end to the drive sprocket, dismantle the output shaft as follows.
- Remove the output shaft bearing (1) and plain thrust washer (2).
- Mark one side of first gear to denote its correct orientation. Remove first gear (3) from the shaft, complete with the plain bush (4) which runs inside the gear.
- Remove the plain thrust washer (5).
- Mark one side of fifth gear to denote its correct orientation. Remove fifth gear (6) from the shaft.
- Remove the circlip (7) and splined thrust washer (8) from in front of fourth gear.
- Mark one side of fourth gear to denote its correct orientation. Remove fourth gear (9) complete with the splined bush which runs inside the gear (10).
- Note their orientation and remove the splined lock washers (11 and 12).
- Mark one side of third gear to denote its correct orientation. Remove third gear (14) off the shaft complete with the splined bush (13) which runs inside the gear.
- Remove the splined thrust washer (15).
- Remove the circlip (16) from in front of sixth gear.
- Mark one side of sixth gear to denote its correct orientation. Remove sixth gear (17) from the shaft.
- Remove the circlip (18) from in front of second gear.
- Remove the splined thrust washer (19).
- Mark one side of second gear to denote its correct orientation. Remove second gear (21) from the shaft, complete with the plain bush (20) which runs inside the gear.
- Position the output shaft (22) in a vice with soft jaws fitted. Tighten the vice to prevent the shaft from turning and release the tab washer (28) from the output sprocket nut (29), then release the nut.
- Remove the output sprocket nut (29), tab washer (28) and sprocket (27).
- Collect the output shaft seal (26).
- If it is found necessary to replace the large bearing (24) at the end of the shaft, use a press to remove both the bearing and output shaft sprocket spacer (25) together.
Output Shaft - Inspection
- Examine all gears, bearings, bushes and thrust washers for damage, distortion, chipped teeth and wear beyond the service limits. Replace all suspect components and always use a new circlip to assemble the shaft.
Output Shaft - Assembly
- Working from the output sprocket end of the shaft, fit a new bearing (24) and a new sprocket spacer (25) to the shaft using a press and press bars. Fit the sleeve with the large chamfer facing outwards.
Output shaft
Bearing
Press bars
- Lubricate and fit a new output shaft seal (26).
- Transfer the shaft to the vice and secure between soft jaws. Fit the output sprocket (27), new tab washer (28) and nut (29). Tighten the nut to 85 Nm. Close the tab washer.
- Withdraw the shaft from the vice and continue to assemble from the opposite end to the output sprocket.
- Fit the plain bush (20) to the shaft.
- Locate second gear (21) to the shaft as noted during disassembly, with the large step side facing towards the output sprocket end. Fit the splined thrust washer (19) and retain with a new circlip (18) as shown below.
Second gear
Thrust washer
Circlip
- Fit sixth gear (17) as noted during disassembly, with the selector fork groove facing away from the output sprocket end. Ensure that the oil holes in the gear DO NOT align with the corresponding oil hole in the output shaft.
- Fit a new circlip (16) to retain sixth gear. Fit the splined thrust washer (15) to the rear of third gear as shown below.
Third gear
Splined thrust washer
Circlip
- Fit the splined bush (13) for third gear. Ensure that the oil holes in the gear DO NOT align with the corresponding oil hole in the output shaft. Fit third gear (14) to the shaft with the large step side facing away from the output sprocket.
- Fit the splined lock washers (12 and 11), ensuring the tabs in the smaller washer (11) locate in the slots in the larger washer (12) as shown below.
Third gear
Large splined lock washer
Small splined lock washer
- Fit the splined bush (10) from fourth gear. Ensure that the oil holes in the gear DO NOT align with the corresponding oil hole in the output shaft.
- Fit fourth gear (9) as noted during disassembly, with the larger step side facing towards the output sprocket.
- Fit the splined thrust washer (8) and retain with a new circlip (7) as shown below.
Fourth gear
Splined thrust washer
Circlip
- Fit the fifth gear (6) to the shaft with the groove facing towards the output sprocket. Ensure that the oil holes in the gear DO NOT align with the corresponding oil hole in the output shaft.
- Fit the first gear thrust washer (5) and plain bush (4).
- Fit first gear (3) to the shaft as marked during disassembly as shown below.
First gear
Thrust washer
Thrust washer
Needle roller bearing
- Finally fit the thrust washer (2) and needle roller bearing (1) to the end of the shaft.
Starter Drive and Sprag Clutch
Exploded View - Sprag Clutch and Starter Gears
Starter Drive/Sprag Clutch - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Alternator Cover - Remove L Series
- Withdraw the starter idler gear and shaft, noting the fitted position of the components.
Idler gear
Idler shaft
- Remove the alternator rotor (see Alternator Rotor - Removal).
- Withdraw the starter drive gear from the sprag clutch.
Starter drive gear
Sprag clutch/housing
Alternator rotor
- Remove and discard the fixings securing the sprag clutch housing to the alternator rotor. Withdraw the sprag clutch housing.
- Remove the sprag clutch from the housing.
Sprag clutch housing
Sprag clutch assembly
Starter Drive/Sprag Clutch - Inspection
- Check the sprag clutch bearings for overheating, wear and/or non-smooth operation. Replace the sprag clutch if overheating, wear and/or non-smooth operation is found.
- Examine all gears for chipped teeth and for any other damage.
- With the sprag clutch mounted in the housing, check the sprag clutch for smooth, free movement in one direction only (as indicated by the arrow marked on the sprag clutch body).
Starter Drive/Sprag Clutch - Installation
- Locate the sprag clutch to the sprag clutch housing as shown below. Push firmly until the lip seats in the recess provided in the housing.
Sprag clutch housing
Sprag clutch assembly
- Fit the housing to the alternator rotor.
- Ensure that the housing is squarely seated and is not on the rotor. Install new fixings.
- Tighten the cover bolts to in the sequence shown below to 16 Nm.
- Once all six bolts have been tightened, go around again in sequence and recheck each bolt is correctly torqued, if any bolt moves, go around again. Repeatedly check the bolts in sequence until all are correctly torqued and do not move when checked, this will ensure the sprag clutch housing is correctly seated on the rotor.
- Fit the starter drive gear to the sprag clutch.
Starter drive gear
Sprag clutch/housing
Alternator rotor
- Refit the alternator rotor (see Alternator Rotor - Installation).
- Lubricate the idler gear shaft with new engine oil which meets specification API SH (or higher) and JASO MA.
- Fit the starter idler gear and shaft to the crankcase.
Idler gear
Idler shaft
Tightening Sequence |
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Alternator Cover - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Lubrication
Exploded View - Oil Pump/Water Pump, Gears and Heat Exchanger
Engine Oil - Specification
Triumph's high performance fuel injected engines are designed to use 10W/40 or 10W/50 fully or semi synthetic motorcycle engine oil that meets specification API SH (or higher) and JASO MA.
Triumph Performance fully synthetic engine oil is recommended.
The oil viscosity may need to be changed to accommodate the ambient temperatures in your riding area.
Refer to the chart below for the correct oil viscosity (10W/40 or 10W/50) to be used in your riding area.
Oil Viscosity Temperature Range
Disposal of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
To protect the environment, do not pour oil on the ground, down sewers or drains, or into watercourses.
Do not place used oil filters in with general waste. If in doubt contact your local authority.
Engine Oil Circuit Description
Oil is collected from the sump and is drawn through a mesh strainer into the oil pump rotor. The oil pump is fitted with a single pumping rotor which supplies pressurised oil to the lubrication circuit via the oil pressure relief valve. The relief valve is set to open at 5.1 bar (75 lb/in ²) and when open, returns high pressure oil directly to the sump.
Pressurised oil is delivered to the outside rim of the oil filter, where it is filtered by passing through the filter membrane.
Filtered oil is then delivered to the oil-to-water heat exchanger (mounted on the front of the engine), where it is cooled.
The cooled oil is then fed into the lower crankcase gallery. From here it is distributed around the engine:
Oil is delivered to the crankshaft main bearings and, via drillings in the crankshaft, to the big end bearings.
Spray jets located in the upper crankcase, behind the main bearing shells, lubricate the pistons and connecting rod small ends. These jets are fed oil from the crankshaft oil feed. A low oil pressure warning light switch is also located in the upper crankcase gallery.
Some oil is sent directly to the cylinder head via an internal gallery. Oil that arrives at the cylinder head is fed to both camshafts via a gallery in the cylinder head casting that delivers oil directly to the sprocket end of the camshafts. Oil is then fed through the hollow camshafts to the other camshaft bearings, the tappet buckets and the valves.
Oil is fed to the gearbox via internal oil pipes and drillings that supply oil directly to the end of each shaft. Oil is circulated along the gearbox shafts to exit holes that feed directly to the bearings, gears and selectors.
Oil is fed to the alternator to aid cooling of the alternator components. The oil is taken from the crankshaft oil feed and directed to the alternator via a drilling in the alternator bolt.
Engine Oil Circuit
Oil and Coolant Pump - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Warning - Cooling - Cap Removal (scalding)
Warning - Hot Engine oil
Warning - General - Prolonged or repeated contact with engine oil
Caution - General - Do not pour engine oil - pollution
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Radiator - Remove L Series
Exhaust - Removal L Series
Drain the engine oil (see Oil and Oil Filter Change)
Clutch - Remove L Series
Sump - Removal L Series
- Release and discard the two fixings and remove the oil transfer pipe. Remove and discard the two O-ring seals.
Oil transfer pipe
Fixings
- Release and discard the two fixings and remove the oil pick-up. Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
Oil pick-up
Fixings
- Remove and discard the bolt securing the coolant outlet pipe to the crankcase and withdraw the pipe. Remove and discard the O-rings from the elbow.
Coolant outlet pipe
Fixing
- Remove and discard the bolt securing the coolant inlet elbow to the crankcase and withdraw the elbow. Remove and discard the O-ring from the elbow.
Coolant inlet pipe
Fixing
- Release the fixings securing the drive chain guide to the crankcase and remove the guide.
Oil pump drive chain guide (engine shown inverted)
Fixings
- Slide the oil pump drive sprocket gently backwards and forwards to dislodge the inner needle roller bearing.
Oil pump drive sprocket (engine shown inverted)
Needle roller bearing
- Carefully remove the bearing while supporting the oil pump drive sprocket.
Needle roller bearing (engine shown inverted)
Oil pump drive sprocket
- Release the fixings securing the oil pump. Remove the fixings and collect the washer.
Oil pump
Fixings
Washer
- Using a suitable tool, slide the dowel upwards to release the oil pump from the crankcase. It is not necessary to remove the dowel completely from the oil pump.
Oil pump
Dowel
- Detach the drive chain from the oil pump.
Oil pump
Drive chain
- Carefully withdraw the oil pump from the crankcase.
- Remove and discard the O-ring from the inlet sleeve on the water pump body.
Oil Pump - Disassembly
- Release the fixing and remove the drive sprocket and spacer washer.
Oil pump
Spacer washer
Drive sprocket
Fixing
- Release the three fixings and withdraw the oil pump body.
Oil pump body
Fixings
Oil Pump - Inspection
- Measure the rotor tip clearance using feeler gauges.
- Measure the pump body clearance using feeler gauges.
- Measure the pump end clearance.
Outer rotor
Plastigauge
Outer rotor
Plastigauge
Gauge, in millimetres

Rotor Tip Clearance | |
Standard | 0.15 mm |
Service limit | 0.20 mm |
Rotor Tip Clearance |
Pump Body Clearance |

Pump Body Clearance | |
Standard | 0.15 - 0.22 mm |
Service limit | 0.35 mm |

Pump End Clearance | |
Standard | 0.04 - 0.09 mm |
Service limit | 0.17 mm |
Oil Pump - Assembly
- If all clearances are within service limits, liberally apply clean engine oil to all internal components and refit the oil pump body to the oil pump rotor. Refit the fixings and tighten to 12 Nm.
- If any clearance measured is outside the service limits, renew the complete pump.
- Inspect the sprockets and chain for wear and/or damage. Replace the sprockets and chain if wear and/or damage is found.
- Check the water pump shaft and shaft bearings for side and end float. Renew if necessary.
- Check for corrosion and scale build-up around the impeller and in the pump body. Renew if necessary.
- Check the oil pump location dowel for damage. Renew if necessary.
- Refit the spacer washer and drive sprocket. Apply ThreeBond 1374 to the fixing and tighten to 12 Nm.
|
Oil and Coolant Pump - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Install a new O-ring to the inlet sleeve on the water pump body.
- Fill the oil pump with new engine oil, turning the pump rotor as the oil is poured in to ensure all surfaces are coated with oil.
- Position the oil pump to the crankcase and insert the water pump inlet sleeve into the opening in the crankcase.
- Fit the oil pump to the crankcase, ensuring the oil pump dowel correctly locates into the bolt hole in the crankcase.
- Using a suitable pin punch, gently tap the dowel downwards into the crankcase until it seats.
- Feed the drive chain over the transmission input shaft and fit to the sprocket.
- Fit the drive chain to the sprocket on the oil pump.
- Support the oil pump drive sprocket and carefully refit the needle roller bearing.
Needle roller bearing
Oil pump drive sprocket
- Refit the washer and fixings as noted for removal. Tighten the fixings to 12 Nm.
Oil pump
Fixings
Washer
- Refit the oil pump drive chain guide. Install new fixings and tighten to 9 Nm.
Oil pump drive chain guide
Fixings
- Install a new O-ring to the coolant inlet elbow and position the elbow to the water pump inlet. Fit a new bolt and tighten to 12 Nm.
Coolant inlet elbow
Fixing
- Install three new O-rings to the coolant outlet pipe and position the pipe through the crankcase. Locate the pipe to the water pump outlet. Install a new fixing and tighten to 12 Nm.
Coolant outlet pipe
Fixing
- Install a new O-ring to the oil pick-up and refit the oil pick-up. Fit new bolts and tighten to 12 Nm.
Oil pick-up
Fixings
- Install two new O-rings to the oil transfer pipe and refit the oil transfer pipe. Fit new bolts and tighten to 12 Nm.
Oil transfer pipe
Fixings
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Sump - Install L Series
Clutch - Install L Series
Refill the engine oil (see Oil and Oil Filter Change)
Exhaust - Installation L Series
Radiator - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Heat Exchanger
The heat exchanger is used to transfer heat from the engine oil into the coolant.
Filtered oil is delivered to the heat exchanger via an opening (4) where it is circulated through the heat exchanger core. Coolant is pumped through spigot (1) into the heat exchanger core to cool the oil. The cooled oil then exits the heat exchanger (3) and flows to the main oil gallery. The coolant then flows out of the heat exchanger (2) and through the rest of the cooling system.
|
An additional benefit of the heat exchanger is that, as the engine coolant reaches its operating temperature more quickly than the engine oil, the oil is heated by the engine coolant at lower engine temperatures; this allows the engine oil to reach its optimum operating temperature more quickly, thereby helping to improve engine oil life, reduce exhaust emissions and reduce engine wear.
Heat Exchanger - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Warning - Cooling - Cap Removal (scalding)
Warning - Hot Engine oil
Warning - General - Prolonged or repeated contact with engine oil
Position the motorcycle on level ground on the side stand.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Radiator - Remove L Series
Exhaust - Removal L Series
Drain the engine oil (see Oil and Oil Filter Change).
- Noting their orientation, disconnect the coolant hoses from the heat exchanger using service tool T3880207 - Hose Clip Pliers.
- Remove the three fixings from the heat exchanger and withdraw it from the crankcase.
Heat exchanger
Fixings
Hose clips
Coolant hoses
- Remove and discard the O ring from the lower crankcase.
Heat Exchanger - Inspection
- Check the heat exchanger body for corrosion and/or damage.
Heat Exchanger - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Fit a new heat exchanger O-ring to the lower crankcase.
- Fit the heat exchanger to the crankcase and tighten the bolts in the sequence shown to 10 Nm.
- Retighten fixing 1 to 10 Nm.
- Fit the coolant hoses to the heat exchanger in the orientation noted during removal.
- Using service tool T3880207 - Hose Clip Pliers, fit the coolant hose clips in the orientation noted during removal.
Heat exchanger
Fixings
Hose clips
Coolant hoses
Tightening Sequence |
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Exhaust - Installation L Series
Radiator - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Low Oil Pressure Warning Light Switch - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
The low oil pressure warning light switch is located in the upper crankcase, behind the cylinder head.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Fuel Tank - Remove L Series
Airbox - Remove L Series
Throttle Body - Remove L Series
Inlet Manifold - Removal - LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1
- Disconnect the electrical connection to the switch.
- Remove the switch and collect the copper washer.
Electrical connection
Low oil pressure warning light switch
Low Oil Pressure Warning Light Switch - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Incorporating a new copper washer, fit the switch and tighten to 13 Nm.
- Refit the electrical connection.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Inlet Manifold - Install - LG1; LGX; LL1
Throttle Body - Install L Series
Airbox - Install L Series
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Engine Remove and Install
Engine - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Fuel Tank - Remove L Series
Airbox - Remove L Series
Purge Valve - Remove L Series
Throttle Body - Remove L Series
Front Sprocket Cover - Remove L Series
Coolant Expansion Tank - Removal L Series
Radiator - Remove L Series
Exhaust - Removal L Series
Engine Remove LG1; LGX
- If required, drain the engine oil (see Oil and Oil Filter Change).
- Remove the two fixings and remove the gear change bracket and side stand switch from the frame.
- Note the routing of the alternator regulator/rectifier harness for installation. Release the grey alternator regulator/rectifier electrical connection and route the harness back to the engine.
- Disconnect the harness from the following components:
- Remove and discard the lock nut securing the engine ground lead to the crankcase. Remove the engine ground lead.
- Disconnect the engine subharness from the main harness.
Engine subharness connector
Engine ground lead
- Disconnect the gear position sensor from the main harness.
- Detach the MAP sensor hose (engine end) from its four way connector.
MAP sensor hose (throttle body removed for clarity)
Four way connector
- Set the drive chain adjustment to allow maximum free play in the chain (see Drive Chain Free Movement - Adjustment).
- Place a support beneath the engine and ensure that the frame is still adequately and securely supported.
- Remove the lower crankcase bolt, washer and lock nut. Discard the lock nut.
- Remove the upper crankcase bolt, washer and lock nut. Discard the lock nut.
- Using service tool T3880166, loosen the frame adjusters and unscrew them fully to allow clearance between the frame and engine.
- Remove the right hand side rear cylinder head bolt and lock nut. Discard the lock nut.
- Remove the left hand side rear cylinder head bolt.
- Remove the right hand side front cylinder head bolt and lock nut. Discard the lock nut.
- Remove the left hand side front cylinder head bolt and lock nut. Discard the lock nut.
Lower crankcase bolt (and frame adjuster)
Upper crankcase bolt (and frame adjuster)
Right hand side rear cylinder head bolt
Right hand side front cylinder head bolt
Left hand side front cylinder head bolt
Left hand side rear cylinder head bolt
Upper crankcase bolt
Lower crankcase bolt
- Lower the engine sufficiently to allow the drive chain to be detached from the front sprocket.
- Remove the engine.
Engine - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Engine Install LG1; LGX
- Position the engine beneath the frame.
- Make sure the alternator regulator/rectifier harness is routed as noted during removal.
- Raise the engine, looping the drive chain over the output sprocket as it is raised.
- Align the engine to the frame.
- Loosely assemble the left hand side front cylinder head bolt and a new lock nut.
- Loosely assemble the right hand side front cylinder head bolt and a new lock nut.
- Thoroughly clean the threaded part of the left hand side rear cylinder head bolt and smear the first four threads with a proprietary copper based grease
- Loosely assemble the left hand side rear cylinder head bolt.
- Loosely assemble the right hand side rear cylinder head bolt and a new lock nut.
- Using service tool T3880166 tighten the upper crankcase frame adjuster to 3 Nm.
- Loosely assemble the upper crankcase bolt, washer and a new lock nut.
- Using service tool T3880166 tighten the lower crankcase frame adjuster to 3 Nm.
- Loosely assemble the lower crankcase bolt, washer and a new lock nut.
- Whilst holding the lock nut, tighten the upper crankcase bolt to 48 Nm.
- Whilst holding the lock nut, tighten the lower crankcase bolt to 48 Nm.
- Whilst holding the lock nut, tighten the left hand side front cylinder head bolt to 48 Nm.
- Tighten the left hand side rear cylinder head bolt to 48 Nm.
- Whilst holding the lock nut, tighten the right hand side front cylinder head bolt to 48 Nm.
- Whilst holding the lock nut, tighten the right hand side rear cylinder head bolt to 48 Nm.
Lower crankcase bolt (and frame adjuster)
Upper crankcase bolt (and frame adjuster)
Right hand side rear cylinder head bolt
Right hand side front cylinder head bolt
Left hand side front cylinder head bolt
Left hand side rear cylinder head bolt
Upper crankcase bolt
Lower crankcase bolt
- Attach the MAP sensor hose (engine end) to its four way connector.
MAP sensor hose (throttle body removed for clarity)
Four way connector
- Reconnect the gear position sensor to the main harness.
- Reconnect the engine subharness to the main harness.
- Reconnect the engine ground lead to the crankcase with a new lock nut and tighten to 10 Nm.
Engine subharness connector
Engine ground lead
- Reconnect the following components to the main harness:
- Reconnect the grey alternator regulator/rectifier electrical connection.
- Refit the gear change bracket and side stand switch to the frame with two fixings and tighten to 24 Nm.
- Set the drive chain adjustment (see Drive Chain Free Movement - Adjustment).
- If drained, refill the engine oil (see Oil and Oil Filter Change).
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Exhaust - Installation L Series
Radiator - Install L Series
Coolant Expansion Tank - Installation L Series
Front Sprocket Cover - Install L Series
Throttle Body - Install L Series
Purge Valve - Install L Series
Airbox - Install L Series
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Fuel and Exhaust System and Engine Management
Exploded Views
Exploded View - Airbox
Exploded View - Secondary Air Injection
Exploded View - Engine Management
Exploded View - Evaporative System
Exploded View - Exhaust System
Exploded View - Fuel Rail, Throttles and Injectors
Exploded View - Fuel Tank
Exploded View - Fuel Tank Bodywork
Fuel Diagnostics
Pin Point Tests
Link to Diagnostics Chapter
Select the relevant diagnostics chapter.
Links to Diagnostics Chapter - H*8; L*1
Immobiliser/TPMS: Diagnostic - Trouble Codes - Index - Immobiliser/TPMS
Instruments: Diagnostic - Trouble Codes - Index - Instruments
CAN errors (five digit fault code): Diagnostics - Trouble Codes - Index - CAN Errors
Removal and Installation - Fuel and Air Components
Fuel Tank - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Warning - General - Fuel
Fuel Tank Removal - Quick Release Tank Bag
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Side Panels - Removal LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2
Fuel Tank Remove LG1; LGX
- Unclip and remove the ignition barrel shroud from the fuel tank.
Ignition barrel shroud
- Remove the rear and side fixings from the fuel tank bodywork.
Fuel tank bodywork
Rear fixing
Side fixing (right hand side shown)
- Remove the front fixings from the fuel tank bodywork.
Front fixings
- Flex the fuel tank bodywork sides out in the areas shown below and lift clear of the fuel tank.
- Unclip the twist grip position sensor harness connector from the fuel tank bracket.
Twist grip position sensor main harness connector
Twist grip position sensor connector
- Release and discard the two fixings and remove the immobiliser module from its bracket.
Immobiliser module
Fixings
- Release the three fixings and remove the immobiliser bracket from the frame. Allow to rest to one side.
Immobiliser bracket
Fixings
- Unclip the left hand switch housing connector A (2) and the right hand switch housing connector (1) from the fuel tank.
- Disconnect the ignition switch electrical connector.
Right hand switch housing connector
Left hand switch housing connector A
Left hand switch housing connector B
Fuse box 2
Ignition switch connector
- Release the two fixings and remove the harness bracket from the frame and allow to rest to one side.
Fixings
Harness bracket
- Remove the two front fixings and flanged sleeves from the fuel tank.
Fixing (right hand side shown)
Flanged sleeve
- Remove the lower fuel tank bracket fixings.
- Loosen, but do not remove, the upper fuel tank bracket fixings.
Upper bracket fixing (left hand side shown)
Lower bracket fixing (left hand side shown)
Fuel tank rear bracket
- Tilt the fuel tank and bracket assembly rearwards to allow access to the fuel tank electrical connectors and hoses.
Fuel level sensor electrical connector
Fuel pump electrical connector
Fuel tank
Fuel hose
- Disconnect the fuel pump and fuel level sensor electrical connectors.
- Reconnect the ignition switch electrical connector.
- Have an assistant reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead first, and crank the engine to reduce pressure in the fuel rail.
- Disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first.
- Disconnect the ignition switch electrical connector.
- Ease the latch away from the connector until the release buttons are exposed.
Locked position
Unlocked position
- Disconnect the fuel hose by squeezing the sides of the connector and pulling the hose free from its spigot on the fuel pump plate.
- Disconnect the two breather hoses from near the rear of the fuel tank and note their position for installation.
- Remove the upper bracket fixings and remove the fuel tank and bracket assembly from the motorcycle.
- If required, remove the pivot fixings and remove the bracket from the fuel tank. Discard the lock nut.
Fuel tank flex positions |
Fuel Tank - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Fuel Tank Install LG1; LGX
- If required, assemble the fuel tank bracket to the fuel tank and secure with a bolt and new lock nut. Tighten the lock nut to 8 Nm.
- Align the fuel tank and bracket assembly to the frame and loosely fit the two upper bracket fixings.
Fuel tank bracket
Bracket upper fixing (right hand side shown)
- Tilt the fuel tank rearwards and refit the breather hoses as noted during removal.
- Refit the fuel pump and fuel level sensor electrical connectors.
- Reconnect the fuel feed hose by gently pushing inwards until the hose engages with a click.
- Slide the double check latch down (towards the spigot) until the release buttons are covered. If the latch will not slide into position, then the fuel hose is not fully home on its spigot and must therefore be refitted correctly.
Fuel level sensor electrical connector
Fuel pump electrical connector
Fuel tank
Fuel hose
- Lower the fuel tank and align the two front fixing holes.
- Install the two front fixings and flanged sleeves. Tighten to 9 Nm.
Fixing (right hand side shown)
Flanged sleeve
- Loosely fit the two lower bracket fixings.
- Tighten the right hand side upper bracket fixing to 12 Nm.
- Tighten the right hand side lower bracket fixing to 12 Nm.
- Tighten the left hand side upper bracket fixing to 12 Nm.
- Tighten the left hand side lower bracket fixing to 12 Nm.
Upper bracket fixing (left hand side shown)
Lower bracket fixing (left hand side shown)
Fuel tank rear bracket
- Refit the harness bracket to the frame with two fixings and tighten to 5 Nm.
Fixings
Harness bracket
- Reclip the left hand switch housing connector A (2) and the right hand switch housing connector (1) to the fuel tank.
- Reconnect the ignition switch electrical connector.
Right hand switch housing connector
Left hand switch housing connector A
Left hand switch housing connector B
Fuse box 2
Ignition switch connector
- Refit the immobiliser bracket to the frame with three fixings and tighten to 3 Nm.
Immobiliser bracket
Fixings
- Refit the immobiliser module with two new fixings and tighten to 1.5 Nm.
Immobiliser module
Fixings
- Reattach the twist grip position sensor harness connector to the fuel tank bracket.
Twist grip position sensor main harness connector
Twist grip position sensor connector
- Flex the fuel tank bodywork sides out slightly at the positions shown below and refit the fuel tank bodywork to the fuel tank.
- Install the two front fixings and tighten to 3 Nm.
Front fixings
- Refit the two bodywork side fixings and tighten to 3 Nm.
- Refit the fuel tank bodywork rear fixing and tighten to 3 Nm.
Fuel tank bodywork
Rear fixing
Side fixing (right hand side shown)
- Make sure the clips and rubber grommet are fitted and install the ignition barrel shroud to the front of the fuel tank.
Ignition barrel shroud
- Using proprietary professional automotive workshop equipment approved for fuel handling, refill the fuel tank with the fuel previously removed.
Fuel tank flex positions |
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Side Panels - Install LG1; LGX
Battery - Install L Series
Check for Fuel Leaks
Start the engine and check carefully for fuel leaks. Rectify as necessary.
Seat - Install L Series
Fuel Pressure Checking
Warning - General - Fuel
Fuel pressure is checked using service tool T3880001.
T3880001 - Fuel Pressure Gauge |
- Remove the fuel tank (see Fuel Tank - Removal) and place on a suitable support, close to the motorcycle.
- Using the service tool T3880123, carefully connect the fuel pump connection on the main harness to the fuel tank.
- Select the fuel pressure gauge adapter marked B from service tool T3880001.
- Connect the adapter hose to the fuel pump plate outlet as shown in the illustration below.
Adaptor hose B
Fuel pump plate outlet
T3880123 - Extension Cable
- Connect the fuel hose to the adaptor hose.
- Connect the fuel pressure gauge to the adaptor hose as shown below by pushing the gauge spigot into the adapter until a click can be heard.
Adaptor hose
Fuel pressure gauge
- Ensure the gauge is visible to the side of the motorcycle.
- Temporarily reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead first and tighten the terminals to 4.5 Nm.
- Start the engine and observe the fuel pressure reading on the gauge.
- When fuel pressure checking is complete, disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first.
- Disconnect the fuel pressure gauge adapter and wiring extension.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Fuel Cap Lock - Removal
Warning - General - Fuel
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
A new filler cap is supplied without the barrel lock. Therefore, the barrel in the original filler cap will need to be removed and fitted to the filler cap.
- Remove the fuel tank (see Fuel Tank - Removal).
- Drain the fuel tank into a suitable fuel proof container.
- Open the fuel cap on the original fuel tank.
- Remove the screws shown in the illustration below, then remove the fuel filler cap.
Screws
Filler cap
- Remove the screws, then carefully remove the lock housing and sealing ring from the fuel cap and collect the four springs.
Screws
Lock housing
Sealing ring
- Remove the O-ring from the fuel cap.
O-ring
- Remove the two washers (one washer is behind the other).
Washers
- Using a suitable flat blade screwdriver, release the locking device for the barrel lock and push the barrel out of the fuel cap.
Locking device
Barrel lock
- If still attached, remove the barrel lock seal.
Seal
Barrel lock
Fuel Cap Lock - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Insert the key into the barrel lock.
Key
Barrel lock
- Align the locking device on the barrel to the small slot in the upper left hand side of the housing, as indicated in the illustration below.
Slot
Housing
Locking device
- Push the barrel lock half way into the fuel cap.
- Turn the lock clockwise until the key is vertical in the fuel cap.
- Push the barrel fully into the fuel cap.
- Fit the two washers to the fuel cap.
- Fit the O-ring to the fuel cap.
- Fit the lock housing, sealing ring and springs as noted during removal and secure with the screws.
- Test the lock for normal operation.
- Fit the filler cap to the fuel tank and secure with the screws shown in the illustration below. Tighten the screws to 4 Nm.
Screws
Filler cap
- Fit the fuel tank (see Fuel Tank - Installation).
- Refill the fuel tank with the fuel drained earlier.
Fuel Pump Assembly - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Warning - General - Fuel
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Using proprietary professional automotive workshop equipment approved for fuel handling, drain the fuel from the fuel tank.
Fuel Tank - Remove L Series
- Invert the fuel tank and place on a protective surface to prevent paint damage.
- Remove the fixings securing the fuel pump mounting plate to the fuel tank.
Mounting plate
Fixings
- Lift the fuel pump assembly and manoeuvre it from the fuel tank aperture.
- Disconnect the fuel level sensor electrical connector and remove the fuel pump and filter assembly.
Fuel level sensor electrical connector
- Noting its orientation, remove and discard the sealing ring from the fuel pump assembly.
Fuel pump assembly
Sealing ring location
Fuel Pump Assembly - Installation
- Install a new sealing ring into the fuel pump assembly, with the seal lip facing uppermost, and ensure that it is correctly seated.
Sealing ring
Seal lip
- Taking care to ensure the sealing ring is not damaged or dislodged, manoeuvre the fuel pump assembly into the fuel tank aperture.
- Reconnect the fuel level sensor electrical connector and locate the fuel pump and filter assembly.
- Ensure the locating peg on the fuel pump assembly is located in the cut out on the mounting plate and the offset hole is positioned as shown below.
Offset hole position
Locating peg
- In the sequence shown below, tighten the mounting plate fixings to 9 Nm.
Pump Mounting Plate Torque Sequence |
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Using proprietary professional automotive workshop equipment approved for fuel handling, refill the fuel tank with the fuel drained earlier.
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Fuel Level Sensor - Removal
Warning - General - Fuel
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
- Press the three locking tabs inwards to remove fuel level sensor from the bracket.
Bracket (inside fuel tank)
Locking tabs
- Carefully manoeuvre the fuel level sensor out of the fuel tank.
Fuel Level Sensor - Installation
Warning - General - Fuel
- Align the three locking tabs into the holes in the bracket and push to secure.
- Make sure the fuel level sensor is held securely.
Bracket (inside fuel tank)
Locking tabs
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Airbox - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Fuel Tank - Remove L Series
- Remove the two rear fixings and flanged sleeves.
Airbox
Fixings
- Loosen the clamp at the front of the airbox.
Airbox
Clamp
- Move the airbox rearwards and upwards and remove the breather hose and secondary air injection hose from the front of the airbox.
- Remove the airbox. Note the position of the rubber seal and clamp for installation.
Airbox - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Make sure the blank is fitted to the underside of the airbox and the clip is positioned towards the centreline.
Airbox
Blank
Clip
- Make sure the rubber seal and clamp are fitted to the airbox as noted during removal.
- Position the airbox to the motorcycle and refit the secondary air injection hose and breather hose to the airbox.
- Push the airbox forwards on to the throttle body and align the two rear fixing holes.
- Install the two rear fixings and flanged sleeves and tighten to 6 Nm.
Airbox
Fixings
- Tighten the airbox clamp to 1.5 Nm.
Airbox
Clamp
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Air Filter - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Fuel Tank - Remove L Series
- Remove the nine fixings and separate the airbox upper from the airbox.
Airbox upper
Fixings
- Remove the air filter from the airbox.
Air filter
Seal
Airbox
Air Filter - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Install the air filter into the airbox.
- Check the condition of the seal and, if necessary, replace.
Air filter
Seal
Airbox
- Fit the airbox upper to the airbox and secure with nine fixings. Tighten to 1.5 Nm.
Airbox upper
Fixings
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Throttle Body - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Fuel Tank - Remove L Series
Airbox - Remove L Series
- Disconnect the throttle actuator motor multiplug.
Throttle body
Throttle actuator motor multiplug
Fixings
- Remove the four fixings and washers securing the throttle body to the inlet manifold and remove the throttle body.
- Remove and discard the inlet manifold seal.
Throttle Body - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Caution - Transition Pieces, Map/ Evap Hoses - DO NOT Use Lubricants When Fitting
- Ensure the mating surfaces of the throttle body and inlet manifold are clean.
- Fit a new seal to the inlet manifold.
Inlet manifold
Seal
- Install the throttle body to the inlet manifold and secure with four fixings and washers. tighten to 8 Nm.
- Connect the multiplug to the throttle actuator motor.
Throttle body
Throttle actuator motor multiplug
Fixings
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Airbox - Install L Series
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Inlet Manifold - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Fuel Tank - Remove L Series
Airbox - Remove L Series
Throttle Body - Remove L Series
Purge Valve - Remove L Series
Inlet Manifold Remove LG1; LGX
- Unclip the harness from the inlet manifold moulding, noting the routing of the harness and the position of the clips for installation.
- Remove the MAP sensor hose and purge valve hose from the inlet manifold moulding.
MAP sensor hose
Inlet manifold moulding
Purge valve hose
- Remove the three fixings and remove the fuel rail assembly from the inlet manifold.
- Disconnect the intake air temperature sensor from the engine sub harness.
- Remove the intake air temperature sensor from the inlet manifold moulding.
- Remove the tie bar fixing from the inlet manifold moulding.
Tie bar fixing
Inlet manifold moulding
Intake air temperature sensor
- Remove the six fixings and remove the inlet manifold moulding. Discard the three seals.
Inlet manifold moulding
Fixings
- Remove the four fixings and remove the inlet manifold casting from the cylinder head. Discard the three seals.
Inlet manifold casting
Fixings
Inlet Manifold - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Inlet Manifold Install LG1; LGX
- Install new seals to the inlet manifold casting and fit the casting to the cylinder head. Refit the fixings and tighten to 8 Nm in the sequence shown below. Tighten the fixings a second time in the same sequence to 8 Nm.
- Make sure the mating faces of the inlet manifold casting and inlet manifold moulding are clean and free from debris.
- Install new seals to the inlet manifold moulding and refit the moulding to the inlet manifold casting. Tighten the fixings 8 Nm to in the sequence shown below.
- Retighten fixings 1 and 2 to 8 Nm.
- Install the tie bar fixing and tighten to 8 Nm.
- Check the condition of the intake air temperature sensor rubber washer and replace if necessary.
- Make sure the threads of the intake air temperature sensor are clean and apply Threebond 1360.
- Install the intake air temperature sensor to the inlet manifold moulding and tighten to 1 Nm.
- Reconnect the intake air temperature sensor to the engine subharness.
Tie bar fixing
Inlet manifold moulding
Intake air temperature sensor
- Refit the fuel rail assembly to the inlet manifold casting and tighten the fixings to 4 Nm.
- If the restrictor in the MAP hose has been removed, refit the restrictor (see Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Hose Restrictor).
- Reconnect the MAP sensor hose and purge valve hose to the inlet manifold moulding.
MAP sensor hose
Inlet manifold moulding
Purge valve hose
- Reclip the harness to the inlet manifold moulding as noted during removal.
Inlet manifold casting tightening sequence |
Inlet manifold moulding tightening sequence |
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Purge Valve - Install L Series
Throttle Body - Install L Series
Airbox - Install L Series
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Secondary Air Injection
System Purpose and Operation
The secondary air injection system is an aid to reducing levels of pollutants in the exhaust gases. It does this by introducing a small amount of air into each exhaust port as the exhaust valve opens. The introduced air helps promote further combustion of the fuel mixture in the exhaust system after it has left the combustion chamber.
At certain specific engine speeds (determined by the factory programming of the engine management system), the secondary air injection control valve is opened by the ECM and allows an air feed into the secondary air system where, each time a pair of exhaust valves open, the exhaust gases in the exhaust port create a depression which causes reed valves in the secondary air injection system to open. When open, the depression in the exhaust port draws air from the control valve, through the open reed valves, into the exhaust port. This air promotes secondary combustion of the exhaust gases in the ports and the header system.
At other engine speeds, the system is disabled by closing the control valve in the system. This allows an oxygen sensor to control air to fuel ratios. If air was fed to the exhaust system when the oxygen sensor was operational, the incoming air would cause inaccuracies in the readings sensed by the oxygen sensor (which requires access to raw combustion gases) which would lead to rough running.
Secondary Air Injection Solenoid Valve - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Fuel Tank - Remove L Series
ABS Modulator - Removal LG1; LGX; LL1
- Release the hoses attached to the valve.
- Disconnect the solenoid valve multiplug.
Solenoid valve
Reed valve cover fixings
Solenoid valve bracket
ABS modulator bracket
Reed valve covers
- Gently pull the valve to detach it from the bracket.
Harness shown removed for clarity |
Secondary Air Injection Solenoid Valve - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Locate the solenoid valve to the bracket.
- Reconnect the multiplug.
- Refit the hoses to the valve.
Harness shown removed for clarity
|
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
ABS Modulator - Installation LG1; LGX; LL1
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Secondary Air Injection Reed Valves - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Fuel Tank - Remove L Series
ABS Modulator - Removal LG1; LGX; LL1
SAI Valve - Removal L Series
- Release the spring clips and detach the secondary air injection feed hoses from the reed valves on the camshaft cover.
- Release the bolts securing the valve covers to the camshaft cover.
Solenoid valve
Reed valve cover fixings
Solenoid valve bracket
ABS modulator bracket
Reed valve covers
- Ease the valve covers from the valves.
- Detach the valves from the camshaft cover.
Reed valves
Harness shown removed for clarity |
Secondary Air Injection Reed Valves - Inspection
- Check for cracks, bending or other damage to the reed valves. Replace as necessary.
- Check for cracks or other damage to the reed valve limiting plates. Replace as necessary.
- Clean any carbon build up on the reed valve assemblies, reed valve cover and the camshaft cover.
- Check for damage to the seal areas on the reed valve assemblies. Replace as necessary.
- Make sure the reed valve limiting plates are fitted as shown in the illustration below.
Reed valve limiting plates
Reed valves
Secondary Air Injection Reed Valves - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Fit the reed valves to the camshaft cover.
Reed valves
- Refit the valve covers, and the brackets for the secondary air injection solenoid and ABS modulator, as noted for removal. Tighten the fixings to 9 Nm.
Solenoid valve
Reed valve cover fixings
Solenoid valve bracket
ABS modulator bracket
Reed valve covers
- Refit the secondary air injection feed hoses to the reed valves.
Harness shown removed for clarity |
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
SAI Valve - Installation L Series
ABS Modulator - Installation LG1; LGX; LL1
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Hose Restrictor
The MAP hose restrictor is fitted to the flared end (inlet manifold end) of the MAP hose to the depth shown.
|
Removal and Installation - Engine Management Components
Engine Electronic Control Module (ECM) - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Engine ECM Remove LG1; LGX
- Note the position and routing of the harness.
- Release the diagnostic connector from its locating tang.
- Remove the starter solenoid from the engine ECM tray and rest to one side.
- Release the fixing and remove the ambient air pressure sensor and rest to one side.
- Tilt the alarm electrical connector towards the rear and slide rearwards to release from the battery tray.
- Unclip the rear light connector from the battery tray.
- Disconnect the fall detection switch electrical connector.
- Remove the two relay blocks and rest to one side, noting the position of each block for installation. The rear block has blue tape to identify.
- Remove the fuse box from the engine ECM tray.
Accessory USB connector
Relays
Ambient air pressure sensor
Rear light connector
Alarm connector
Fuse box
Fall detection switch
Starter solenoid
- Move the harness and seat lock cables clear of the engine ECM tray, noting their position for installation.
- Unclip the accessory USB connector from the engine ECM tray.
- Release the two fixings and raise the engine ECM tray from the battery tray. Unclip the ECM tray from the rear and remove from the battery tray.
- Disconnect the three engine ECM harness connectors and remove the engine ECM.
Engine Electronic Control Module (ECM) Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Engine ECM Install LG1; LGX
- Install the engine ECM and reconnect the three electrical connectors.
- Refit the engine ECM tray with two fixings and tighten to 5 Nm.
Engine ECM tray
Rear fixing
Centre fixings
Engine ECM tray fixings
Side fixings
Battery tray
- Reroute the harness and seat lock cable over the engine ECM tray as noted during removal.
- Reclip the accessory USB connector to the engine ECM tray.
- Refit the fuse box to the engine ECM tray.
- Refit the relay blocks to the engine ECM tray in the positions as noted during removal.
- Reconnect the fall detection switch electrical connector.
- Refit the starter solenoid to the battery tray.
- Reclip the alarm and rear light connectors to the battery tray.
- Refit the ambient air pressure sensor to the battery tray and tighten the fixing to 3 Nm.
Accessory USB connector
Relays
Ambient air pressure sensor
Rear light connector
Alarm connector
Fuse box
Fall detection switch
Starter solenoid
- Refit the diagnostic connector to its locating tang.
Harness not shown for clarity |
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Fuel Tank - Remove L Series
Immobiliser Remove LG1; LGX
- Remove and discard the rear fixing from the ABS modulator bracket.
ABS modulator
ABS modulator multiplug
ABS modulator rear fixing
Brake line unions
- Remove and discard the two fixings and remove the ABS modulator and bracket assembly from the frame.
Fixings
ABS modulator bracket
- Manoeuvre the ABS modulator to the left hand side to gain access to the immobiliser electrical connector.
- Unclip the immobiliser electrical connector from the ABS modulator bracket.
- Disconnect the immobiliser from the main harness. Feed the harness through the frame, noting the routing for installation.
Immobiliser electrical connector
ABS modulator
- Remove the two fixings and remove the immobiliser/TPMS module.
Immobiliser
Fixings
Immobiliser Control Module - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Immobiliser Install LG1; LGX
- Route the immobiliser harness through the frame as noted during removal.
- Secure the immobiliser with two fixings and tighten to 1.5 Nm.
- Reconnect the immobiliser to the main harness.
Immobiliser electrical connector
ABS modulator
- Make sure the two rubber grommets are fitted to the frame and one is fitted to the ABS modulator bracket.
- Align the ABS modulator and bracket to the frame and secure with two flanged sleeves and two new fixings. Tighten the fixings to 9 Nm.
Fixings
ABS modulator bracket
- Install a flanged sleeve and new fixing and tighten to 9 Nm.
ABS modulator
ABS modulator multiplug
ABS modulator rear fixing
Brake line unions
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Twist Grip - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Handlebar End Weights - Removal L Series
Handlebar End Weights - Removal (if applicable)
- Release the fixings and remove the clamp for the twist grip housing from the handlebar.
Anti-tamper fixings
Fixings
- Slide the twist grip assembly off the handlebar.
Twist Grip - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Slide the twist grip onto the handlebar and align it to the twist grip position sensor as noted for removal.
- Fit the twist grip clamp. Ensure the locating lug fits into its hole on the handlebar.
Locating lug
Hole
Twist grip clamp
- Fit and fixings and tighten, upper one first, to 2.5 Nm.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Handlebar End Weights - Installation L Series
Handlebar End Weights - Installation (if applicable)
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Twist Grip Position Sensor - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Fuel Tank Bodywork Remove LG1; LGX
Remove the fuel tank bodywork (see Fuel Tank - Removal)
Twist Grip - Removal L Series
Twist Grip Position Sensor Remove LG1; LGX
- Detach the twist grip position sensor connection from the right hand side of the fuel tank.
- Disconnect the twist grip position sensor from the main harness.
Twist grip position sensor main harness connector
Twist grip position sensor connector
- Remove the rubber band that secures the right hand switch cube harness, right hand side front direction indicator harness and twist grip position sensor harness. Note its position for installation.
- Route the twist grip harness out of the frame to the twist grip.
- Slide the twist grip position sensor off the handlebar.
Twist Grip Position Sensor - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Twist Grip Position Sensor Install LG1; LGX
- Slide the twist grip position sensor onto the handlebar in the orientation noted for removal.
- Route the twist grip harness to the main harness as noted for removal.
- Connect the harness to the main harness then attach the connector to its bracket on the fuel tank.
Twist grip position sensor main harness connector
Twist grip position sensor connector
- Refit the rubber band around the right hand switch cube harness, right hand side front direction indicator harness and twist grip position sensor harness as noted during removal.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Twist Grip - Installation L Series
Fuel Tank Bodywork Install LG1; LGX
Refit the fuel tank bodywork (see Fuel Tank - Installation)
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Intake Air Temperature Sensor - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
- Press the wire locking device fully in and disconnect the harness from the intake air temperature sensor.
- Remove the intake air temperature sensor from the inlet manifold moulding.
Intake air temperature sensor
Electrical connector
Red tape identifier
Intake Air Temperature Sensor - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Check the condition of the rubber washer and replace if necessary.
- Make sure the threads of the sensor are clean and apply Threebond 1360.
- Install the intake air temperature sensor to the inlet manifold moulding and tighten to 1 Nm.
- Refit the harness to the intake air temperature sensor.
Intake air temperature sensor
Electrical connector
Red tape identifier
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Coolant Temperature Sensor - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Drain the cooling system (see Coolant Replacement - Drainage).
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Fuel Tank - Remove L Series
Airbox - Remove LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1; LL2
Throttle Body - RemoveLG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1; LL2
Inlet Manifold - Removal - LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1
Coolant Temperature Sensor Remove - LG1; LGX; LL1
- Disconnect the coolant temperature sensor from the main harness, noting its routing in between ignition coil 1 and injector 1 harness connector.
Ignition coil 1
Coolant temperature harness connector
Injector 1 harness connector
- Disconnect the bypass hose from the cylinder head spigot.
- Remove the rubber cover and using a suitable 19 mm slotted socket, remove the coolant temperature sensor from the cylinder head, noting the routing of the harness for installation.
Bypass hose
Coolant temperature sensor
Coolant Temperature Sensor - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Fit the coolant temperature sensor into the cylinder head and tighten to 18 Nm and route the harness as noted during removal. Refit the rubber cover.
- Refit the bypass hose to the cylinder head spigot.
Bypass hose
Coolant temperature sensor
- Reconnect the coolant temperature sensor to the main harness, routing the harness as noted during removal.
Ignition coil 1
Coolant temperature harness connector
Injector 1 harness connector
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Inlet Manifold - Install - LG1; LGX; LL1
Throttle Body - Install L Series
Airbox - Install L Series
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Fuel Tank - Remove L Series
- Release the fixing and detach the MAP sensor from the bracket.
- Disconnect the map sensor multiplug and the MAP sensor hose. Remove the MAP sensor.
MAP sensor
Fixing
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Reconnect the MAP sensor multiplug.
- Refit the MAP sensor hose to the MAP sensor.
- Fit the sensor to the bracket, tightening the fixing to 5 Nm.
MAP sensor
Fixing
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Ambient Air Pressure Sensor - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Ambient Air Remove LG1; LGX
- Release the fixing securing the ambient air pressure sensor to the battery tray.
- Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the sensor.
Ambient air pressure sensor
Fixing
Electrical connector
Ambient Air Pressure Sensor - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Ambient Air Install LG1; LGX
- Reconnect the electrical connector to the ambient air pressure sensor.
- Fit the sensor to the battery tray and tighten its fixing to 3 Nm.
Ambient air pressure sensor
Fixing
Electrical connector
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Fall Detection Switch - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
- Remove and discard the fixings securing the fall detection switch to the engine ECM tray.
- Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the fall detection switch.
Fall detection switch
Fixings
Electrical connector
Fall Detection Switch - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Connect the electrical connector to the fall detection switch.
- Fit the fall detection switch to the engine ECM tray and tighten the new fixings to 3 Nm.
Fall detection switch
Fixings
Electrical connector
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Gear Position Sensor - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Front Sprocket Cover - Remove L Series
- Disconnect the gear position sensor from the main harness.
- Remove the fixings and remove the gear position sensor.
Gear position sensor
Fixings
Gear Position Sensor - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Refit the gear position sensor and tighten the fixings to 5 Nm.
Gear position sensor
Fixings
- Reconnect the gear position sensor to the main harness.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Front Sprocket Cover - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Crankshaft Position Sensor
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
The alternator stator and crankshaft position sensor are supplied as an assembly and cannot be separated.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Removal and Installation - Exhaust System Components
Exhaust System - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Warning - Hot Exhaust
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Radiator - Remove L Series
- Disconnect the oxygen sensor from the main harness and remove the rubber bands. Note the routing of the harness and position of the rubber bands for installation.
Oxygen sensor electrical connector
Rubber band
Coolant tee piece
- If required, remove the oxygen sensor from the exhaust.
Oxygen sensor
- Support the exhaust and remove the two rear fixings and washers.
Fixing
Washer
- Remove and discard the six header lock nuts.
Exhaust header
Lock nuts
- Lower the rear of the exhaust and then remove the exhaust from the cylinder head. Collect the flanged sleeves from the rear mounts.
Right hand side shown, left hand side similar |
Exhaust System - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Align the exhaust with the cylinder head and loosely fit six lock nuts.
Exhaust header
Lock nuts
- Make sure the flanged sleeves and grommets are fitted to the two rear exhaust mounts.
- Fit the exhaust to the two rear mounts and secure with two fixings and two washers.
Fixing
Washer
- Tighten the cylinder head lock nuts to 15 Nm in the sequence shown below.
- Tighten the two rear mount fixings to 19 Nm.
- If required, refit the oxygen sensor to the exhaust and tighten to 25 Nm.
Oxygen sensor
- Reroute the oxygen sensor harness as noted during removal and reconnect to the main harness.
- Secure the oxygen harness to the coolant hose with two rubber bands.
Oxygen sensor electrical connector
Rubber band
Coolant tee piece
Right hand side shown, left hand side similar |
Exhaust Header Tightening Sequence |
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Radiator - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Oxygen Sensor Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Caution - Hot Exhaust
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Oxygen Sensor Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Removal - LG1; LGX; LL1
- Disconnect the oxygen sensor from the main harness and remove the rubber bands. Note the position of the rubber bands for installation.
Oxygen sensor electrical connector
Rubber band
Coolant tee piece
- Remove the oxygen sensor bank 1 sensor 1 from the exhaust header.
Oxygen sensor
Oxygen Sensor Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Note to be used in service manual with stabilise warning
Oxygen Sensor Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Installation - LG1; LGX; LL1
- Insert the oxygen sensor bank 1 sensor 1 into the exhaust header. Tighten to 25 Nm.
Oxygen sensor bank sensor 1
- Reroute the oxygen sensor harness as noted during removal and reconnect to the main harness.
- Secure the oxygen harness to the coolant hose with two rubber bands.
Oxygen sensor electrical connector
Rubber band
Coolant tee piece
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Evaporative System Components
Evaporative Emissions Control System
Certain Markets Only
Some models in certain markets are fitted with a system to control the evaporation of fuel vapour to the atmosphere.
A carbon filled canister absorbs vapour while the engine is not running. When the engine is started, the vapour is returned to the engine and burnt.
There are two distinct phases to the system's operation: engine off and engine running. These two conditions are explained overleaf.
Component Locations
EVAP Locations LG1
Carbon Filled Canister - under the airbox.
Purge Control Valve - attached to the bracket mounted on the inlet manifold (electronically controlled by the engine ECM).
EVAP Locations LL1
Carbon Filled Canister - attached to the rear of the fuel tank.
Purge Control Valve - attached to the bracket mounted on the left hand side fuel tank bracket (electronically controlled by the engine ECM).
|
Evaporative Emissions Control System - Engine Off
When the engine is stationary, any pressure increase in the fuel tank due to a rise in ambient temperature will cause the fuel vapour to pass down the breather hose (1) to a carbon filled canister (2) which stores the vapour.
Once in the canister, vapour cannot enter the engine because the purge valve (3) is closed.
|
Evaporative Emissions Control System - Engine Running
When the engine is running, a vacuum is applied to the purge hose (4) from the inlet manifold.
At certain times, the ECM opens the purge valve. The vacuum applied to the purge hose (4) now begins to draw stored vapour from the carbon filled area of the canister and returns it to the inlet manifold for burning in the engine.
In order to control the speed at which the vapour is purged from the canister, the engine management system shuttles the purge control valve between the open and closed positions.
|
Evaporative Canister - Removal
Warning - General - Fuel
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Fuel Tank - Remove L Series
Airbox - Remove L Series
EVAP Canister Remove LG1; LGX
- Remove the fuel tank hose from the evaporative canister.
Fuel tank hose
Evaporative canister
- Remove and discard the cable tie securing the evaporative canister to the frame.
- Disconnect the purge valve hose and drain hose from the evaporative cannister.
Evaporative canister
Purge valve hose
Drain hose
Evaporative canister bracket
- Remove the evaporative canister from the grommet in the bracket.
- If required, remove the drain hose noting the routing for installation.
Evaporative Canister - Installation
Warning - General - Fuel
Caution - Transition Pieces, Map/ Evap Hoses - DO NOT Use Lubricants When Fitting
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
EVAP Canister Install LG1; LGX
- If required, route the drain hose as noted during removal.
- Make sure the purge valve hose is routed as noted during removal.
- Refit the evaporative canister to the bracket, aligning the spigot to the grommet. Secure the canister to the frame with a new cable tie.
- Refit the purge valve hose and drain hose to the evaporative canister.
Evaporative canister
Purge valve hose
Drain hose
Evaporative canister bracket
- Refit the fuel tank hose to the evaporative canister. Make sure the hose routes underneath the airbox fixing boss.
Fuel tank hose
Evaporative canister
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Airbox - Install L Series
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Purge Control Valve - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Side Panels - Removal LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2
Purge Valve Remove LG1; LGX
- Disconnect the electrical connector from the purge control valve.
- Disconnect the evaporative canister hose and inlet manifold hose from the purge control valve.
- Remove the bracket fixing and remove the purge control valve and bracket from the inlet manifold.
Purge control valve electrical connector
Purge control valve
Bracket fixing
Hoses
- If required, remove the fixing and separate the bracket from the purge valve.
Purge Control Valve - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Caution - Transition Pieces, Map/ Evap Hoses - DO NOT Use Lubricants When Fitting
Purge Valve Install LG1; LGX
- If required, position the purge control valve to its mounting bracket ensuring that the locating tab locates correctly into the bracket. Secure with the fixing and tighten to 3 Nm.
- Position the purge control valve and mounting bracket to the inlet manifold. Secure with the fixing and tighten to 8 Nm.
- Connect the hoses as noted during removal.
- Connect the purge control valve electrical connector as noted during removal.
Purge control valve electrical connector
Purge control valve
Bracket fixing
Hoses
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Side Panels - Install LG1; LGX
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Evaporative Hose (EVAP) and Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) - Fitment
Notice - Transition Pieces, Map/ Evap Hoses - DO NOT Use Lubricants When Fitting
EVAP and MAP hoses fitment LG1 LGX LL1
Evaporative Hose (EVAP)
- Fit the EVAP hose to the right hand spigot.
EVAP hose
Spigot housing
MAP hose
Inlet manifold (throttle body removed for clarity)
MAP Hoses
- Assemble the six components of the MAP sensor hose assembly as shown in the illustration below.
Hose, to inlet manifold
Hose, to MAP sensor
Four way connector
Drain hose
Blanking cap
Drain hose plug
- Check the position of the breather hose clamp. If required, reposition so the clamp lugs are pointing to the right hand side of the motorcycle.
Clamp
Breather hose
- Attach the MAP sensor and the purge valve hoses to the spigots on the inlet manifold.
Hose, to inlet manifold
Hose, to MAP sensor
Four way connector
Drain hose
Blanking cap
Cooling
Exploded View - Cooling System
Coolant
Before VIN AG0784, a year-round, Hybrid Organic Acid Technology (known as Hybrid OAT or HOAT) coolant was installed in the cooling system when the motorcycle left the factory. It is coloured green, contains a 50% solution of ethylene glycol based antifreeze, and has a freezing point of -35°C (-31°F).
From VIN AG0784, Triumph D2053 OAT coolant is installed in the cooling system when the motorcycle leaves the factory. It is coloured orange, contains a 50% solution of ethylene glycol based antifreeze, and has a freezing point of -38°C (-36.4°F).
Triumph D2053 OAT coolant, as supplied by Triumph, is premixed and does not need to be diluted prior to filling or topping up the cooling system.
Always change the coolant at the intervals specified in the Scheduled Maintenance chart.
Warning Coolant - General Safety
Radiator Hoses
Check the radiator hoses for cracks or deterioration, and hose clamps for tightness in accordance with scheduled maintenance requirements.
Coolant Replacement - Drainage
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Paddock stand (Unordered List)
Position the motorcycle on level ground and place on a paddock stand.
Radiator Cowls - Remove LG1; LGX; LL1
Warning - Cooling - Cap Removal (scalding)
- Release the fixing and remove the coolant pressure cap.
Coolant pressure cap
- Position a container to collect the displaced coolant.
- Loosen the hose clip then release the bottom hose from the radiator and allow the coolant to drain.
Hose clips
Top hose
Bottom hose
- Remove the drain bolt from the coolant outlet tube, located next to the heat exchanger and allow the coolant to drain.
Drain bolt
Coolant Replacement - Filling
- Incorporating a new sealing washer, refit the drain bolt to the coolant outlet tube and tighten to 10 Nm.
- Reconnect the bottom hose. Ensure the hose clip is positioned as noted for removal.
- Slowly add coolant mixture to the system, through the filler opening in the radiator, until the system is full.
- If the system has filled correctly and fully, there should be coolant visible through the radiator filler opening.
- If necessary, top up the system through the filler and refit the coolant pressure cap to the radiator filler neck. Tighten the fixing to 1 Nm.
- With the aid of an assistant, lean the motorcycle fully over to the right hand side, and then the left hand side, to release air trapped in the cooling system. Repeat as necessary.
- Reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead first and tighten the battery terminals to 4.5 Nm.
- Start the motorcycle and allow to run for approximately 20 to 30 seconds. Briefly raise the engine speed several times to allow any air to be expelled from the system.
- Stop the engine. Check and top up the coolant level as necessary.
- With the aid of an assistant, lean the motorcycle fully over to the right hand side, and then the left hand side, to release air trapped in the cooling system.
- Start the motorcycle. Briefly raise the engine speed several times to allow any air to be expelled from the system.
- Allow the engine to run until the cooling fan operates.
- Stop the motorcycle and allow the engine to cool.
- Check and top up the coolant level as necessary.
- Check the expansion tank level and top up if necessary.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Radiator Cowls - Installation LG1; LGX; LL1
Coolant Pressure Cap and Coolant System Testing
Inspection and Testing
- Allow the engine temperature to cool for at least 30 minutes.
- Remove the coolant pressure cap.
- Check the condition of the upper and lower seals of the coolant pressure cap.
Lower seal
Upper seal
Spring
- Pressure test the cap and cooling system to the blow off pressure of 1.1 bar as described below using service tool T3880147. If the cap opens at a lower pressure or fails to open at 1.1 bar, replace the cap.
Coolant Pressure Cap Test
|
- Select pressure cap test adaptor C - T3880453 and securely fasten to the pressure cap.
- Carefully connect the hand pump to the adaptor ensuring an air tight seal is maintained.
Pressure cap
Test adaptor
Hand held pump
- Pressure test the coolant cap to the blow off pressure. If the coolant cap opens at a lower pressure, fails to open at the correct pressure or the seal leaks, replace the cap.
Coolant System Pressure Test
- Select the bayonet type adaptor and securely fasten to the radiator.
- Carefully connect the hand pump to the bayonet connector ensuring an air tight seal is maintained.
Radiator filler
Bayonet type connector
Hand held pump
- Pressurise the cooling system to the operating pressure, using the hand pump taking care not to exceed the maximum cap pressure.
- Hold the pressure for a minimum of 10 minutes, whilst visually inspecting the external components of the coolant system for leaks.
- Remove the engine oil filler cap/dipstick and check for contamination of the engine oil caused by coolant escaping into the engine sump.
- Depressurise the coolant test kit using the pressure release valve.
Radiator filler
Bayonet type connector
Hand held pump
Pressure release valve
- Refit the coolant pressure cap.
- Fill the coolant to the maximum mark (see Coolant Replacement - Filling).
Radiator - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Fuel Tank - Remove L Series
Radiator Cowls - Remove LG1; LGX; LL1
Clutch Cable - Remove L Series
Radiator Remove LG1; LGX
- Disconnect the horn's two electrical connectors and detach the harness from the cooling fan cowl, noting the position of the clips and routing of the harness.
- Release the fixing and remove the horn.
Fixing
Horn
- Follow the routing of the harness for the cooling fan and disconnect it from the main harness.
- Release the hose clip and disconnect the bypass hose from the radiator. Discard the clip.
Hose clip
Bypass hose
- Loosen the hose clips then detach the top and bottom hoses from the radiator.
Hose clips
Top hose
Bottom hose
- Release the radiator lower mounting.
Fixing
Radiator lower mounting
- Release the fixing securing the radiator to the frame. Slide the radiator towards the right hand side of the motorcycle to release the radiator from the bracket pin. Collect the retaining plate for the air deflector.
Fixing
Retaining plate
Bracket pin
- Remove the radiator.
Radiator and Cooling Fan Inspection
Radiator
Caution - Radiator Damage using pressure wash
- Check the radiator for stone damage.
- Check the radiator core for damage to fins or obstructions to air flow.
- Clean off any obstructions with a stream of low-pressure water.
- Rectify any damage.
Cooling Fan
Caution - Cooling - Fan - fingers loose clothing trapped
The motorcycle is fitted with a thermostatically controlled electric fan situated behind the radiator. When the fan operates with the motorcycle stationary or at slow speed, cool air is drawn through the radiator from the front of the motorcycle.
- Check that the cooling fan spins freely and without tight spots.
- Check the cooling fan blades for signs of heat distortion.
- Rectify as necessary.
Radiator - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Radiator Install LG1
- Align the radiator to the frame and lower mounting.
- Position the rubber air deflector and its retaining plate to the upper mountings as noted for removal.
- Fit the upper mounting fixing and tighten to 9 Nm.
- Fit and tighten the lower mounting fixing to 6 Nm.
- Reconnect the top and bottom hoses. Ensure the hose clips are positioned as noted for removal and secure with the hose clips.
Hose clips
Top hose
Bottom hose
- Connect the bypass hose to the radiator and secure with a new hose clip.
Hose clip
Bypass hose
- Route the harness for the cooling fan as noted for removal (ensure connectors are pushed through the air deflector) and connect to the main harness.
- Fit the horn to the radiator and tighten its fixing to 9 Nm.
Fixing
Horn
- Route the harness as noted during removal and connect the horn's two electrical connectors.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Clutch Cable - Install L Series
Radiator Cowls - Installation LG1; LGX; LL1
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Coolant Pump
Thermostat - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Fuel Tank - Remove L Series
Airbox - Remove L Series
Throttle Body - Remove L Series
Inlet Manifold - Removal - LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1
Coolant Expansion Tank - Removal L Series
- Detach the top hose from the thermostat housing, noting the position of the clip for installation.
- Release the fixings securing the thermostat housing to the cylinder head.
- Remove the thermostat housing and the bracket. Discard the O-ring.
Thermostat housing
Fixings
Coolant expansion tank bracket
- Remove the thermostat from the cylinder head.
Thermostat
Bleed valve
Thermostat - Inspection
- Inspect the thermostat at room temperature. If the thermostat is open, it must be replaced.
- To check the thermostat is opening at the correct temperature, suspend the thermostat in a suitable container of water and raise the temperature of the water until the thermostat opens.
- Measure the water temperature with an accurate thermometer.
- If the temperature at which thermostat opening takes place is incorrect, replace the thermostat.
Thermostat - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Locate the thermostat into the cylinder head. Ensure the bleed valve is uppermost as shown below.
Thermostat
Bleed valve
- Fit a new O-ring to the thermostat housing groove.
O-ring groove
- Refit the thermostat housing and bracket to the cylinder head,
- Tighten the fixings to 9 Nm.
Thermostat housing
Fixings
Coolant expansion tank bracket
- Reconnect the top hose. Ensure the hose clip is positioned as noted for removal.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Coolant Expansion Tank - Installation L Series
Inlet Manifold - Install - LG1; LGX; LL1
Throttle Body - Install L Series
Airbox - Install L Series
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Coolant Expansion Tank - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Warning - Cooling - Do not remove the expansion tank or coolant pressure cap when engine is hot
- Remove the coolant expansion tank cap from the coolant expansion tank.
- Release the fixings and remove the coolant expansion tank cover and coolant expansion tank.
Coolant expansion tank cap
Coolant expansion tank
Fixings
Coolant Expansion Tank - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle Including locking devices
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Note to be used in service manual with stabilise warning
Expansion Tank Install - LG1; LGX; LL1
- Position the coolant expansion tank onto the frame and brackets.
- Refit the cover and secure the tank and cover with three fixings and washers. Tighten to 3 Nm.
Coolant expansion tank cap
Coolant expansion tank
Fixings
- Check and adjust the coolant level as necessary (see Coolant Level Inspection and Coolant Level Adjustment).
- Refit the coolant expansion tank cap.
Front Suspension and Steering
Exploded View - Front Forks, Bottom Yoke and Steering Head Bearings
Exploded View - Handlebars and Upper Yoke
Fork Inspection
Examine each fork for any sign of damage or scratching of the slider surface or for oil leaks.
If any damage or oil leakage is found, strip and repair as described in this section or consult an authorised Triumph dealer.
Check for smooth operation of the forks as follows:
Place the motorcycle on level ground
While holding the handlebars and applying the front brake, pump the forks up and down several times.
If roughness or excessive stiffness is detected, repair as described in this section or consult an authorised Triumph dealer.
Front Fork Oil Seal - Clean
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Clean the area around the dust seal then carefully detach the dust seal from the fork outer tube.
- Wipe away any visible dirt or water from the oil seal.
- Clean service tool T3880215
- Fit service tool T3880215 to the fork inner tube. Make sure that the cleaning hook, with the text OIL SEAL below it, is pointing towards the oil seal.
Cleaning hook
OIL SEAL text
Oil seal location
- Slide the cleaning hook carefully under the seal lip. Rotate service tool T3880215 360° in the direction shown then remove the cleaning hook from the oil seal.
- Slide service tool T3880215 down to use the other cleaning hook to clean the dust seal. Rotate service tool T3880215 360° in the direction shown then remove the cleaning hook from the dust seal.
Dust seal
Cleaning hook
- With hand pressure only, press the dust seal into position in the outer tube.
Direction of Rotation |
Direction of Rotation |
Front Fork - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Front Fork Remove LG1; LGX
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Raise and Support the Front of the Motorcycle
Raise and support the front of the motorcycle.
- Detach and support the front brake calipers (see Front Brake Caliper - Removal).
- Detach the front ABS wheel speed sensor (and its harness if necessary) from the right hand fork leg (see Front ABS Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal).
- Remove the front direction indicators (see Front Direction Indicators - Removal).
- Remove the front wheel (see Front Wheel - Removal).
- Remove the front mudguard (see Front Mudguard - Removal).
- Loosen the upper yoke pinch bolts.
- Loosen the lower yoke pinch bolts.
Upper yoke pinch bolt (left hand side shown)
Lower yoke pinch bolts
- Using a downward, twisting action, withdraw the forks from the yokes. Retrieve the direction indicator brackets.
Front Fork - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Fork Install LG1; LGX
- Install the forks into the yokes, refitting the direction indicator brackets in between the two yokes, and make sure the manufacturer's labels are facing outwards on each fork leg.
- Position the forks within the yokes so that the lip of the outer tube, not the top cap, is 39.50 mm +/- 0.5 mm above the flat/machined surface on the underside of the upper yoke.
- Tighten the lower yoke pinch bolts as follows:
- Tighten the upper yoke pinch bolts, upper fixings first, to 26 Nm.
- If the forks have been dismantled, tighten the fork top caps to 35 Nm.
Fork pull through measurement |
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Front Mudguard - Install L Series
Front Wheel - Install L Series
Front Direction Indicators - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Sidestand (Unordered list)
Lower the motorcycle to the ground and park it on the side stand.
Fork Oil Change - Oil Draining
- Remove the fork (see Front Fork - Removal).
- Disassemble the following items from the fork leg:
- Holding the inner and outer tubes together, invert the fork and pour out the fork oil into a suitable container. Pump the fork assembly to remove all the oil.
Fork Oil Change - Oil Refilling
The oil level is measured from the upper surface of the fork outer tube, with the fork fully compressed with the spring removed.
Fork Oil Level (fork fully compressed) |
Fork Oil Level Chart
Fork Leg | Oil Level* | Oil Volume | Oil Grade |
---|---|---|---|
Left Hand | 125 mm | 560 cc | Showa SS47G |
Right Hand | 115 mm | 475 cc | |
*Fork fully compressed with the spring removed. |
- Fill the fork with the specified fork oil until the oil level passes the side holes in the fork inner tube.
Hole (one of two shown)
Fork inner tube
- Pump the fork outer tube several times to expel any trapped air then fully compress the fork and support it in an upright position. Leave the fork for a few minutes to allow the oil level to stabilise.
- Refer to the oil level chart and set the scale on service tool T3880160 to the specified level.
T3880160 - Fork Oil Filler/Evacuator
Adjuster plate
Scale area
Hole (zero position)
- Insert the scale end of the tool into the fork inner tube.
- Hold the tool adjuster plate level with the upper surface of the fork outer tube and draw fluid into the syringe until fluid flow ceases (empty the syringe if the body becomes full before fluid flow stops).
- The fluid level in the fork is now set to the height set on the tool scale. Check the tool scale setting and repeat the process if incorrectly set.
- Assemble the following items to the fork leg:
Left Hand Front Fork - Disassembly
Remove the fork assembly (see Front Fork - Removal).
- Using a soft jawed vice, clamp the service tool T3880171 such that the fork can be mounted vertically.
- With the top cap facing upwards, very gently clamp the fork inner tube into service tool T3880171.
- Carefully unscrew the top cap from the fork outer tube.
Top cap
Fork outer tube
- Remove the fork assembly from service tool T3880171 and transfer to a soft jawed vice.
Front fork assembly
Soft jaws
- Hold the fork inner tube fully into the fork outer tube. Using service tool T3880367 unscrew and remove the fork top cap and joint rod assembly from the fork inner tube.
T3880367 - Wrench, Damper Cylinder, 33mm
Top cap
Joint rod
Fork outer tube
- If removal of the top cap is required, loosen the locknut and unscrew the top cap from the joint rod. If necessary remove the O-ring joint seal from the top cap assembly.
Fork top cap
Lock nut
Joint rod
- Remove the spring.
Spring
Fork outer tube
- Invert the fork and pour out the fork oil into a suitable container. Pump the fork assembly to remove all oil.
- With the fork still inverted, very gently clamp the fork outer tube into service tool T3880171.
- Ease the dust seal out of the outer tube.
Dust seal
Inner tube
- Carefully ease the circlip out from the top of the outer tube.
Circlip
- Compress the fork then pull the inner tube sharply out of the outer tube. Repeat this procedure until the upper bush and seal are forced out of position and the inner and outer tube can be separated.
- Carefully slide the upper bush off the fork inner tube. Discard the upper bush.
- Slide the lower bush, washer, oil seal, circlip and dust seal off the fork inner tube. Discard the lower bush, oil seal, circlip and dust seal.
Upper bush
Lower bush
Washer
Oil seal
Circlip
Dust seal
Fork inner tube
Right Hand Front Fork - Disassembly
Remove the fork assembly (see Front Fork - Removal).
- Using a soft jawed vice, clamp the service tool T3880171 such that the fork can be mounted vertically.
- With the top cap facing upwards, very gently clamp the fork inner tube into service tool T3880171.
- Carefully unscrew the top cap from the fork outer tube.
Top cap
Fork outer tube
- Loosen the lock nut, unscrew and remove the top cap. If necessary, remove the O-ring seal from the top cap assembly.
- Invert the fork and pour out the fork oil into a suitable container. Pump the fork assembly to remove all oil.
- Return the fork to the clamping tool.
- Fit service tool T3880067 over the spring spacer. Position the two adjustable arms to the spring spacer. Screw in the arms until they positively engage in the spring spacer holes.
- Using service tool T3880067, manually compress the fork spring and remove the split collar from below the damper lock nut.
Damper lock nut
T3880067 - Fork Spring Compressor
Split collar
- Remove service tool T3880067 from the spring spacer.
- Remove the spring spacer, washer and spring.
Spring spacer
Washer
Spring
Damper rod
- Invert the fork and very gently clamp the fork outer tube into service tool T3880171.
- Ease the dust seal out of the outer tube.
Dust seal
Inner tube
- Carefully ease the circlip out from the top of the outer tube.
Circlip
- Compress the fork then pull the inner tube sharply out of the outer tube. Repeat this procedure until the upper bush and seal are forced out of position and the inner and outer tube can be separated.
- Carefully slide the upper bush off the fork inner tube. Discard the upper bush.
- Slide the lower bush, washer, oil seal, circlip and dust seal off the fork inner tube. Discard the lower bush, oil seal, circlip and dust seal.
Upper bush
Lower bush
Washer
Oil seal
Circlip
Dust seal
Fork inner tube
- If removal of the damping cylinder is required, unscrew the damping cylinder bolt from the bottom of the fork. Discard the sealing washer.
- Slide the damping cylinder out of the fork inner tube. Collect the centering collar from the lower end of the damping cylinder.
Damping cylinder
Front Fork - Inspection
- Thoroughly clean and examine all components for damage, wear, scoring, corrosion. The condition of the bushes and damper rod piston ring (where fitted) is very important. Renew the components as necessary.
- Always renew the damper rod bolt sealing washer (where fitted), oil seal, dust seal and seal circlip every time the fork is dismantled.
- Always renew the bushes if the fork inner and outer tubes have been separated.
Left Hand Front Fork - Assembly
Warning - Suspension - Front forks have precision machined parts
- Lubricate the oil seal, upper and lower bushes for the inner tube with clean fork oil.
- Install service tool T3880642 to the fork inner tube. Ensure the tool is not damaged and that it covers the bush groove fully.
Fork inner tube
T3880642 - Fork Seal Guide/Protector
- Slide a new dust seal on to the fork inner tube as noted for removal.
- Slide the circlip and a new oil seal on to the fork inner tube as noted for removal.
- Slide the washer and a new lower bush onto the inner tube.
- Remove service tool T3880642 from the fork inner tube.
- Fit a new upper bush to the fork inner tube.
Upper bush
Lower bush
Washer
Oil seal
Circlip
Dust seal
Fork inner tube
- Insert the fork inner tube assembly into the fork outer tube.
- Using the narrow end of service tool T3880003, guide the lower bush, washer and oil seal into place.
T3880003 - Front Fork Seal Installer
Oil seal
Fork inner tube
Fork outer tube
- Secure the oil seal in position with the circlip, ensuring it is correctly located in its groove.
- Position the dust seal to the outer tube.
- Invert service tool T3880003 and, using hand pressure only, push the dust seal squarely into the outer tube.
T3880003 - Front Fork Seal Installer
Dust seal
- Return the fork to an upright position, with the lower end of the fork inner tube secure in service tool T3880171.
- Refill the fork with new oil (see Fork Oil Change - Oil Refilling).
- Fit the spring into the fork inner tube as noted during removal.
Spring
Fork outer tube
- If removed, fit a new O-ring to the top cap.
- If removed, screw the top cap fully onto the joint rod.
- Hold the top cap while tightening the lock nut to 20 Nm.
- With the fork fully compressed use service tool T3880367 to fit the fork joint rod assembly to the inner tube.
T3880367 - Wrench, Damper Cylinder, 33mm
Top cap
Joint rod
Fork outer tube
- Remove the fork from service tool T3880171 and transfer to a soft jawed vice.
Front fork assembly
Soft jaws
- With the lower end of the fork inner tube secure in the vice, tighten the joint rod assembly to 90 Nm using a torque wrench fitted with a suitable crow foot spanner adapter (see Use of Crow Foot Spanner Adapters with Torque Wrenches).
- Lubricate the O-ring on the top cap with a smear of clean fork oil then screw the top cap fully into the fork outer tube.
- Tighten the top cap to 35 Nm.
Refit the fork assembly (see Front Fork - Installation).
Right Hand Front Fork - Assembly
Warning - Suspension - Front forks have precision machined parts
- Fit the centering collar to the lower end of the damping cylinder.
- Fit the damping cylinder to the fork inner tube.
- Clean the threads of the damping cylinder bolt and fit a new sealing washer. Prevent the cylinder from turning while tightening the damping cylinder securing bolt to 20 Nm.
- Lubricate the oil seal, upper and lower bushes for the inner tube with clean fork oil.
- Install service tool T3880642 to the fork inner tube. Ensure the tool is not damaged and that it covers the bush groove fully.
Fork inner tube
T3880642 - Fork Seal Guide/Protector
- Slide a new dust seal on to the fork inner tube as noted for removal.
- Slide the circlip and a new oil seal on to the fork inner tube as noted for removal.
- Slide the washer and a new lower bush onto the inner tube.
- Remove service tool T3880642 from the fork inner tube.
- Fit a new upper bush to the fork inner tube.
Upper bush
Lower bush
Washer
Oil seal
Circlip
Dust seal
Fork inner tube
- Insert the fork inner tube assembly into the fork outer tube.
- Using the narrow end of service tool T3880003, guide the lower bush, washer and oil seal into place.
T3880003 - Front Fork Seal Installer
Oil seal
Fork inner tube
Fork outer tube
- Secure the oil seal in position with the circlip, ensuring it is correctly located in its groove.
- Position the dust seal to the outer tube.
- Invert service tool T3880003 and, using hand pressure only, push the dust seal squarely into the outer tube.
T3880003 - Front Fork Seal Installer
Dust seal
- Return the fork to an upright position, with the lower end of the fork inner tube secure in service tool T3880171.
- Refill the fork with new oil (see Fork Oil Change - Oil Refilling).
- Position the fork assembly as for compression of the fork spring during disassembly.
- Make sure that the damper rod lock nut is screwed fully onto the threads of the damper rod.
- Fit the spring, washer and spring spacer into the fork inner tube as noted during removal.
Spring spacer
washer
Spring
Damper rod lock nut
- Attach service tool T3880085 to the threads of the damper rod and pull the damper upwards.
- Fit service tool T3880067 over the spring spacer. Position the two adjustable arms to the spring spacer. Screw in the arms until they positively engage in the spring spacer holes.
- Using service tool T3880067, manually compress the fork spring and with the aid of an assistant, fit the split collar below the damper lock nut.
Damper lock nut
T3880067 - Fork Spring Compressor
Split collar
- Remove service tool T3880085 from the damper rod.
- Fit a new O-ring to the top cap.
- Screw the top cap fully onto the damper rod.
- Compress the fork spring using service tool T3880067 and with the aid of an assistant, hold the top cap while tightening the damper rod lock nut to 20 Nm.
- Remove service tool T3880067 from the spring spacer.
- Lubricate the O-ring on the top cap with a smear of clean fork oil then screw the top cap fully into the outer tube.
- Tighten the top cap to 35 Nm.
- Refit the fork assembly (see Front Fork - Installation).
Handlebars - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Mirrors - Remove L Series
Front Master Cylinder - Remove L Series
Handlebar End Weights - Removal L Series
Handlebar End Weights - Removal (if applicable)
Twist Grip - Removal L Series
- Release the fixings securing the right hand switch housing to the handlebar.
Fixings
Right hand switch housing
- Release the fixings and remove the clamp from the clutch lever assembly. Without disconnecting the clutch cable, lay the lever aside.
Clutch lever
Fixings
- Release the two fixings and remove the left hand grip from the handlebar. Collect the two washers.
Fixing (one of two shown)
- Release the fixings securing the left hand switch housing to the handlebar.
Left hand switch housing
Fixings
- Support the handlebars and remove the handlebar clamp bolts.
Handlebar clamp
Fixings
- Remove the clamp and the handlebars.
Handlebars - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Locate the handlebars on to the upper yoke, fit the clamp and the fixings. Do not fully tighten at this stage.
- Rotate the handlebars so that the alignment mark on the handlebar aligns with the handlebar clamp split line.
Alignment mark
Split line
- Tighten the handlebar clamp fixings, front ones first, to 26 Nm.
- Align the left hand switch housing to the handlebar, ensure the locating lug aligns with the hole in the handlebar. Fit the two screws and tighten to 2.5 Nm.
Left hand switch housing
Fixings
- Refit the left hand grip with two fixings and washers, and tighten to 3 Nm.
- Locate the clutch lever assembly to the handlebar and fit the clamp.
- Align the clutch lever split line with the alignment mark on the handlebar. Tighten the clamp fixings, upper one first, to 9 Nm.
Clutch lever
Fixings
- Align the right hand switch housing to the handlebar, ensure the locating lug aligns with the hole in the handlebar. Fit the two fixings and tighten to 2.5 Nm.
Fixings
Right hand switch housing
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Twist Grip - Installation L Series
Handlebar End Weights - Installation L Series
Handlebar End Weights - Installation (if applicable)
Front Master Cylinder - Install L Series
Mirrors - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Handlebar End Weights - Removal
- Release and discard the fixings and remove the handlebar end weights.
|
Handlebar End Weights - Installation
- Install the handlebar end weights with new fixings and tighten to 3 Nm.
|
Upper Yoke - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Instruments - Remove L Series
Clutch Cable - Remove L Series
Upper Yoke Remove LG1; LGX
- Release the fixings securing the handlebar clamp to the upper yoke, detach the clamps and release the handlebar.
Handlebar clamp
Fixings
- As an assembly, raise the handle bars until clear of the upper yoke. Rest the assembly forward of the steering stem such that access to the upper yoke centre nut is unrestricted. Ensure the master cylinder remains in an upright position.
- Loosen the upper yoke pinch bolts.
- Remove the upper yoke centre nut.
Upper yoke centre nut
- Ease the upper yoke from the forks and remove from the motorcycle.
- If required, release the four fixings and remove the instruments bracket from the upper yoke.
Upper Yoke - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Upper yoke install LG1; LGX
- If required, refit the instruments bracket to the upper yoke with four fixings and tighten to 3 Nm.
- Refit the upper yoke and tighten the upper yoke centre nut to 90 Nm.
- Tighten the upper yoke pinch bolts, upper fixings first, to 26 Nm.
- Locate the handlebar assembly in the upper yoke. Fit the handlebar clamp and bolts.
- Align the handlebar alignment mark with the front split line of the left hand side.
- Tighten the front clamp bolts to 26 Nm, then the rears.
Alignment mark
Split line (left hand side)
- Reroute the harnesses through the upper yoke wire guides as noted during removal.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Clutch Cable - Install L Series
Instruments - Install - LG1; LGX; LL1
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Lower Yoke and Headstock Bearings - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Headlight - Remove L Series
Lower Yoke Remove LG1; LGX
- Remove the upper yoke centre nut.
Upper yoke centre nut
- As an assembly, raise the upper yoke and handle bars until clear of the steering stem. Rest the assembly forward of the steering stem such that access to the adjustment nuts is unrestricted. Ensure the master cylinder remains in an upright position.
- Using service tool T3880023, remove the lock nut and tab washer. Discard the tab washer.
Adjuster nut
Lock nut
T3880023 - 50 mm Socket
- Using service tool T3880750, remove the adjuster nut.
T3880750 - Headstock Service Tool
Proprietary wrench
Adjuster nut
- Remove the lower yoke from below the frame headstock.
- Using a suitable drift, evenly and progressively drive the bearing races from the frame headstock.
- Remove the inner race and dust seal from the lower yoke using a press or puller.
Lower Yoke and Headstock Bearings - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Lower Yoke Install LG1; LGX
- Fit a new dust seal to the steering stem on the lower yoke.
Steering stem
Dust seal
- Press a new lower bearing inner race onto the steering stem of the lower yoke.
Bearing
Lower yoke
Press bed
- Evenly and progressively drive a new complete upper bearing into the frame headstock.
- Lubricate the lower bearing using a heavy duty, lithium based, NLGI 2 specification grease such as Castrol SpheerolTM LCX 222.
- Drive a new lower outer bearing into the frame headstock.
- Lubricate the upper bearing using a heavy duty, lithium based, NLGI 2 specification grease such as Castrol SpheerolTM LCX 222.
- Insert the lower yoke to the frame, fit the upper bearing and race, and retain with the adjuster nut.
- Ensure that the threads on the steering stem are free from grease and adjust the headstock bearings (see Steering Head Bearing - Adjustment).
- Locate the upper yoke to the steering stem. Install but do not fully tighten the upper yoke centre nut at this stage.
- Fit the forks (see Front Fork - Installation).
- Tighten the upper yoke centre nut to 90 Nm.
- Check that no free play exists in the headstock bearings. Adjust as necessary (see Steering Head Bearing - Check and Steering Head Bearing - Adjustment).
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Headlight - Install L Series
Instruments - Install - LG1; LGX; LL1
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Rear Suspension and Swinging Arm
Exploded View - Rear Suspension Unit
Exploded View - Swinging Arm
Rear Suspension Unit
Warning - Suspension - Contents under Pressure, Never Disassemble the RSU
RSU warning symbol and text
The rear suspension units are sealed units and do not have any internally user serviceable parts. |
Rear Suspension Spring Preload Adjustment
The spring preload adjuster is located at the bottom of the rear suspension unit.
Rear adjuster settings are counted from one, with position one being with the adjuster turned fully clockwise. Position one gives the minimum amount of spring preload. There are seven adjuster positions in total. Position seven gives the maximum amount of spring preload.
|
A. Anticlockwise direction
B. Clockwise direction
To change the rear suspension spring preload setting:
Locate the C spanner supplied in the tool kit.
Insert the C spanner into the slots of the spring preload adjuster ring.
Turn the spring preload adjuster ring anticlockwise (shown as direction A in the diagram) towards the left hand side of the motorcycle to increase spring preload.
Turn the spring preload adjuster ring clockwise (shown as direction B in the diagram) towards the right hand side of the motorcycle to decrease spring preload.
Rear Suspension Settings
The motorcycle is delivered from the factory with all the suspension settings set at the Solo Riding setting as shown in the suspension settings table. The Solo Riding suspension settings provide a comfortable ride and good handling characteristics for general, solo riding.
The details shown in the suspension settings table are only a guide. Setting requirements may vary for rider and passenger weight and personal preferences.
Spring Preload Settings
Loading Condition | Spring Preload1 |
---|---|
Solo Riding | 1 |
Solo Riding with Accessories/Loading (not exceeding limits) | 1 |
Rider and Passenger | 7 |
Rider and Passenger with Accessories/Loading (not exceeding limits) | 7 |
1 Position 1 is minimum (fully clockwise) and position 7 is maximum (fully anticlockwise). |
Rear Suspension Unit - Removal
Warning - Hot Exhaust
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Side Panels - Removal LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2
Fuel Tank - Remove L Series
Airbox - Remove L Series
Rear Wheel - Remove L Series
RSU Remove LG1; LGX
- Remove the two push release plastic rivets securing the rear suspension unit guard to the rear hugger. Remove the rear suspension unit guard.
Rear suspension unit guard
Plastic rivets
- Remove the two fixings and remove the rear hugger and chain guard.
Rear hugger and chain guard
Fixings
- Remove the fixing, flanged sleeve and plate from the drive chain rubbing strip.
Drive chain rubbing strip
Fixing
Flanged sleeve
Plate
- Remove the front fixing and remove the drive chain rubbing strip from the swinging arm.
Drive chain rubbing strip
Fixing
- Position a suitable block to support the swinging arm.
- Remove the upper rear suspension unit fixing and discard the lock nut.
- Remove the lower fixing, discard the lock nut and remove the rear suspension unit.
Upper fixing
Rear suspension unit
Lower fixing
Rear Suspension Unit Lower Mounting Bearing Replacement
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
RSU Remove L Series
Caution - General - When using a press
Removal
- Remove the bearing sleeve and seals. Discard the seals.
- Using a suitable press, remove the needle roller bearing.
Bearing sleeve
Seals
Needle roller bearing
Trident model shown, Tiger Sport and Daytona 660 models similar |
Installation
- Install the new bearing using a suitable press.
- Fit new bearing seals and carefully insert the bearing sleeve.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
RSU Install L Series
Rear Suspension Unit Upper Mounting Bush Replacement
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
RSU Remove L Series
Warning - General - When using a press
|
Removal
- Using a suitable press, remove the upper mounting bush.
Installation
- Install the new bush using a suitable press.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
RSU Install L Series
Rear Suspension Unit - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
RSU Install LG1; LGX
- Refit the rear suspension unit to the motorcycle and refit the fixings with new lock nuts.
Upper fixing
Rear suspension unit
Lower fixing
- Raise the swinging arm as high as the slack in the linkage units will allow. This will ensure the rear suspension unit and rear suspension linkages are sat in their correct seating position. Support with a suitable block.
- If required, tighten the drag link and rocker centre fixing to 48 Nm whilst holding the lock nut.
- Tighten the rocker pivot fixing to 48 Nm whilst holding the lock nut.
- Tighten drag link lower fixing to 48 Nm whilst holding the lock nut.
Drag link lower fixing
Drag link
Drag link and rocker centre fixing
Rocker
Rocker pivot fixing
- Tighten the rear suspension unit lower fixing to 48 Nm whilst holding the lock nut.
- Tighten the rear suspension unit upper fixing to 48 Nm whilst holding the lock nut.
- If removed, refit the left hand control plate and tighten the fixings to 24 Nm.
- Check the condition of the drive chain rubbing strip and replace if necessary.
- Install the drive chain rubbing strip to the swinging arm and install the front fixing.
Drive chain rubbing strip
Fixing
- Install the plate, flanged sleeve and fixing to the drive chain rubbing strip. Tighten the front and rear fixings to 4 Nm.
Drive chain rubbing strip
Fixing
Flanged sleeve
Plate
- Refit the rear hugger and chain guard with two fixings and tighten to 4 Nm.
Rear hugger and chain guard
Fixings
- Refit the rear suspension unit guard to the rear hugger and secure with the two plastic rivets.
Rear suspension unit guard
Plastic rivets
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Rear Wheel - Install L Series
Airbox - Install L Series
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Side Panels - Install LG1; LGX
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Drag Link and Rocker - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
RSU Remove L Series
- Remove the two fixings and remove the left hand control plate.
- Remove the lower drag link fixing and discard the lock nut.
- Remove the rocker pivot fixing and discard the lock nut.
- Remove the drag link and rocker assembly.
- If required, remove the drag and rocker centre fixing and discard the lock nut. Separate the drag link and rocker.
Drag link lower fixing
Drag link
Drag link and rocker centre fixing
Rocker
Rocker pivot fixing
Drag Link Bearing Replacement
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
RSU Remove L Series
Drag and Drop Links - Removal L Series
Warning - General - When using a press
|
Removal
- Remove the drag link bearing sleeve and seals. Discard the seals.
- Using a suitable press, remove the needle roller bearings.
Installation
- Install the new bearings (marked side facing outwards) to the correct depth using service tool T3880368 and a suitable press.
- Fit new bearing seals and carefully insert the bearing sleeves.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Drag and Drop Links - Installation L Series
RSU Install L Series
Rocker Bearing Replacement
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
RSU Remove L Series
Drag and Drop Links - Removal L Series
Warning - General - When using a press
|
Removal
- Remove the drop link bearing sleeves and seals. Discard the seals.
- Using a suitable press, remove the needle roller bearings.
Installation
- Install the new bearings (marked side facing outwards) to the correct depth using service tool T3880368 and a suitable press.
- Fit new bearing seals and carefully insert the bearing sleeves.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Drag and Drop Links - Installation L Series
RSU Install L Series
Drag Link and Rocker - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- If required, refit the drag link and rocker centre fixing with a new lock nut. Do not tighten at this stage.
- Refit the drag link and rocker assembly to the swinging arm and secure with the rocker pivot fixing and a new lock nut. Do not tighten at this stage.
- Refit the drag link lower fixing with a new lock nut. Do not tighten at this stage.
|
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
RSU Install L Series
Swinging Arm - Removal
Warning - Hot Exhaust
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Exhaust - Removal L Series
Rear Mudguard - Removal LG1; LGX
Rear Wheel - Remove L Series
RSU Remove L Series
Drag and Drop Links - Removal L Series
Swinging Arm Remove LG1; LGX
- Remove the harness conduit from the swinging arm and remove the cable ties. Note the routing of the harness for installation and position the harness to one side.
Fir tree clips
Harness conduit
Harness
Cable ties
- Remove the swinging arm pivot covers from the frame.
Swinging arm pivot cover (left hand side shown)
- Remove the nut and washer from the swinging arm spindle.
Nut
Swinging arm spindle
- Partially withdraw the swinging arm spindle from the right hand side, to allow access to the frame adjuster sleeve located on the left hand side of the frame.
- Engage service tool T3880104 in the slots of the frame adjuster sleeve and rotate anticlockwise to loosen the sleeve fully.
Frame adjuster sleeve
T3880104 - Swinging Arm Adjuster Wrench
- Support the swinging arm and remove the swinging arm spindle from the right hand side of the motorcycle.
- Remove the swinging arm clear of the motorcycle and drive chain.
Swinging Arm - Inspection
- Check all swinging arm bearings for damage, pitting, and cracks. Replace as necessary.
- Check the swinging arm for damage. Replace as necessary.
- Check all bearing seals for damage, splits etc. Replace as necessary.
- Check the drive chain rubbing strip for wear and damage. Replace as necessary.
Swinging Arm - Disassembly
- Remove the bush, bearing sleeve and seal from the left hand side.
- Remove the bush, bearing sleeve and seal from the right hand side.
- Remove the right hand side needle roller bearing by drifting through from the left.
- Remove the spacer tube.
- Remove the left hand side needle roller bearing by drifting through from the right.
Bush
Sleeve
Seal
Needle roller bearing
Spacer tube
Swinging Arm - Assembly
Bush
Sleeve
Seal
Needle roller bearing
Spacer tube
- Install the spacer tube, needle roller bearings (marked faces outwards), seals, sleeves and bushes into the swinging arm in the order shown above. Use new seals throughout.
Swinging Arm - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Swinging Arm Install LG1; LGX
- Position the swinging arm to the frame ensuring the drive chain is in position on the rubbing strip.
- Refit the swinging arm spindle from the right hand side such that it will support the swinging arm, but not pass all the way through the frame adjuster sleeve. This will allow service tool T3880104 to engage in the slot in the frame adjuster sleeve.
- Using service tool T3880104, tighten the frame adjuster sleeve to 6 Nm.
Frame adjuster
T3880104 - Swinging Arm Adjuster Wrench
- Fully insert the swinging arm spindle.
- Fit the washer and a new lock nut and tighten to 110 Nm.
- Refit the swinging arm pivot covers.
- Route the harness to the swinging arm as noted during removal.
- Refit the conduit with the two fir tree clips and fit two new cable ties.
Fir tree clips
Harness conduit
Harness
Cable ties
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Drag and Drop Links - Installation L Series
RSU Install L Series
Exhaust - Installation L Series
Rear Mudguard - Installation LG1; LGX
Rear Wheel - Install L Series
Brakes
Exploded Views
Exploded View – Front Brake Caliper and Brake Discs
Exploded View - Front Brake Master Cylinder
Exploded View – Rear Brake Caliper and Brake Disc
Exploded View - Rear Brake Master Cylinder
Exploded View - ABS System
Braking System Maintenance and Safety
Braking System Maintenance Safety Precautions
Changing Brake Fluid
Brake fluid must be changed every two calendar years, irrespective of the mileage the motorcycle has covered in that time.
Bleeding the Front Brakes
Brake Fluid Replacement - Routine Maintenance
Braking performance reduces as brake fluid ages, Repeated stops cause brake fluid to heat and cool rapidly reducing braking performance.
Brake fluid absorbs moisture over a period of time and becomes contaminated as it ages.
Therefore brake fluid should be replaced at specified intervals as instructed in the routine maintenance schedule, see Brake Fluid - Renew.
Brake Bleeding - Description
Brake Bleeding
When removing or replacing brake components and the brake line is opened air will enter as fluid escapes.
If the brake bleed procedure is not carried out air can become trapped in the brake fluid.
A consequence of air being trapped in the brake system is that the brake can feel soft/spongy and the performance of the brakes will be reduced.
Bleeding The Brakes - General Warning, Cautions and Notes
Front Brake Bleed Procedure Table
The following table indicates the procedure to follow when carrying out repairs or replacement of the following brake components.
Brake Bleed Procedure Table
When replacing/fitting the | Bleed the brakes as follows: | ||||||||
ABS Modulator | Front Brake Lever Setting | Brake Fluid Cap Removal | Back bleed master cylinder | Brake master cylinder bleed1 | Bleed brake caliper(s) | Final bleed procedure | Brake caliper conditioning | Front Brake Lever Setting | Brake Fluid Cap Installation |
Master Cylinder | Front Brake Lever Setting | Brake Fluid Cap Removal | Back bleed master cylinder | Brake master cylinder bleed1 | Final bleed procedure | Brake caliper conditioning | Front Brake Lever Setting | Brake Fluid Cap Installation | - |
Brake Caliper(s) | Front Brake Lever Setting | Brake Fluid Cap Removal | Bleed brake caliper(s) | Final bleed procedure | Brake caliper conditioning | Front Brake Lever Setting | Brake Fluid Cap Installation | - | - |
Brake Hose/line(s) | Front Brake Lever Setting | Brake Fluid Cap Removal | Brake master cylinder bleed1 | Bleed brake caliper(s) | Final bleed procedure | Brake caliper conditioning | Front Brake Lever Setting | Brake Fluid Cap Installation | - |
1 For models with a front brake master cylinder bleed screw only.
Front Brake Lever Setting
- Note the rider's setting of the brake lever adjuster.
- Set the brake lever adjuster to position No. 1.
- Once the bleeding operation is complete, reset the brake lever adjuster to the rider's preferred setting as noted prior to setting the maximum adjustment.
|
Front Brake Fluid Cap Removal
- Turn the handlebars to bring the fluid reservoir to a level position.
Front reservoir upper level
Front reservoir lower level
Screws
- Remove the screws from the brake reservoir cover.
- Carefully remove the reservoir cover taking care not to spill any fluid.
- Check the condition of the sealing diaphragm for the reservoir. Replace if necessary.
Master Cylinder Back Bleed
- Remove the caliper mounting fixings and slide the brake caliper off the brake disc.
Brake pad retaining pin
Brake caliper fixings
- Using a suitable flat metal plate approximately 2 mm thick and 30 to 50 mm wide (for example a gasket scraper) between the brake pads, pump the front brake lever slowly until the plate is held by the brake pads. Do not allow the pistons to fall out.
- Being careful not to damage the brake pad material, use the metal plate against the brake pads to push the caliper pistons in evenly and apply pressure to the system.
- Repeat steps 2 and 3 until no more air appears in the reservoir.
- Refit the front brake caliper (see Front Brake Caliper - Installation).
Front Brake Caliper Bleed
- Remove the rubber cap from the bleed nipple on the right hand caliper.
- Attach a transparent tube to the bleed nipple.
Bleed nipple
Bleed tube
Container
- Place the other end of the tube in a suitable receptacle containing new brake fluid.
- Slowly apply and slowly release pressure to the brake lever five times, maintaining pressure on the final application.
- Briefly open and close the caliper bleed screw slightly as per the note.
- Repeat steps 4 and 5.
- Slowly apply and slowly release pressure to the brake lever another five times, maintaining pressure on the final application.
- Open the bleed screw slightly to allow fluid to flow out but to still feel resistance in the brake lever.
- Leave the bleed screw slightly open and slowly release the brake lever.
- Slowly apply and slowly release pressure to the brake lever another five times, closing the bleed screw on the final application.
- Repeat steps 4 to 11 until no more air appears in the bleed tube.
- Tighten the bleed screw to the 6 Nm.
- Fill the reservoir to the upper level with new DOT 4 fluid.
- Repeat front brake caliper bleed for the left hand caliper.
- Remove the transparent bleed tube.
Final Bleed Procedure
- Repeat the bleed procedure as detailed in Front Brake Caliper Bleed.
- If brake lever travel is unacceptably high, repeat the front brake bleed procedure.
- If the brake lever travel is acceptable, refit the front brake reservoir cover and tighten the screws to 1.5 Nm.
- Check that the brakes operate correctly. Rectify as necessary.
Front Brake Caliper Conditioning
- On the right hand side caliper, using a suitable tool, push the caliper pistons 1-2 mm into the caliper body by forcing the brake pads apart.
- Operate the brake lever to pump the pistons back out until the brake pads come into contact with the brake disc.
- Repeat steps 1 to 2 on the same caliper until the pistons have been pushed in and out three times.
- Repeat steps 1 to 3 on the left hand side caliper.
- Slowly apply front brake lever to the handlebar and maintain that pressure for approximately five seconds. Slowly release the lever, and leave for 30 seconds. Repeat three times.
Brake Fluid Cap - Installation
- Fit the diaphragm seal into the reservoir cap and make sure that the holes for the fixings in the cap and the diaphragm seal are correctly aligned.
- Install the fixings into the cap and diaphragm seal assembly.
- Hold the assembly together and position the cap, diaphragm seal and fixings onto the reservoir.
Fixings
- Tighten the fixings to 1.5 Nm.
Bleeding the Rear Brakes
Brake Fluid Replacement - Routine Maintenance
Braking performance reduces as brake fluid ages, Repeated stops cause brake fluid to heat and cool rapidly reducing braking performance.
Brake fluid absorbs moisture over a period of time and becomes contaminated as it ages.
Therefore brake fluid should be replaced at specified intervals as instructed in the routine maintenance schedule, see Brake Fluid - Renew.
Brake Bleeding - Description
Brake Bleeding
When removing or replacing brake components and the brake line is opened air will enter as fluid escapes.
If the brake bleed procedure is not carried out air can become trapped in the brake fluid.
A consequence of air being trapped in the brake system is that the brake can feel soft/spongy and the performance of the brakes will be reduced.
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Rear Brake Bleed Procedure Table
The following table indicates the procedure to follow when carrying out repairs or replacement of the following brake components.
Rear Brake Bleed Procedure Table
When replacing/fitting the | Bleed the brakes as follows: | |||||
ABS Modulator | Brake Fluid Cap Removal | Back bleed front and rear master cylinders | Bleed brake caliper | Final bleed procedure | Brake caliper conditioning | Brake Fluid Cap Installation |
Master Cylinder | Brake Fluid Cap Removal | Back bleed master cylinder | Final bleed procedure | Brake caliper conditioning | Brake Fluid Cap Installation | - |
Brake Caliper | Brake Fluid Cap Removal | Bleed brake caliper | Final bleed procedure | Brake caliper conditioning | Brake Fluid Cap Installation | - |
Brake Hose/Line(s) | Brake Fluid Cap Removal | Back bleed master cylinder | Bleed brake caliper | Final bleed procedure | Brake caliper conditioning | Brake Fluid Cap Installation |
Brake Fluid Cap Removal
- Unscrew and remove the rear brake reservoir cover taking care not to spill any fluid.
- Carefully remove the diaphragm seal.
- Check the condition of the diaphragm seal. Replace if necessary.
Rear reservoir
Rear reservoir upper level
Rear reservoir lower level
Rear Brake Master Cylinder Back Bleed
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Rear Wheel - Remove L Series
- Remove the brake caliper and carrier assembly.
Caliper carrier, wheel shown removed for clarity
Swinging arm slot
Caliper carrier groove
- Using a suitable flat metal plate approximately 2 mm thick and 30 to 50 mm wide (for example a gasket scraper) between the brake pads, pump the rear brake pedal slowly until the plate is held by the brake pads. Do not allow the pistons to fall out.
- Being careful not to damage the brake pad material, use the metal plate against the brake pads to push the caliper pistons in evenly.
- Push the pistons into the caliper to apply pressure to the system.
- Position the rear brake caliper and carrier to the swinging arm as noted prior to removal. Align the groove in the carrier with the boss on the swinging arm.
Caliper carrier, wheel shown removed for clarity
Swinging arm slot
Caliper carrier groove
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Rear Wheel - Install L Series
Rear Brake Caliper Bleed
- Remove the rubber cap from the caliper bleed screw.
- Attach a transparent tube to the bleed screw.
- Place the other end of the tube in a suitable container containing new brake fluid.
Bleed screw
Spanner
Bleed tube
- Slowly apply and slowly release pressure to the brake pedal five times, maintaining pressure on the final application.
- Open the bleed screw slightly to allow fluid to flow out but to still feel resistance in the brake pedal.
- Close the bleed screw.
- Slowly apply and slowly release pressure to the brake pedal five times, maintaining pressure on the final application.
- Open the bleed screw slightly to allow fluid to flow out but to still feel resistance in the brake pedal.
- Leave the bleed screw slightly open and slowly release the brake pedal.
- Slowly apply and slowly release pressure to the brake pedal five times.
- Close the bleed screw.
- Repeat steps 4 to 11 until no more air appears in the bleed tube/container.
- With the brake pedal still applied tighten the bleed screw to 6 Nm.
- Fill the reservoir to the upper level with new DOT 4 fluid.
- Remove the transparent bleed tube.
Rear Brake Final Bleed Procedure
- Repeat the bleed procedure as detailed in Rear Caliper Bleed .
- If brake pedal travel is unacceptably high, bleed the rear brake as detailed in Rear Master Cylinder Back Bleed.
- If brake pedal travel is acceptable, refit the rear brake reservoir cover.
Warning Brakes - Dangerous to operate with defective brakes
Brake Caliper Conditioning
- Using a suitable tool, push the rear brake caliper pistons 1-2 mm into the caliper body by forcing the brake pads apart.
Brake pad
Brake caliper
- Operate the brake pedal to pump the pistons back out until the brake pads come into contact with the brake disc.
- Repeat steps 1 and 2 on the caliper until the pistons have been pushed in and out three times.
- Slowly apply the rear brake pedal to the stop and maintain that pressure for approximately five seconds. Slowly release the pedal, and leave for 30 seconds. Repeat three times.
Brake Fluid Cap Installation
- Check the condition of the brake fluid cap sealing diaphragm. Replace the diaphragm if necessary.
- Refit the rear brake reservoir cap.
Rear reservoir
Rear reservoir upper level
Rear reservoir lower level
Brake Pads Wear
Front and rear brake pad wear is automatically compensated for and has no effect on brake lever or pedal action.
Front Brake Discs - Wear
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Wear
- Replace any brake disc if it is worn beyond the service limit or exceeds the disc run-out limit.

Front Brake Disc Thickness | |
Standard | 4.5 mm |
Service Limit | 4.0 mm |

Front Brake Disc Run-out | |
Service Limit: | 0.25 mm |
Measure disc run out using an accurate dial gauge mounted on a surface plate.
|
Rear Brake Disc - Wear
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Replace any brake disc worn beyond the service limit or that exceeds the disc run-out limit.
Rear Brake Disc Thickness | |
Standard | 5.5 mm |
Service Limit | 5.0 mm |
Rear Brake Disc Run-out | |
Service Limit | 0.25 mm |
Measure brake disc run-out using an accurate dial gauge mounted on a surface plate.
|
Breaking-in New Brake Pads and Discs
After replacement brake discs and/or pads have been fitted to the motorcycle, we recommend a period of careful breaking-in that will optimise the performance and longevity of the discs and pads. The recommended distance for breaking in new pads and discs is 200 miles (300 km).
After fitting new brake discs and/or pads avoid extreme braking, ride with caution and allow for greater braking distances during the breaking-in period.
Front ABS Sensor Air Gap Measurement
- Using feeler gauges, measure the air gap between the wheel speed sensor and the pulser ring.
ABS sensor (front sensor shown)
Shim
Pulser ring
Fixing
- Rotate the wheel and repeat the measurement in several places to ensure the pulser ring is not distorted or bent. Renew a damaged pulser ring.
- Adjust the air gap using the correct shim to achieve an air gap between 0.74 mm and 1.36 mm.
- Shims are available in the following sizes:
- If necessary, remove the wheel speed sensor, fit the correct thickness shim and refit the wheel speed sensor and tighten the fixing to 9 Nm.
- Repeat the air gap measurement. Readjust as necessary.
Rear ABS Sensor Air Gap Measurement
Air Gap Measurement
- Using feeler gauges, measure the air gap between the wheel speed sensor and the pulser ring.
- Rotate the wheel and repeat the measurement in several places to ensure the pulser ring is not distorted or bent. Renew a damaged pulser ring.
- Adjust the air gap using the correct shim to achieve an air gap between 0.74 mm to 1.36 mm.
- If necessary, remove the wheel speed sensor, fit the correct thickness shim and refit the wheel speed sensor and tighten the fixing to 9 Nm.
Fixing
ABS sensor
Shim
- Repeat the air gap measurement. Re-adjust as necessary.
ABS Wheel Speed Sensor Air Gap Measurement |
ABS Diagnostics
Pin Point Tests
Link to Diagnostics Chapter
Select the relevant diagnostics chapter.
Links to Diagnostics Chapter - H*8; L*1
Immobiliser/TPMS: Diagnostic - Trouble Codes - Index - Immobiliser/TPMS
Instruments: Diagnostic - Trouble Codes - Index - Instruments
CAN errors (five digit fault code): Diagnostics - Trouble Codes - Index - CAN Errors
Removal and Installation - Front Brake Components
Front Brake Pads - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Warning - Brakes - Unsupported brake lines
- Loosen the brake pad retaining pin.
- Remove the caliper mounting fixings and slide the brake caliper off the brake disc.
Brake pad retaining pin
Brake caliper fixings
- Remove the brake pad retaining pin and remove the brake pads from the caliper. Take care not to lose the brake pad retainer from the mounting bracket or the anti-rattle spring from the brake caliper.
Brake caliper
Outer brake pad
Inner brake pad
Anti-rattle spring
Brake pad retainer
Brake pad retaining pin
Front Brake Pads - Inspection
Check the brake pad anti-rattle spring, brake pad retainer and retaining pin. Renew any component which shows signs of damage or corrosion.
Inspect the brake pads for wear (see Front Brake Wear inspection).
Front Brake Pads - Installation
Warning - Brakes - Pad Friction Material
Warning - Brakes - Pad Carrier Plate Thickness
Warning Brakes - Mineral based grease
Caution - Brakes - lever against brake disc
- If new brake pads are being installed, push the pistons fully back into the caliper body. Keep an eye on the fluid level in the reservoir whilst retracting the pistons to prevent fluid spillage.
- Ensure the brake pad retainer is correctly fitted to the mounting bracket and the anti-rattle spring is securely clipped onto the caliper body.
- Lubricate the brake pad retaining pin with a thin smear of proprietary high temperature copper based grease.
- Fit the brake pads to the brake caliper with their friction material surfaces facing each other. Locate the brake pad upper ends in the mounting bracket retainer then align them with the caliper body and insert the retaining pin.
- Slide the brake caliper onto the brake disc, ensuring the brake pads pass either side of the brake disc, fit the fixings and tighten to 21 Nm.
- Tighten the brake pad retaining pin to 18 Nm.
Brake pad retaining pin
Brake caliper fixings
- Pump the brake lever to correctly position the caliper pistons.
- Check the front brake fluid level and top up as required with new DOT 4 fluid.
- Check for correct brake operation. Rectify as necessary.
Warning - Brakes - Dangerous to operate with defective brakes
Front Brake Caliper - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Caution - Do not spill brake fluid
- Disconnect the brake hose at the front caliper and place the free end of the hose in a suitable container to collect the brake fluid. Discard the two sealing washers.
- Remove the caliper mounting fixings and slide the brake caliper off the brake disc.
Brake pad retaining pin
Brake caliper fixings
- If required, remove the brake pads (see Front Brake Pads - Removal).
Front Brake Caliper - Disassembly
Warning - Brakes - Fingers inside caliper openings
- Separate the caliper and mounting bracket.
- Cover the brake caliper opening with a clean, heavy cloth and, using either compressed air or by reconnecting the master cylinder and pumping the brake lever, eject both pistons from the caliper at the same time.
Dust seals
Piston seals
Pistons
- Extract the dust seals and piston seals, taking care not to damage the brake caliper bores.
- Check the pistons, caliper and mounting bracket for signs of damage, paying particular attention to the caliper bores and pistons. If damage is present, renew the worn component or the complete caliper assembly.
Front Brake Caliper - Inspection
Warning Brakes - Caliper Seals
- Check the pistons and caliper bores for corrosion, scoring and damage. Renew as necessary.
- Inspect the brake pads for damage and wear beyond the service limit. Renew as necessary.
Front Brake Caliper - Assembly
- If all components are serviceable, obtain a piston seal kit and reassemble the caliper as follows:
- Ensure all components are clean, then fit the new seals to their grooves in the caliper bores.
- Lubricate the fluid seals, caliper bore and the outside of the pistons with clean DOT 4 brake fluid.
- Ease the pistons squarely back into the bores, taking care not to displace the seals.
- Lubricate the mounting bracket pins with a suitable silicone based brake grease then reassemble the bracket and caliper. Ensure the pin gaiters are correctly located on both the bracket and caliper.
Caliper sliding pin
Caliper bracket sliding pin
Front Brake Caliper - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle Including locking devices
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Note to be used in service manual with stabilise warning
Front Brake Caliper Install - LG1; LGX
- If removed, fit the brake pads (see Front Brake Pads - Installation).
- Slide the brake caliper onto the brake disc, ensuring the brake pads pass either side of the brake disc, fit the fixings and tighten to 21 Nm.
- If removed, tighten the brake pad retaining pin to 18 Nm.
Brake pad retaining pin
Brake caliper fixings
- Connect the brake hose to the caliper incorporating new sealing washers on each side of the brake hose union.
- Tighten the brake hose union to 25 Nm.
Notice - Do not spill brake fluid
Fill the master cylinder with new, DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed container.
Bleed the front brakes (see Bleeding the Front Brakes).
Check the brakes for correct operation. Rectify any faults as necessary.
Warning Brakes - Dangerous to operate with defective brakes
Front Brake Disc - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Warning - Brakes - Renewing Brake Discs in Pairs
- Remove the front wheel (see Front Wheel - Removal).
- Support the wheel on blocks as illustrated to avoid damage to the wheel centre.
Wheel
Support blocks
- Remove and discard the five fixings and remove the brake disc.
- Repeat for the other disc.
- Collect the ABS pulser ring from the right hand brake disc.
Front Brake Disc - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Locate the right hand brake disc and ABS pulser ring to the wheel as noted during removal.
- Fit new fixings and tighten to 22 Nm.
- Fit the other disc in the same way.
- Refit the front wheel (see Front Wheel - Installation).
- Check, and if necessary, adjust the air gap between the wheel speed sensor and the ABS pulser ring (see Front ABS Sensor Air Gap Measurement).
- Check for correct brake operation. Rectify as necessary.
Warning - Brakes - Dangerous to operate with defective brakes
Front Brake Master Cylinder - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Caution - Do not spill brake fluid
Front Master Cyl Remove - LG1; LGX
- Note the setting of the brake lever adjuster to make sure it is returned to the same position when the overhaul operation is complete.
- Remove the caliper mounting bolts and slide the caliper off the brake disc.
Caliper mounting bolts
Brake pad retaining pin
- Using a suitable flat metal plate approximately 2 mm thick and 30 to 50 mm wide (for example a gasket scraper) between the brake pads, pump the front brake lever slowly until the plate is held by the brake pads. Do not allow the pistons to fall out.
- Noting its orientation for installation, disconnect the brake hose, discard the washers and allow the brake fluid to drain from the master cylinder outlet into a suitable container.
- Release the fixing and remove the brake light switch and bracket.
Brake light switch
Bracket
Fixing
- Remove the pivot lock nut and bolt securing the brake lever to the master cylinder, and remove the lever.
- Release the clamp screws from the handlebar to remove the master cylinder.
Front Brake Master Cylinder - Disassembly
- Detach the rubber boot from the lever end of the cylinder.
- Remove the circlip from beneath the boot.
Circlip
- Remove the piston set from the master cylinder bore noting the relative position of the seals and piston components.
Master cylinder
Spring and piston assembly
Circlip
Rubber boot
Front Brake Master Cylinder - Inspection
- Check the following for wear, damage, cracks or deterioration:
- Always renew the piston and seal set if the cylinder is dismantled.
- Check that the two ports in the master cylinder bore are not blocked.
Ports
Front Brake Master Cylinder - Assembly
Warning Brakes - Mineral based grease
Warning - Brakes - Clean and lubricate internal brake components with DOT 4 fluid
- Lubricate the piston and cylinder with new, clean brake fluid.
- Fit the new piston set into the master cylinder and retain with a new circlip.
- Refit the master cylinder boot.
Front Brake Master Cylinder - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Front Master Cyl Install
- Locate the master cylinder to the handlebars and position the clamp with the UP arrow pointing upwards.
- Align the master cylinder/clamp split line with the alignment mark on the handlebar.
UP arrow
Alignment mark
- Tighten the clamp bolts, upper first and then the lower to 12 Nm.
- Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the maximum mark.
- Allow the brake fluid to flow through the master cylinder until fluid just starts to flow at the front brake hose union, collect any escaping fluid.
- Connect the brake hose to the master cylinder incorporating new sealing washers. Tighten the union bolt to 25 Nm.
- Refit the brake light switch and bracket to the master cylinder as noted during removal. Tighten the fixing to 2 Nm.
Brake light switch
Bracket
Fixing
- Position the brake lever ensuring that the pivot boss is correctly aligned to the pushrod. Fit and tighten the pivot bolt to 1 Nm, and the lock nut to 6 Nm.
- Fill and bleed the front brakes (see Bleeding the Front Brakes).
- Reset the brake lever adjuster to the original setting.
- Examine the system for correct operation and fluid leaks. Rectify as necessary.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Check for correct brake operation. Rectify as necessary.
Warning - Brakes - Dangerous to operate with defective brakes
Removal and Installation - Rear Brakes Components
Rear Brake Pads - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
|
- Remove the rear wheel (see Rear Wheel - Removal).
- Remove the brake pad retaining pin and remove the brake pads. Note the position of the anti-rattle spring
- For inspection and replacing the anti-rattle spring, remove the caliper (see Rear Brake Caliper - Removal).
Rear Brake Pads - Inspection
- Check the friction material of each brake pad for signs of contamination and measure its thickness. If the friction material of either pad is contaminated or has worn beyond the service limit, renew both pads as a set.
Friction material thickness (service limit 1.5 mm)
Brake pads
- Check the retaining pin. Renew any component which shows signs of damage or corrosion.
- Check the caliper body slides easily on the mounting bracket pins and check there is no sign of leakage from the piston seal. Rectify any problems before installing the brake pads.
Rear Brake Pads - Installation
Warning - Brakes - Pad Friction Material
Warning - Brakes - Pad Carrier Plate Thickness
Warning Brakes - Mineral based grease
Caution - Do not spill brake fluid
- Make sure the anti-rattle spring is located as noted during removal.
- If fitting new pads, use hand pressure to compress the caliper piston fully into its bore. Keep an eye on the fluid level in the reservoir whilst retracting the pistons to prevent fluid spillage.
- Fit the brake pads to the caliper in the positions noted during removal.
- Lubricate the pad retaining pin using a minimum amount of proprietary high temperature brake grease.
- Install the brake pad retaining pin and tighten to 18 Nm.
- Refit the rear wheel (see Rear Wheel - Installation).
- Pump the brake pedal to correctly position the caliper pistons.
- Check the brake fluid level in the rear reservoir and top-up as required with new DOT 4 fluid.
- Check for correct brake operation. Rectify as necessary.
Warning - Brakes - Dangerous to operate with defective brakes
Rear Brake Caliper - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Caution - Do not spill brake fluid
- Remove the fixing and remove the rear wheel speed sensor and bracket and position to one side, noting the routing for installation.
Rear wheel speed sensor
Bracket
Fixing
Clips
Wire guide
- Disconnect the rear brake hose at the caliper and place the free end of the hose in a suitable container to collect the brake fluid. Discard the sealing washers.
- Remove the rear wheel (see Rear Wheel - Removal).
- Remove the brake pads (see Rear Brake Pads - Removal).
- Remove the brake caliper and carrier assembly.
Caliper carrier
Swinging arm slot
Caliper carrier groove
Rear Brake Caliper - Disassembly
The following items can be replaced on the rear brake caliper:
Anti-rattle spring
Piston, piston seal and dust seal
Bleed screw
Bleed screw boot.
- Release the two bolts and remove the caliper from the carrier.
Caliper carrier
Anti-rattle spring
Bolts
- Remove the anti-rattle spring.
- Cover the caliper opening with a clean, heavy cloth and, using either compressed air, or by reconnecting the master cylinder and pumping the brake lever, eject the piston from the caliper.
- Extract the dust seal and piston seal, taking care not to damage the caliper bore.
Rear Brake Caliper - Inspection
Warning Brakes - Caliper Seals
- Check the pistons and caliper bores for corrosion, scoring and damage. Renew as necessary.
- Inspect the brake pads for damage and wear beyond the service limit. Renew as necessary.
Rear Brake Caliper - Assembly
Warning Brakes - Mineral based grease
Warning - Brakes - caliper bores - Scratched
Warning - Brakes - Clean and lubricate internal brake components with DOT 4 fluid
- Fit new seals to the caliper. Apply brake fluid to the outside of the caliper piston and fluid seal.
Caliper
Piston seal
Dust seal
Piston
- Carefully push the piston into the caliper by hand.
- If removed, install the anti-rattle spring into the caliper carrier.
- Assemble the caliper onto the carrier. Tighten the rear bolt to 22 Nm and the front bolt to 29 Nm.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Rear Brake Caliper - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Position the caliper and carrier assembly to the swinging arm as noted for removal. Align the boss on the carrier with the slot on the swinging arm.
Caliper carrier
Swinging arm slot
Caliper carrier groove
- Fit the rear wheel (see Rear Wheel - Installation).
- Fit the brake pads (see Rear Brake Pads - Installation).
- Connect the brake hose to the caliper incorporating new washers on each side of the union bolt.
- Tighten the union bolt to 25 Nm.
- Position the wheel speed sensor and bracket to the caliper carrier with its shim between the sensor and caliper carrier. Tighten the fixing to 9 Nm.
Rear wheel speed sensor
Bracket
Fixing
Clips
Wire guide
- Fill the master cylinder with new, DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed container.
- Bleed the rear brake (see Bleeding the Rear Brakes).
- The air gap between the wheel speed sensor and the pulser ring must be between 0.74 mm and 1.36 mm. Check, and if necessary, adjust the air gap (see Rear ABS Sensor Air Gap Measurement).
- Check for correct brake operation. Rectify as necessary.
Warning - Brakes - Dangerous to operate with defective brakes
Rear Brake Disc - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Remove the rear wheel (see Rear Wheel - Removal).
- Support the wheel on blocks to avoid damage to the wheel centre.
- Remove and discard the four screws and remove the ABS pulser ring and brake disc.
Brake disc
Fixing
ABS pulser ring
Rear Brake Disc - Inspection
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Brake Disc Wear
Replace any brake disc worn beyond the service limit or that exceeds the disc run-out limit.
Rear Brake Disc Thickness
Standard: | 5.5 mm |
Service Limit: | 5.0 mm |
Rear Brake Disc Run-out
Service Limit: | 0.25 mm |
Measure disc run-out using an accurate dial gauge mounted on a surface plate.
|
Rear Brake Disc - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Locate the brake disc and ABS pulser ring to the rear wheel as noted during removal.
- Use service tool T3880172 to align the pulser ring and brake disc.
Pulser ring
Brake disc
T3880172 - Pulser Ring Alignment Tool
- Install new fixings and tighten to 22 Nm.
- Remove the service tool T3880172.
- Refit the rear wheel (see Rear Wheel - Installation).
- Check, and if necessary, adjust the air gap between the wheel speed sensor and the ABS pulser ring (see Rear ABS Sensor Air Gap Measurement).
- Check for correct brake operation. Rectify as necessary.
Warning - Brakes - Dangerous to operate with defective brakes
Rear Brake Master Cylinder - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Rear Master Cyl Remove - LG1; LGX
Remove the right hand side panel (see Side Panels - Removal).
Caution - Do not spill brake fluid
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Rear Wheel - Remove L Series
- Using a suitable flat metal plate approximately 2 mm thick and 30 to 50 mm wide (for example a gasket scraper) between the brake pads, pump the rear brake pedal slowly until the plate is held by the brake pads. Do not allow the pistons to fall out.
- Noting its orientation for installation, disconnect the brake hose from the master cylinder, discard the washers and allow the brake fluid to drain from the master cylinder outlet into a suitable container.
- Remove and discard the rear master cylinder reservoir fixing and support the reservoir.
- Remove the two fixings and remove the right hand control plate and rear brake master cylinder assembly.
- Disconnect the rear brake switch from the main harness.
- Remove the two fixings and remove the rear brake switch and bracket from the control plate, noting the routing for installation. Position the brake switch and bracket to one side.
Fixings
Rear brake switch bracket
- Remove the clip and clevis pin at the lower end of the brake push rod.
- Remove the two fixings and remove the master cylinder from the control plate.
Fixings
Clevis pin
Clip
- Disconnect the reservoir hose from the master cylinder if required and collect any brake fluid.
Rear Master Cylinder - Disassembly
- Remove the dust boot from the cylinder and pushrod.
- Remove the circlip retaining the pushrod to the cylinder.
- Remove the pushrod and piston set from the master cylinder bore noting the relative position of the seals and piston components.
Rear brake master cylinder
Piston set
Push rod
Circlip
Dust boot
Brake switch plate
Clip
Clevis pin
Rear Master Cylinder - Inspection
- Visually inspect the master cylinder bore for wear, scratches or corrosion. Replace as necessary.
- Check the piston and cylinder bore for damage, wear or deterioration. Replace as necessary. Always renew the piston seals if the cylinder has been dismantled.
- Examine the pushrod for bends and damage. Replace as necessary.
Rear Master Cylinder - Assembly
Warning Brakes - Mineral based grease
Rear Master Cylinder Assembly LG1; LGX
- Clean the master cylinder bore, piston and seals, with new brake fluid.
- Ensure all ports are clear of obstruction.
- Install the spring and piston set together.
- Apply a small amount of brake grease to the push rod.
- Install the push rod in the master cylinder and retain with a new circlip.
- Refit the dust boot.
Rear brake master cylinder
Piston set
Push rod
Circlip
Dust boot
Brake switch plate
Clip
Clevis pin
- If the push rod and brake switch plates have been disassembled, set the brake switch plate (A) to 39 mm and the push rod free length (B) to 91 mm, as shown below.
- Tighten the lock nuts to 17 Nm.
Push rod and brake switch plate setting dimensions |
Rear Brake Master Cylinder - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle Including locking devices
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Note to be used in service manual with stabilise warning
Rear Master Cyl Install - LG1; LGX
- If required, refit the reservoir hose to the rear brake master cylinder.
- Align the rear brake pedal to the master cylinder push rod and secure with the clevis pin and clip as noted during removal.
- Secure the rear master cylinder to the control plate and tighten the fixings to 16 Nm.
Fixings
Clevis pin
Clip
- Refit the rear brake switch and bracket assembly to the control plate and loosely install the fixings. Make sure the routing of the harness is as noted during removal. Position the rear brake switch until it engages with the brake switch plate. The gap between the brake switch bracket and the brake switch plate should be 0.6 mm.
Brake switch bracket
Brake switch plate
Rear master cylinder
Brake switch
- Tighten the fixings to 3 Nm.
Fixings
Rear brake switch bracket
- Fit the right hand control plate to the frame and tighten its fixings to 24 Nm.
- Reconnect the rear brake switch to the main harness.
- Refit the brake fluid reservoir with a new fixing and tighten to 3 Nm.
- Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the maximum mark.
- Allow the brake fluid to flow through the master cylinder until fluid just starts to flow at the rear brake hose union, collect any escaping fluid.
- Incorporating new washers, fit the brake hose to the master cylinder. Ensuring correct orientation of the brake hose, tighten the union bolt to 25 Nm.
- Fill and bleed the rear brake system (see Bleeding the Rear Brakes).
- Install the right hand side panel (see Side Panels - Installation)
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Check the brakes for correct operation. Rectify any faults as necessary.
Warning Brakes - Dangerous to operate with defective brakes
Removal and Installation - ABS Components
ABS Modulator - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Fuel Tank - Remove L Series
ABS Modulator Remove - LG1; LGX; LL1
Front Brake Caliper
- Remove one of the front caliper mounting fixings and slide the brake caliper off the brake disc.
Fixings
Caliper
- Use a suitable flat metal plate approximately 2 mm thick and 30 to 50 mm wide (for example a gasket scraper) between the brake pads. Pump the front brake lever slowly until the plate is held by the brake pads. Do not allow the pistons to fall out.
- Pull the front brake lever towards the handlebar until a small amount of pressure is felt. Cable tie the brake lever to this position.
Brake lever
Cable tie
Rear Brake Caliper
- Remove the fixing and remove the rear wheel speed sensor and bracket and position to one side, noting the routing for installation.
Rear wheel speed sensor
Bracket
Fixing
Clips
Wire guide
- Remove the rear wheel see Rear Wheel - Removal
- Detach the brake caliper from its carrier assembly.
- Using a suitable a flat metal plate approximately 2 mm thick and 30 to 50 mm wide (for example a gasket scraper) between the brake pads, pump the rear brake pedal until the plate is held by the brake pads.
ABS Hydraulic Modulator/ECM
- Disconnect the electrical connector from the ABS modulator.
- Remove the union bolts and carefully disconnect the four brake lines from the ABS modulator, collecting any brake fluid. Discard the sealing washers.
- Remove and discard the rear fixing from the ABS modulator bracket.
ABS modulator
ABS modulator multiplug
ABS modulator rear fixing
Brake line unions
- Remove and discard the two fixings and remove the ABS modulator and bracket assembly from the frame.
Fixings
ABS modulator bracket
- If required, remove the anti-rotation moulding from the ABS modulator.
- If required, remove and discard the fixings and remove the ABS modulator from the bracket.
Anti-rotation moulding
ABS modulator
Bracket
Fixings
ABS Modulator - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Caution - Do not spill brake fluid
- If required, fit the anti-rotation moulding to the ABS modulator.
- If required, position the ABS modulator onto its bracket. Fit new fixings and tighten to 9 Nm.
Anti-rotation moulding
ABS modulator
Bracket
Fixings
- Make sure the two rubber grommets are fitted to the frame and one is fitted to the ABS modulator bracket.
- Align the ABS modulator and bracket to the frame and secure with two flanged sleeves and two new fixings. Tighten the fixings to 9 Nm.
Fixings
ABS modulator bracket
- Install a flanged sleeve and new fixing and tighten to 9 Nm.
- Incorporating new washers to either side of the unions, fit the brake lines to the ABS modulator as noted for removal. Tighten the brake line unions to 25 Nm.
ABS modulator
ABS modulator multiplug
ABS modulator rear fixing
Brake line unions
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Front ABS Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
FWSS Remove LG1; LGX
Remove the fuel tank bodywork (see Fuel Tank - Removal).
- Disconnect the front ABS wheel speed sensor multiplug.
Front wheel speed sensor multiplug
- Detach the wheel speed sensor harness from its three clips on the front brake hose and the wire guide behind the lower yoke.
- Release the fixing and remove the sensor. Collect the shim from between the sensor and fork leg.
Front ABS wheel speed sensor
Fixing
Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
RWSS Remove - LG1; LGX
Remove the right hand side panel (see Side Panels - Removal).
- Remove the fixing and remove the rear wheel speed sensor and bracket and position to one side, noting the routing for installation. Collect the shim from in between the sensor and the caliper carrier.
- Release the harness from the three clips and two wire guides.
Rear wheel speed sensor
Bracket
Fixing
Clips
Wire guide
Clips
Wire guides
Swinging arm
- Detach the rear ABS wheel speed sensor multiplug from its bracket on the battery tray and disconnect from the main harness.
Front ABS Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
FWSS Install LG1; LGX
- Position the wheel speed sensor to the fork leg with its shim between the sensor and fork leg. Tighten the fixing to 9 Nm.
Front ABS wheel speed sensor
Fixing
- Route the sensor harness along the front brake hose as noted for removal. Secure with the three clips.
- Route the sensor harness through the wire guide behind the lower yoke and through the frame as noted during removal.
- Connect the wheel speed sensor multiplug and secure the harness to the clip behind the bracket. Any slack in the harness must be positioned behind the headstock area.
Front wheel speed sensor multiplug
- Install the fuel tank bodywork (see Fuel Tank - Installation)
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
RWSS Install LG1; LGX
- Refit the rear wheel speed sensor, shim and bracket with the fixing, routing the harness through the two wire guides and three clips as noted during removal. Tighten the fixing to 9 Nm.
Rear wheel speed sensor
Bracket
Fixing
Clips
Wire guide
Clips
Wire guides
Swinging arm
- Connect the wheel speed sensor multiplug and secure to its bracket on the battery tray.
- Refit the right hand side panel (see Side Panels - Installation)
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Front ABS Pulser Ring - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
The procedure for installing the front ABS pulser ring is described in front brake disc installation (see Front Brake Disc - Installation).
Warning - Brakes - Dangerous to operate with defective brakes
Front ABS Pulser Ring - Inspection
- Check the pulser ring for damaged, missing or cracked teeth or distortion. Renew the pulser ring as necessary.
Front ABS Pulser Ring - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
The procedure for removing the front ABS pulser ring is described in front brake disc removal (see Front Brake Disc - Removal).
Rear ABS Pulser Ring - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
The procedure for removing the rear ABS pulser ring is described in rear brake disc removel (see Rear Brake Disc - Removal).
Rear ABS Pulser Ring - Inspection
- Check the pulser ring for damaged, missing or cracked teeth or distortion. Renew the pulser ring as necessary.
Rear ABS Pulser Ring - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
The procedure for installing the rear ABS pulser ring is described in rear brake disc installation (see Rear Brake Disc - Installation).
Warning - Brakes - Dangerous to operate with defective brakes
ABS Hydraulic Circuit Layout
Wheels and Tyres
Exploded View - Front Wheel
Exploded View - Rear Wheel
Tyres
This model is fitted with tubeless tyres, valves and wheel rims. Use only tyres marked 'TUBELESS' and tubeless valves on rims marked 'SUITABLE FOR TUBELESS TYRES'.
Typical Tyre Marking -Tubeless Tyre |
Typical Wheel Marking -Tubeless Tyre |
Typical Tyre Marking - Tubeless Tyre Suitable For Use With An Inner Tube |
Tyre Inflation Pressures
Tyres - Inflation Pressures Warning
Tyres - Inflation Pressures Off-Road Warning
Correct inflation pressure will provide maximum stability, rider comfort and tyre life. Always check tyre pressures before riding when the tyres are cold. Check tyre pressures daily and adjust if necessary. See the Specification section for details of the correct inflation pressures.
Tyre Wear/Wheel Inspection
Warning - Tyre Safety Fragment
Tyre Wear
As the tyre tread wears down, the tyre becomes more susceptible to puncture and failure. It is estimated that 90% of all tyre failures occur during the last 10% of tread life (90% worn). It is false economy and unsafe to use tyres until they are worn to their minimum.
All tyres are fitted with tread wear indicators. When the tyre becomes worn down as far as the top of a tread wear indicator, the tyre is worn beyond its service life and must be replaced.
|
Attention must also be paid to the legal limits for tread wear, which differ from country to country. Tyres that have worn to the legal limit in the country or region in which the motorcycle is operated must be replaced, even if tread wear has not yet reached the level of the tread wear indicators.
In accordance with the scheduled maintenance chart, measure the depth of the tread with a depth gauge, and replace any tyre that has worn to, or beyond the minimum allowable tread depth.
Mud and Snow/Dual Purpose Tyres (if fitted)
The use of mud and snow/dual purpose tyres may result in reduced motorcycle stability. If the stability or handling characteristics of the motorcycle (with the mud and snow/dual purpose tyres fitted) begins to change adversely, then check the tyre tread depth. It is recommended that mud and snow/dual purpose tyres are replaced earlier than normal tyres and before they are worn near to the minimum allowable tread depth, see https://www.triumphmotorcycles.co.uk/owners/your-triumph#tyres.
Wheel Inspection
Inspect wheels for cracks, splits and kerb damage. Always replace wheels that are suspected of having become damaged.
Minimum Recommended Tread Depth
Tyres - Min Rec Tread Depth Warning
In accordance with the periodic maintenance chart, measure the depth of the tread with a depth gauge, and replace any tyre that has worn to, or beyond the minimum allowable tread depth specified in the table below:
Under 80 mph (130 km/h) | 2 mm (0.08 in) |
Over 80 mph (130 km/h) | Front 2 mm (0.08 in) Rear 3 mm (0.12 in) |
Important Tyre Information
All Triumph motorcycles are carefully and extensively tested in a range of riding conditions to ensure that the most effective tyre combinations are approved for use on each model. It is essential that approved tyre combinations are used when purchasing replacement tyres as the use of non-approved tyres or approved tyres in non-approved combinations may lead to motorcycle instability. A list of approved tyres specific to this model is available from your authorised Triumph dealer, or on the internet at www.triumph.co.uk.
Front Wheel - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Remove the front wheel speed sensor (see Front ABS Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal).
- Detach and support the front brake calipers (see Front Brake Caliper - Removal).
- Raise and support the front of the motorcycle.
- Loosen both pinch bolts at the lower end of the left hand fork.
- Release and remove the wheel spindle.
- Remove the wheel and the wheel spacers.
Fork pinch bolts
Wheel spindle
Wheel spacers (left hand shown)
- Place the wheel on wooden blocks.
- Thoroughly clean all components and inspect for wear or damage.
Front Wheel - Inspection
- Check the wheel bearings spin smoothly with no signs of play. If not, renew the bearings (see Front Wheel Bearings - Removal).
Front Wheel - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Lightly smear the wheel spacers with grease and locate in the hubs.
- Position the wheel between the forks ensuring the spacers remain in position on both sides.
- Refit the wheel spindle from the left hand side and tighten to 65 Nm.
- Lower the motorcycle to the ground and position the front wheel up against a fixed surface. Bounce the front suspension numerous times to allow the left hand fork to float to its natural position on the wheel spindle.
- Tighten the fork pinch bolts to 22 Nm.
Fork pinch bolts
Wheel spindle
Wheel spacers (left hand shown)
- Thoroughly clean and degrease the brake discs.
- Refit the front brake calipers (see Front Brake Caliper - Installation).
- Refit the front wheel speed sensor (see Front ABS Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation).
Rear Wheel - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Rear Wheel Remove Fragments LG1
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Rear Mudguard - Removal LG1; LGX
- Remove the fixing and remove the rear wheel speed sensor and bracket and position to one side, noting the routing for installation.
Rear wheel speed sensor
Bracket
Fixing
Clips
Wire guide
Clips
Wire guides
Swinging arm
- Raise and support the rear of the motorcycle to allow removal of the rear wheel.
- Remove the nut from the rear wheel spindle.
Rear wheel spindle nut
- Support the wheel and withdraw the wheel spindle.
- Noting its position, release the brake caliper and carrier from the slot on the swinging arm and roll the wheel forward until the chain can be detached from the rear sprocket.
- Tie the rear brake caliper aside.
- Withdraw the wheel and collect the flanged spacer from the right hand side and the plain spacer from the left hand side.
- Place the wheel on wooden blocks with the drive sprocket uppermost.
- If required, remove the final drive (see Final Drive - Removal).
- Reposition the wheel on wooden blocks with the rear brake disc uppermost.
- If required, remove the rear brake disc (see Rear Brake Disc - Removal).
Rear Wheel - Inspection
- Check the wheel bearings spin smoothly with no signs of play. If not, renew the bearings (see Rear Wheel Bearing - Removal).
Rear Wheel - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Rear Wheel Install LG1 LGX
- Thoroughly clean and degrease the brake disc.
- If removed, refit the brake disc (see Rear Brake Disc - Installation).
- Refit the final drive assembly (see Final Drive - Installation).
- Position the wheel within the swinging arm and refit the chain to the final drive sprocket.
- Position the rear brake caliper and carrier to the swinging arm as noted prior to removal. Align the groove in the carrier with the boss on the swinging arm.
Caliper carrier, wheel shown removed for clarity
Swinging arm slot
Caliper carrier groove
- Refit the wheel spacers, flanged spacer to the right hand side (flange facing outwards) and plain spacer to the left.
Wheel spacer (right hand shown)
- Lift the rear wheel into position, aligning the wheel, caliper carrier and swinging arm.
- Fit the wheel spindle with the threaded end facing to the left.
- Refit the rear wheel speed sensor and bracket with the fixing, routing the harness as noted during removal. Tighten the fixing to 9 Nm.
Rear wheel speed sensor
Bracket
Fixing
Clips
Wire guide
Clips
Wire guides
Swinging arm
Rear Wheel Install Fragments LG1; LGX
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Rear Mudguard - Installation LG1; LGX
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Front Wheel Bearings - Removal
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Front Wheel - Remove L Series
- Place the wheel on wooden blocks to prevent damage to the brake discs.
- Remove and discard the seals and the bearing circlip.
- Using a suitable pin punch, through the centre of the wheel, drift out the wheel bearings. Collect the centre sleeve.
Wheel Bearing Removal |
Rear Wheel Bearing - Removal
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Rear Wheel - Remove L Series
- Place the wheel on wooden blocks to prevent damage to the brake disc.
- Remove and discard the seals and the bearing circlip.
- Using a suitable pin punch, through the centre of the wheel, drift out the wheel bearings. Collect the centre sleeve.
Rear Wheel Bearing Removal |
Wheel Bearings - Inspection
- Check the wheel bearings spin smoothly with no signs of play. If not, renew the bearings.
Front Wheel Bearing - Installation
Bearing insertion tool | Support tool | |
---|---|---|
Left bearing | service tool T3880053 Small face to bearing | service tool T3880065 Large face to wheel |
Right bearing | service tool T3880053 Small face to bearing | service tool T3880065 Large face to wheel |
- Fit the wheel bearings and centre sleeve using the method described above.
T3880053 - Wheel Bearing Extraction Kit
T3880065 - Bearing Installer
- Fit a new circlip.
- Lubricate and fit new seals to the front wheel. Lubricate the seal’s knife-edge with grease to NLGI 2 specification.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Front Wheel - Install L Series
Rear Wheel Bearing - Installation
Bearing insertion tool | Support tool | |
---|---|---|
Left bearing | service tool T3880070 Small face to bearing | service tool T3880065 Large face to wheel |
Right bearing | service tool T3880070 Small face to bearing | service tool T3880065 Large face to wheel |
- Fit the wheel bearings and centre sleeve using the method described above.
- Fit a new circlip.
- Lubricate and fit new seals to the rear wheel. Lubricate the seal’s knife-edge with grease to NLGI 2 specification.
T3880070 - Bearing Installer |
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Rear Wheel - Install L Series
Final Drive
Exploded View - Final Drive
Final Drive Chain
For safety and to prevent excessive wear, the drive chain must be checked, adjusted and lubricated in accordance with scheduled maintenance requirements. Checking, adjustment and lubrication must be carried out more frequently for extreme conditions such as salty or heavily gritted roads.
If the drive chain is badly worn or incorrectly adjusted (either too loose or too tight) the drive chain could jump off the sprockets or break.
Drive Chain Replacement
Rivet link type
Removal of the swinging arm is not required for drive chain replacement, the drive chain can be split for removal from the motorcycle. The following instructions for the replacement of rivet link type drive chains requires the use of service tool T3880027.
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Support the motorcycle on a stand so the rear wheel is clear of the ground.
- Insert the hollow chain cutting tail piece into the tool body so its larger diameter end is facing towards the large pressure screw as shown.
T3880027 - Chain Link Tool Kit
Large pressure screw
Chain cutting tail piece
- Position the chain to the tool ensuring that the chain link pin which is to be removed is aligned with the holes in the chain cutting tail piece and the large pressure screw. Tighten the large pressure screw by hand to grip the chain.
T3880027 - Chain Link Tool Kit
Large pressure screw
Chain
Chain cutting tail piece
- Insert the small pressure screw into the larger pressure screw as shown below, until the cutting pin on the small pressure screw contacts the link pin. Ensure that the cutting pin is centralised on the link pin to be removed.
T3880027 - Chain Link Tool Kit
Small pressure screw
- Retain the tool body then tighten the small pressure screw until the link pin is pressed out from the chain.
- Repeat steps 3 to 5 on the remaining chain link pin.
- Remove the tool and separate the two ends of the chain.
- Remove the chain cutting tail piece from the body.
- Use the old drive chain to pull the new chain into position as follows: Temporarily attach the end of the new chain to a free end of the old chain using the old connector link. Carefully pull the other end of the old chain to pull the new chain around the sprockets.
- Using the new link supplied with the chain kit, join the two ends of the chain. Ensure that the O-rings are positioned as shown below and the link plate is fitted with its markings facing outwards.
O-rings
Link
Link plate
- Insert the riveting tail piece into the tool body so its larger diameter end is facing towards the large pressure screw as shown.
- Insert the link plate holder (marked PH5060R) into the large pressure screw.
Tool body
Large pressure screw
Link plate holder (marked PH5060R)
Riveting tail piece
- Position the tool to the chain. Ensure the link plate holder is correctly located in the large pressure screw.
Tool body
Link plate holder (marked PH5060R)
Link plate
Link
Large pressure screw
- Locate the split link pins such that the pins will enter the groove in the link plate holder when the link plate is pressed on to the link.
Link plate holder
Link plate
Chain link
Link plate holder groove
- Retain the tool body and tighten the large pressure screw until the link plate is pressed fully onto the link.
- Back off the pressure screw, slide the tool assembly to one side and check that the split link is correctly assembled.
- Remove the link plate holder from the tool. Do not remove the riveting tail piece from the tool
- Insert the flare pin into the large pressure screw.
Tool body
Large pressure screw
Riveting tail piece
Flair pin
- Locate one of the split link pins into the riveting tail piece and screw the large pressure screw in until the flare pin contacts the split link end. Ensure the split link pin is centrally located on the flare pin.
- Retain the tool body and tighten the large pressure screw until the split link end is riveted-over.
Tool body
Large pressure screw
Flare pin
- Back off the large pressure screw and rivet the remaining split link pin as described above.
- Remove the tool from the chain and check that both the split link pins are correctly riveted as shown below.
Correct riveting
Insufficient riveting
Excessive riveting
Riveting off-centre
Front Sprocket - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Position the motorcycle on the side stand.
Front Sprocket Cover - Remove L Series
- Bend back the front sprocket lock washer.
- Have an assistant sit on the motorcycle, select sixth gear and apply the front and rear brakes hard.
- Loosen the front sprocket nut.
Nut
Lock washer
Front sprocket
- Remove the front sprocket nut and discard the lock washer.
- Set the drive chain adjustment to allow maximum free play in the drive chain.
- Disengage the front sprocket from the drive chain and slide it off the output shaft.
Front Sprocket - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Fit the front sprocket, as noted during removal, and engage it with the drive chain.
- Fit a new lock washer engaging it with the output shaft splines, and fit the sprocket nut hand tight.
Nut
Lock washer
Front sprocket
- Have an assistant sit on the motorcycle, select sixth gear and apply the front and rear brakes hard.
- Tighten the front sprocket nut to 85 Nm.
- Secure the front sprocket nut in position by bending the lock washer down to contact one of the nut flats.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Front Sprocket Cover - Install L Series
Final Drive - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Rear Wheel - Remove L Series
- Place the wheel on wooden blocks with the drive sprocket uppermost.
- Gently lever the drive flange from the wheel hub.
Drive flange
- Remove the cush drive rubbers.
Cush drive
Rear Sprocket Carrier Bearings - Disassembly
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
- Remove and discard the seal.
Sprocket carrier
Seal
- Remove and discard the bearing circlip.
Sprocket carrier
Circlip
- Turn the sprocket carrier over, and use a pin punch to drift out the ball bearing.
Sprocket carrier
Ball bearing
Rear Sprocket Carrier and Cush Drive - Inspection
- Check the cush drive rubbers for deterioration and cracks.
- Inspect the sprocket teeth for wear, damage and chips.
- Check the wheel and drive flange for wear, cracks and damage.
Rear Sprocket Carrier Bearings - Assembly
Warning - General - When using a press
- Position the ball bearing, marked side facing outwards, to the drive flange.
- Using a suitable press, fully insert the ball bearing into the sprocket carrier.
- Fit a new circlip.
- Install a new seal, marked side facing outwards, to the sprocket carrier.
- Lubricate the seal’s knife-edge with grease to NLGI 2 specification.
- Install the cush drive rubbers to the wheel hub.
- Fit the spacer to the wheel hub as noted for removal.
- Refit the sprocket carrier to the wheel.
Final Drive - Installation
- Install the cush drive rubbers to the wheel.
- Refit the drive flange to the wheel.
- Refit the rear wheel (see Rear Wheel - Installation).
Rear Sprocket - Removal
Caution - Wheels - Do not rest on brake disc
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Rear Wheel - Remove L Series
- Place the wheel on wooden blocks with the drive chain sprocket uppermost.
- Evenly and progressively, remove and discard the rear sprocket lock nuts.
- Remove the rear sprocket.
Lock nut
Sprocket
Rear Sprocket - Installation
Caution - Wheels - Do not rest on brake disc
- If necessary, replace any rear sprocket studs that have been loosened or removed as follows:
Studs (three of six shown)
- Fit the rear sprocket to the sprocket carrier as noted for removal.
- Fit new lock nuts, evenly and progressively tighten to 55 Nm.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Rear Wheel - Install L Series
Drive Chain Rubbing Strip - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Rear Wheel - Remove L Series
Drive Chain Rubbing Strip Remove LG1 LGX
- Remove the fixing, flanged sleeve and plate from the drive chain rubbing strip.
Drive chain rubbing strip
Fixing
Flanged sleeve
Plate
- Remove the front fixing and remove the drive chain rubbing strip from the swinging arm.
Drive chain rubbing strip
Fixing
Drive Chain Rubbing Strip - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Drive Chain Rubbing Strip Install LG1 LGX
- Install the drive chain rubbing strip to the swinging arm and install the front fixing.
Drive chain rubbing strip
Fixing
- Install the plate, flanged sleeve and fixing to the drive chain rubbing strip. Tighten the front and rear fixings to 4 Nm.
Drive chain rubbing strip
Fixing
Flanged sleeve
Plate
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Rear Wheel - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Frame and Bodywork
Exploded View - Frame and Fixings
Exploded View - Front Mudguard
Exploded View - Rear Mudguard
Exploded View - Rear Bodywork
Exploded View - Footrests
Exploded View - Grab Handles - Applicable Markets Only
Exploded View - Ignition Switch and Lock Set
Exploded View - Seat
Exploded View - Side Panels
Exploded View - Saree Guard - Applicable Markets Only
Exploded View - Side Stand
General Frame Inspection
Inspect the frame, bodywork and footrests for accident and other damage. Check all fixings for security. If any faults are found, rectify as necessary. If any faults with the frame are found, the frame must be replaced. Repairs to the frame are not permitted.
Warning Accident -Dealer Referral
Models With a Side Stand Fitted
Check the operation of the side stand to make sure it is securely held in the retracted position by the spring. Rectify any faults.
Models With a Centre Stand Fitted
Check the operation of the centre stand to make sure it is securely held in the retracted position by the spring. Rectify any faults.
Seat - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Caution - Seat Care
Seat Remove LG1
- Insert the ignition key into the seat lock and turn it anticlockwise. This will release the seat from its lock and allow it to be slid rearwards for complete removal from the motorcycle.
Seat lock
Seat - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Seat Install LG1
- Align the two locating holes at the front of the seat with the locating tangs on the fuel tank brackets.
- Engage the seat tongue with the seat tongue locating position on the motorcycle.
Seat
Seat lock peg
Seat lock
Seat tongue
Seat tongue locating position
- Align the seat lock peg to the lock and press down, engaging the seat lock. An audible click can be heard when the seat is fully engaged in its lock.
- Grasp the seat and pull firmly upwards to ensure that it is securely retained.
Mirrors - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Left and Right - Same Procedure
- Slide the rubber cover from the lock nut.
- Make a note of the lock nut position on the thread of the mirror arm.
- Loosen the lock nut and separate the mirror arm from the mirror boss.
Mirror arm
Rubber cover
Lock nut
Mirror boss
Mirrors - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Position the locknut as noted during removal onto the thread of the mirror arm.
- Fit the mirror boss to the handlebar clamp and tighten to 17 Nm.
Mirror arm
Rubber cover
Lock nut
Mirror boss
- Fit the mirror arm into the mirror boss. Tighten by hand until the lock nut makes contact with the mirror boss, do not tighten fully at this stage.
- Loosen the mirror arm one full turn.
- Position the mirror arm to give rear visibility in the riding position and tighten the lock nut by hand.
- Counter-hold the mirror boss and tighten the mirror lock nut to 17 Nm.
- Slide the rubber cover over the lock nut.
Front Mudguard - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Front Mudguard Remove LG1; LGX
- Remove the four fixings securing the front mudguard assembly to the front forks and remove the mudguard assembly.
Front mudguard assembly
Fixings (right hand side shown)
- If required, remove the four screws to separate the centre moulding from the side mouldings.
Left hand side moulding
Right hand side moulding
Centre moulding
Screws
Front Mudguard - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Front Mudguard Install LG1; LGX
- If required, position the side mouldings to the centre moulding and secure with four screws. Tighten to 1.5 Nm.
Left hand side moulding
Right hand side moulding
Centre moulding
Screws
- Position the front mudguard assembly to the front forks and install the four fixings. Tighten to 6 Nm.
Front mudguard assembly
Fixings (right hand side shown)
Rear Mudguard - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
- Remove the rear wheel spindle nut.
- Remove the fixings from the rear hanger cover.
Rear hanger cover
Fixings
- Remove the lock nut and upper fixing and support the rear mudguard assembly. Collect the rear hanger cover and discard the lock nut.
Fixing and lock nut (rear wheel removed for clarity)
- Cut the cable tie, disconnect the rear subharness and remove the rear mudguard assembly.
- If required, remove the rear direction indicators (see Rear Direction Indicators - Removal).
- If required, remove the rear licence plate light (see Rear Licence Plate Light - Removal).
- If the spray guard needs to be removed, first remove and discard the two rear fixings.
Fixings
- Remove the three underside fixings and remove the spray guard, collecting the indicator mounting bracket, indicator mount and three flanged sleeves.
- If required, remove the two fixings and remove the harness cover from the licence plate hanger arm, noting the routing of the rear subharness for installation.
Spray guard
Fixings
Harness cover
Fixings
Rear Mudguard - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- If required, route the sub harness as noted during removal and install the harness cover to the rear licence plate hanger arm with two fixings. Tighten to 1 Nm.
Main harness
Rear subharness
Rear harness slack
Cable tie
- Make sure the two captive nuts are fitted to the spray guard.
- If required, refit the spray guard to the hanger arm with the three flanged sleeves, indicator mount and indicator mounting bracket. Secure with three fixings and tighten to 6 Nm.
Spray guard (rear wheel removed for clarity)
Fixings
Harness cover
Fixings
- Install two new fixings to the rear of the spray guard. Tighten to 3 Nm.
Fixings
- If required, refit the rear licence plate light (see Rear Licence Plate Light - Installation).
- If required, refit the rear direction indicators (see Rear Direction Indicators - Installation).
- Reconnect the rear subharness to the harness and secure with a cable tie. Ensure the routing of the subharness remains as explained in step 1.
- Install the rear mudguard assembly and rear hanger cover to the swinging arm and loosely assemble the one upper fixing and a new lock nut.
Fixing and lock nut(rear wheel removed for clarity)
- Loosely assemble the three fixings and wheel spindle nut to the rear hanger cover and rear mudguard assembly.
Rear hanger cover
Fixings
- Torque the upper fixing whilst holding the lock nut to 3 Nm.
Fixing and lock nut (rear wheel removed for clarity)
- Tighten the outer fixings in the sequence below to 3 Nm.
- Tighten the upper fixing whilst holding the lock nut to 32 Nm.
Fixing
- Tighten the outer fixings in the sequence below to 32 Nm.
- Make sure the wheel spindle is fully inserted before tightening the wheel spindle nut. Tighten the wheel spindle nut to 110 Nm.
Rear wheel spindle nut
- Lower the motorcycle to the ground.
- Check and, if necessary, adjust the chain (see Drive Chain Free Movement - Adjustment).
- Check the operation of the rear brake.
Tightening sequence |
Tightening sequence |
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Final Drive Chain Guard - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
- Remove the two fixings securing the rear hugger and chain guard to the swingarm.
- Manoeuvre the rear hugger and chain guard rearwards to detach the two locating slots from the retaining grommets.
Rear hugger and chain guard
Fixing (left hand side)
Fixing location (right hand side)
Retaining tangs
Retaining grommet (left hand side)
Final Drive Chain Guard - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle Including locking devices
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts
Note to be used in service manual with stabilise warning
- Position the two locating slots at the front end of the rear hugger and chain guard onto the retaining grommets.
- Make sure the two retaining tangs on the rear suspension unit guard are in the locating holes on the rear hugger and chain guard.
- Fit the two fixings and tighten to 4 Nm.
Rear hugger and chain guard
Fixing (left hand side)
Fixing location (right hand side)
Retaining tangs
Retaining grommet (left hand side)
Battery Tray - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Side Panels - Removal LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2
Fuel Tank - Remove L Series
Airbox - Remove L Series
Rear Light - Removal LG1; LGX; LL1
Rear Panels Remove L Series
Battery Tray Remove LG1; LGX
- Note the position and routing of the harness.
- Remove the starter solenoid from the engine ECM tray and rest to one side.
- Release the fixing and remove the ambient air pressure sensor and rest to one side.
- Tilt the alarm electrical connector towards the rear and slide rearwards to release from the battery tray.
- Unclip the rear light connector from the battery tray.
- Disconnect the fall detection switch electrical connector.
- Remove the two relay blocks and rest to one side, noting the position of each block for installation. The rear block has blue tape to identify.
- Remove the fuse box from the engine ECM tray.
Accessory USB connector
Relays
Ambient air pressure sensor
Rear light connector
Alarm connector
Fuse box
Fall detection switch
Starter solenoid
- Release the two fixings and remove the engine ECM tray from the battery tray.
- Unclip the accessory USB connector from the engine ECM tray.
- Disconnect the three engine ECM harness connectors and remove the engine ECM.
- Remove and discard the two side fixings from the battery tray.
- Remove the two centre fixings and the rear fixing and washer from the battery tray.
Engine ECM tray
Rear fixing
Centre fixings
Engine ECM tray fixings
Side fixings
Battery tray
- Remove the two front fixings from the battery tray and alternator regulator/rectifier bracket.
Fixings
Battery tray
Alternator regulator/rectifier bracket
- Unclip the seat lock cable and remove the battery tray, noting the position of the harness for installation.
Harness not shown for clarity |
Some parts removed for clarity |
Battery Tray - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Battery Tray Install LG1:LGX
- Align the battery tray to the frame and alternator regulator/rectifier bracket and position the harness as noted during removal.
- Secure the battery tray to the alternator regulator/rectifier bracket with two fixings. Tighten to 5 Nm.
Fixings
Battery tray
Alternator regulator/rectifier bracket
- Locate the seat lock cable to the battery tray and position the harness as noted during removal.
- Install the two centre fixings and the rear fixing and washer to the battery tray. Tighten to 3 Nm.
- Install two new side fixings and tighten to 4 Nm.
- Install the engine ECM and reconnect the three electrical connectors.
- Reclip the accessory USB connector to the engine ECM tray.
- Refit the engine ECM tray with two fixings and tighten to 5 Nm.
Engine ECM tray
Rear fixing
Centre fixings
Engine ECM tray fixings
Side fixings
Battery tray
- Refit the fuse box to the engine ECM tray.
- Refit the relay blocks to the engine ECM tray in the positions as noted during removal.
- Reconnect the fall detection switch electrical connector.
- Refit the starter solenoid to the battery tray.
- Reclip the alarm and rear light connectors to the battery tray.
- Refit the ambient air pressure sensor to the battery tray and tighten the fixing to 3 Nm.
Some parts removed for clarity |
Harness not shown for clarity |
|
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Rear Panels Install L Series
Rear Light - Installation LG1; LGX; LL1
Airbox - Install L Series
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Side Panels - Install LG1; LGX
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Side Stand - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Raise and support the motorcycle.
- With the side stand in the up position, unhook the spring from the side stand and remove it from the motorcycle.
Pivot pin
Circlip
Spring
Side stand
- Remove and discard the circlip securing the pivot pin.
- Remove the pivot pin and remove the side stand.
Side Stand - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Fit the side stand to the motorcycle.
- Insert the pivot pin and install a new circlip.
Pivot pin
Circlip
Spring
Side stand
- With the side stand in the up position, hook the spring onto the upper plate then carefully hook it onto the side stand lug.
- Check the operation of the side stand before riding the motorcycle. Ensure the spring holds the stand securely in the retracted position.
Side Panels - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Side Panels Remove LG1; LGX
- Remove the central fixings and lock nuts. Discard the lock nuts.
- Remove the rear fixings and washers.
Central fixing
Lock nut
Side panel
Rear fixing
Washer
- Ease the front of the side panel away from the motorcycle, releasing the front clip and the spigot from the rubber grommet. Note their position for installation. Raise the side panel to release the locating slot from the frame.
- On the left hand side panel, rotate the seat lock cable end 180 degrees and release it from the seat lock assembly and bracket, noting the position of the cable in the bracket locating feature for installation.
Seat lock cable end
Spigot
Side panel
Clip
Locating slot
Side Panels - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Side panels Install LG1; LGX
- Ensure the rubber grommets and plastic clips are in place as noted during removal.
- For the left hand side panel, install the seat lock cable to the seat lock assembly and bracket. Make sure the cable is located in the bracket locating feature as noted during removal.
- Align the side panel locating slot to the frame locating tang. Press the spigots into the rubber grommets and make sure the plastic clips are locked in place.
Seat lock cable end
Spigot
Side panel
Clip
Locating slot
- Install the central fixings with new lock nuts. Install the rear fixings and washers. Tighten the fixings to 3 Nm.
|
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Rear Panels - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Rear Light - Removal LG1; LGX; LL1
Rear Panels Remove LG1; LGX
- If required, remove the screws securing the rear infill panels to the rear undertray.
Rear undertray
Rear infill panel
Screw
Rear Panels - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Rear Panels Install LG1; LGX
- If required, fit the rear infill panels to the rear undertray and secure with two screws. Tighten to 1 Nm.
Rear undertray
Rear infill panel
Screw
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Rear Light - Installation LG1; LGX; LL1
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Radiator Cowl - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Left and Right - Same Procedure
Rad Cowl Remove LG1; LGX
- Remove and discard the two fixings securing the radiator cowl to the radiator.
Radiator cowl (right hand side shown)
Fixings
- Remove the radiator cowl and collect the flanged sleeves, noting their orientation for installation.
- Unclip the horn harness from the left hand side radiator cowl, noting the routing for installation.
Radiator Cowl - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Rad Cowl Install LG1; LGX
- Clip the horn harness to the left hand side radiator cowl as noted during removal.
- Install the flanged sleeves to the radiator cowls as noted during removal and align the radiator cowl to the radiator.
Radiator cowl (right hand side shown)
Fixings
- Install two new fixings and tighten to 2.5 Nm.
Electrical
Exploded Views
Exploded View - Battery, Horn and Wiring
Exploded View - Front Direction Indicators
Exploded View - Rear Direction Indicators
Exploded View - Headlight
Exploded View - Rear Lights
Exploded View - Instruments
Exploded View - Starter Motor and Alternator
Battery, Fuses and Relays
Battery
Battery Disposal
Should the battery ever require replacement, the original battery must be handed to a recycling agent who will ensure that the dangerous substances from which the battery is manufactured do not pollute the environment.
Battery Maintenance
Factory commissioned battery - battery maintenance
The battery is a sealed type and does not require any maintenance other than checking the voltage and routine recharging such as during storage.
It is not possible to adjust the electrolyte level in the battery.
With normal use of the motorcycle, the charging system will keep the battery charged. If the motorcycle is unused, the battery will gradually discharge due to battery self discharge and the continuous current drain for the clock and the engine control module memory.
The rate of battery discharge can be greatly increased by the addition of electrical security systems or other accessories.
Allowing a battery to discharge, or leaving it discharged over a period of time, causes sulphation of the lead plates within the battery.
Sulphation is a normal chemical reaction inside the battery and over a period of time sulphate will crystallise on to the lead plates making charging difficult or impossible. The result is a permanently damaged battery, which would not be covered by the motorcycle warranty.
Keeping a battery at full charge reduces the chance of it freezing in cold conditions. Allowing a battery to freeze can cause serious internal damage to the battery.
When leaving the motorcycle standing for more than a few days, regularly check the battery voltage using a digital multimeter. Should the battery voltage fall below 12.8 V, charge the battery using the BatteryMate Battery Charger - see latest Parts Catalogue for part number information. Refer to the instructions supplied with the BatteryMate Battery charger.
For extended periods of storage (beyond two weeks) the battery should be removed and the battery voltage checked regularly and charged when below 12.8 V.
Battery Already in Service
Factory commissioned battery - battery already in service
Use the guidelines in the table below for charging. Always verify the battery condition before charging, and 30 minutes after charging.
Table of Battery Charging Times
State of charge | Voltage | Action | Charge time (using BatteryMate 150-9) |
---|---|---|---|
100% | 12.8 V - 13.0 V | None. Check at 4 months from date of delivery | None required |
75% - 100% | 12.5 V - 12.8 V | Charge and check in 4 months from date of last check | 3 - 6 hours |
50% - 75% | 12.0 V - 12.5 V | Needs charge | 5 - 11 hours |
25% - 50% | 11.5 V - 12.0 V | Needs charge | At least 13 hours |
0% - 25% | 11.5 V or less | Needs recovery using BatteryMate 150-9. Retest after recovery | 20 hours |
Battery Commissioning and Charging
New Battery
In order to correctly and safely commission a new battery, the battery commissioning procedure listed below must be carefully followed. This is the only battery commissioning procedure that Triumph recommends. The procedure is designed to ensure that the battery is at its best when fitted to the motorcycle, and will provide the best possible performance and reliability.
Failure to comply with this procedure may lead to reduced battery performance and/or shorten the life of the battery.
- Check the battery carefully for damage.
- Read the instructions and warnings delivered with the battery.
- Place the battery on a flat level surface and remove the sealing foil.
- Remove the battery sealing strip from the electrolyte container and save for later in this procedure. Place the sealing strip on a clean surface, with the upper side facing downwards to avoid contamination of the sealing strip. Do not break the seal on the electrolyte container.
- Place the electrolyte container on the battery and fill the battery according to the manufacturers instructions.
- After starting to fill the battery with electrolyte, allow the battery to stand for 30 minutes with the filling container in place.
- Check that all of the electrolyte has drained from the container. Do not remove the container at this point. If the container has not completely drained, tap the sides of the container to start the electrolyte flowing again.
- After the electrolyte has drained into the battery, allow the battery to stand with the electrolyte container in place for a further 2 hours.
- Remove the electrolyte container carefully, and dispose of immediately.
- Place the sealing cap strip LOOSELY over the filling holes of the battery.
- Charge the battery using the BatteryMate Battery Charger. Refer to the instructions supplied with the BatteryMate Battery Charger.
- After charging is complete, press down firmly with both hands to seat the caps (do not use tools or force the caps into position).
- Disconnect the charger and allow the battery to stand for 1 hour before fitting to the motorcycle.
- Fit the battery to the motorcycle, positive (red) lead first.
Battery - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Warning - Battery terminals
Battery Disconnection - Rider Configurable Modes
The riding modes allow the rider to adjust the throttle response (MAP), Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) and Traction Control (TC) settings to suit differing road conditions and rider preference.
Before disconnecting the battery or removing a fuse, note and record the rider’s settings. Once the fuse has been refitted or the battery reconnected the rider’s settings should be reset as noted.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
- Disconnect the battery leads, negative (black) lead first.
- Remove the battery strap.
Negative (black) terminal
Battery
Battery strap
Positive (red) terminal
Battery insert
- Remove the battery insert.
- Remove the battery.
Battery - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Warning - Battery terminals
Battery Reconnection - Rider Configurable Modes
Battery Install LG1 LGX
- Place the battery into the battery tray and install the battery insert.
- Reattach the battery strap.
- Reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead first, routing the positive lead underneath the diagnostic connector cable, and tighten the battery terminals to 4.5 Nm.
- Make sure the battery positive (red) lead is clipped to the engine ECM tray.
Battery positive terminal
Battery positive lead
Retaining feature on engine ECM moulding
Diagnostic connector cable
- Apply a light coat of grease to the terminals to prevent corrosion.
- Cover the positive terminal with the protective cap.
Negative (black) terminal
Battery
Battery strap
Positive (red) terminal
Battery insert
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Install L Series
Fuse Identification
The riding modes allow the rider to adjust the throttle response (MAP), Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) and Traction Control (TC) settings to suit differing road conditions and rider preference.
Before disconnecting the battery or removing a fuse for any reason, note and record the rider’s settings. Once the fuse has been refitted or the battery reconnected the rider’s settings should be reset as noted.
A blown fuse is indicated when all of the systems protected by that fuse become inoperative. When checking for a blown fuse, refer to the fuse identification table to establish which fuse has blown.
The fuse boxes are located underneath the seat.
To allow access to the fuse boxes, the seat must be removed (see Seat - Removal).
Fuse Box 1
Fuse Box 1 |
Position | Circuit Protected | Rating (Amps) |
---|---|---|
1 | Cooling Fan | 15 |
2 | Instruments | 15 |
3 | Engine Management System (EMS) | 15 |
4 | Position Lighting | 5 |
5 | Engine Control Unit (ECU) | 5 |
6 | Ignition | 7.5 |
7 | ABS Solenoid | 20 |
8 | Fuel Pump | 10 |
9 | ABS Pump | 25 |
Fuse Box 2
Fuse Box 2 |
Position | Circuit Protected | Rating (Amps) |
---|---|---|
1 | ABS ECU | 2 |
2 | Diagnostics | 2 |
Relays
Identification and Location
The relays are located underneath the seat. To gain access to the relays, remove the seat (see Seat - Removal).
|
Electrical Diagnostics
Pin Point Tests
Link to Diagnostics Chapter
Select the relevant diagnostics chapter.
Links to Diagnostics Chapter - H*8; L*1
Immobiliser/TPMS: Diagnostic - Trouble Codes - Index - Immobiliser/TPMS
Instruments: Diagnostic - Trouble Codes - Index - Instruments
CAN errors (five digit fault code): Diagnostics - Trouble Codes - Index - CAN Errors
Lighting Adjustment and Bulb Replacement
Headlight
Warning - Headlights - Adjust road speed
Warning - Headlights - Do not adjust headlight when moving
Caution - Headlight - Do not cover the headlight lens
Headlight Vertical Adjustment
Headlight Adjust LG1; LGX
- Switch the headlight dipped beam on.
- Loosen the headlight pivot lock nut sufficiently to allow restricted movement of the headlight.
- Adjust the position of the headlight to give the required beam setting.
- Tighten the mounting fixings to 26 Nm.
- Recheck the headlight beam setting.
- Switch the headlight off when the beam setting is satisfactorily set.
Headlight Assembly
Pivot bolt
LED Headlight Unit - Replacement
The LED headlight unit is a sealed, maintenance free unit. The headlight unit must be replaced in the event of the failure of the headlight or position light. See Headlights - Removal.
Rear Light Bulb Replacement - LED
The LED rear light units are sealed, maintenance free LED units. The rear light units must be replaced in the event of the failure of the rear lights.
Direction Indicators - US and Canada Markets Only
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
|
- Release the fixing and remove the lens to gain access to the bulb for replacement.
LED Direction Indicators - All Markets Except US and Canada
The LED direction indicators are sealed for life units and must be replaced in the event of a failure.
LED Rear Licence Plate Light
The LED rear licence plate light unit is a sealed, maintenance free LED unit. The rear licence plate light unit must be replaced in the event of the failure.
Removal and Installation - Electrical Components
Instruments - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Instruments Removal LG1; LG2; LH2
- Loosen, but do not remove, the headlight pivot fixings.
Headlight Assembly
Pivot bolt
- Tilt the headlight forwards in order to gain access to the instruments fixings.
Headlight
- Remove the instruments shroud from the instruments bracket by pressing the sides of the shroud to release the retaining clips and pulling it downwards clear of the instruments bracket. Disconnect the instruments electrical connector.
Instruments bracket
Instruments shroud
- Remove the three fixings and washers and remove the instruments from the bracket.
Instruments
Fixings
Instruments - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Instruments Install LG1
- Install the instruments to the instruments bracket with three fixings and washers. Tighten to 3 Nm.
Instruments
Fixings
- Reconnect the instruments electrical connector and install the instruments shroud.
Instruments bracket
Instruments shroud
- Raise the headlight to the desired position and tighten the lock nut to 26 Nm.
Headlight Assembly
Pivot bolt
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Ignition Switch - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Fuel Tank - Remove L Series
Ignition Switch Remove LG1; LGX
- Disconnect the ignition switch electrical connector.
Right hand switch housing connector
Left hand switch housing connector
Left hand switch housing connector
Fuse box 2
Ignition switch connector
- Remove the sheared bolts then remove the ignition switch.
Sheared bolts
Ignition switch
Ignition Switch - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Ignition Switch Install LG1; LGX
- Fit the ignition switch to the frame.
- Fit new shear bolts and tighten to 16 Nm.
Shear bolts
Ignition switch
- Reconnect the ignition switch electrical connector.
Right hand switch housing connector
Left hand switch housing connector
Left hand switch housing connector
Fuse box 2
Ignition switch connector
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Headlights - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Headlights Remove LG1; LGX
- Support the headlight assembly and remove the headlight pivot fixings.
Headlight Assembly
Pivot bolt
- Remove the three fixings and remove the headlight assembly rear cover.
Headlight assembly rear cover
Electrical connector
Fixings
- Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the headlight from the harness, noting the routing of the harness for installation.
- If required, remove the two fixings and washers to remove the headlight brackets from the headlight.
Headlight
Headlight bracket, left hand side
Headlight bracket, right hand side
Fixings
Headlights - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Headlight Install LG1; LGX
- If required, ensure the rubber grommets are fitted to the headlight brackets. Position the brackets to the headlight and secure with two fixings and washers and tighten to 3 Nm.
Headlight
Headlight bracket, left hand side
Headlight bracket, right hand side
Fixings
- Reconnect the electrical connector and position the harness as noted during removal. Install a new cable tie to secure the harness.
Headlight assembly rear cover
Harness
Cable tie
- Install the headlight assembly rear cover to the headlight and secure with three fixings. Tighten the fixings to 3 Nm.
Headlight assembly rear cover
Electrical connector
Fixings
- Position the headlight to the lower yoke and install the pivot bolt and lock nut. Adjust the headlight to the correct height and tighten the lock nut to 26 Nm.
Headlight Assembly
Pivot bolt
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Rear Light - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Rear Light Remove LG1; LGX
- Disconnect the rear light electrical connector from the harness.
Rear light electrical connector
- Support the rear light and release the two rear light fixings and two scrivets. Remove the rear light and rear undertray as an assembly.
Rear light
Fixings
Scrivets
Rear undertray assembly
- Release the two fixings and remove the rear light from the undertray assembly.
Rear light
Fixings
Rear undertray assembly
Rear Light - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Rear Light Install LG1; LGX
- Fit the rear light to the rear undertray assembly with two fixings and tighten to 3 Nm.
Rear light
Fixings
Rear undertray assembly
- Install the rear undertray and rear light assembly to the motorcycle, aligning the two locating slots to the rubber grommets. Secure with two rear fixings and two scrivets and tighten the fixings to 3 Nm.
Rear light
Fixings
Scrivets
Rear undertray assembly
- Reconnect the rear light electrical connector to the harness.
Rear light electrical connector
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Front Direction Indicators - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Front Indicator Remove LG1; LGX
- Remove the direction indicator fixing.
- Loosen the direction indicator bracket fixing and lower the bracket in order to access the cable.
Direction indicator
Fixing
Direction indicator bracket fixing
Direction indicator bracket
- Disconnect the direction indicator electrical connectors and feed the cable up to the direction indicator, noting the routing for installation.
- Remove the direction indicator.
Front Direction Indicators - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Front Indicator Install LG1; LGX
- Install the direction indicator to the bracket and route the cable around the top of the bracket as noted during removal.
Direction indicator cable
Bracket
Direction indicator
Fork leg
- Install the direction indicator fixing but do not tighten.
- Raise the bracket up to align with the upper yoke and tighten the bracket fixing to 3 Nm.
- Tighten the direction indicator fixing to 3 Nm.
- Route the cable down to the electrical connectors as shown.
- Reconnect the electrical connectors.
Fork leg
Direction indicator cable
Front brake hose
Right hand switch housing cable
Cable tie
Rubber band
Twist grip position sensor cable
Fork leg
Direction indicator cable
Cable tie
Instruments cable
Left hand switch housing cable
Rubber band
Front brake hose
Right hand switch housing cable
Clutch cable
Right hand direction indicator connectors
Twist grip position sensor cable
Headstock rubber guide
Headlight cable
Left hand switch housing cable
Instruments cable
Rubber band
Left hand direction indicator connectors
Right hand direction indicator shown, left hand similar (upper yoke shown removed for clarity) |
Right hand direction indicator cable routing |
Left hand direction indicator routing |
Right hand direction indicator routing |
Left hand direction indicator routing |
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Check the operation of the direction indicators, rectify as necessary.
Rear Direction Indicators - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Rear Indicator Remove LG1; LGX
- Remove the rear direction indicator fixings and raise the rear direction indicators and support moulding as an assembly.
Rear direction indicator (right hand side shown)
Fixing
Support bracket (right hand side shown)
- Disconnect the rear licence plate light electrical connector. Unclip and move the connector holder to gain access to the direction indicator connectors.
- Noting the position and routing of the wiring, disconnect both direction indicator connectors and remove the direction indicators and support brackets from the support moulding.
Left rear direction indicator
Left rear direction indicator connectors
Rear licence plate light
Rear licence plate light connector
Right rear direction indicator
Right rear direction indicator fixings
Rear licence plate light fixings
Left hand support bracket
Right hand support bracket
Rear Direction Indicators - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Rear Indicator Install LG1; LGX
- Position the direction indicators and support brackets to the support moulding and reconnect the electrical connectors as noted during removal.
- Reconnect the rear licence plate light connector and reposition the connector holder as noted during removal.
Left rear direction indicator
Left rear direction indicator connectors
Rear licence plate light
Rear licence plate light connector
Right rear direction indicator
Right rear direction indicator fixings
Rear licence plate light fixings
Left hand support bracket
Right hand support bracket
- Install the support moulding and direction indicators to the rear mudguard and secure with two fixings. Tighten to 3 Nm.
Rear direction indicator (right hand side shown)
Fixing
Support bracket (right hand side shown)
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Check the operation of the rear indicators and the licence plate light. Rectify if necessary.
Rear Licence Plate Light - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Rear Direction Indicators - Removal LG1; LGX; LL1
Rear Direction Indicators - Removal L Series
Rear Licence Plate Light Remove LG1; LGX
- Disconnect the rear licence plate electrical connector.
- Release the two fixings and remove the rear licence plate light from the support moulding.
Left rear direction indicator
Left rear direction indicator connectors
Rear licence plate light
Rear licence plate light connector
Right rear direction indicator
Right rear direction indicator fixings
Rear licence plate light fixings
Rear Licence Plate Light - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Rear Licence Plate Light Install LG1; LGX
- Align the rear licence plate light to the support moulding and secure with two fixings. Tighten to 0.5 Nm.
- Reconnect the rear licence plate electrical connector.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Rear Direction Indicators - Installation L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Side Stand Switch - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Coolant Expansion Tank - Removal L Series
Side Stand Switch Remove LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2
- Disconnect the side stand switch electrical connector from the engine sub harness at the rear of the starter motor and feed it down to the side stand switch.
Side stand switch electrical connector
Side stand switch harness
- Release the fixings and remove the gear change bracket from the frame.
- Release the fixings and remove the side stand switch from the gear change bracket. Discard the fixings.
Gear change bracket
Fixings
Side stand switch
Side Stand Switch - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Side Stand Switch Install LG1; LGX
- Fit the side stand switch to the gear change bracket tighten the new fixings to 7 Nm.
- Fit the gear change bracket to the frame and tighten the fixings to 24 Nm.
Gear change bracket
Fixings
Side stand switch
- Route the side stand switch harness and reconnect to the engine sub harness as noted for removal.
Side stand switch electrical connector
Side stand switch harness
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Coolant Expansion Tank - Installation L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Starter Motor - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Fuel Tank - Remove L Series
Airbox - Remove L Series
Coolant Expansion Tank - Removal L Series
Purge Valve - Remove L Series
Throttle Body - Remove L Series
Inlet Manifold - Removal - LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1
- Disconnect the low oil pressure warning light switch.
- Ease the boot from the starter cable terminal and then release the cable bolt.
- Detach the cable from the starter motor.
- Release the fixings securing the starter to the crankcase.
Fixings
Starter motor
Multiplug, crankshaft position sensor
- Ease the starter motor from the upper crankcase.
Starter Motor - Inspection
- Ensure the starter turns freely and without binding.
- Check the starter O-ring for damage and deterioration. Replace as necessary.
Starter Motor - Installation
- Fit a new O-ring to the starter motor.
- Lubricate the starter motor O-ring with a small amount of petroleum jelly.
- Fit the starter motor to the upper crankcase with the multiplug for the crankshaft position sensor as noted for removal. Ensure that the O-ring does not become damaged during installation.
Fixings
Starter motor
Multiplug, crankshaft position sensor
- Fit and tighten the starter motor bolts to 10 Nm.
- Refit the starter cable and secure with the bolt. Tighten to 3 Nm.
- Refit the starter cable boot.
- Connect the low oil pressure warning light switch.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Inlet Manifold - Install - LG1; LGX; LL1
Throttle Body - Install L Series
Purge Valve - Install L Series
Coolant Expansion Tank - Installation L Series
Airbox - Install L Series
Fuel Tank - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Alternator Rotor - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
Alternator Cover - Remove L Series
- Withdraw the starter idler gear and shaft, noting the fitted position of the components.
Idler gear
Idler shaft
- To remove the rotor, clean the alternator rotor to remove all traces of oil, and fit service tool T3880375 to the rotor as shown below. Retain the tool to prevent the crankshaft from rotating and remove the centre bolt from the crankshaft.
Rotor
T3880375 - Alternator Rotor Holder
- With the bolt removed, locate the spigot from the larger of the two thrust pads supplied with service tool T3880365 to the crankshaft.
Thrust pad
- Assemble service tool T3880174 to the threaded centre section of the rotor.
- Hold the centre ofservice tool T3880174 to prevent rotation then tighten the draw-bolt in the centre of the tool to release the taper seating of the rotor from the crankshaft.
Rotor
T3880174 - Alternator Housing Puller
- Withdraw the rotor and tool as an assembly and then separate the tool from the rotor. Collect the Woodruff key and the tool thrust pad from the crankshaft.
Alternator Rotor - Installation
- Refit the Woodruff key to the crankshaft.
- Assemble the rotor to the keyway on the crankshaft, ensuring the Woodruff key remains in position.
- Refit the service tool T3880375 to prevent the crankshaft from rotating, ensuring the rotor is free from oil and the tool is not over-tightened.
- Tighten the rotor retaining bolt to 120 Nm.
Rotor
T3880375 - Alternator Rotor Holder
- Remove the service tool T3880375.
- Lubricate the idler gear shaft with new engine oil which meets specification API SH (or higher) and JASO MA.
- Fit the starter idler gear and shaft to the crankcase.
Idler gear
Idler shaft
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Alternator Cover - Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Alternator Stator - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Alternator Cover - Remove L Series
Alternator Stator and Rotor Note
- Remove and discard the fixings securing the crankshaft position sensor to the alternator cover.
- Remove and discard the fixing securing the cable bracket to the alternator cover.
- Remove and discard the fixings securing the stator to the alternator cover and remove the stator.
Fixings
Crankshaft position sensor
Cable bracket
Alternator stator
Alternator Stator - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Locate the stator and crankshaft position sensor to the engine cover.
- Apply silicone sealer to the cable grommet (at the factory, ThreeBond 1215 is used) and align the cable to the exit slot.
- Fit the cable retainer bracket and tighten the new fixings to 6 Nm.
- Tighten the alternator stator new fixings to 12 Nm.
- Tighten the crankshaft position sensor new fixings to 6 Nm.
Fixings
Crankshaft position sensor
Cable bracket
Alternator stator
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Alternator Cover - Install L Series
Alternator Regulator/Rectifier - Removal
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
The alternator regulator/rectifier is located in between the rear suspension unit and the gearbox.
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
Seat - Remove L Series
Battery - Remove L Series
RSU Remove L Series
Reg Rec Remove LG1; LGX; LL1
- Disconnect the two electrical connectors, noting their position for installation.
- Release the fixings and remove the regulator/rectifier from its bracket
Electrical connectors
Regulator/Rectifier
Fixings
Mounting bracket
Alternator Regulator/Rectifier - Installation
Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle
- Fit the regulator/rectifier to its bracket and tighten its fixings to 9 Nm.
- Reconnect the two electrical connectors as noted for removal.
Electrical connectors
Regulator/Rectifier
Fixings
Mounting bracket
Perform the following operations
Perform the following operations:
RSU Install L Series
Battery - Install L Series
Seat - Install L Series
Circuit Diagrams
Glossary of Circuit Diagram Symbols
The following is a description of the symbols and information found in the circuit diagrams for this model.
Components with a Fly lead and an In-line Connector
The illustration shows an example of a component with a fly lead and an in-line connector.
The component is represented by a white box, with fly lead wires leading to an in-line connector (shaded grey). Information provided with the component includes:
The component name - located above the component.
A function reference for each terminal - located inside the component, adjacent to the connecting wire (provided in English only).
Wire colour references - located on each wire.
An in-line connector name - located above the in-line connector.
A component and pin number reference - located on each wire entering the in-line connector.
In the above example, the component and pin number references can be interpreted as follows:
M71 | Component reference for the front brake switch |
M | Identifies the mating connector (component side only) |
- | Separator |
1, 2, 3 | Connector pin number reference |
Components with an Integral Connector
The illustration shows an example of a component with an integral connector.
The component is identified by a white box, with a grey shaded area representing the integral connector. Information provided with the component includes:
The component name - located above the component.
A function reference for each terminal - located inside the component, adjacent to the connecting wire (provided in English only).
Wire colour references - located on each wire.
A component and pin number reference - located on each wire entering the integral connector.
In the above example, the component and pin number references can be interpreted as follows:
M01 | Component reference for the instruments |
- | Separator |
24, 25 | Connector pin number reference |
Components with Multiple Integral Connectors
The illustration shows an example of a component with multiple integral connectors.
The multiple integral connectors can be identified by separated grey shaded areas (as shown), or by a grey shaded area that is divided into multiple sections by black line(s).
The above example shows an engine ECM with three integral connectors, connectors A, B and C. The component, connector and pin number references can be interpreted as follows:
E02 | Component reference for the engine ECM |
A, B, C | Connector reference |
- | Separator |
9, 28, 33 | Connector pin number reference |
Fuse Boxes
The illustration shows an example of a fuse box.
A fuse is a device which protects a circuit in the event of a fault. The fuse will 'blow' should a short circuit occur, protecting that circuit from further damage.
Information provided with the fuse box includes:
The fuse box name - located above the fuse box.
A fuse number/location reference for each fuse - located above the fuse.
A fuse rating (in Amps) for each fuse - located inside the fuse.
A fuse box, terminal number and terminal block reference - located on each wire entering the fuse box.
In the above example, the fuse box, terminal number and terminal block references can be interpreted as follows:
F | Reference code for a fuse box |
2 | Denotes the type of fuse box: 1 = Fuse box 1 (Main fuse) 2 = Fuse box 2 (Individual circuit protection) |
3 | Indicates the number of fuses contained in the fuse box |
- | Separator |
1, 2, 3 | Connector terminal number reference |
A or B | Terminal block reference A (power in) or B (power out) |
Relays
A relay is effectively an electromagnetic switch. To close the relay contacts and complete the circuit, an electromagnet in the relay is energised which causes the relay contacts to close, making the circuit complete.
Relays are used when the electrical current is too great for a mechanical switch, usually when the switching must be done quickly to prevent arcing across the switch contacts. If a mechanical switch were used, the mechanical switch contacts would quickly burn away.
Relays Connected with a Single Socket Connector
The illustration above shows an example of a relay connected to the wiring harness with a single socket relay connector.
A pin diagram of a typical single socket relay connector is shown below.
Information provided on the circuit diagram for relays with a single socket harness connector includes:
The relay name - located above the relay.
A relay and terminal number reference - located on each wire entering the relay connector terminals.
In the above example, the relay and terminal number reference can be interpreted as follows:
R | Indicates the component is a relay |
04 | Reference number for the relay (cooling fan relay in the example shown) |
- | Separator |
1, 2, 3, 5 | Connector terminal number reference |
Relays connected with a Dual Socket Connector
The illustration above shows an example of a relay connected to the wiring harness with a dual socket relay connector.
A dual socket relay connector provides sockets for two individual relays, socket A and socket B. A pin diagram of a typical dual socket relay connector is shown below.
Information provided on the circuit diagram for relays with a dual socket harness connector includes:
The names of the relays connected to sockets A and B - located above the relay.
A dual relay and terminal number reference - located on each wire entering the relay connector terminals.
In the above example, the relay and terminal number reference can be interpreted as follows:
R | Indicates the component is a relay |
04 | Reference number for the relay connected to socket A (cooling fan relay in the example shown) |
03 | Reference number for the relay connected to socket B (fuel pump relay in the example shown) |
- | Separator |
A or B | Socket reference (socket A or socket B) In the example above, all references show socket A. This indicates that the component shown is the cooling fan relay. |
1, 2, 3, 5 | Connector terminal number reference for the socket/relay identified |
Ring Terminals
The illustration shows the symbol used to identify a ring terminal (commonly used as ground points).
A ring terminal reference is provided on the wire entering the terminal.
Shielded Wires
The illustration shows the symbol used to identify wires that are shielded against electromagnetic interference.
Examples of components that have shielded wires include:
ABS wheel speed sensors
Immobiliser antenna
Throttle position sensor
USB socket
The wire shielding is typically connected to ground.
Splices
The illustration shows an example of a splice.
A splice is a hard cable joint where two or more cables are joined in the wiring harness. A splice is a potential source of both open and short circuits.
A splice reference code is provided at the nearest convenient location to the splice symbol.
Twisted Wires
The illustration shows the symbol used to indicate a pair of wires that are twisted together, such as CAN circuit wires.
Starter Motor Grounding
Starter motors fitted to Triumph motorcycles are connected to ground through the mating faces of the starter motor body and the crankcase.
Table - Wiring Colour Codes -Triumph Wiring
Key To Wiring Colour Codes
Code | Wiring Colour |
---|---|
B | Black |
U | Blue |
N | Brown |
G | Green |
S | Slate/Grey |
O | Orange |
K | Pink |
R | Red |
P | Purple |
W | White |
Y | Yellow |
LG | Light Green |
LU | Light Blue |
Main Wiring Harness Electrical Connectors
The table below shows the connector pin diagrams for each electrical connector on the main wiring harness for this model.
E02A - Engine ECM connector A | E02B - Engine ECM connector B |
E02C - Engine ECM connector C | E04 - Diagnostic connector |
E05 - Crankshaft position sensor | E06 - Fuel pump |
E07 - Fuel level sensor | E09 - Purge valve |
E10 - Coolant temperature sensor | E11 - Fuel injector 1 E12 - Fuel injector 2 E13 - Fuel injector 3 |
E15 - Gear position sensor | E16 - Oxygen sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 |
E17 - Side stand switch | E19 - Cooling fan 1 |
E20 - Intake air temperature sensor | E21 - Ignition coil 1 E22 - Ignition coil 2 E23 - Ignition coil 3 |
E25 - Oil pressure sensor | E37 - Secondary air injection |
E38 - Manifold absolute pressure sensor E39 - Ambient air pressure sensor | E47 - Throttle body |
E48 - Triumph shift assist | F19 - Fuse box 1 |
F22 - Fuse box 2 | H03 - Rear light subharness |
F32 - Fuse box 3 | H05 - Engine subharness |
H10 - Sub harness ground | M01 - Instruments |
M02A - Left handlebar switch housing connector A | M02B - Left handlebar switch housing connector B |
M04A - Front left direction indicator connector A M04B - Front left direction indicator connector B | M07 - Headlight |
M11A - Horn connector A M11B - Horn connector B | M13 - Ignition switch |
M14A - Right handlebar switch housing connector A | M19A - Front right direction indicator connector A M19B - Front right direction indicator connector B |
M26 - Rear brake switch | M28 - Starter solenoid |
M36 - Alarm | M37 - Rear light |
M48A - Regulator rectifier connector A | M51 - Fall detection switch |
M57 - Front ABS wheel speed sensor M58 - Rear ABS wheel speed sensor | M59 - ABS modulator |
M68 - Immobiliser/TPMS ECM | M70 - USB socket |
M72 - Bluetooth module | M73 - Twist grip position sensor |
R04 - Cooling fan relay R03 - Fuel pump relay R05 - Horn relay R11 - Dip beam relay R09 - Starter motor relay R07 - Engine management system relay R12 - Main beam relay |
Power Distribution
Starter Motor Circuit
Ignition Circuit
ABS Circuit
Brake Circuit
Engine Management – ECM Power and Ground
Engine Management – Pressure Sensors
Engine Management – Temperature Sensors
Engine Management – Switches
Engine Management – Position Sensors
Engine Management – Level Sensor
Engine Management – Fuel Injection Components
Engine Management – Throttle Control
Engine Management – Cooling Fan
Engine Management – Fuel Pump
Instruments Circuit
Lighting Circuit - Front
Lighting Circuit - Rear
Lighting Circuit - Indicators
Communication Networks Circuit
Horn Circuit
Immobiliser Circuit
Diagnostic Connector Circuit
Accessories Circuit
Heated Accessories Circuit
Alarm Circuit
Rider Information Circuit
Ground Circuit - Front
Ground Circuit - Middle
Ground Circuit - Rear
Diagnostics
General Information
Calibration Downloading General Information
Instrument Calibration Downloads
Following an instrument calibration download, the following items (if fitted) may return to their factory default settings. Before starting an instrument calibration download, record the settings of each item where applicable so that the settings can be restored after the download has finished.
Time/date
Distance/time to next service
TPMS instrument display (enabled/disabled)
All riding mode settings
Self cancelling indicators (enabled/disabled).
Downloading Sequence - Calibration Downloads to Multiple ECMs
When planning to download a calibration, check each of the motorcycle’s ECMs for out of date calibrations and make sure all ECMs are updated as necessary. Where calibration updates are available for more than one ECM, the ECMs should be updated in the following order.
- Keyless ECM
- Chassis ECM
- Suspension ECM
- Headlight ECM
- Blind spot radar ECM
- Instruments
- Engine ECM
Electronic Control Module (ECM) Connectors
Electronic Control Module (ECM) Electrical Connectors
Connector - Pre Diagnosis Checks - Generic
Note the following connector related information before you start any diagnosis:
For example:
Dirty/corroded terminals
Damp terminals
Broken or bent cable pins within multiplugs.
For example, the ABS electronic control module (ABS modulator/ECM) relies on the supply of accurate information to enable it to monitor and control the brake system. One dirty terminal will cause an excessive voltage drop resulting in an incorrect signal to the ECM.
If, when carrying out fault diagnosis, a fault appears to clear by simply disconnecting and reconnecting an electrical connector, examine each disconnected connector for the following.
Before Disconnection:
If testing with a voltmeter, the voltage across a connector battery supply and ground pins should be virtually battery volts with a small deviation allowable for usual voltage drop within wiring circuits. If there is a noticeable change, suspect faulty/dirty connections. Refer to the circuit diagram within this Service Manual for pin numbers.
When Disconnecting a Connector:
Check for a security device that must be released before the connector can be separated. For example: barb, hook and eye and so on.
When Inspecting a Connector:
Check that the individual pins have not been bent.
Check for dampness/dirt/corrosion.
Check cables for security.
Check cable pin joints for damage.
When Connecting a Connector:
Make sure there is no contamination around the connector/seal.
Push together squarely to make sure that the terminals are not bent or incorrectly located.
Push the two halves together positively.
Instruments Management System Overview
Odometer Reset
This model is equipped with an odometer that allows the recorded odometer value to be reset to zero during the PDI check.
In the event of replacement this functionality will also allow a new set of instruments to be programmed with the motorcycle’s existing odometer value.
Triumph Motorcycles LTD. would like to emphasise the importance of following the correct process whilst using the Triumph Diagnostic Tool to SET/RESET the odometer.
When setting or resetting the odometer value ensure:
The CORRECT odometer value is displayed in the Set Odometer box before pressing the Set or Reset button.
DO NOT press the Set or Reset buttons before entering the correct odometer value. Once pressed the option to set or reset the odometer will no longer be available.
REMEMBER, pressing the set or reset buttons will lock the odometer and no further programming will be allowed.
To Set/Reset the Odometer always refer to Set/Reset Odometer in the Chassis Diagnostics chapter of the Triumph Diagnostic User Guide.
Instrument Calibration Download Flow Chart
System Diagnostics
Diagnostic Tool Connection
Diagnostic Tool Connection L*1
- To connect the Triumph diagnostic interface to the motorcycle, remove the seat (see Seat - Removal) and release the diagnostic connector from its location on the battery tray.
Diagnostic connector
- Plug the Triumph diagnostic interface directly into the diagnostic connector.
- When the diagnostic session is completed, disconnect the Triumph diagnostic interface.
- Refit the diagnostic connector to its location and refit the seat (see Seat - Installation).
T3880057 - Triumph Diagnostic Interface |
Systems Diagnostics
The management systems on this model have on-board diagnostic features which allows service technicians to retrieve stored data from the relevant electronic control module (ECM) using Triumph diagnostic software. Full details of the Triumph diagnostic software operation and how to interpret the results are given in the Triumph Diagnostic Tool User Guide.
The software allows the user to retrieve data associated with the system sensors and actuators, test various component functions, read build data and make minor adjustments to the set-up of the system.
To connect to the Triumph diagnostic tool see Diagnostic Tool Connection.
The DTCs are reported to the Triumph diagnostic tool as a five digit code.
When the system detects a fault, it begins to count the number of times the fault occurs before confirming the fault and storing a fault code. A confirmed fault may be indicated by the effected system(s) simply becoming inoperative, or by the illumination of a system warning light and/or instrument warning message.
Similarly, if a fault clears, the Instruments also records this fact and will extinguish any warning lights or instrument messages and restore normal operation to the affected system, when sufficient no-fault ignition switch cycles have taken place. Any fault codes will remain in the memory until the required number of no-fault ignition switch cycles have taken place. The number of ignition switch cycles required to restore normal operation will always be less than the number required to remove a DTC from the memory.
DTCs can be removed at any time using the Triumph diagnostic tool.
Engine ECM
Engine ECM
The on-board diagnostic system has two stages to fault detection. When a fault is detected, the DSM (Diagnostic Status Manager) raises a flag to indicate that a fault is present and increments a counter. The counter checks the number of instances that the fault is noted. For example, if there is a fault in the crankshaft position sensor, the counter will increment its count each time the crankshaft turns through 360°, provided the fault is still present.
When the count begins, the fault is detected but not confirmed. If the fault continues to be detected and the count reaches a predetermined threshold, the fault becomes confirmed. If the fault is an emissions related fault or a serious malfunction affecting engine performance, a DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) and freeze-frame data will be logged in the ECM's memory and the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp) on the motorcycle instrument panel is illuminated. Once a fault is confirmed, the number of warm-up cycles made by the engine is counted. If the fault clears, the warm-up cycle counter will extinguish the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp) at a predetermined count, and erase the DTC and freeze-frame data from the ECM memory at another (higher) count.
A single warm-up cycle is deemed to have taken place when the following criteria have been met:
The coolant temperature must be raised to 72°C or more.
The coolant temperature must have risen by 23°C or more from its start temperature, when 72°C is reached.
A controlled power down sequence must take place.
Service Symbol
Service Symbol/General Warning Symbol
The service symbol will illuminate for five seconds after the motorcycle start up sequence as a reminder that a service is due in approximately 60 miles (100 km). The service symbol will illuminate permanently when the mileage is reached, it will remain permanently illuminated until the service interval is reset using the Triumph Diagnostic tool.
The general warning symbol will flash if an ABS or engine management fault has occurred and the ABS and/or MIL warning lights are illuminated. Rectify the fault and clear the diagnostic trouble codes using the Triumph Diagnostic tool.
Link to DTC Index
To view the engine ECM DTC index see Diagnostic Trouble Codes - Index - Engine. The index has links to the relevant pin point tests.
ABS ECM
ABS ECM
Under normal operation, the ABS warning light will flash after the ignition is switched on and until the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h). The ABS performs a self check and if no faults are found the flashing light is extinguished. If a trouble code is stored the ABS warning light will stay illuminated and the ABS will not function, however the brakes will operate as a non-ABS braking system. If the ABS warning light does not extinguish, or illuminates whilst the motorcycle is being ridden.
Dependant on the DTC stored, the ABS ECM will act in one of two ways:
Inhibit ABS operation immediately, irrespective of the ABS operating mode;
Allow the ABS operation to complete before inhibiting the ABS.
Once the ABS ECM has inhibited ABS function, the ECM will act in one of three ways:
Allow the ABS to resume operation if the fault clears;
Allow ABS operation after an ignition cycle if the fault clears;
Inhibit the ABS function until the fault is rectified and the DTC erased.
ABS DTC Link
To view the ABS ECM DTC index see Diagnostic Trouble Codes - Index - ABS. The index has links to the relevant pin point tests.
CAN errors
CAN Errors
The diagnostic trouble codes are reported to the Triumph diagnostic tool as a five digit fault code (DTC) followed by a four digit code (Failure Type).
CAN DTC Index ink
To view the CAN Errors DTC index see Diagnostics - Trouble Codes - Index - CAN Errors. The index has links to the relevant pin point tests.
Further Diagnosis
Pinpoint Tests
Pin point tests, if used correctly, help to diagnose a fault in the system once a diagnostic trouble code has been stored.
Before Starting Pinpoint Tests:
- Delete the stored DTCs.
- Switch the ignition OFF and ON.
- Ride the motorcycle at a road speed in excess of 30 km/h. If the DTC is repeated, proceed to the relevant pinpoint test.
After Completion of Pinpoint Tests:
- Delete the stored DTCs.
- Switch the ignition OFF and ON.
- Ride the motorcycle at a road speed in excess of 30 km/h. If the DTC is repeated, proceed to the relevant pinpoint test.
- If a DTC is stored, there is a further fault. Read the stored DTC and refer to the relevant pinpoint test.
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Tests - Engine ECM
Diagnostic Trouble Codes - Index - Engine
The system will log the diagnostic trouble codes listed below.
Diagnostic Trouble Codes - Index - Engine - LG1; LGX; LL1
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) | Fault Description | Number of no-fault cycles before turning off MIL | Number of no-fault cycles before DTC is erased | MIL illuminated when fault is logged | Pinpoint test page number |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
P0030 | Oxygen sensor heater open circuit or short to ground - bank 1 sensor 1 | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0032 | Oxygen sensor heater short circuit to battery positive - bank 1 sensor 1 | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0053 | Oxygen sensor heater resistance - bank 1 sensor 1 | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0068 | Manifold absolute pressure sensor correlation error with throttle position sensor | 3 | 40 | Yes | P0068, P0069, P0107, P0105, P1105 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor |
P0069 | Manifold absolute pressure sensor correlation error with ambient pressure sensor | 3 | 40 | Yes | P0068, P0069, P0107, P0105, P1105 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor |
P0105 | Manifold absolute pressure sensor 1 open circuit or short circuit to 5 Volt sensor supply | 3 | 40 | Yes | P0068, P0069, P0107, P0105, P1105 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor |
P0107 | Manifold absolute pressure sensor 1 short circuit to ground | 3 | 40 | Yes | P0068, P0069, P0107, P0105, P1105 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor |
P0110 | Intake air temperature sensor open circuit or short circuit to 5 Volt sensor supply | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0111 | Intake air temperature sensor signal out of range | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0112 | Intake air temperature sensor short circuit to ground | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0115 | Engine coolant temperature sensor open circuit or short circuit to 5 Volt sensor supply | 3 | 40 | Yes | P011B, P0115, P0117, P0125, P050C - Coolant Temperature Sensor |
P0117 | Engine coolant temperature sensor short circuit to ground | 3 | 40 | Yes | P011B, P0115, P0117, P0125, P050C - Coolant Temperature Sensor |
P011B | Engine coolant temperature sensor correlation error with intake air temperature sensor | 3 | 40 | Yes | P011B, P0115, P0117, P0125, P050C - Coolant Temperature Sensor |
P0120 | Throttle position sensor 1 short circuit to battery positive or open circuit | 3 | 40 | Yes | P0120, P0121, P0122, P0220, P0221, P0222, P2135 - Throttle Position Sensor |
P0121 | Throttle position sensor 1 signal out of range | 3 | 40 | Yes | P0120, P0121, P0122, P0220, P0221, P0222, P2135 - Throttle Position Sensor |
P0122 | Throttle position sensor 1 short circuit to ground | 3 | 40 | Yes | P0120, P0121, P0122, P0220, P0221, P0222, P2135 - Throttle Position Sensor |
P0125 | Engine coolant temperature sensor signal low - not reaching temperature required for closed loop fuel control | 3 | 40 | Yes | P011B, P0115, P0117, P0125, P050C - Coolant Temperature Sensor |
P0130 | Oxygen sensor open circuit or short circuit to battery positive - bank 1 sensor 1 | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0131 | Oxygen sensor short circuit to ground - bank 1 sensor 1 | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0133 | Oxygen sensor circuit slow response - bank 1 sensor 1 | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0134 | Oxygen sensor circuit no activity detected - bank 1 sensor 1 | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0171 | System too lean - bank 1 | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0172 | System too rich - bank 1 | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0201 | Injector 1 circuit malfunction | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0202 | Injector 2 circuit malfunction | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0203 | Injector 3 circuit malfunction | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0220 | Throttle position sensor 2 short circuit to battery positive or open circuit | 3 | 40 | Yes | P0120, P0121, P0122, P0220, P0221, P0222, P2135 - Throttle Position Sensor |
P0221 | Throttle position sensor 2 signal out of range | 3 | 40 | Yes | P0120, P0121, P0122, P0220, P0221, P0222, P2135 - Throttle Position Sensor |
P0222 | Throttle position sensor 2 short circuit to ground | 3 | 40 | Yes | P0120, P0121, P0122, P0220, P0221, P0222, P2135 - Throttle Position Sensor |
P0300 | Random/Multiple Cylinder Misfire Detected | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0301 | Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0302 | Cylinder 2 Misfire Detected | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0303 | Cylinder 3 Misfire Detected | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0315 (European markets only) | Crankshaft position not adapted | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0335 | Crankshaft sensor circuit malfunction | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0351 | Ignition coil 1 malfunction | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0352 | Ignition coil 2 malfunction | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0353 | Ignition coil 3 malfunction | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0412 | Secondary air injection short circuit to ground or open circuit | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0443 | Purge valve short circuit to ground or open circuit | 3 | 40 | Yes | P0443, P0459 - Purge valve short circuit to ground or open circuit |
P044F | Secondary air injection short circuit to battery positive | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0459 | Purge valve short circuit to battery positive | 3 | 40 | Yes | P0443, P0459 - Purge valve short circuit to ground or open circuit |
P0460 | Fuel level sensor circuit malfunction | 0 | 40 | No | |
P0500 | Vehicle speed sensor - Wheel speed sensor fault | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P050C | Engine coolant temperature sensor signal high - too warm for cold start conditions | 3 | 40 | Yes | P011B, P0115, P0117, P0125, P050C - Coolant Temperature Sensor |
P0506 | Idle control system RPM lower than expected | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0507 | Idle control system RPM higher than expected | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0560 | System voltage - battery circuit malfunction | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P06A4 | 5V Sensor Circuit D - reference voltage low | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P06A5 | 5V Sensor Circuit D - reference voltage high | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P06A6 | 5V Sensor Circuit A - reference voltage out of range | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P06A7 | 5V Sensor Circuit B - reference voltage out of range | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P06A8 | 5V Sensor Circuit C - reference voltage out of range | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P06A9 | 5V Sensor Circuit D - reference voltage out of range | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P06B8 | EEPROM Error | 0 | 40 | No | |
P0606 | ECM internal error | 0 | 0 | Yes | |
P0642 | 5V Sensor Circuit A - reference voltage low | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0643 | 5V Sensor Circuit A - reference voltage high | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0652 | 5V Sensor Circuit B - reference voltage low | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0653 | 5V Sensor Circuit B - reference voltage high | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0698 | 5V Sensor Circuit C - reference voltage low | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0699 | 5V Sensor Circuit C - reference voltage high | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0704 | Clutch switch 1 input circuit malfunction | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0914 | Gear position sensor short circuit to ground or open circuit | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0915 | Gear position sensor signal error - correlation error with vehicle speed | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P0917 | Gear position sensor short circuit to 5 Volt sensor supply | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P1105 | Manifold absolute pressure sensor 1 pipe malfunction | 3 | 40 | Yes | P0068, P0069, P0107, P0105, P1105 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor |
P1135 | Traction Control prevented due to ABS malfunction | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P1231 | Fuel pump relay short circuit to ground or open circuit | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P1232 | Fuel pump relay short circuit to battery Voltage | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P1520 | Unmatched ABS module | 3 | 40 | Flashing | |
P1521 | CAN fault - lost communication with ABS module or ABS system status error | 3 | 40 | Yes | P1521 - CAN Fault - Lost Communication With ABS Module Or ABS System Status Error |
P1552 | Cooling fan relay short circuit to ground or open circuit | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P1553 | Cooling fan relay short circuit to battery positive or over temp | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P1576 | Brake switch 1 correlation error with brake switch 2 | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P1577 | Brake switch 2 correlation error with brake switch 1 | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P1604 | ECM tamper detected - return to Triumph | 0 | 0 | Yes | |
P1605 | ECM locked by the tune lock function | Only if tune lock is unlocked | N/A | Flashing | |
P1607 | ECM ride by wire internal error | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P1608 | ECM ride by wire internal error | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P1614 | Instrument ID incompatible | Only if Instrument ID Matching | N/A | Flashing | P1614 - Instrument ID incompatible Or Instruments Locked By Calibration Lock Function |
P1631 | Fall detection circuit short circuit to ground | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P1632 | Fall detection circuit short circuit to battery positive | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P1650 | CAN fault - lost communication with Immobiliser ECM | 0 | 40 | No | |
P1659 | Ignition power supply malfunction | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P1685 | Main relay circuit malfunction | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P1690 | CAN Fault | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P1695 | CAN fault - lost communication with instrument panel | 0 | 40 | No | P1695 - CAN Fault - Lost Communication With Instrument Panel |
P1702 | Shift force sensor circuit low voltage | 3 | 40 | Yes | P1702, P1703 - Shift Force Sensor Circuit (Triumph Shift Assist) |
P1703 | Shift force sensor circuit high voltage | 3 | 40 | Yes | P1702, P1703 - Shift Force Sensor Circuit (Triumph Shift Assist) |
P2100 | Throttle actuator control motor open circuit | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P2102 | Throttle actuator control internal motor relay does not operate | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P2103 | Throttle actuator control internal motor relay operates continually | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P2111 | Throttle valve drive error (stuck open) | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P2119 | Throttle valve drive error | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P2120 | Twist grip position sensor 1 short circuit to ground or open circuit | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P2121 | Twist grip position sensor 1 signal out of range | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P2123 | Twist grip position sensor 1 short circuit to battery positive | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P2125 | Twist grip position sensor 2 short circuit to ground or open circuit | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P2126 | Twist grip position sensor 2 signal out of range | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P2128 | Twist grip position sensor 2 short circuit to battery positive | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P2135 | Throttle position sensor 1 correlation error with throttle position sensor 2 | 3 | 40 | Yes | P0120, P0121, P0122, P0220, P0221, P0222, P2135 - Throttle Position Sensor |
P2138 | Twist grip position sensor 1 correlation error with twist grip position 2 | 3 | 40 | Yes | P2138 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 1 Correlation Error with Twist Grip Position 2 |
P2226 | Ambient air pressure sensor circuit open circuit or short circuit to 5 Volt sensor supply | 3 | 40 | Yes | |
P2228 | Ambient air pressure sensor circuit short circuit to ground | 3 | 40 | Yes |
P0030, P0032 - Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit
P0030, P0032, Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit - Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Fault Code - CM8; CR8; CS8; DP5; DR5; DS5; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC; YE1; YF1; YM1; YN1
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P0030 | Oxygen sensor heater open circuit or short to ground - bank 1 sensor 1 | View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available. View and note 'sensor' data. Make sure sensor connector is secure. Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
P0032 | Oxygen sensor heater short circuit to battery positive - bank 1 sensor 1 |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P0030, P0032, Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit - Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Pinpoint Test - PB1, PJ1, L*1, PV1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin A08 - EMS relay pin 5 | OK | Disconnect oxygen sensors and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin A08 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin A08 to oxygen sensor pin 4 - Engine ECM pin C22 to oxygen sensor pin 3 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin C22 to Engine ECM pin A08 | OK | Renew oxygen sensor, proceed to test 5 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine. Check adaption status. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P0030, P0032, P0053, P0134, P0171, P0172 Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit - Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Circuit Diagram_LG1; LGX; LL1
|
P0053, P0134, P0171, P0172 - Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit
P0053, P0134, P0171, P0172 - Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit - Fault Code - PB1,PJ1, CS7, L*1; PV1
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P0053 | Oxygen sensor heater resistance - bank 1 sensor 1 | View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available. Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
P0134 | Oxygen sensor circuit no activity detected - bank 1 sensor 1 | |
P0171 | System too lean - bank 1 | |
P0172 | System too rich - bank 1 |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P0053, P0134, P0171, P0172 Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit - Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Test L*1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: -Oxygen sensor pin 3 -Oxygen sensor pin 4 -EMS relay pin B05 -Engine ECM pin C22 | OK | Disconnect oxygen sensor and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check sensor resistance: - Oxygen sensor pin 3 to 4 | 13 to 18.5 Ohms | Proceed to test 3 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin C22 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable continuity: -Engine ECM pin C22 to oxygen sensor pin 3 -Engine ECM pin A08 to oxygen sensor pin 4 -Engine ECM pin A21 to oxygen sensor pin 1 | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine. Check adaption status. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P0030, P0032, P0053, P0134, P0171, P0172 Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit - Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Circuit Diagram_LG1; LGX; LL1
|
P0068, P0069, P0107, P0105, P1105 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
P0068, P0069, P0107, P0105, P1105 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor - Fault Code - DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PWC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P0068 | Manifold absolute pressure sensor correlation error with throttle position sensor | Check for air leak at the throttle body/transition piece to cylinder head face. Check for trapped, twisted and damaged MAP sensor hose(s). Check for air leak at the MAP sensor hoses. View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available. View and note 'sensor' data. Make sure sensor connector is secure. Disconnect the engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: Camshaft Timing Check/Adjust, as described in the service manual |
P0069 | Manifold absolute pressure sensor correlation error with ambient pressure sensor | View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available. View and note 'sensor' data. Make sure sensor connector is secure. Disconnect the engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
P0107 | Manifold absolute pressure sensor 1 short circuit to ground | |
P0105 | Manifold absolute pressure sensor 1 open circuit or short circuit to 5 Volt sensor supply | |
P1105 | Manifold absolute pressure sensor 1 pipe malfunction | Check connection/condition of pipes from MAP sensors to throttle body. |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P0068, P0069, P0107, P0105, P1105 , P1106 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin B23 - Engine ECM pin B18 - Engine ECM pin C29 - MAP sensor pin 1, 2, 3 | OK | Disconnect MAP sensors and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin C29 to Engine ECM pin B23 - Engine ECM pin C29 to Engine ECM pin B18 - Engine ECM pin B18 to Engine ECM pin B23 - Engine ECM pin B18 to ground - Engine ECM pin C29 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
3 | Check cable for continuity: - Engine ECM pin B18 to MAP sensor pin 3 - Engine ECM pin B23 to MAP sensor pin 1 - Engine ECM pin C29 to MAP sensor pin 2 | OK | Renew relevant MAP pressure sensor, proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
4 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P0068, P0069, P0107, P0105, P1105, P1106 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor - Circuit Diagram - LG1 LGX
|
P0110, P0111, P0112 - Intake Air Temperature Sensor
P0110, P0111, P0112 - Intake Air Temperature Sensor - Fault Code - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PWC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P0110 | Intake air temperature sensor open circuit or short circuit to 5 volt sensor supply | View and note diagnostic software 'freeze-frame' data if available. View and note diagnostic software 'sensor' data. Make sure sensor connector is secure. Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
P0111 | Intake air temperature sensor signal out of range | |
P0112 | Intake air temperature sensor short circuit to ground | Disconnect engine ECM and sensor and proceed to pinpoint test 6: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P0110, P0111, P0112 - Intake Air Temperature Sensor - Test - L*1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin A07 - Engine ECM pin A17 | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 7 | ||
2 | Check resistance value: - Engine ECM pin A17 to ground (Temperature dependent - see below) | OK | Proceed to test 6 |
Open circuit | Disconnect air temperature sensor and proceed to test 3 | ||
Short circuit | Disconnect air temperature sensor and proceed to test 4 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin A17 to sensor pin 1 - Engine ECM pin A07 to sensor pin 2 - Engine ECM pin B12 to sensor pin 2 - Ground to sensor pin 2 | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 7 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin A17 to Engine ECM pin A08 - Engine ECM pin A17 to Engine ECM pin A21 - Engine ECM pin A17 to Engine ECM pin B12 | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 7 | ||
5 | Check sensor resistance: - Sensor pin 1 to sensor pin 2 (Temperature dependent - see below) | OK | Proceed to test 7 |
Faulty | Renew air temperature sensor, proceed to test 7 | ||
6 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin A17 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 7 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 7 | ||
7 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Resistance Data
Resistance Data
P0110, P0111, P0112 - Intake Air Temperature Sensor - Resistance Data - PB1, PJ1, L*1 PV1
If engine is warm, remove the sensor and allow time to cool to ambient temperature prior to test.
Ambient Temperature | Resistance Value |
80ºC | 200 to 400 Ohms |
20ºC | 2.35 to 2.65 K Ohms |
-10ºC | 8.50 to 10.25 K Ohms |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P0110, P0111, P0112 - Intake Air Temperature Sensor - Circuit Diagram - LG1 LGX
|
P011B, P0115, P0117, P0125, P050C - Coolant Temperature Sensor
P011B, P0115, P0117, P0125, P050C - Coolant Temperature Sensor - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PWC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P011B | Engine coolant temperature sensor correlation error with intake air temperature sensor | View and note diagnostic software freeze frame data if available View and note diagnostic software sensor data Make sure the sensor connector is secure Disconnect ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1 |
P0115 | Engine coolant temperature sensor open circuit or short circuit to 5 Volt sensor supply | |
P0117 | Engine coolant temperature sensor short circuit to ground | |
P0125 | Engine coolant temperature sensor signal low - not reaching temperature required for closed loop fuel control | |
P050C | Engine coolant temperature sensor signal high - too warm for cold start conditions |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P011B, P0115, P0117, P0125, P050C - Coolant Temperature Sensor - Pinpoint Test - L*1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin B20 - Engine ECM pin B12 - Engine ECM pin A07 - Coolant Temperature Sensor pin 1 - Coolant Temperature Sensor pin 2 | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin B20 to ground - Engine ECM pin B20 to Engine ECM pin A08 - Engine ECM pin B20 to Engine ECM pin A21 | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin B20 to sensor pin 1 - Engine ECM pin B12 to sensor pin 2 - Engine ECM pin A07 to sensor pin 2 - Coolant Temperature Sensor pin 2 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
4 | Check resistance value: - Engine ECM pin B20 to ground Temperature dependent see Resistance Data below | OK | Disconnect temp sensor and proceed to test 5 |
Open circuit | Disconnect temp sensor and proceed to test 5 | ||
Short circuit | Disconnect temp sensor and proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Check sensor resistance: - Sensor pin 1 to sensor pin 2 Temperature dependent see Resistance Data below | OK | Proceed to test 6 |
Short circuit | Renew temp sensor, proceed to test 6 | ||
6 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Resistance Data
Resistance Data
P011B, P0115, P0117, P0125, P050C - Coolant Temperature Sensor - Resistance Data - CM8; CR8; CS8; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PWC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Resistance data under typical conditions:
Temperature | Resistance Value |
Warm engine | 200 to 400 Ohms |
Cold engine: 20°C ambient | 2.35 to 2.60 K Ohms |
Cold engine: -10°C ambient | 8.50 to 10.20 K Ohms |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P011B, P0115, P0117, P0125, P050C - Coolant Temperature Sensor - Circuit diagram - LG1; LGX
|
P0120, P0121, P0122, P0220, P0221, P0222, P2135 - Throttle Position Sensor
P0120, P0121, P0122, P0220, P0221, P0222, P2135 - Throttle Position Sensor - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PWC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P0120 | Throttle position sensor 1 short circuit to battery positive or open circuit | View and note diagnostic software 'freeze-frame' data if available. View and note diagnostic software 'sensor' data. Make sure the throttle position sensor connector is secure. Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
P0121 | Throttle position sensor 1 signal out of range | |
P0122 | Throttle position sensor 1 short circuit to ground | |
P0220 | Throttle position sensor 2 short circuit to battery positive or open circuit | |
P0221 | Throttle position sensor 2 signal out of range | |
P0222 | Throttle position sensor 2 short circuit to ground | |
P2135 | Throttle position sensor 1 correlation error with throttle position sensor 2 |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P0120, P0121, P0122, P0220, P0221, P0222, P2135 - Throttle Position Sensor - Pinpoint Test - L*1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin A20 - Engine ECM pin A38 - Engine ECM pin A26 - Engine ECM pin A32 | OK | Disconnect sensor and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin A26 to ground - Engine ECM pin A38 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin A32 to throttle position sensor connector pin 5 - Engine ECM pin A38 to throttle position sensor connector pin 4 - Engine ECM pin A20 to throttle position sensor connector pin 3 - Engine ECM pin A26 to throttle position sensor connector pin 6 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin A26 to Engine ECM pin A32 - Engine ECM pin A26 to Engine ECM pin A38 - Engine ECM pin A32 to Engine ECM pin A38 | OK | Renew throttle position sensor, proceed to test 5 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P0120, P0121, P0122, P0220, P0221, P0222, P2135 - Throttle Position Sensor - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LL1
|
P0130, P0131 - Oxygen Sensor
P0130, P0131 - Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Fault - PB1,PJ1, L*1 PV1; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P0130 | Oxygen sensor open circuit or short circuit to battery positive - bank 1 sensor 1 | Disconnect oxygen sensor and proceed to pinpoint test 4: |
P0131 | Oxygen sensor short circuit to ground - bank 1 sensor 1 | View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available. View and note 'sensor' data. Make sure sensor connector is secure. Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P0130, P0131 - Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin C32 | OK | Disconnect oxygen sensors and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin C32 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin C32 to oxygen sensor pin 1 | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin A08 to Engine ECM pin C32 | OK | Renew oxygen sensor and proceed to test 5 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine. Check adaption status. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P0130, P0131 - Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LL1
|
P0133 - Oxygen Sensor 1
P0133 - Oxygen Sensor Circuit Slow Response - Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC; YE1; YF1; YM1; YN1
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P0133 | Oxygen sensor 1 circuit slow response - bank 1 sensor 1 | View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available. Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P0133 - Oxygen Sensor Circuit Slow Response - Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: -Oxygen sensor pin 1 -Oxygen sensor pin 2 -EMS relay pin B05 -Engine ECM pin C22 | OK | Disconnect oxygen sensor and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin C22 to ground Check sensor resistance: - Oxygen sensor pin 1 to 2 | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: -Engine ECM pin C22 to oxygen sensor pin 3 -Engine ECM pin A08 to oxygen sensor pin 4 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
4 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine. Check adaption status. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P0130, P0131 - Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LL1
|
P0201, P0202, P0203 - Injector Circuit Malfunction
P0201, P0202, P0203 - Injector Circuit Malfunction - Fault - H*8, L*1, PB1, PJ1, PV1
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P0201 | Injector 1 circuit malfunction | View and note diagnostic software 'freeze-frame' data if available. Make sure the relevant injector connector is secure. Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
P0202 | Injector 2 circuit malfunction | |
P0203 | Injector 3 circuit malfunction |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P0201, P0202, P0203 - Injector Circuit Malfunction - Pinpoint Test - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin C23 - Engine ECM pin C6 - Engine ECM pin C7 | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 7 | ||
2 | Check resistance value: - Engine ECM pin A08 to Engine ECM pin C23 (injector 1) - Engine ECM pin A08 to Engine ECM pin C6 (injector 2) - Engine ECM pin A08 to Engine ECM pin C7 (injector 3) - Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin C23 (injector 1) - Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin C6 (injector 2) - Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin C7 (injector 3) | 3.0 Ohms to 4.2 Ohms | Proceed to test 3 |
Open circuit | Disconnect relevant injector and proceed to test 4 | ||
Short circuit | Disconnect relevant injector and proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable for short circuit to ground: - Engine ECM pin C23 to ground - Engine ECM pin C6 to ground - Engine ECM pin C7 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 7 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 7 | ||
4 | Check cable continuity: - EMS relay pin 5 to relevant injector pin 2 - Engine ECM pin C23 to injector 1 pin 1 - Engine ECM pin C6 to injector 2 pin 1 - Engine ECM pin C7 to injector 3 pin 1 | OK | Proceed to test 6 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 7 | ||
5 | Check cable for short circuit to supply: - Engine ECM pin A08 to Engine ECM pin C23 (injector 1) - Engine ECM pin A08 to Engine ECM pin C6 (injector 2) - Engine ECM pin A08 to Engine ECM pin C7 (injector 3) - Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin C23 (injector 1) - Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin C6 (injector 2) - Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin C7 (injector 3) | OK | Proceed to test 6 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 7 | ||
6 | Check relevant injector resistance: - Injector pin 1 to injector pin 2 | 11.4 Ohms to 12.6 Ohms | Proceed to test 7 |
Faulty | Renew relevant injector, proceed to test 7 | ||
7 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P0201, P0202, P0203 - Injector Circuit Malfunction - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
|
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 - Cylinder Misfire Detected
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 - Cylinder Misfire Detected - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P0300 | Random/Multiple Cylinder Misfire Detected | View and note diagnostic software freeze frame data if available Make sure the relevant fuel injector and coil connectors are secure. Disconnect Engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1 |
P0301 | Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected | |
P0302 | Cylinder 2 Misfire Detected | |
P0303 | Cylinder 3 Misfire Detected |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 - Cylinder Misfire Detected- Pinpoint Test - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cables and terminal integrity for the relevant fault code, P0300 will require all terminals/cables listed to be checked: P0301 - Engine ECM pin C23 - Fuel injector 1 pin 1 - Engine ECM pin B33 P0302 - Engine ECM pin C6 - Fuel injector 2 pin 1 - Engine ECM pin B22 P0303 - Engine ECM pin C7 - Fuel injector 3 pin 1 - Engine ECM pin B11 All - EMS relay pin 5 | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 9 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit to ground integrity for the relevant fault code, P0300 will require all terminals/cables listed to be checked: P0301 - Engine ECM pin C23 to ground - Engine ECM pin B33 to ground P0302 - Engine ECM pin C6 to ground - Engine ECM pin B22 to ground P0303 - Engine ECM pin C7 to ground - Engine ECM pin B11 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 9 | ||
3 | Check cable for short circuit to supply for the relevant fault code, P0300 will require all terminals/cables listed to be checked: P0301 - Engine ECM pin A8 to Engine ECM pin C23 - Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin C23 - Engine ECM pin A08 to Engine ECM pin B33 - Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin B33 P0302 - Engine ECM pin A8 to Engine ECM pin C6 - Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin C6 - Engine ECM pin A8 to Engine ECM pin B22 - Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin B22 P0303 - Engine ECM pin A8 to Engine ECM pin C7 - Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin C7 - Engine ECM pin A8 to Engine ECM pin B11 - Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin B11 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 9 | ||
4 | Check cable continuity for the relevant fault code, P0300 will require all terminals/cables listed to be checked: P0301 - EMS relay pin 5 to fuel injector 1 pin 2 - EMS relay pin 5 to ignition coil 1 pin 2 - Engine ECM pin C23 to fuel injector 1 pin 1 - Engine ECM pin B33 to ignition coil 1 pin 1 P0302 - EMS relay pin 5 to fuel injector 2 pin 2 - EMS relay pin 5 to ignition coil 2 pin 2 - Engine ECM pin C6 to fuel injector 2 pin 1 - Engine ECM pin B22 to ignition coil 2 pin 1 P0303 - EMS relay pin 5 to fuel injector 3 pin 2 - EMS relay pin 5 to ignition coil 3 pin 2 - Engine ECM pin C7 to fuel injector 3 pin 1 - Engine ECM pin B11 to ignition coil 3 pin 1 | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 9 | ||
5 | Check fuel injector resistance value integrity for the relevant fault code, P0300 will require all terminals listed to be checked: P0301 - Engine ECM pin A8 to Engine ECM pin C23 - Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin C23 P0303 - Engine ECM pin A8 to Engine ECM pin C6 - Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin C6 P0303 - Engine ECM pin A8 to Engine ECM pin C7 - Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin C7 | OK 11.4 Ohms to 12.6 Ohms | Proceed to test 7 |
Faulty | Disconnect relevant fuel injector and proceed to test 6 | ||
6 | Check relevant fuel injector resistance: - Fuel injector pin 1 to fuel injector pin 2 | OK 11.4 Ohms to 12.6 Ohms | Proceed to test 9 |
Faulty | Renew relevant fuel injector, proceed to test 9 | ||
7 | Check coil resistance value for the relevant fault code, P0300 will require all terminals listed to be checked: P0301 - Engine ECM pin A8 to Engine ECM B33 -Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM B33 P0302 - Engine ECM pin A8 to Engine ECM B22 - Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM B22 P0303 - Engine ECM pin A8 to Engine ECM B11 - Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM B11 | OK 1.2 Ohms to 1.6 Ohms | Proceed to test 9 |
Faulty | Disconnect relevant ignition coil, proceed to test 8 | ||
8 | Check relevant ignition coil resistance: - Ignition coil pin 1 to ignition coil pin 2 | OK 1.2 Ohms to 1.6 Ohms | Proceed to test 9 |
Faulty | Renew relevant ignition coil, proceed to test 9 | ||
9 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 - Cylinder Misfire Detected - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX
|
P0315, P0335 - Crankshaft Position Not Adapted
P0315, P0335 - Crankshaft Position Not Adapted - Fault - LG1; LGX; LL1
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P0315 | Crankshaft position not adapted. | |
P0335 | Crankshaft sensor circuit malfunction | View and note diagnostic software freeze frame data if available Ensure sensor is fitted correctly and connector is secure Disconnect Engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1 |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P0315, P0335 - Crankshaft Position Not Adapted - Pinpoint test - HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check terminal and cable integrity: - Engine ECM pin B17 - Engine ECM pin B16 | OK | Disconnect sensor and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin B17 to ground - Engine ECM pin B16 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin B16 to sensor pin 2 - Engine ECM pin B17 to sensor pin 1 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin B17 to Engine ECM pin B16 | OK | Renew crankshaft sensor, proceed to test 6 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
5 | Check crank toothed wheel: - Damage to teeth - magnetic debris contamination | OK | Proceed to test 6 |
Faulty | Clean/renew toothed wheel, proceed to test 6 | ||
6 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P0315, P0335 - Crankshaft Position Not Adapted - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX
|
P0351, P0352, P0353 - Ignition Coil Malfunction
P0351, P0352, P0353 - Ignition Coil Malfunction - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P0351 | Ignition coil 1 malfunction | View and note diagnostic software 'freeze-frame' data if available. Make sure relevant ignition coil connector is secure. Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
P0352 | Ignition coil 2 malfunction | |
P0353 | Ignition coil 3 malfunction |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P0351, P0352, P0353 - Ignition Coil Malfunction - Pinpoint Test - L*1, HG8, HJ8, HK8, HL8
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin B33 - Engine ECM pin B22 - Engine ECM pin B11 - EMS relay pin 5 | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 7 | ||
2 | Check resistance value: Engine ECM pin A08 to - Engine ECM pin B33 (ignition coil 1) - Engine ECM pin B22 (ignition coil 2) - Engine ECM pin B11 (ignition coil 3) Engine ECM pin A21 to - Engine ECM pin B33 (ignition coil 1) - Engine ECM pin B22 (ignition coil 2) - Engine ECM pin B11 (ignition coil 3) | 3.0 Ohms to 4.2 Ohms | Proceed to test 3 |
Open circuit | Disconnect relevant ignition coil and proceed to test 4 | ||
Short circuit | Disconnect relevant ignition coil and proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin B33 to ground - Engine ECM pin B22 to ground - Engine ECM pin B11 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 6 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
4 | Check cable continuity: - EMS relay pin 5 to relevant ignition coil pin 2 - Engine ECM pin B33 to ignition coil 1 pin 1 - Engine ECM pin B22 to ignition coil 2 pin 1 - Engine ECM pin B11 to ignition coil 3 pin 1 | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
5 | Check relevant ignition coil resistance: - Ignition coil pin 1 to ignition coil pin 2 | 3.0 Ohms to 4.2 Ohms | Proceed to test 6 |
Faulty | Renew relevant ignition coil, proceed to test 6 | ||
6 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P0351, P0352, P0353 - Ignition Coil Malfunction - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
|
P0412, P044F, Secondary Air injection Valve
P0412, P044F, Secondary Air injection Valve - Fault - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P0412 | Secondary air injection short circuit to ground or open circuit | View and note diagnostic tool sensor data. Ensure SAI valve connector is secure. Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
P044F | Secondary air injection short circuit to battery positive | Disconnect engine ECM and SAI valve and proceed to pinpoint test 5: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P0412, P044F, Secondary Air injection Valve - Pinpoint Test - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin B02 - EMS Relay pin 5 | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 7 | ||
2 | Check resistance value: - Engine ECM pin A08 to Engine ECM pin B02 - Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin B02 | 18 Ohms to 24 Ohms | Proceed to test 3 |
Open circuit | Disconnect SAI valve and proceed to test 4 | ||
Short circuit | Disconnect SAI valve and proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin B02 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 7 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 7 | ||
4 | Check cable continuity: - EMS relay pin 5 to SAI valve pin 2 - Engine ECM pin B02 to SAI valve pin 1 | OK | Proceed to test 6 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 7 | ||
5 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin A08 to Engine ECM pin B02 - Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin B02 | OK | Proceed to test 6 |
Fault still present | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 7 | ||
6 | Check SAI valve resistance: - SAI valve pin 1 to SAI valve pin 2 | 18 Ohms to 24 Ohms | Proceed to test 7 |
Faulty | Renew SAI valve, proceed to test 7 | ||
7 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run diagnostic tool function test to visually verify operation of SAI valve. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P0412, P044F, Secondary Air injection Valve - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LL1
|
P0443, P0459 - Purge valve short circuit to ground or open circuit
P0443, P0459 - Purge Valve - Fault - LG1; LGX; LL1
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P0443 | Purge valve short circuit to ground or open circuit | View and note diagnostic software 'sensor' data. Ensure purge valve connector is secure. Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
P0459 | Purge valve short circuit to battery positive | Disconnect the purge valve and proceed to pinpoint test 5: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P0443, P0459 - Purge Valve - Pinpoint Test - HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin A08 - Engine ECM pin A21 - Engine ECM pin B01 - EMS relay pin 5 | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 7 | ||
2 | Check resistance value: - Engine ECM pin A08 to Engine ECM pin B01 - Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin B01 | 22 Ohms to 30 Ohms | Proceed to test 3 |
Open circuit | Disconnect purge valve and proceed to test 4 | ||
Short circuit | Disconnect purge valve and proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin B01 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 7 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 7 | ||
4 | Check cable continuity: - EMS relay pin 5 to valve pin 1 - Engine ECM pin B01 to valve pin 2 | OK | Proceed to test 6 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 7 | ||
5 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin A08 to Engine ECM pin B01 - Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin B01 | OK | Proceed to test 6 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 7 | ||
6 | Check purge valve resistance: - Valve pin 1 to valve pin 2 | 22 Ohms to 30 Ohms | Proceed to test 7 |
Faulty | Renew purge valve, proceed to test 7 | ||
7 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run diagnostic software function test to visually verify operation of purge valve. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P0443, P0459 - Purge Valve - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LL1
|
P0460 - Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Malfunction
P0460 - Fuel Level Sensor Circuit - Fault - CG7; CM7; CM8; CN7; CR7; CR8; CS7; CS8; CT7; CX7; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P0460 | Fuel level sensor circuit malfunction | View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available. View and note 'sensor' data. Make sure sensor connector is secure. Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P0460 - Fuel Level Sensor Circuit - Pinpoint Test - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin C05 | OK | Disconnect sensor and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin C05 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin C05 to sensor pin 1 - Engine ECM pin B12 to sensor pin 2 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
4 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P0460 - Fuel Level Sensor Circuit - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX
|
P0500 - Vehicle speed sensor malfunction
Vehicle Speed Sensor P0500 L*1; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P0500 | Wheel speed sensor fault | Refer to the following ABS DTCs C1611 - Front Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit C1612 - Front Wheel Sensor Incorrect or Missing Signal C1613 - Rear Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
Not Applicable - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Not Applicable
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
Not Applicable - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Not Applicable
P0506 - Idle Control System RPM Lower Than Expected
P0506 - Idle Control System RPM Lower Than Expected - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P0506 | Idle control system RPM lower than expected | View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available. Check for associated DTCs and perform tests as required. Reset DTCs, if fault still present check the following:
|
P0507 - Engine Idle Higher Than Expected
P0507 - Engine Idle Higher Than Expected - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P0507 | Idle control system RPM higher than expected | View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available. Check for associated DTCs and perform tests as required. Reset DTCs, if fault still present check the following:
|
P0560 - System Voltage - Battery Circuit Malfunction
P0560 - System Voltage - Battery Circuit Malfunction - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC; YK1
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P0560 | System voltage - battery circuit malfunction | View and note diagnostic software 'sensor' data. Make sure voltage across battery is acceptable, note voltage. |
Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P0560 - System Voltage - Battery Circuit Malfunction - Pinpoint Test - DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin A08 - Engine ECM pin A21 - Engine EMS relay pin 5 | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 3 | ||
2 | With Ignition on check voltage at: - Engine ECM pin A08 - Engine ECM pin A21 | Same as across battery voltage | Proceed to test 3 |
Less than across battery voltage | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 3 | ||
3 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P0560 - System Voltage - Battery Circuit Malfunction - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2
|
P0642, P0643, P06A6 - 5 V Sensor Circuit A
P0642, P0643, P06A6 - 5 V Sensor Circuit A - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P0642 | 5V Sensor Circuit A - reference voltage low | View and note diagnostic software 'freeze-frame' data if available. Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
P0643 | 5V Sensor Circuit A - reference voltage high | |
P06A6 | 5V Sensor Circuit A - reference voltage out of range |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P0642, P0643, P06A6 - 5 V Sensor Circuit A - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin A32 | OK | Disconnect sensor and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin A32 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin A32 to throttle position sensor connector pin 5 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin A32 to Engine ECM pin A20 - Engine ECM pin A32 to Engine ECM pin A08 - Engine ECM pin A32 to Engine ECM pin A21 | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P0642, P0643, P06A6 - 5 V Sensor Circuit A - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
|
P0652, P0653, P06A7 - 5V Sensor Circuit B
P0652, P0653, P06A7 - 5V Sensor Circuit B - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P0652 | 5V Sensor Circuit B - reference voltage low | View and note diagnostic tool freeze frame data if available. View and note diagnostic tool sensor data. Disconnect twist grip position sensor and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
P0653 | 5V Sensor Circuit B - reference voltage high | |
P06A7 | 5V Sensor Circuit B - reference voltage out of range |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P0652, P0653, P06A7 - 5V Sensor Circuit B - Pinpoint Test -HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check terminal and cable integrity: - Engine ECM pin B26 | Ok | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin B26 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin B26 to twist grip position sensor pin 5 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin B26 to Engine ECM pin B24 - Engine ECM pin B26 to Engine ECM pin A08 - Engine ECM pin B26 to Engine ECM pin A21 | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P0652, P0653, P06A7 - 5V Sensor Circuit B - Circuit Diagram -LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
|
P0698, P0699, P06A8 - 5V Sensor Circuit C
P0698, P0699, P06A8 - 5V Sensor Circuit C - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P0698 | 5V Sensor Circuit C - reference voltage low | View and note diagnostic tool freeze frame data if available. View and note diagnostic tool sensor data. Disconnect twist grip position sensor and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
P0699 | 5V Sensor Circuit C - reference voltage high | |
P06A8 | 5V Sensor Circuit C - reference voltage out of range |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P0698, P0699, P06A8 - 5V Sensor Circuit C - Pinpoint Test - HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check terminal and cable integrity: - Engine ECM pin B25 | Ok | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin B25 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin B25 to twist grip position sensor pin 2 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin B25 to Engine ECM pin B13 - Engine ECM pin B25 to Engine ECM pin A08 - Engine ECM pin B25 to Engine ECM pin A21 | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P0698, P0699, P06A8 - 5V Sensor Circuit C - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
|
P06A4, P06A5, P06A9, 5V Sensor Circuit D
P06A4, P06A5, P06A9, 5 v Sensor Circuit D - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P06A4 | 5V Sensor Circuit D - reference voltage low | View and note diagnostic tool freeze frame data if available. View and note diagnostic tool sensor data. Disconnect twist grip position sensor and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
P06A5 | 5V Sensor Circuit D - reference voltage high | |
P06A9 | 5V Sensor Circuit D - reference voltage out of range |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P06A4, P06A5, P06A9, 5 v Sensor Circuit D - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check terminal and cable integrity: - Engine ECM pin B18 | Ok | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin B18 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin B18 to ambient pressure sensor pin 3 - Engine ECM pin B18 to MAP sensor pin 3 - Engine ECM pin B18 to Triumph shift assist sensor pin 3 - Engine ECM pin B18 to fall detection switch pin 4 - Engine ECM pin B18 to gear position sensor pin 3 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin B18 to Engine ECM pin B23 - Engine ECM pin B18 to Engine ECM pin A08 - Engine ECM pin B18 to Engine ECM pin A21 | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P06A4, P06A5, P06A9, 5 v Sensor Circuit D - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX
|
P0606, P1607, P1608 - Engine ECM Internal Error
P0606, P1607, P1608 - Engine ECM Internal Error - CG7; CM7; CM8; CN7; CR7; CR8; CS7; CS8; CT7; CX7; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Fault Code | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P0606 | Engine ECM internal error | Contact Triumph service. |
P1607 P1608 | Engine ECM ride by wire internal error |
P06B8 - EEPROM Error
P06B8 - EEPROM Error - Fault - CG7; CM7; CM8; CN7; CR7; CR8; CS7; CS8; CT7; CX7; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P06B8 | EEPROM Error | View and note freeze frame data if available. No tests available - contact Triumph service. |
P0704 - Clutch Switch 1 Input Circuit Malfunction
P0704 - Clutch Switch 1 Input Circuit Malfunction - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P0704 | Clutch switch 1 input circuit malfunction | View and note diagnostic tool freeze frame data if available. Disconnect Engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P0704 - Clutch Switch 1 Input Circuit Malfunction - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check terminal and cable integrity: - Engine ECM pin A06 | Ok | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin A06 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin A06 to left hand switch housing connector B pin 4 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin A06 to A08 - Engine ECM pin A06 to A21 | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P0704 - Clutch Switch 1 Input Circuit Malfunction - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX
|
P0914, P0917 - Gear Position Sensor
P0914, P0917 - Gear Position Sensor - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P0914 | Gear position sensor short circuit to ground or open circuit | View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available. View and note 'sensor' data. Make sure the sensor connector is secure. Disconnect the engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
P0917 | Gear position sensor short circuit to 5 Volt sensor supply |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P0914, P0917 - Gear Position Sensor - Pinpoint Test - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin B18 - Engine ECM pin B23 - Engine ECM pin B30 | OK | Disconnect sensor and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin B18 to ground - Engine ECM pin B30 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin B18 to sensor pin 3 - Engine ECM pin B23 to sensor pin 4 - Engine ECM pin B30 to sensor pin 1 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin B30 to Engine ECM pin B18 - Engine ECM pin B30 to Engine ECM pin B23 - Engine ECM pin B30 to Engine ECM pin A08 - Engine ECM pin B30 to Engine ECM pin A21 | OK | Renew gear position sensor and contact pin and proceed to test 5 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P0914, P0917 - Gear Position Sensor - Circuit Diagram - CM8; CR8; CS8; LG1; LGX
|
P0915 - Gear Position Sensor
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P0915 | Gear position sensor signal error - correlation error with vehicle speed | See information below |
This is a calculation error between wheel speed and engine rpm, so the calculated gear position does not match the indicated gear position.
Possible causes can include incorrect front or rear sprocket sizes, incorrect gearing or an incorrect rear ABS pulser ring.
P1135 - Traction Control Disabled Due To Malfunction
P1135 - Traction Control Disabled Due To Malfunction - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P1135 | Traction Control disabled due to malfunction | Check that there is no other DTC linked to the ABS system or CAN communication stored. Contact Triumph service. |
P1231, P1232 - Fuel Pump Relay
P1231, P1232 - Fuel Pump Relay - Fault - DR5; DS5; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LL1
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P1231 | Fuel pump relay short circuit to ground or open circuit | Check if pump runs briefly when ignition is switched on Ensure fuel pump relay connector is secure Disconnect Engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1 |
P1232 | Fuel pump relay short circuit to battery positive | Disconnect fuel pump relay and proceed to pinpoint test 4 |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P1231, P1232 - Fuel Pump Relay - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin A12 - Right hand switch housing pin 2 | OK | Disconnect fuel pump relay and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit to ground: - Engine ECM pin A12 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin A12 to fuel pump relay pin 1 - Right hand switch housing pin 2 to fuel pump relay pin 2 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin A12 to Right hand switch housing pin 2 | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run diagnostic software function test to verify operation of fuel pump. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P1231, P1232 - Fuel Pump Relay - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX
|
P1520 - Unmatched ABS Module
P1520 - Unmatched ABS Module - Fault - DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P1520 | Unmatched ABS | This is also identified by ABS warning light indication. Proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P1520 - Unmatched ABS Module - Pinpoint Test- DR5; DS5; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check ABS modulator part number is correct for the motorcycle | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Incorrect | Replace ABS modulator with correct part and proceed to test 3 | ||
2 | Check that the engine ECM calibration is correct for the motorcycle, using the diagnostic tool. | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Incorrect | Update calibration using service tool, proceed to test 3 | ||
3 | Clear fault code, check for normal operation | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
P1521 - CAN Fault - Lost Communication With ABS Module Or ABS System Status Error
P1521 - CAN Fault - Lost Communication With ABS Module Or ABS System Status Error - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P1521 | CAN fault - lost communication with ABS module or ABS system status error | View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available. Make sure ABS modulator connector is secure. Proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P1521 - CAN Fault - Lost Communication With ABS Module Or ABS System Status Error - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin C25 - Engine ECM pin C24 - ABS modulator pin 2 - ABS modulator pin 10 - ABS modulator pin 11 - ABS modulator pin 18 | OK | Disconnect ECM and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin C25 to ground - Engine ECM pin C24 to ground | OK | Disconnect ABS modulator and proceed to test 3 |
Faulty | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
3 | Check fuse box fuse 7 integrity. | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Faulty | Proceed to test 4 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - ABS pin 2 to ground - ABS pin 11 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Faulty | Locate and rectify wiring fault, replace relevant fuse, proceed to test 6 | ||
5 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin C25 to ABS pin 2 - Engine ECM pin C24 to ABS pin 11 - ABS pin 10 to ground - Fuse box fuse 7 to ABS pin 18 - Engine ECM pin C14 to ABS pin 4 | OK | Proceed to test 6 |
Fault still present | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
6 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P1521 - CAN Fault - Lost Communication With ABS Module Or ABS System Status Error - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX
|
P1552, P1553 - Cooling Fan Relay
P1552, P1553 - Cooling Fan Relay - Fault - DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P1552 | Cooling fan relay short circuit to ground or open circuit | View and note diagnostic software 'sensor' data. Ensure fan relay connector is secure. Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
P1553 | Cooling fan relay short circuit to battery positive or over temp | Disconnect engine ECM and fan relay and proceed to pinpoint test 4: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P1552, P1553 - Cooling Fan Relay - Pinpoint Test - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin A13 - Cooling fan relay pin 1 - Cooling fan relay pin 2 | OK | Disconnect fan relay and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin A13 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin A13 to fan relay pin 1 - EMS relay pin 5 fan relay pin 2 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin A13 to Engine ECM pin A08 | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run diagnostic software function test to visually verify operation of cooling fan. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P1552, P1553 - Cooling Fan Relay - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX
|
P1576, P1577 - Brake Switches
P1576, P1577 - Brake Switches - Fault - CG7; CM7; CN7; CR7; CS7; CT7; CX7; DR5; DS5; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P1576 | Brake 1 switch correlation error with brake switch 2 | View and note freeze frame data if available. Make sure the brake switches connectors are secure. Make sure the battery voltage is greater than 10V. Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
P1577 | Brake 2 switch correlation error with brake switch 1 |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P1576, P1577 - Brake Switches - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Turn ignition on, operate rear brake switch and check brake light operation. | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
2 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin C14 - Engine ECM pin C26 - Ignition switch pin 8 | OK | Disconnect front and rear brake switch connectors, proceed to test 3 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
3 | With brakes released, check front and rear brake switch operation: The following should be short circuit: - Front brake switch pin 8 to pin 7 - Rear brake light switch pin 3 to pin 2 The following should be open circuit: - Front brake switch pin 8 to pin 6 - Rear brake light switch pin 3 to pin 1 With the front brake switch pressed the following should be short circuit: - Front brake switch pin 8 to pin 6 The following should be open circuit: - Front brake switch pin 8 to pin 7 With the rear brake switch pressed the following should be open circuit: - Rear brake light switch pin 3 to pin 2 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Faulty | Replace relevant brake switch, proceed to test 6 | ||
4 | Re-Connect the brake switch connectors. Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin C14 to front brake switch pin 6 - Engine ECM pin C26 to rear brake switch pin 2 - Engine ECM pin C14 to rear brake switch pin 1 - Engine ECM pin C14 to front brake switch pin 6 With the brake switches released: - Engine ECM pin C26 to ignition switch pin 4 | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Open Circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
5 | Re-Connect the brake switch connectors. With the ignition switch on, measure the following Voltages: - Engine ECM pin C26 to ground - Rear brake switch pin 1 to ground (with rear brake pedal depressed) - Rear brake switch pin 2 to ground (with rear brake pedal released) - Rear brake switch pin 3 to ground - Front brake switch pin 8 to ground - Front brake switch pin 7 to ground (with front brake lever released) - Front brake switch pin 6 to ground (with front brake lever pressed) | Greater than 10V | Proceed to test 6 |
Less than 10V | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
6 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P1576, P1577 - Brake Switches - Circuit Diagram - LG1
|
P1604 - Engine ECM Tamper Detected - Return To Triumph
P1604 - Engine ECM Tamper Detected - Return To Triumph - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P1604 | Engine ECM tamper detected - return to Triumph | Contact Triumph service |
P1605 - Engine ECM Locked By The Calibration Lock Function
P1605 - Engine ECM Locked By The Calibration Lock Function - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P1605 | Engine ECM locked by the Calibration Lock function | This is also identified by a fast flashing MIL indication, and a disabled engine management system. Unlock the engine ECM using the diagnostic software and supplied unlock code from Triumph service. |
P1614 - Instrument ID incompatible Or Instruments Locked By Calibration Lock Function
P1614 - Instrument ID incompatible or Instruments locked by Calibration Lock function - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P1614 | Instrument ID incompatible Instrument or calibration is incorrect, causing the engine ECM to be disabled to prevent the motorcycle from being operated | This is also identified by a fast flashing MIL indication and a disabled engine management system. |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P1614 - Instrument ID incompatible or Instruments locked by Calibration Lock function - Pinpoint Test - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check instrument part number is correct for the motorcycle | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Replace instrument with correct part and proceed to test 3 | ||
2 | Check that the calibration is correct for the motorcycle, using the diagnostic software | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Faulty | Update the calibration using the diagnostic software, proceed to test 3 | ||
3 | Clear fault code, check for normal operation | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Short circuit | Contact Triumph service |
P1631, P1632 - Fall Detection Switch
P1631, P1632 - Fall Detection Switch - Fault - CG7; CM7; CN7; CR7; CS7; CT7; CX7; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P1631 | Fall detection circuit short circuit to ground | View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available. View and note 'sensor' data. Ensure switch connector is secure. Disconnect the engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
P1632 | Fall detection circuit short circuit to battery Voltage |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P1631, P1632 - Fall Detection Switch - Pin point Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin B23 - Engine ECM pin B18 - Engine ECM pin A37 - Sensor pin 4, 5, 6 | OK | Disconnect sensor and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin A37 to Engine ECM pin B18 - Engine ECM pin A37 to Engine ECM pin B23 | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin B18 to sensor pin 4 - Engine ECM pin B23 to sensor pin 6 - Engine ECM pin A37 to sensor pin 5 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
4 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P1631, P1632 - Fall Detection Switch - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX
|
P1650 - CAN Fault - Lost communication With Immobiliser ECM
P1650 - CAN Fault - Lost communication With Immobiliser ECM - Fault - CG7; CM7; CM8; CN7; CR7; CR8; CS7; CS8; CT7; CX7; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P1650 | Lost communication with Immobiliser ECM | View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available. Make sure the immobiliser control module connector is secure. Make sure the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P1650 - CAN Fault - Lost communication With Immobiliser ECM - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin C25 - Engine ECM pin C24 - Immobiliser pin 1 - Immobiliser pin 2 - Immobiliser pin 6 - Immobiliser pin 7 - Immobiliser pin 8 | OK | Disconnect ECM and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin C25 to ground - Engine ECM pin C24 to ground | OK | Disconnect immobiliser, ignition switch and proceed to test 3 |
Faulty | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
3 | Check fuse box fuse 6 integrity. | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Faulty | Proceed to test 4 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - Immobiliser pin 2 to ground - Immobiliser pin 8 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Faulty | Locate and rectify wiring fault, replace relevant fuse, proceed to test 6 | ||
5 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin C25 to immobiliser pin 6 - Engine ECM pin C24 to Immobiliser pin 1 - Immobiliser pin 7 to ground - Fuse box fuse 6 to immobiliser pin 2 | OK | Proceed to test 6 |
Fault still present | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
6 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P1650 - CAN Fault - Lost communication With Immobiliser ECM - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX
|
P1659 - Ignition Power Supply Malfunction
P1659 - Ignition Power Supply Malfunction - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P1659 | Ignition power supply malfunction | Make sure that the engine stop switch is in the RUN position and any alarm fitted is disarmed Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P1659 - Ignition Power Supply Malfunction - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check fuse box fuse 5 integrity. | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Faulty | Proceed to test 2 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin A11 to ground | OK | Replace Fuse 5 and proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, replace Fuse 5 and proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin A11 - Right hand switch housing pin 1 - Right hand switch housing pin 2 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin A11 to fuse box fuse 5 Note that the engine stop switch must be in the RUN position, fuse 5 must be removed and any alarm fitted must be disarmed. | OK | Replace fuse 6 and proceed to test 5 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring, immobiliser or engine stop switch fault, replace fuse 5 and proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P1659 - Ignition Power Supply Malfunction - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX
|
P1685 - Main Relay Circuit Malfunction
P1685 - Main Relay Circuit malfunction - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P1685 | Main relay circuit malfunction | Note that the starter motor cannot be powered if a main relay fault exists. Make sure the EMS main relay connector is secure. Proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P1685 - Main Relay Circuit malfunction - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Ensure ignition has been switched off for greater than 90 seconds. Identify EMS main relay on the harness. Check that relay operates when the ignition is switched ON and the stop and run switch is in the RUN position. | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Faulty | Disconnect EMS main relay and engine ECM. Proceed to test 4 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin A27 to ground - Engine ECM pin A08 to ground - Engine ECM pin A21 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, replace Fuse 5 and proceed to test 6 | ||
3 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin A27 - EMS main relay pin 1 - EMS main relay pin 2 - EMS main relay pin 3 - EMS main relay pin 5 | OK | Disconnect main relay and proceed to test 4 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check fuse box fuse 3 integrity. | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Fuse blown or open circuit | Replace fuse and proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin A08 to EMS main relay pin 5 - Engine ECM pin A21 to EMS main relay pin 5 - Engine ECM pin A27 to EMS relay pin 1 - EMS main relay pin 2 to ground - EMS main relay pin 3 to fuse box fuse 3 | OK | Replace EMS main relay and proceed to test 6 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
6 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code. Switch ignition off for longer than 90 seconds. Switch ignition on and check that the EMS main relay operates. Start engine as final check. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P1685 - Main Relay Circuit malfunction - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX1
|
P1690 - CAN Fault
P1690 - Can Fault - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P1690 | CAN Fault | View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available. View and note 'sensor' data. Make sure Instrument connector is secure. Disconnect the engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P1690 - Can Fault - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin C24 - Engine ECM pin C25 - Instrument pin 3 - Instrument pin 2 - ABS module pin 2 - ABS module pin 11 - Diagnostic connector pin 6 - Diagnostic connector pin 14 - Immobiliser module pin 1 - Immobiliser module pin 6 | OK | Disconnect instruments and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin C24 to ground - Engine ECM pin C25 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin C24 to Instrument pin 3 - Engine ECM pin C25 to Instrument pin 2 - Engine ECM pin C24 to ABS control module pin 11 - Engine ECM pin C25 to ABS control module pin 2 - Engine ECM pin C24 to Diagnostic connector pin 14 - Engine ECM pin C25 to Diagnostic connector pin 6 - Engine ECM pin C24 to Immobiliser module pin 1 - Engine ECM pin C25 to Immobiliser module pin 6 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin C24 to Engine ECM pin C25 | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P1690 - Can Fault - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LL1
|
P1695 - CAN Fault - Lost Communication With Instrument Panel
P1695 - CAN Fault - Lost Communication With Instrument Panel - Fault - PB1, PJ1, L*1, PV1
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P1695 | Lost communication with instrument panel | View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available. Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P1695 - CAN Fault - Lost Communication With Instrument Panel - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin C25 - Engine ECM pin C24 - Instrument pin 3 - Instrument pin 2 | OK | Disconnect instruments and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin C25 to ground - Engine ECM pin C24 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin C25 to Instrument pin 2 - Engine ECM pin C24 to Instrument pin 3 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin C25 to Engine ECM pin C24 | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P1695 - CAN Fault - Lost Communication With Instrument Panel - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
|
P1702, P1703 - Shift Force Sensor Circuit (Triumph Shift Assist)
P1702 - Shift Force Sensor Circuit - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC
Fault Code | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P1702 | Shift force sensor short circuit to ground or open circuit Shift force sensor voltage too low | View and note diagnostic tool 'sensor' data Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
P1703 | Shift force sensor short circuit to 5 volt supply Shift force sensor voltage too high | Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 2: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P1702 - Shift Force Sensor Circuit - Pinpoint test - G1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin B21 - Engine ECM pin B18 - Engine ECM pin B23 | OK | Disconnect shift force sensor and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin B21 to Engine ECM pin B23 - Engine ECM pin B18 to Engine ECM pin B23 | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin B21 to sensor pin 1 - Engine ECM pin B23 to sensor pin 2 - Engine ECM pin B18 to sensor pin 3 | OK | Renew shift force sensor and proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
4 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P1702 - Shift Force Sensor Circuit - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX
|
P2100 - Throttle Actuator Control Motor Open Circuit
P2100 - Throttle Actuator Control Motor Open Circuit - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P2100 | Throttle actuator control motor open circuit Throttle actuator short circuit to ground or short circuit to battery positive Throttle actuator with default spring open circuit | View and note diagnostic tool freeze frame data if available. View and note diagnostic tool sensor data. Make sure accelerator position sensor connector is secure. Disconnect the engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P2100 - Throttle Actuator Control Motor Open Circuit - Pinpoint Test - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin B04 - Engine ECM pin B03 - Throttle body connector pin 1 - Throttle body connector pin 2 | OK | Disconnect accelerator position sensor and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin B04 to ground - Engine ECM pin B03 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin B26 to sensor pin 5 - Engine ECM pin B27 to sensor pin 3 - Engine ECM pin B24 to sensor pin 1 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin B04 to Engine ECM pin A08 - Engine ECM pin B04 to Engine ECM pin A21 - Engine ECM pin B03 to Engine ECM pin A08 - Engine ECM pin B03 to Engine ECM pin A21 | OK | Renew twist grip position sensor, proceed to test 5 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P2100 - Throttle Actuator Control Motor Open Circuit - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
|
P2102, P2103 - Throttle Actuator Control
P2102, P2103 - Throttle Actuator Control - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
P2102 | Throttle actuator control internal motor relay does not operate | View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available. View and note 'sensor' data. Check throttle body for mechanical malfunctions. Clear fault code and contact Triumph service if fault is still present. |
P2103 | Throttle actuator control internal motor relay operates continually |
P2111, P2119 - Throttle Valve Drive Error
P211, P2119 - Throttle Actuator Control - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
P2111 | Throttle valve drive error (stuck open) | View and note diagnostic tool freeze frame data if available. View and note diagnostic tool sensor data. Check throttle body for mechanical malfunctions. Clear fault code and contact Triumph service if fault still present |
P2119 | Throttle valve drive error |
P2120, P2121, P2123 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 1
P2120, P2121, P2123 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 1 - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P2120 | Twist grip position sensor 1 short circuit to ground or open circuit | View and note 'sensor' data. Note ECM sensors requiring a power supply will not be active. Make sure the twist grip position sensor is secure. Disconnect the engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
P2121 | Twist grip position sensor 1 signal out of range | |
P2123 | Twist grip position sensor 1 short circuit to battery positive |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P2120, P2121, P2123 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 1 - Pinpoint Test - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin B26 - Engine ECM pin B27 - Engine ECM pin B24 - Engine ECM pin B28 - Engine ECM pin B25 - Engine ECM pin B13 | OK | Disconnect twist grip position sensor and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin B25 to ground - Engine ECM pin B26 to ground - Engine ECM pin B27 to ground - Engine ECM pin B28 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin B26 to sensor pin 5 - Engine ECM pin B27 to sensor pin 3 - Engine ECM pin B24 to sensor pin 1 - Engine ECM pin B25 to sensor pin 2 - Engine ECM pin B28 to sensor pin 4 - Engine ECM pin B13 to sensor pin 6 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin B27 to Engine ECM pin B26 - Engine ECM pin B27 to Engine ECM pin B24 - Engine ECM pin B27 to Engine ECM pin B25 - Engine ECM pin B28 to Engine ECM pin B25 - Engine ECM pin B28 to Engine ECM pin B26 - Engine ECM pin B28 to Engine ECM pin B24 | OK | Renew twist grip position sensor, proceed to test 5 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P2120, P2121, P2123 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 1 - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
|
P2125, P2126, P2128 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 2
P2125, P2126, P2128 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 2 - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P2125 | Twist grip position sensor 2 short circuit to ground or open circuit | View and note 'sensor' data. Note ECM sensors requiring a power supply will not be active. Make sure the twist grip position sensor is secure. Disconnect the engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
P2126 | Twist grip position sensor 2 signal out of range | |
P2128 | Twist grip position sensor 2 short circuit to battery positive |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P2125, P2126, P2128 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 2 - Pinpoint Test - L*1; HG8;HJ8;HK8;HL8
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin B13 - Engine ECM pin B28 - Engine ECM pin B25 | OK | Disconnect twist grip position sensor and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin B28 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin B13 to sensor pin 6 -Engine ECM pin B28 to sensor pin 4 - Engine ECM pin B25 to sensor pin 2 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin B28 to Engine ECM pin B13 - Engine ECM pin B28 to Engine ECM pin B25 | OK | Renew twist grip position sensor, proceed to test 5 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P2125, P2126, P2128 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 2 - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
|
P2138 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 1 Correlation Error with Twist Grip Position 2
P2138 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 1 Correlation Error with Twist Grip Position 2 - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P2138 | Twist grip position sensor 1 correlation error with twist grip position sensor 2 | View and note diagnostic tool freeze frame data if available. View and note diagnostic tool sensor data. Disconnect twist grip position sensor and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P2138 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 1 Correlation Error with Twist Grip Position 2 - Pinpoint Test - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Turn the ignition on and measure the Voltage between: - Engine ECM pin B25 and Engine ECM pin B13 - Engine ECM pin B26 and Engine ECM pin B24 | Ok - 5V DC | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 2 | ||
2 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin B27 to sensor pin 3 - Engine ECM pin B28 to sensor pin 4 | OK | Renew the twist grip and proceed to test 3 |
Open circuit | Rectify fault, proceed to test 3 | ||
3 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P2138 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 1 Correlation Error with Twist Grip Position 2 - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LL1
|
P2226, P2228 - Ambient Air Pressure Sensor
P2226, P2228 - Ambient Air Pressure Sensor - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
P2226 | Ambient air pressure sensor circuit open circuit or short circuit to 5 Volt sensor supply | View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available. View and note 'sensor' data. Make sure sensor connector is secure. Disconnect the engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
P2228 | Ambient air pressure sensor circuit short circuit to ground |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
P2226, P2228 - Ambient Air Pressure Sensor - Pinpoint Test - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin B23 - Engine ECM pin A5 - Engine ECM pin B18 - Sensor pin 1, 2, 3 | OK | Disconnect ambient pressure sensor and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit to ground: - Engine ECM pin B23 to Engine ECM pin A5 - Engine ECM pin B23 to Engine ECM pin B18 | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Faulty | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable for short circuit to supply: - Engine ECM pin B18 to Engine ECM pin A5 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable for continuity: - Engine ECM pin B23 to sensor pin 1 - Engine ECM pin A5 to sensor pin 2 - Engine ECM pin B18 to sensor pin 3 | OK | Renew ambient pressure sensor and proceed to test 5 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
P2226, P2228 - Ambient Air Pressure Sensor - Circuit Diagram - CM8; CR8; CS8; LG1; LGX
|
Pinpoint Tests - Immobiliser and Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Diagnostic - Trouble Codes - Index - Immobiliser/TPMS
Diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) are logged in the immobiliser/TPMS control module memory when there is a confirmed fault in the system.
The codes are reported to the Triumph Diagnostic Tool as a four digit code.
The system will log the Diagnostic Trouble Codes listed below:
Diagnostic - Trouble Codes - Index - Immobiliser/TPMS - LG1; LGX; LL1
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) | Fault Description | Warning Light/Information | Pinpoint test |
---|---|---|---|
L0001 | Front Wheel Unit Sensor Battery Alert | For low battery Voltage -lo bAtt visible in the instrument display screen. the TPMS symbol in the display screen will indicate which sensor has low battery Voltage.For zero battery Voltage - Only dashes will be visible in the instrument display screen, TPMS warning light ON and the TPMS symbol in the display screen will flash ON and OFF | |
L0002 | Rear Wheel Unit Sensor Battery Alert | ||
L0003 | Front Wheel Unit Sensor Fault Alert | TPMS warning light ON and the TPMS symbol in the display screen will flash ON and OFF | |
L0004 | Rear Wheel Unit Sensor Fault Alert | ||
L0005 | Front Wheel Unit Sensor Loss of Communication | ||
L0006 | Rear Wheel Unit Sensor Loss of Communication | ||
L0007 | Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module Fault | ||
L0008 | Invalid Key: Key Authentication Unsuccessful | Alarm/Immobiliser light ON |
L0001 - Front Wheel Unit Sensor Battery Alert
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
L0001 or The TPMS tyre symbol in the instrument pack will be on for 8 seconds with the 'F' symbol with 'lo bAtt' shown in the display screen | Low battery voltage | Replace the front wheel pressure sensor following the procedure described in the Triumph diagnostic tool user guide. Record the new sensor's ID number into the owner handbook before fitting. |
L0002 - Rear Wheel Unit Sensor Battery Alert
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
L0002 or The TPMS tyre symbol in the instrument pack will be on for 8 seconds with the 'R' symbol with 'lo bAtt' shown in the display screen | Low battery voltage | Replace the rear wheel pressure sensor following the procedure described in the Triumph diagnostic tool user guide. Record the new sensor's ID number into the owner handbook before fitting. |
L0003 - Front Wheel Unit Sensor Fault Alert
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
L0003 | Front wheel sensor unit fault alert Note: This DTC will automatically be generated if DTC L0007 occurs | If the problem persists: Replace the front wheel pressure sensor following the procedure described in the Triumph diagnostic tool user guide. Record the new sensor's ID number into the owner handbook before fitting. |
L0004 - Rear Wheel Unit Sensor Fault Alert
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
L0004 | Rear wheel sensor unit fault alert Note: This DTC will automatically be generated if DTC L0007 occurs | If the problem persists: Replace the rear wheel pressure sensor following the procedure described in the Triumph diagnostic tool user guide. Record the new sensor's ID number into the owner handbook before fitting. |
L0005 - Front Wheel Unit Sensor Loss of Communication
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
L0005 | Front wheel sensor unit loss of communication error Low battery voltage Wrong sensor ID number has been registered in the immobiliser/TPMS control module | If the problem persists: Using the Triumph diagnostic tool, check that the correct ID number for the front wheel pressure sensor is registered to the Immobiliser/TPMS control module. Replace the front wheel pressure sensor following the procedure described in the Triumph diagnostic tool user guide. Record the new sensor's ID number into the owner handbook before fitting. |
L0006 - Rear Wheel Unit Sensor Loss of Communication
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
L0006 | Rear wheel sensor unit loss of communication error Low battery voltage Wrong sensor ID number has been registered in the immobiliser/TPMS control module | If the problem persists: Using the Triumph diagnostic tool, check that the correct ID number for the rear wheel pressure sensor is registered to the Immobiliser/TPMS control module. Replace the rear wheel pressure sensor following the procedure described in the Triumph diagnostic tool user guide. Record the new sensor's ID number into the owner handbook before fitting. |
L0007 - Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module Fault
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
L0007 | Immobiliser/TPMS control module fault Low battery voltage Wrong sensor ID numbers have been registered in the immobiliser/TPMS control module | Using the Triumph diagnostic tool, check that the correct ID numbers for the wheel pressure sensors are registered to the Immobiliser/TPMS control module. If the correct IDs are registered, replace the front and rear wheel pressure sensor following the procedure described in the Triumph diagnostic tool user guide. Record the new sensor's ID number into the owner handbook before fitting. |
L0008 - Invalid Key: Key Authentication Unsuccessful
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
L0008 or Alarm/immobiliser warning indicator light is on when the ignition switch is at the ON position (only visible on motorcycles without the accessory alarm fitted) | Invalid key: Key authentication unsuccessful | Check that the key has been registered with the immobiliser control module, if it is a new key or an additional key. Check that there are no additional keys with a transponder chip fitted close to the ignition key and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | If available, try to start the motorcycle with the second registered key: | OK | Transponder chip in the key not functioning correctly. Register a new key using the Triumph Diagnostic Tool then proceed to test 5 |
Faulty | Proceed to test 2 | ||
2 | Check the condition of cable, connector housing and terminals for the following: - Ignition switch - Immobiliser control module | OK | Disconnect the ignition switch, proceed to test 3 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check antenna coil resistance: - Ignition switch pin 2 to ignition switch pin 7 | 7 Ohms to 13 Ohms | Proceed to test 4 |
Faulty | Replace the ignition switch, register new keys and proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable continuity: - Ignition switch pin 2 to Immobiliser control module pin 5 - Ignition switch pin 7 to Immobiliser control module pin 10 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
L0008 - Invalid Key: Key Authentication Unsuccessful - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX
|
Pinpoint Tests - ABS ECM
Diagnostic Trouble Codes - Index - ABS
The system will log the diagnostic trouble codes listed below:
The system will log the diagnostic trouble codes listed below.
Diagnostic Trouble Codes - Index - ABS - LG1; LGX; LL1
Fault code and description | ABS warning light Illuminated when fault is logged | ABS operation is inhibited immediately when fault is logged | ABS continues to operate if performing an ABS manouevre when fault is logged Operation is inhibited when ABS manouevre is completed | ABS will automatically resume operation if fault clears(DTC still stored for 40 cycles) | Pinpoint Test Page Number |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
C1611 Front wheel sensor short circuit to ground or open circuit | Yes | Yes | No DTC stored for 40 cycles. | C1611 - Front Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit | |
C1612 Front wheel sensor incorrect or missing signal | Yes | Yes | Yes, if after ignition cycle, no fault is detected and ABS has initialised. DTC stored for 40 cycles. | ||
C1613 Rear wheel sensor short circuit to ground or open circuit | Yes | Yes | No DTC stored for 40 cycles. | C1613 - Rear Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit | |
C1614 Rear wheel sensor incorrect or missing signal | Yes | Yes | Yes, if after ignition cycle, no fault is detected and ABS has initialised. DTC stored for 40 cycles. | ||
C1621 Front wheel pulser ring missing teeth | Yes | Yes | Yes, if after ignition cycle, no fault is detected and ABS has initialised. DTC stored for 40 cycles. | ||
C1623 Rear wheel pulser ring missing teeth | Yes | Yes | Yes, if after ignition cycle, no fault is detected and ABS has initialised. DTC stored for 40 cycles. | ||
C1631 Front wheel input solenoid short circuit to ground or open circuit | Yes | Yes | No | ||
C1632 Front wheel output solenoid short circuit to ground or open circuit | Yes | Yes | No | ||
C1633 Rear wheel input solenoid short circuit to ground or open circuit | Yes | Yes | No | ||
C1634 Rear wheel output solenoid short circuit to ground or open circuit | Yes | Yes | No | ||
C1635 Master cylinder isolation valve short circuit to ground or open circuit | Yes | Yes | No | ||
C1636 Low pressure feed valve short circuit to ground or open circuit | Yes | Yes | No | ||
C1641 Front wheel speed signal error; simulated wheel lock | Yes | Yes | Yes, if after ignition cycle, no fault is detected and ABS has initialised. DTC stored for 40 cycles. | C1641, C1643 - Wheel Speed Signal Error; Simulated Wheel Lock | |
C1643 Rear wheel speed signal error; simulated wheel lock | Yes | Yes | Yes, if after ignition cycle, no fault is detected and ABS has initialised. DTC stored for 40 cycles. | C1641, C1643 - Wheel Speed Signal Error; Simulated Wheel Lock | |
C1651 Motor circuit fault | Yes | Yes | Yes, if after ignition cycle, no fault is detected and ABS has initialised. DTC stored for 40 cycles. | C1651, C1652, C1653 - Motor – Lock; Motor Circuit Fault; Motor Does Not Run; Motor Runs Continually | |
C1652 Motor - does not run | Yes | Yes | Yes, if after ignition cycle, no fault is detected and ABS has initialised. DTC stored for 40 cycles. | C1651, C1652, C1653 - Motor – Lock; Motor Circuit Fault; Motor Does Not Run; Motor Runs Continually | |
C1653 Motor - runs continually | Yes | Yes | Yes, if after ignition cycle, no fault is detected and ABS has initialised. DTC stored for 40 cycles. | C1651, C1652, C1653 - Motor – Lock; Motor Circuit Fault; Motor Does Not Run; Motor Runs Continually | |
C1661 Power source voltage too low | Yes | Yes | Yes, if voltage rises above a preset threshold. | ||
C1662 Power source voltage too high | Yes | Yes | Yes, if voltage drops below a preset threshold. | ||
C1663 Power source - short term under-voltage detected | Yes | Yes | Yes, if voltage rises above a preset threshold. | ||
C1664 Power source - long term Under-voltage detected | Yes | Yes | No DTC stored for 40 cycles. | ||
C1671 Incorrect tyre size detected | Yes | Yes | Yes, if after ignition cycle, no fault is detected and ABS has initialised. DTC stored for 40 cycles. | ||
C1681 ABS ECM internal error | Yes | Yes | No | ||
C1682 CAN fault - lost communication with engine ECM | DTC stored for 40 cycles. | ||||
C1683 CAN fault - lost communication with instrument panel | DTC stored for 40 cycles. | ||||
C1684 CAN fault - all communication lost | DTC stored for 40 cycles. | ||||
C1690 Modulator - active pressure control malfunction | Yes | Yes | No DTC stored for 40 cycles. | ||
C1691 Modulator input (master cylinder) pressure sensor malfunction | Yes | Yes | No DTC stored for 40 cycles. | ||
C1692 Modulator output (wheel) pressure sensor malfunction | Yes | Yes | No | ||
C1700 ABS variant coding error | Yes | Yes | Not applicable | Not applicable |
ABS Warning Light ON (No DTCs Stored)
ABS Warning Light ON (No DTCs Stored) - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
ABS Warning Light ON (No DTCs Stored) | ABS Ignition supply fuse/circuit fault ABS Warning light circuit fault | Ensure ABS ECM connector is secure. Disconnect ABS ECM connector and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
ABS Warning Light ON (No DTCs Stored) - Pinpoint Test -LG1; LGX; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - ABS ECM connector pin 7 and ground pin 10 | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check cable continuity of the ABS ignition supply circuit: With the ignition 'ON', check voltage between: - ABS ECM connector pin 7 and ground pin 10 | Voltage greater than 10 V | Proceed to test 3 |
Voltage less than 10 V | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity of the ABS warning light circuit: Reconnect the ABS ECM connector Check voltage between: - ABS ECM connector pin 3 and ground pin 10 Disconnect the ABS ECM connector | Voltage greater than 1.5 V | Proceed to test 4 |
Voltage less than 1.5 V | Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable continuity of the ABS warning light circuit: - Short ABS ECM connector pin 3 and ground pin 10 together: Turn ignition 'ON' | ABS warning light 'OFF' | Proceed to test 5 |
ABS warning light 'ON' | Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect ABS ECM harness, clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
ABS Warning Light ON (No DTCs Stored) - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX
|
ABS Warning Light Does Not Illuminate (No DTCs Stored)
ABS Warning Light Does Not Illuminate (No DTCs Stored) - Fault - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
ABS Warning Light OFF (No DTCs Stored) | Warning light circuit fault ABS ECM ground circuit fault | Ensure ABS ECM connector is secure. Ensure ABS ECM ground connection is secure. Disconnect ABS ECM connector and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
ABS Warning Light Does not Illuminate (No DTCs Stored) LG1; LGX; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check the ABS warning light circuit and ignition fuses - fuse 6 and fuse 7 | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Replace fuse, proceed to test 6 | ||
2 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - ABS ECM connector pin 4 and ground pin 10 | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
3 | Check cable for short to voltage: With ignition 'OFF', check voltage between: - ABS ECM connector pin 4 and ground | 0 V | Proceed to test 4 |
Above 3 V | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
4 | Check cable for short to ground: With ignition 'ON', check the ABS warning light circuit voltage between: - ABS ECM connector pin 3 and ground | Voltage greater than 1.5 V | Proceed to test 5 |
Voltage less than 1.5 V | Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
5 | Check cable for continuity: ABS ECM connector pin 10 and ground: | OK | Proceed to test 6 |
Faulty | Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
6 | Reconnect ABS ECM harness, clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
ABS Warning Light ON (No DTCs Stored) - Circuit Diagram - LG1
|
C1611 - Front Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit
C1611 - Front Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
C1611 | Front wheel sensor short circuit to ground or open circuit | Make sure the ABS ECM connector is secure. Make sure the wheel speed sensor connector is secure. Disconnect ABS ECM connector and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
C1611 - Front Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit - Pinpoint Test -LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - ABS ECM connector pin 17 and ABS ECM connector pin 8 - Sensor connector pin 1 - Sensor connector pin 2 | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 9 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - ABS ECM connector pin 8 and ground | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Short circuit | Proceed to test 3 | ||
3 | Disconnect the front wheel speed sensor connector. Check cable for short circuit: - Wheel speed sensor connector pin 2 (motorcycle harness side) and ground | OK | Replace the wheel speed sensor, proceed to test 9 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 9 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - ABS ECM connector pin 17 and ground | OK | Proceed to test 6 |
Short circuit | Proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Check cable for short circuit: - Wheel speed sensor connector pin 1 (motorcycle harness side) and ground | OK | Replace the wheel speed sensor, proceed to test 9 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 9 | ||
6 | Check cable continuity: - ABS ECM connector pin 8 and wheel speed sensor connector pin 2 (motorcycle harness side) | OK | Proceed to test 7 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 9 | ||
7 | Check cable continuity: - ABS ECM connector pin 17 and wheel speed sensor connector pin 1 (motorcycle harness side) | OK | Proceed to test 8 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 9 | ||
8 | Reconnect the front wheel speed sensor connector. Check the wheel speed sensor operation: - Connect a suitable voltage supply between 10 V and 16 V between ABS ECM connector pin 8 (negative) and pin 17 (positive), and measure the current consumption of the wheel speed sensor | 1.8 mA to 16.8 mA | Proceed to test 9 |
Faulty | Replace the wheel speed sensor, proceed to test 9 | ||
9 | Reconnect ABS ECM harness, clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Resistance Data
Resistance Data
C1611 - Front Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit - Resistance Data - PB1, PJ1, L*1; PV1;HG8;HJ8;HK8;HL8
Wheel speed sensor current consumption data under typical conditions:
Supply Voltage | Min | Typical | Max |
---|---|---|---|
10 - 16 V | 1.8 mA | 7.5 mA | 16.8 mA |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
C1611 - Front Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX
|
C1612 - Front Wheel Sensor Incorrect or Missing Signal
C1612 - Front Wheel Sensor Incorrect or Missing Signal - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
C1612 | Front wheel sensor abnormal input or dropping out Incorrect wheel speed sensor air gap Damaged or dirty pulser ring Loose or incorrectly installed wheel speed sensor | Ensure ABS modulator connector is secure. Ensure wheel speed sensor connector is secure. Proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
C1612 - Front Wheel Sensor Incorrect or Missing Signal - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Measure the air gap of the front wheel speed sensor between the sensor and the pulser ring: - Air gap between 0.74 mm and 1.36 mm | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check the pulser ring for damage or contamination by road grime or ferrous metal filings. | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Faulty | Clean or replace the ABS pulser ring, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check the wheel speed sensors for correct installation, and the fixings for correct torque. | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Faulty | Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check the wheel speed sensor circuit (see C1611 - Front Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit). | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Faulty | Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
C1613 - Rear Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit
C1613 - Rear Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
C1613 | Rear wheel sensor short circuit to ground or open circuit | Make sure the ABS ECM connector is secure. Make sure the wheel speed sensor connector is secure. Disconnect ABS ECM connector and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
C1613 - Rear Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - ABS modulator/ECM connector pin 6 and ABS ECM connector pin 15 | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 9 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - ABS modulator/ECM connector pin 6 and ground | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Short circuit | Proceed to test 3 | ||
3 | Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor connector. Check cable for short circuit: - Wheel speed sensor connector pin 2 (motorcycle harness side) and ground | OK | Replace the wheel speed sensor, proceed to test 9 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 9 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - ABS modulator/ECM connector pin 15 and ground | OK | Proceed to test 6 |
Short circuit | Proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Check cable for short circuit: - Wheel speed sensor connector pin 1 (motorcycle harness side) and ground | OK | Replace the wheel speed sensor, proceed to test 9 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 9 | ||
6 | Check cable continuity: - ABS modulator/ECM connector pin 6 and wheel speed sensor connector pin 2 (motorcycle harness side) | OK | Proceed to test 7 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 9 | ||
7 | Check cable continuity: - ABS modulator/ECM connector pin 15 and wheel speed sensor connector pin 1 (motorcycle harness side) | OK | Proceed to test 8 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 9 | ||
8 | Reconnect the rear wheel speed sensor connector. Check the wheel speed sensor operation: - Connect a suitable voltage supply between 10 V and 16 V between ABS ECM connector pin 6 (negative) and pin 15 (positive), and measure the current consumption of the wheel speed sensor | 1.8 mA to 16.8 mA | Proceed to test 9 |
Faulty | Replace the wheel speed sensor, proceed to test 9 | ||
9 | Reconnect ABS modulator/ECM harness, clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Resistance Data
Resistance Data
C1613 - Rear Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit - Resistance Data - PB1, PJ1, L*1; HG8;HJ8;HK8;HL8
Supply Voltage | Min | Typical | Max |
---|---|---|---|
10 - 16 V | 1.8 mA | 7.5 mA | 16.8 mA |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
C1613 - Rear Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX
|
C1614 - Rear Wheel Sensor Incorrect or Missing Signal
C1614 - Rear Wheel Sensor Incorrect or Missing Signal - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
C1614 | Rear wheel sensor abnormal input or dropping out Incorrect wheel speed sensor air gap Damaged or dirty pulser ring Loose or incorrectly installed wheel speed sensor | Make sure the ABS modulator connector is secure. Proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
C1614 - Rear Wheel Sensor Incorrect or Missing Signal - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Measure the air gap of the rear wheel speed sensor between the sensor and the pulser ring: - Air gap between 0.74 mm and 1.36 mm | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check the pulser ring for damage or contamination by road grime or ferrous metal filings. | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Faulty | Clean or replace the ABS pulser ring, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check the wheel speed sensors for correct installation, and the fixings for correct torque. | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Faulty | Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check the wheel speed sensor circuit (see C1613 - Rear Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit). | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Faulty | Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
C1621 - Front Wheel Pulser Ring Missing Teeth
C1621 - Front Wheel Pulser Ring Missing Teeth - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
C1621 | Front wheel pulser gear missing teeth Incorrect wheel speed sensor air gap Loose or incorrectly installed wheel speed sensor Damaged/incorrect wheels | Make sure the ABS modulator connector is secure. Proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
C1621 - Front Wheel Pulser Ring Missing Teeth - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Measure the air gap of the front wheel speed sensor between the sensor and the pulser ring: - Air gap between 0.74 mm and 1.36 mm | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check the pulser ring for damage or contamination by road grime or ferrous metal filings. | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Faulty | Clean or replace the ABS pulser ring, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check the wheel speed sensors for correct installation, and the fixings for correct torque. | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Faulty | Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check the motorcycle wheel for damage/incorrect size. | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Faulty | Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
C1623 - Rear Wheel Pulser Ring Missing Teeth
C1623 - Rear Wheel Pulser Ring Missing Teeth - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
C1623 | Rear wheel pulser gear missing teeth Incorrect wheel speed sensor air gap Loose or incorrectly installed wheel speed sensor Damaged/incorrect wheels | Make sure the ABS modulator connector is secure. Proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
C1623 - Front Wheel Pulser Ring Missing Teeth - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
1 | Measure the air gap of the rear wheel speed sensor between the sensor and the pulser ring: - Air gap between 0.74 mm and 1.36 mm | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check the pulser ring for damage or contamination by road grime or ferrous metal filings | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Faulty | Clean or replace the ABS pulser ring, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check the wheel speed sensors for correct installation, and the fixings for correct torque | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Faulty | Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check the motorcycle wheel for damage/incorrect size | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Faulty | Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
C1631, C1632, C1633, C1634, C1635, C1636 - Front or Rear Input/Output Solenoid Short Circuit to Ground or Open Circuit
C1631, C1632, C1633, C1634, C1635, C1636 - Front or Rear Input/Output Solenoid Open/Short Circuit - Fault - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
C1631 | Front wheel input solenoid short circuit to ground or open circuit | Make sure ABS ECM connector is secure. Disconnect ABS ECM connector and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
C1632 | Front wheel output solenoid short circuit to ground or open circuit | |
C1633 | Rear wheel input solenoid short circuit to ground or open circuit | |
C1634 | Rear wheel output solenoid short circuit to ground or open circuit | |
C1635 | Master cylinder isolation valve short circuit to ground or open circuit | |
C1636 | Low pressure feed valve short circuit to ground or open circuit |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
Front or Rear Input/Output Solenoid Open/Short Circuit- LG1; LGX
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check the ABS main fuse 7: | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Faulty | Proceed to test 2 | ||
2 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - ABS ECM connector pin 18 and ground pin 10 | OK | Replace fuse, proceed to test 5 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, replace fuse, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable for short to ground: With ignition 'ON', check voltage between: - ABS ECM connector pin 18 and ground pin 10 | Voltage greater than 11 V | Proceed to test 4 |
Voltage less than 11 V | Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable for continuity: - ABS ECM connector pin 10 and ground | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Faulty | Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
ABS Warning Light ON (No DTCs Stored) Circuit LG1; LGX
|
C1641, C1643 - Wheel Speed Signal Error; Simulated Wheel Lock
C1641, C1643 - Wheel Speed Signal Error; Simulated Wheel Lock - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
C1641 | Front wheel speed signal error simulated wheel lock Binding front brake Incorrect Wheel speed sensor air gap Loose or incorrectly installed wheel speed sensor An abnormal manoeuvre was performed (a very long 'wheelie' or 'stoppie with the wheel stopped) | Make sure the ABS modulator connector is secure. Proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
C1643 | Rear wheel speed signal error simulated wheel lock Binding rear brake Incorrect Wheel speed sensor air gap Loose or incorrectly installed wheel speed sensor An abnormal manoeuvre was performed (a very long 'wheelie' or 'stoppie with the wheel stopped) |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
C1641, C1643 - Wheel Speed Signal Error; Simulated Wheel Lock - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check the relevant wheel for brake bind caused by caliper or master cylinder faults, or other mechanical causes. | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify the fault and proceed to test 4 | ||
2 | Measure the air gap of the wheel speed sensor between the sensor and the pulser ring: - Air gap between 0.74 mm to 1.36 mm | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Faulty | Rectify the fault and proceed to test 4 | ||
3 | Check the wheel speed sensors for correct installation, and the fixings for correct torque. | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Faulty | Rectify the fault and proceed to test 4 | ||
4 | Clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
C1651, C1652, C1653 - Motor – Lock; Motor Circuit Fault; Motor Does Not Run; Motor Runs Continually
C1651, C1652, C1653 - Motor – Lock; Motor Circuit Fault; Motor Does Not Run; Motor Runs Continually - Fault -CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
C1651 | Motor circuit fault | Make sure the ABS modulator connector is secure. Turn the ignition ON. Proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
C1652 | Motor does not run | |
C1653 | Motor runs continually |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
C1651, C1652, C1653 - Motor – Lock; Motor Circuit Fault; Motor Does Not Run; Motor Runs Continually Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check the ABS main fuse 7 | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Replace fuse and proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check the motor function: Check that with the motorcycle stationary and the ABS ECM modulator connected, the motor does not operate | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Motor runs continually | Contact Triumph service | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: With ignition 'ON', check voltage between: - ABS ECM connector pin 18 and ground pin 10 | Voltage greater than 11 V | Proceed to test 4 |
Voltage less than 11 V | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable for continuity: - ABS ECM connector pin 10 and ground | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Faulty | Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect ABS ECM harness, clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
C1651, C1652, C1653 - Motor – Lock; Motor Circuit Fault; Motor Does Not Run; Motor Runs Continually - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX
|
C1631, C1632, C1633, C1634, C1635, C1636, C1654 - Front or Rear Input/Output Solenoid Open/Short Circuit - Circuit Diagram - PV1
|
C1661, C1662, C1663, C1664 - Power Source Voltage
C1661, C1662, C1663, C1664 - Power Source Voltage - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC
Fault Code | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|
C1661 | Power source voltage too low | Make sure ABS ECM connector is secure Disconnect ABS ECM connector and proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
C1662 | Power source voltage too high | |
C1663 | Power source - short term under-voltage detected | |
C1664 | Power source - long term Under-voltage detected |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
C1661, C1662, C1663, C1664 - Power Source Voltage - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - ABS ECM connector pin 7 and ground pin 10 | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check the cable for continuity: - ABS ECM connector pin 10 and ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Faulty | Rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check battery voltage: With ignition 'ON', check the voltage between: - ABS ECM connector pin 7 and ground pin 10 | Voltage greater than 11 V | Proceed to test 4 |
Voltage less than 11 V | Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check battery voltage: Reconnect ABS ECM connector and start the engine, check the voltage between: - Battery positive (red) terminal and negative (black) terminal | Voltage between 11 V and 16 V | Proceed to test 5 |
Voltage greater than 16 V | Check the battery charging circuit. Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
C1661, C1662, C1663, C1664 - Power Source Voltage - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX
|
C1671 - Incorrect Tyre Size Detected
C1671 - Incorrect Tyre Size Detected - Fault L*1; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
C1671 | Incorrect diameter wheels installed Incorrect tyre pressures Incorrect wheel speed sensor air gap Damaged or dirty pulser ring | Ensure ABS modulator/ECM connector is secure. Proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
C1671 - Incorrect Tyre Size Detected - Pinpoint Test -LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check for installation of wheels and tyres of the correct size. | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check the tyre pressures. | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check the pulser rings for damage or contamination by road grime or ferrous metal filings. | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Faulty | Clean or replace the ABS pulser ring, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Measure the air gap of the wheel speed sensors between the sensor and the pulser ring: - Air gap should be in between 0.74 mm and 1.36 mm. | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Faulty | Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
C1681 - ABS ECM Internal Error
C1681 - ABS ECM Internal Error - Fault - L*1
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
C1681 | ABS ECM internal error Incorrect wheel speed sensor air gap Damaged or dirty pulser ring Loose or incorrectly installed wheel speed sensor | Ensure ABS modulator/ECM connector is secure. Proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
C1681 - ABS ECM Internal Error - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Measure the air gap of the wheel speed sensors between the sensor and the pulser ring: - Air gap between 0.74 mm to 1.36 mm | OK | Proceed to test 1 |
Faulty | Rectify the fault and proceed to test 4 | ||
2 | Check the pulser rings for damage or contamination by road grime or ferrous metal filings. | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Clean or replace the ABS pulser ring, proceed to test 4 | ||
3 | Check the wheel speed sensors for correct installation, and the fixings for correct torque. | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Faulty | Rectify the fault and proceed to test 4 | ||
4 | Clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
C1682, C1683, C1684 - CAN Fault
C1682, C1683, C1684 - CAN Fault - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PS1; PX1; PY1
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
C1682 | CAN fault - lost communication with engine ECM | Make sure ABS ECM connector is secure. Proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
C1683 | CAN fault - lost communication with instrument panel | |
C1684 | CAN lost fault - all communication |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
C1682, C1683, C1684 - CAN Fault - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - ABS ECM connector pin 2 - ABS ECM connector pin 11 | OK | Disconnect instruments and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check the cable for short circuit: - ABS ECM pin 2 to ground - ABS ECM pin 11 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - ABS ECM pin 2 to ECM pin C25 - ABS ECM pin 11 to ECM pin C24 - ABS ECM pin 2 to Instruments pin 2 - ABS ECM pin 11 to Instruments pin 3 - ABS ECM pin 2 to Diagnostic connector pin 6 - ABS ECM pin 11 to Diagnostic connector pin 14 - ABS ECM pin 2 to Immobiliser module pin 6 - ABS ECM pin 11 to Immobiliser module pin 1 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - ABS ECM pin 2 to ABS ECM pin 11 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Short circuit | Rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
C1682, C1683, C1684 - CAN Fault - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LL1
|
C1690, C1691, C1692 - ABS Modulator Malfunction
C1690, C1691, C1692 - ABS Modulator Malfunction - Fault -CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC; YA1; YB1; YJ1; YK1; YL1
Fault Code | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|
C1690 | Modulator - active pressure control malfunction | Contact Triumph service |
C1691 | Modulator input (master cylinder) pressure sensor malfunction | |
C1692 | Modulator output (wheel) pressure sensor malfunction |
C1700 - ABS Variant Coding Error
C1700 - ABS Variant Coding Error Fault - DR5; DS5; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Fault Code | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
C1700 | ABS variant coding error | Note the ABS build data. Proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
C1700 - ABS Variant Coding Error PPT - DR5; DS5; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check ABS modulator part number is correct for the motorcycle. | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Incorrect | Replace ABS modulator with correct part and proceed to test 2 | ||
2 | Clear fault code, check for normal operation. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Pinpoint Tests - Instruments
Diagnostic - Trouble Codes - Index - Instruments
The system will log the diagnostic trouble codes listed below.
Diagnostic - Trouble Codes - Index - Instruments - LG1; LGX; LL1
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) | Failure Type | Fault Description | Ignition switch cycles before clearing fault | Pinpoint test |
---|---|---|---|---|
C1300 | 18 | Main Beam Relay | 20 | |
C1300 | 19 | Main Beam Relay | 20 | |
C1302 | 18 | Heated Grips | 20 | |
C1302 | 19 | Heated Grips | 20 | |
C1303 | 18 | Front Left Direction Indicator | 20 | |
C1303 | 19 | Front Left Direction Indicator | 20 | |
C1304 | 18 | Front Right Direction Indicator | 20 | |
C1304 | 19 | Front Right Direction Indicator | 20 | |
C1305 | 18 | Rear Left Direction Indicator | 20 | |
C1305 | 19 | Rear Left Direction Indicator | 20 | |
C1306 | 18 | Rear Right Direction Indicator | 20 | |
C1306 | 19 | Rear Right Direction Indicator | 20 | |
C1307 | 16 | Battery Voltage | 20 | |
C1307 | 17 | Battery Voltage | 20 | |
C1308 | 16 | Ambient Light Sensor Voltage | 20 | |
C1308 | 17 | Ambient Light Sensor Voltage | 20 | |
C1309 | 4B | CPU Over Temperature | 20 | |
C130A | 03 | Display Backlight Failure | 20 | |
C130A | 4B | Display Backlight Failure | 20 | |
C130C | 92 | CPU Fault | 20 | |
C130D | 00 | CPU Fault | 20 | |
C130E | 00 | CPU Fault | 20 | |
C130F | 47 | CPU Fault | 20 | |
C1310 | 00 | CPU Fault | 20 | |
C1311 | 41 | Calibration Failure | 20 | |
C1311 | 46 | Calibration Failure | 20 | |
C1311 | 54 | Calibration Failure | 20 | |
C1311 | 56 | Calibration Failure | 20 | |
C1312 | 41 | Calibration Failure | 20 | |
C1312 | 46 | Calibration Failure | 20 | |
C1312 | 54 | Calibration Failure | 20 | |
C1312 | 56 | Calibration Failure | 20 | |
C1313 | 05 | Software Update Failure | 20 | |
C1314 | 49 | Internal Failure | 20 | |
C1315 | 64 | Direction Indicator Switch Correlation Fault | 0 | C1315 - Direction Indicator Switch Correlation Fault - Left/Right |
C1317 | 64 | Navigation Switch Correlation Fault | 40 | |
C1318 | 64 | Navigation Switch Correlation Fault | 40 | |
C1319 | 00 | Instrument I.D | 5 | |
C131A | 00 | Instrument I.D | 5 |
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) | Failure Type | Fault Description | Ignition switch cycles before clearing fault | Pinpoint test |
---|---|---|---|---|
C1308 | 16 | Ambient Light Sensor Voltage | 20 | |
C1308 | 17 | Ambient Light Sensor Voltage | 20 | |
C1309 | 4B | CPU Over Temperature | 20 | |
C130A | 03 | Display Backlight Failure | 20 | |
C130A | 4B | Display Backlight Failure | 20 | |
C130C | 92 | CPU Fault | 20 | |
C130D | 00 | CPU Fault | 20 | |
C130E | 00 | CPU Fault | 20 | |
C130F | 47 | CPU Fault | 20 | |
C1310 | 00 | CPU Fault | 20 | |
C1311 | 41 | Calibration Failure | 20 | |
C1311 | 46 | Calibration Failure | 20 | |
C1311 | 54 | Calibration Failure | 20 | |
C1311 | 56 | Calibration Failure | 20 | |
C1312 | 41 | Calibration Failure | 20 | |
C1312 | 46 | Calibration Failure | 20 | |
C1312 | 54 | Calibration Failure | 20 | |
C1312 | 56 | Calibration Failure | 20 | |
C1313 | 05 | Software Update Failure | 20 | |
C1314 | 49 | Internal Failure | 20 | |
C1319 | 00 | Instrument I.D | 5 | |
C131A | 00 | Instrument I.D | 5 |
C1300 - Main Beam Relay
C1300 - Main Beam Relay - Fault - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Fault Code | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|
C1300 | Relay control current is above or below threshold. | View and note diagnostic tool 'freeze frame' data if available. Proceed to pinpoint test 1. |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
C1300 - Main Beam Relay - Pinpoint Test - L*1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check the main beam relay, instruments and headlight are connected | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Replace the main beam relay and check functionality | OK | Done |
Faulty | Proceed to test 3 | ||
3 | Check the harness for short circuit: - Main Beam Relay pin 1 to Ground | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable continuity: - Main Beam Relay pin 2 to Ground | OK | Contact Triumph service |
Faulty | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
C1300 - Main Beam Relay - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX
|
C1302 - Heated Grips
C1302 - Heated Grips - Fault - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Fault Code | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|
C1302 | Heated grip current is above or below threshold. | View and note diagnostic tool 'freeze frame' data if available. Proceed to pinpoint test 1. |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
C1302 - Heated Grips - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check the heated grips and instruments are connected | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
2 | Check the harness for short circuit: - Instruments pin 6 to Ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Instruments pin 6 to left heated grip pin 1 - Instruments pin 6 to right heated grip pin 1 | OK | Contact Triumph service |
Faulty | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
4 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
C1302 - Heated Grips - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX
|
C1303 - Front Left Direction Indicator
C1303 - Front Left Direction Indicator - Fault - L*1; Hg8
Fault Code | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|
C1303 | Direction indicator current is above or below threshold. | View and note diagnostic tool 'freeze frame' data if available. Proceed to pinpoint test 1. |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
C1303 - Front Left Direction Indicator - Pinpoint Test - DR5; HF8; HG8; LG1; LGX; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check the direction indicator and instruments are connected | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
2 | Check the harness for short circuit: - Instruments pin 27 to Ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Instruments pin 27 to direction indicator connector A pin 1 | OK | Contact Triumph service |
Faulty | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
4 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
C1303 - Front Left Direction Indicator - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LL1
|
C1304 - Front Right Direction Indicator
C1304 - Front Right Direction Indicator - Fault - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Fault Code | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|
C1304 | Direction indicator current is above or below threshold. | View and note diagnostic tool 'freeze frame' data if available. Proceed to pinpoint test 1. |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
C1304 - Front Right Direction Indicator - Pinpoint Test - DR5; HF8; HG8; LG1; LGX; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check the direction indicator and instruments are connected | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
2 | Check the harness for short circuit: - Instruments pin 29 to Ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Instruments pin 29 to direction indicator connector A pin 1 | OK | Contact Triumph service |
Faulty | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
4 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
C1304 - Front Right Direction Indicator - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LL1
|
C1305 - Rear Left Direction Indicator
C1305 - Rear Left Direction Indicator - Fault - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Fault Code | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|
C1305 | Direction indicator current is above or below threshold. | View and note diagnostic tool 'freeze frame' data if available. Proceed to pinpoint test 1. |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
C1305 - Rear Left Direction Indicator - Pinpoint Test - DR5; HF8; HG8; LG1; LGX; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check the direction indicator, rear light sub-harness and instruments are connected | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
2 | Check the harness for short circuit: - Instruments pin 26 to Ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Instruments pin 26 to direction indicator connector A pin 1 | OK | Contact Triumph service |
Faulty | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
4 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
C1305 - Rear Left Direction Indicator - Circuit Digram - LG1; LGX
|
C1306 - Rear Right Direction Indicator
C1306 - Rear Right Direction Indicator - Fault - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Fault Code | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|
C1306 | Direction indicator current is above or below threshold. | View and note diagnostic tool 'freeze frame' data if available. Proceed to pinpoint test 1. |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
C1306 - Rear Right Direction Indicator - Pinpoint Test - DR5; HF8; HG8; LG1; LGX; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check the direction indicator, rear light sub-harness and instruments are connected | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
2 | Check the harness for short circuit: - Instruments pin 28 to Ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Instruments pin 28 to direction indicator connector A pin 1 | OK | Contact Triumph service |
Faulty | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4 | ||
4 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
C1306 - Rear Right Direction Indicator - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX
|
C1307 - Battery Voltage
C1307 - Battery Voltage - Fault - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Fault Code | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|
C1307 | Battery Voltage above or below threshold. | View and note diagnostic tool 'freeze frame' data if available. Proceed to pinpoint test 1. |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
C1307 - Battery Voltage - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check the starter solenoid, battery and instruments are connected | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Replace starter solenoid and check functionality | OK | Done |
Faulty | Proceed to test 3 | ||
3 | Check harness for short circuit: Instruments pin 1 to Ground | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable continuity: - Instruments pin 1 to battery positive - Fuse box 1 fuse 2 to alternator regulator/rectifier pin 3 - Alternator regulator/rectifier pin 3 to starter solenoid pin 2 - Battery positive to starter solenoid pin 3 | OK | Contact Triumph service |
Faulty | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
C1307 - Battery Voltage - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2
|
C1308 - Ambient Light Sensor Voltage
C1308 - Ambient Light Sensor Voltage - Fault - L*1; PB1; PJ1; PV1; Hg8
Fault Code | Failure Type | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|---|
C1308 | 16 | Ambient Light Sensor Voltage Below Threshold | Make sure the ambient light sensor on the instruments is not covered. Make sure the diagnostic tool is using the latest software version. Update all ECM software. Clear fault code and retest. If fault is still present contact Triumph Service. |
C1308 | 17 | Ambient Light Sensor Voltage Above Threshold |
C1309 - CPU Over Temperature
C1309 - CPU Over Temperature - Fault - L*1; PB1; PJ1; PV1;HG8
Fault Code | Failure Type | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|---|
C1309 | 4B | CPU Over Temperature | Make sure the diagnostic tool is using the latest software version. Update all ECM software. Allow the instruments to return to ambient (room) temperature. Delete the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Test the instruments for full functionality. Switch the heated grips (if fitted) to the maximum heat setting and allow to heat to operating temperature. Clear fault code and retest. if OK action complete - quit test. Fault still present - contact Triumph Service. |
C130A - Instrument Display
C130A - Display Backlight Failure - Fault - L*1; PB1; PJ1; PV!
Fault Code | Failure Type | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|---|
C130A | 03 | Display Backlight Failure | Contact Triumph Service. |
C130A | 4B | Display Over Temperature | Make sure the diagnostic tool is using the latest software version. Update all ECM software. Allow the instruments to return to ambient (room) temperature. Delete the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Test the instruments for full functionality. Switch the heated grips (if fitted) to the maximum heat setting and allow to heat to operating temperature. Clear fault code and retest. If fault is still present contact Triumph Service. |
C130C, C130D, C130E, C130F, C1310 - CPU Fault
C130C, C130D, C130E, C130F, C1310 - CPU Fault - L*1; PB1; PJ1; PV1; HG8
Fault Code | Failure Type | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|---|
C130C | 92 | Task Over-run Detected | Make sure the diagnostic tool is using the latest software version. Update all ECM software. Clear fault code and retest. If fault is still present contact Triumph Service. |
C130D | 00 | Restart Due To CPU Fault | |
C130E | 00 | ||
C130F | 47 | ||
C1310 | 00 |
C1311, C1312 - Calibration Failure
C1311, C1312 - Calibration Failure - Fault - L*1; PB1; PJ1; PV1
Fault Code | Failure Type | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|---|
C1311 | 41 | Calibration Error | Make sure the diagnostic tool is using the latest software version. Update all ECM software. Clear fault code and retest. If fault is still present contact Triumph service. |
C1311 | 46 | ||
C1311 | 54 | ||
C1311 | 56 | ||
C1312 | 41 | ||
C1312 | 46 | ||
C1312 | 54 | ||
C1312 | 56 |
C1313 - Software Update Failure
C1313 - Software Update Failure - Fault - L*1; PB1; PJ1; PV1
Fault Code | Failure Type | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|---|
C1313 | 05 | Software Download Interrupted | Make sure the motorcycle battery is fully charged. Make sure the diagnostic tool is using the latest software version. Update all ECM software. Clear fault code and retest. If fault is still present contact Triumph Service. |
C1314 - Internal Failure
C1314 - Internal Failure - Fault - L*1; PB1; PJ1; PV1
Fault Code | Failure Type | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|---|
C1314 | 49 | Internal Electronic Failure | Make sure the diagnostic tool is using the latest software version. Update all ECM software. Clear fault code and retest. If fault is still present contact Triumph Service. |
C1315 - Direction Indicator Switch Correlation Fault - Left/Right
C1315 - Direction Indicator Switch Correlation Fault - Left/Right - Fault - L*1
Fault Code | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|
C1315 | Left and right direction indicator buttons both active. | View and note diagnostic tool 'freeze frame' data if available. Proceed to pinpoint test 1. |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
C1315 - Direction Indicator Switch Correlation Fault - Left/Right - Pinpoint Test - DR5; HF8; HG8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check the left hand switch housing connector A and instruments are connected | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check cable continuity: - Instruments pin 33 to left hand switch housing connector A pin 8 | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Faulty | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Instruments pin 32 to left hand switch housing connector A pin 10 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Faulty | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check the harness for short circuit: - Instruments pin 33 to left hand switch housing connector A pin 10 - Instruments pin 32 to left hand switch housing connector A pin 8 | OK | Contact Triumph service |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
C1315 - Direction Indicator Switch Correlation Fault - Left/Right - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2
|
C1317 - Navigation Switch Correlation Fault - Up/Down
C1317 - Navigation Switch Correlation Fault - Up/Down - Fault - L*1
Fault Code | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|
C1317 | Up and down navigation buttons both active. | View and note diagnostic tool 'freeze frame' data if available. Proceed to pinpoint test 1. |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
C1317 - Navigation Switch Correlation Fault - Up/Down - Pinpoint Test - DR5; HF8; HG8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check the left hand switch housing connector A and instruments are connected | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check cable continuity: - Instruments pin 25 to left hand switch housing connector A pin 4 | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Faulty | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Instruments pin 22 to left hand switch housing connector A pin 5 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Faulty | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check the harness for short circuit: - Instruments pin 25 to left hand switch housing connector A pin 5 - Instruments pin 22 to left hand switch housing connector A pin 4 | OK | Contact Triumph service |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
C1317 - Navigation Switch Correlation Fault - Up/Down - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
|
C1318 - Navigation Switch Correlation Fault - Left/Right
C1318 - Navigation Switch Correlation Fault - Left/Right - Fault - L*1
Fault Code | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|
C1318 | Left and right navigation buttons both active. | View and note diagnostic tool 'freeze frame' data if available. Proceed to pinpoint test 1. |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
C1318 - Navigation Switch Correlation Fault - Left/Right - Pinpoint Test - DR5; HF8; HG8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check the left hand switch housing connector A and instruments are connected | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check cable continuity: - Instruments pin 16 to left hand switch housing connector A pin 7 | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Faulty | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Instruments pin 23 to left hand switch housing connector A pin 6 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Faulty | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check the harness for short circuit: - Instruments pin 16 to left hand switch housing connector A pin 6 - Instruments pin 23 to left hand switch housing connector A pin 7 | OK | Contact Triumph service |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
C1318 - Navigation Switch Correlation Fault - Left/Right - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1
|
C1319, C131A - Instrument I.D
C1319, C131A - Instrument I.D - Fault - L*1; PB1; PJ1; PV1
Fault Code | Failure Type | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|---|
C1319 | 00 | Instrument I.D Lock Enabled | Make sure the diagnostic tool is using the latest software version. Update all ECM software. If the download fails to upload or the DTC is still present. If fault is still present contact Triumph Service. |
C131A | 00 | Instrument I.D Lock Active |
Pinpoint Tests - CAN Errors - U Codes
Diagnostics - Trouble Codes - Index - CAN Errors
The system will log the diagnostic trouble codes listed below.
Diagnostics - Trouble Codes - Index - CAN Errors - LG1; LGX; LL1
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) | Failure Code | DTC Description | Failure Description | Ignition switch cycles before clearing fault | Pinpoint test |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
U0028 | 88 | CAN 1 Bus Off | Bus Off | 20 | |
U0037 | 88 | CAN 2 Bus Off | Bus Off | 20 | |
U1208 | 87 | Frame "ID208" on network "CAN 1" | Missing Message | 40 | |
U1209 | 82 | Frame "ID209" on network "CAN 1" | Alive / Sequence Counter Incorrect / Not Updated | 40 | |
U1209 | 83 | Frame "ID209" on network "CAN 1" | Value of Signal Protection Calculation Incorrect | 40 | |
U1209 | 87 | Frame "ID209" on network "CAN 1" | Missing Message | 40 | |
U1210 | 82 | Frame "ID210" on network "CAN 1" | Alive / Sequence Counter Incorrect / Not Updated | 40 | |
U1210 | 87 | Frame "ID210" on network "CAN 1" | Missing Message | 40 | |
U1518 | 87 | Frame "ID518" on network "CAN 1" | Missing Message | 40 | U1518, U1530, U1540, U1550, U1570 - Engine ECM CAN Circuit Fault |
U1530 | 87 | Frame "ID530" on network "CAN 1" | Missing Message | 40 | U1518, U1530, U1540, U1550, U1570 - Engine ECM CAN Circuit Fault |
U1540 | 87 | Frame "ID540" on network "CAN 1" | Missing Message | 40 | U1518, U1530, U1540, U1550, U1570 - Engine ECM CAN Circuit Fault |
U1550 | 87 | Frame "ID550" on network "CAN 1" | Missing Message | 40 | U1518, U1530, U1540, U1550, U1570 - Engine ECM CAN Circuit Fault |
U1570 | 87 | Frame "ID570" on network "CAN 1" | Missing Message | 40 | U1518, U1530, U1540, U1550, U1570 - Engine ECM CAN Circuit Fault |
U1600 | 56 | Frame "ID600" on network "CAN 1" | Invalid / Incompatible Configuration | 40 | |
U1600 | 87 | Frame "ID600" on network "CAN 1" | Missing Message | 40 |
U0028, U0037 - CAN Bus Off
U0028, U0037 - CAN Bus Fault - Fault - PJ1, PV1, L*1
Fault Code | Failure Type | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|---|
U0028 | 88 | CAN 1 Bus Off | Make sure the diagnostic tool is using the latest software version. Update all ECM software. Clear fault code and retest. If fault is still present contact Triumph Service. |
U0037 | 88 | CAN 2 Bus Off |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
U0028, U0037 - CAN Bus Fault - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM - Connector C pin 1 - Engine ECM - Connector C pin 6 - Instrument pin 3 - Instrument pin 2 - Positive battery ring terminal - Negative battery ring terminal - Diagnostic connector pin 6 - Diagnostic connector pin 14 | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Instruments pin 3 to battery negative and positive ring terminals - Instruments pin 2 to battery negative and positive ring terminals | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short Circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM - Connector C pin 1 to instrument pin 3 - Engine ECM - Connector C pin 6 to instrument pin 2 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check CAN bus resistance: - Diagnostic connector pin 6 to diagnostic connector pin 14 | OK (60 Ohms +/- 1 Ohms) | Proceed to test 5 |
Faulty | Note measured resistance, Diagnostic Trouble Codes and contract Triumph Service | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
U0028, U0037 - CAN Bus Fault - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LL1
|
U1208, U1209, U1210 - ABS CAN Fault
U1208, U1209, U1210 - ABS CAN Fault - Fault - L*1
Fault Code | Failure Type | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|---|
U1208 | 87 | ABS CAN 1 Circuit Fault | Make sure the diagnostic tool is using the latest software version. Update all ECM software. Clear fault code and retest. If fault is still present proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
U1209 | 82 | ||
U1209 | 83 | ||
U1209 | 87 | ||
U1210 | 82 | ||
U1210 | 87 |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
U1208, U1209, U1210 - ABS CAN Fault - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LL1
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - ABS ECM connector pin 2 - ABS ECM connector pin 11 | OK | Disconnect instruments and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check the cable for short circuit: - ABS ECM pin 2 to ground - ABS ECM pin 11 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - ABS ECM pin 2 to ECM pin C25 - ABS ECM pin 11 to ECM pin C24 - ABS ECM pin 2 to Instruments pin 2 - ABS ECM pin 11 to Instruments pin 3 - ABS ECM pin 2 to Diagnostic connector pin 6 - ABS ECM pin 11 to Diagnostic connector pin 14 - ABS ECM pin 2 to Immobiliser module pin 6 - ABS ECM pin 11 to Immobiliser module pin 1 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - ABS ECM pin 2 to ABS ECM pin 11 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Short circuit | Rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
U1208, U1209, U1210 - ABS CAN Fault - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LL1
|
U1518, U1530, U1540, U1550, U1570 - Engine ECM CAN Circuit Fault
U1518, U1530, U1540, U1550, U1570 - Engine Control Module CAN Fault - Fault - L*1; PB1
Fault Code | Failure Code | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|---|
U1518 | 87 | Engine ECM CAN 1 Circuit Fault | Make sure the diagnostic tool is using the latest software version. Update all ECM software. Clear fault code and retest. If fault is still present proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
U1530 | 87 | ||
U1540 | 87 | ||
U1550 | 87 | ||
U1570 | 87 |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
U1518, U1530, U1540, U1550, U1570 - Engine Control Unit CAN Fault - Pin point Test - L*1
Test | Result | Action | |
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin C24 - Engine ECM pin C25 - Instrument pin 3 - Instrument pin 2 - ABS module pin 2 - ABS module pin 11 - Diagnostic connector pin 6 - Diagnostic connector pin 14 - Immobiliser module pin 1 - Immobiliser module pin 6 | OK | Disconnect instruments and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin C24 to ground - Engine ECM pin C25 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 3 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin C24 to Instrument pin 3 - Engine ECM pin C25 to Instrument pin 2 - Engine ECM pin C24 to ABS control module pin 11 - Engine ECM pin C25 to ABS control module pin 2 - Engine ECM pin C24 to Diagnostic connector pin 14 - Engine ECM pin C25 to Diagnostic connector pin 6 - Engine ECM pin C24 to Immobiliser module pin 1 - Engine ECM pin C25 to Immobiliser module pin 6 | OK | Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin C24 to Engine ECM pin C25 | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Short circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5 | ||
5 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
U1518, U1530, U1540, U1550, U1570 - Engine Control Unit CAN Fault - Circuit Diagram - L*1
|
U1600 - Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module CAN Circuit Fault
U1600 - TPMS CAN Fault - Fault - DR5; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC
Fault Code | Failure Code | Possible Cause | Action |
---|---|---|---|
U1600 | 56 | Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module CAN 1 Circuit Fault | Make sure the diagnostic tool is using the latest software version. Update all ECM software. Clear fault code and retest. If fault is still present proceed to pinpoint test 1: |
U1600 | 87 |
Subheading - Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
U1600 - TPMS CAN Fault - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Engine ECM pin C25 - Engine ECM pin C24 - Immobiliser pin 1 - Immobiliser pin 2 - Immobiliser pin 6 - Immobiliser pin 7 - Immobiliser pin 8 | OK | Disconnect ECM and proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
2 | Check cable for short circuit: - Engine ECM pin C25 to ground - Engine ECM pin C24 to ground | OK | Disconnect immobiliser, ignition switch and proceed to test 3 |
Faulty | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
3 | Check fuse box fuse 6 integrity. | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Faulty | Proceed to test 4 | ||
4 | Check cable for short circuit: - Immobiliser pin 2 to ground - Immobiliser pin 8 to ground | OK | Proceed to test 5 |
Faulty | Locate and rectify wiring fault, replace relevant fuse, proceed to test 6 | ||
5 | Check cable continuity: - Engine ECM pin C25 to immobiliser pin 6 - Engine ECM pin C24 to Immobiliser pin 1 - Immobiliser pin 7 to ground - Fuse box fuse 6 to immobiliser pin 2 | OK | Proceed to test 6 |
Fault still present | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
6 | Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine. | OK | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Contact Triumph service |
Subheading - Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
U1600 - TPMS CAN Fault - Pinpoint Test - Circuit - LG1; LGX
|
Engine Management System
Engine Management Components Overview
Eng Mngt Components Overview LG1; LGX
Engine Management Sensors
|
Engine Management Actuators
|
Engine Management System Sensors
System Sensors LG1; LGX
Intake air temperature sensor - situated underneath the inlet manifold. As the density of the air changes with temperature, the amount of oxygen available to ignite the fuel also changes. Changes in air temperature are compensated for by adjusting the amount of fuel injected to a level consistent with clean combustion and low emissions.
Ambient air pressure sensor - situated at the rear of the battery tray under the seat. The ambient air pressure sensor measures atmospheric air pressure. With this information, the amount of fuel per injection is adjusted to suit the prevailing conditions.
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor - situated to the left of the airbox, connected to the throttle body a hose. The MAP sensor provides information to the engine ECM which is used at shallow throttle angles (very small throttle openings) to provide accurate engine load indications to the ECM. This degree of engine load accuracy allows the ECM to make very small adjustments to fuel and ignition which would otherwise not be possible from throttle angle data alone.
Clutch switch - situated on the clutch lever. The clutch must be pulled in for the starter motor to operate.
Crankshaft position sensor - situated in the alternator cover. The crankshaft position sensor detects movement of teeth attached to the alternator rotor. The teeth give a reference point from which the actual crankshaft position is calculated. The crankshaft position sensor information is used by the engine ECM to determine engine speed and crankshaft position in relation to the point where fuel is injected and ignition of the fuel occurs.
Engine coolant temperature sensor - situated at the rear of the cylinder head near the thermostat housing. Coolant temperature information, received by the engine ECM, is used to optimise fueling at all engine temperatures and to calculate hot and cold start fueling requirements.
Oxygen sensor - situated in the exhaust header pipe system upstream of the catalytic converter. The oxygen sensor constantly feeds information to the engine ECM on the content of the exhaust gases. Based on this information, adjustments to air/fuel ratio are made.
Side stand switch - situated on the gear change bracket. If the side stand is in the down position, the engine will not run unless the transmission is in neutral.
Fall detection switch - situated under the rider’s seat, forward of the fuse box. The fall detection switch will detect if the motorcycle is on its side and will cut power to the engine ECM immediately. This prevents the engine from running and the fuel pump from delivering fuel. In the event of a fall, the switch is reset by returning the bike to an upright position and switching the ignition off then back on again.
Gear position sensor - situated in the lower crankcase, above the drive chain front sprocket. The gear position sensor provides the engine ECM with selected gear information. This is used to prevent the engine from starting if the transmission is in gear. The sensor also provides information to the neutral lamp in the instruments.
Sensor Locations
Engine Management System Actuators
System Actuators
In response to signals received from the sensors, the engine ECM controls and directs messages to a series of electronic and electro-mechanical actuators. The function and location of the actuators is given below.
Throttle actuator motor- situated within the throttle body. The throttle actuator motor opens and closes the throttle plates in the throttle body, in response to commands from the engine ECM. The throttle actuator motor is an integral part of the throttle body.
Canister purge valve - situated in the vapour return line between the carbon canister and the throttle body. The purge valve controls the return of vapour which has been stored in the carbon canister during the period when the engine is switched off. The valve is 'pulsed' by the engine ECM to give control over the rate at which the canister is purged.
Fuel Injectors - located in the fuel rail. The engine is fitted with three injectors. The spray pattern of the injectors is fixed but the length of time each injector can remain open is variable according to operating conditions. The duration of each injection is calculated by the engine ECM using data received from the various sensors in the system.
Ignition coils - plug-top coils are located in the camshaft cover. There are three coils fitted, one for each spark plug. The engine ECM controls the point at which the coils are switched on and off. In calculating the switch-on time, the engine ECM allows sufficient time for the coils to charge to a level where a spark can be produced. The coils are switched off at the point of ignition, the timing of which is optimised for good engine performance.
Engine Management System (EMS) main relay - situated under the seat. When the ignition is switched on, the EMS main relay is powered up to provide a stable Voltage supply for the engine ECM. When the ignition is turned off, the engine ECM carries out a power down sequence during which the EMS main relay remains powered by the engine ECM for one minute. The engine ECM power down sequence includes: writing the adaption data to engine ECM memory.
Fuel pump - located inside the fuel tank. The electric pump delivers fuel into the fuel system, via a pressure regulator, at a constant 3.5 bar pressure. The pump is run continuously when the engine is operating and is also run briefly when the ignition is first switched on to ensure that 3.5 bar is available to the system as soon as the engine is cranked. Fuel pressure is controlled by a regulator also situated inside the fuel tank.
Cooling fan - located behind the radiator. The engine ECM controls switching on and off of the cooling fan in response to a signal received from the coolant temperature sensor. When the coolant temperature rises to a level where the cooling effect of natural airflow is insufficient, the cooling fan is turned on by the engine ECM. When the coolant temperature falls sufficiently, the engine ECM turns the cooling fan off. The fan only becomes operational when the engine is running. It will not operate at any other time.
Secondary air injection solenoid - located above the camshaft cover. The secondary air injection solenoid controls airflow through the secondary air injection system.
Engine Management System Actuator Locations
Fault Finding – Non Electrical
Symptom | Possible cause(s) |
---|---|
Poor throttle response at low rpm | Low fuel pressure caused by filter blockage/leaks |
Low fuel pressure caused by loose fuel pipes to the fuel pump and filter | |
Cutting out at idle | Throttle bodies out of balance |
Low fuel pressure caused by loose fuel pipes to the fuel pump and filter | |
Low fuel pressure | |
Weak mixture caused by air leak at the throttle body/transition piece to cylinder head face | |
Diagnostic software malfunctions during tune download procedure | Low battery voltage |
Throttle hang-up | Incorrect closed throttle position setting |
Motorcycle will start but cuts out immediately | Low fuel pressure caused by loose fuel pipes to the fuel pump and filter |
Low fuel pressure caused by filter blockage/leaks | |
Abnormally high fuel pressure | Fuel pressure regulator inoperative |
Temperature gauge reads cooler than normal | Cooling system air–locked resulting in coolant temperature sensor operating in air instead of coolant Thermostat fault |
Motorcycle will not start | Check the immobiliser system for faults |
Make sure that the keys, Engine ECM and Chassis ECM are all correctly paired |
Engine Adaption
General Information
The engine management system fitted to this model is adaptive. This means that the system is able to learn about new or changing operating conditions. The fuelling and throttle system can continuously adapt itself without needing to constantly make major adjustments from a fixed baseline setting.
Adaptive changes can become necessary because of different fuels, changes in the region in which the motorcycle is operated (i.e. operation at high altitude where it was previously used at sea level) or because a new part may have been fitted which has slightly different characteristics to the old part. Fuelling and throttle system adaptive changes are automatic and require no intervention by rider or dealer.
Adaption Status and Range
To see if a motorcycle has fully adapted, a facility named is provided on the diagnostic tool under Engine Diagnostics - Sensor Data - Engine Adaption. The following adaption details can be examined:
Function Examined | Report Method | Range/Status Description |
Closed throttle position reference status | Adapted/not adapted | N/A |
Twist grip adapted | Adapted/not adapted | N/A |
Idle speed control adaption status | % | N/A |
Oxygen sensor 1 adaption status (off idle) | % | Status off idle |
Oxygen sensor 1 adaption range (off idle) | % | Range off idle |
Oxygen sensor 1 adaption status (idle) | % | Status idle |
Oxygen sensor 1 adaption range (idle) | % | Range idle |
Oxygen sensor 2 adaption status (off idle) | % | Status off idle |
Oxygen sensor 2 adaption range (off idle) | % | Range off idle |
Oxygen sensor 2 adaption status (idle) | % | Status idle |
Oxygen sensor 2 adaption range (idle) | % | Range idle |
Terminology
Where the term 'status' is used, this indicates how far the present operating parameter is from the stored (adapted) value. The nearer these figures are to zero the better as it indicates the motorcycle has adapted to its current operating conditions.
The term 'range' indicates how much (in percentage terms) of the adjustment range has been used to reach the current operating status.
Typical Values
In a correctly adapted motorcycle, the following will be typical:
Function Examined | Read Out | Range/Status Description |
Closed throttle position reference status | Adapted | N/A |
Twist grip adapted | Adapted | N/A |
Idle speed control adaption status | Between +100 and -100% | N/A |
Oxygen sensor 1 adaption status (off idle) | 0% +/- 10% | Status off idle |
Oxygen sensor 1 adaption range (off idle) | Between +100 and -100% | Range off idle |
Oxygen sensor 1 adaption status (idle) | 0% +/- 10% | Status idle |
Oxygen sensor 1 adaption range (idle) | Between +100 and -100% | Range idle |
Oxygen sensor 2 adaption status (off idle) | 0% +/- 10% | Status off idle |
Oxygen sensor 2 adaption range (off idle) | Between +100 and -100% | Range off idle |
Oxygen sensor 2 adaption status (idle) | 0% +/- 10% | Status idle |
Oxygen sensor 2 adaption range (idle) | Between +100 and -100% | Range idle |
Forcing Adaption to Take Place
If the read out indicates that the motorcycle is not adapted, the following will force the system to make adaptions:
- Ensure the engine is cold.
- WITHOUT TOUCHING THE THROTTLE, start the engine and allow it to warm up until the cooling fan comes on.
- Turn the ignition OFF for at least 60 seconds to allow the adaption settings to be stored in ECM memory.
Resetting the Adaptions
A reset engine adaptions facility is provided in the diagnostic tool. This function can be used to:
Force fast fuelling and throttle adaption.
Reset (erase) current adaptions.
Fast Fuelling and Throttle Adaption
To force the fuelling and throttle system to quickly adapt to the current operating conditions:
- Connect the diagnostic tool and turn the ignition ON.
- Start the engine.
- Allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature (90°C for liquid cooled models, 60°C for air cooled models).
- Make sure the system is in closed loop control mode.
- Navigate to Engine Diagnostics - Adjust.
- Select 'RESET ENGINE ADAPTIONS' and click 'ADJUST'.
Reset (Erase) Current Adaptions
To reset the currently stored adaptions:
- Connect the diagnostic tool and turn the ignition ON. Do NOT start the engine.
- Navigate to Engine Diagnostics - Adjust.
- Select 'RESET ENGINE ADAPTIONS' and click 'ADJUST'.
The following adaptions will be reset:
Fuelling
Throttle
Twist Grip
Crankshaft Position (Euro 5 Motorcycles in Applicable Markets Only)
To Re-Adapt
- Connect the diagnostic tool and turn the ignition ON.
- Start the engine.
- Allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature (90°C for liquid cooled models, 60°C for air cooled models).
- Adapt the crankshaft position (Euro 5 Motorcycles in Applicable Markets Only).
- If applicable, perform a cruise control switch check as described in the Service Manual.
Fault Indications
If 'range' figures at 100% are seen, then the adjustment has reached maximum indicating a mechanical fault exists on the motorcycle. This can be due to a number of faults but possible causes will be incorrect fuel pressure, incorrectly connected oxygen sensors, faulty injectors or air leaks at the throttle bodies or airbox.
In these circumstances, locate and rectify the fault, and reset the adaptions as described above.
Crankshaft Position Adaption (European Markets Only)
Signals from the crankshaft position sensor are used by the motorcycle's engine misfire detection system. In order to accurately detect an engine misfire, the crankshaft position must be adapted to allow for manufacturing and assembly tolerances.
The motorcycle is delivered from the factory with the crankshaft position fully adapted. If for any reason the crankshaft position is not adapted, the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) will be illuminated and DTC P0315 will be stored.
In service, the crankshaft position must be re-adapted under the following conditions:
The MIL is illuminated and DTC P0315 is stored, indicating that the crankshaft position sensor is not adapted.
The crankshaft position sensor has been disturbed, removed or disconnected.
The crankshaft position sensor has been replaced.
The crankcases have been disassembled/reassembled.
The engine ECM has been replaced.*
The engine adaptions have been reset using the 'Reset Engine Adaptions' function in the Triumph diagnostic tool.*
* Under these conditions, the MIL is illuminated and DTC P0315 will be stored.
Preliminary Steps
- Make sure the transmission is in neutral.
- Connect the Triumph diagnostic tool and turn the ignition ON.
- Make sure the engine stop switch is in the RUN position.
- Navigate to ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS - Sensor Data - Inputs.
- Make sure the Gear Position Status is reporting as Neutral.
- Navigate to Sensor Data - Gear Position Adaption.
- Make sure the Neutral Position Adaption Status is reporting as Adapted.
- Reset and re-adapt the neutral position if any of the following conditions exist:
Neutral Position Adaption LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LJ2; LK2; LL1
To Adapt the Crankshaft Position:
Warning - General - Confined Area Engine Running
- Navigate to ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS - Function Test - Adapt the crankshaft position.
- Click Start.
- Follow the on-screen instructions.
- Hold the throttle fully open within 60 seconds of being prompted by the diagnostic tool. Do not close the throttle until instructed to do so by the diagnostic tool.
- Close the throttle when prompted by the diagnostic tool.
- Note the results of the adaption and follow the on-screen instructions.
- Click Finish.
- Turn the ignition OFF as prompted by the diagnostic tool and wait for 60 seconds for the Engine ECM to fully power down.
Final Steps
Successful crankshaft position adaption can be verified as follows:
- Turn the ignition ON.
- Navigate to ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS - Read DTCs.
- Check that DTC P0315 has cleared.
- Check that the MIL light goes out when the engine is started.
Trouble Shooting
Symptom | Possible Causes | Action |
---|---|---|
Test is aborted immediately after clicking Start. | Transmission is not in neutral. Neutral position is not adapted. Neutral position adaption is in a state of error. | Check the transmission is in neutral. Reset the neutral position adaption. Start the engine and allow the neutral position to adapt. Turn the ignition off for at least 60 seconds before restarting the crankshaft position adaption test. |
Test is aborted after the engine has reached the required temperature. | The throttle was not held open within 60 seconds of the engine reaching the required temperature. | Turn the ignition off for at least 60 seconds before restarting the crankshaft position adaption test. Make sure the throttle is held open within 60 seconds of being instructed to do so by the diagnostic tool. |
Crank adaption failed. Throttle was held fully open for 10 seconds before the diagnostic tool displayed an instruction to close the throttle. | Ignition was not turned off for 60 seconds after adapting the neutral position. | Turn the ignition off for at least 60 seconds before restarting the crankshaft position adaption test. |
Crank adaption failed. The diagnostic tool displayed an instruction to close the throttle at the expected time (after the forth engine revving cycle). | Adaption has completed abnormally. Mechanical fault. Crankshaft position signal out of range. Crankshaft trigger wheel out of tolerance. | Investigate potential mechanical faults. Contact Triumph Service. |
Gear Position Sensor Diagnosis
This model is fitted with a hall effect gear position sensor that provides a constant voltage output ranging from 0.5 to 4.5 Volts. The output voltage is used to determine which gear is currently engaged.
Voltage Characteristics
The gear position is determined by the following voltage ranges:
Gear | Minimum Voltage | Maximum Voltage |
---|---|---|
1 | 0.5 V | 0.7 V |
N | 0.9 V | 1.1 V |
2 | 1.3 V | 1.5 V |
3 | 2.0 V | 2.2 V |
4 | 2.8 V | 3.0 V |
5 | 3.5 V | 3.7 V |
6 | 4.3 V | 4.5 V |
The sensor voltage can be read using the Triumph diagnostic tool.
Further Diagnostics
Refer to P0914, P0917 - Gear Position Sensor for details of pinpoint tests relating to diagnostic trouble codes P0914 and P0917.
Neutral Position Adaption
The motorcycle is delivered from the factory with the neutral position fully adapted.
The neutral position adaption must be reset and re-adapted under the following conditions:
If a gear position sensor malfunction occurs (DTC P0914 and P0917, see P0914, P0917 - Gear Position Sensor).
The sensor has been removed or disconnected for any reason.
Refer to Neutral Position Adaption.
Neutral Position Adaption
The neutral position adaption is required to allow for manufacturing tolerances of the gearbox and gear position sensor. The motorcycle is delivered from the factory with the neutral position fully adapted.
The neutral position adaption must be reset and re-adapted under the following conditions:
If a gear position sensor malfunction occurs (DTC P0914 and P0917, see P0914, P0917 - Gear Position Sensor).
The gear position sensor has been removed or disconnected for any reason.
Adaption Reset
The Gear Position/Neutral Position Adaption Reset function provided in the Triumph diagnostic tool will erase all previous Gear Position/Neutral Position Adaptions.
To reset the Neutral Position adaptions:
- Connect the Triumph diagnostic tool and turn the ignition ON.
- Select ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS.
- Check and erase any stored DTCs.
- Select ADJUST TUNE then select Gear Position/Neutral Position Adaption Reset.
- Click Start.
- The software will confirm that the adaption has been successfully reset.
- The neutral position will now be reported as Not Adapted.
Re-Adaption
Warning - General - Confined Area Engine Running
To re-adapt the neutral position:
- Ensure the transmission is in neutral.
- Start the engine.
- The neutral position will adapt shortly after engine start provided the above conditions are met.
- The adaption status can be confirmed by selecting GEAR POSITION ADAPTION STATUS on the Triumph diagnostic tool.
- Turn the ignition OFF for at least 60 seconds to allow the adaption settings to be stored in ECM memory.
Triumph Shift Assist System (if fitted)
System Description
The Triumph Shift Assist (TSA) system enables the rider to change gears without the use of the clutch. The system uses signals from the Shift Force Sensor Diagnosis (if fitted) (located on the gear change linkage) and the Gear Position Sensor Diagnosis to detect when a shift force is applied to the gear change pedal. Engine torque is then adjusted to facilitate a smooth, clutch free gear change.
System Operation
The Triumph shift assist system allows clutch free shifts for the majority of gear changes. However, it is recommended that the clutch is used for gear changes at slow riding speeds, or when riding in slow traffic.
The clutch must be used when selecting any gear from neutral, and also when selecting neutral from any other gear.
To ensure a smooth gear change, use a positive pedal force to select the next gear then release the pedal. Do not hold the pedal in its upper or lower positions.
Clutch free Up shifts are disabled by the system at engine speeds lower than 1,500 revolutions per minute (rpm) to prevent stalling.
At maximum engine speeds, clutch free up shifts are allowed by the system, but clutch free down shifts are disabled to prevent engine over speed.
The Triumph shift assist system is disabled if the motorcycle is traveling at its limited top speed. The system is automatically re-enabled when the motorcycle slows down from its limited top speed.
Engine torque is reduced when changing gear at high engine loads.
A throttle 'blip' is applied when changing gear at low engine loads.
Engine torque is returned to normal control when the gear change is complete.
Malfunction Action
If a Triumph shift assist malfunction occurs, the system will be inhibited and the Transmission Warning symbol will be illuminated on the instrument panel.
All Triumph shift assist related malfunctions must be rectified before the system can be re-enabled.
If the malfunction is related to the gear position sensor, the neutral position and gear position adaption must be reset and re-adapted before the system can enabled.
If the malfunction is related to the shift force sensor, the shift force sensor adaption must be reset and re-adapted before the system can enabled.
The Transmission Warning symbol will continue to be displayed until each adaption is completed successfully.
Shift Force Sensor Diagnosis (if fitted)
The shift force sensor is used to detect when a force is applied to the gear change pedal.
Voltage Characteristics
The sensor output voltage changes as follows during normal operation:
Sensor State | Voltage |
---|---|
At rest | 2.5 V |
In compression (up shift) | 2.5 V to 0.5 V |
In tension (down shift) | 2.5 V to 4.5 V |
The sensor voltage can be read using the Triumph diagnostic tool.
Further diagnostics
Refer to P1702, P1703 - Shift Force Sensor Circuit (Triumph Shift Assist) for details of pinpoint tests relating to diagnostic trouble codes P1702 and P1703.
Adaption
If Triumph Shift Assist is fitted as standard, the motorcycle is delivered from the factory with the shift force sensor fully adapted.
If the Triumph Shift Assist has been fitted as an accessory, the shift force sensor must be adapted as part of the accessory kit installation process.
The shift force sensor adaption must be reset and the sensor re-adapted under the following conditions:
If a shift force sensor malfunction occurs (DTC P1702 and P1703, see P1702, P1703 - Shift Force Sensor Circuit (Triumph Shift Assist)).
The sensor has been removed or disconnected for any reason.
Refer to Shift Force Sensor Adaption (if fitted).
Shift Force Sensor Adaption (if fitted)
The shift force sensor adaption is required to allow for manufacturing tolerances of the shift force sensor.
If Triumph Shift Assist is fitted as standard, the motorcycle is delivered from the factory with the shift force sensor fully adapted.
If the Triumph Shift Assist has been fitted as an accessory, the shift force sensor must be adapted as part of the accessory kit installation process.
The shift force sensor adaption must be reset and re-adapted under the following conditions:
If a shift force sensor malfunction occurs (DTC P1702 and P1703, see P1702, P1703 - Shift Force Sensor Circuit (Triumph Shift Assist)).
If the shift force sensor has been removed or disconnected for any reason.
Adaption Reset
The Shift Force Sensor Adaption Reset function provided in the Triumph diagnostic tool will erase all previous shift force sensor adaptions.
To reset the shift force sensor adaption:
- Connect the Triumph diagnostic tool and turn the ignition ON.
- Select ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS.
- Check and erase any stored DTCs.
- Select ADJUST TUNE then select Shift Force Sensor Adaption Reset.
- Click Start.
- The software will confirm that the adaption has been successfully reset.
- The Shift Force Sensor Adaption Status will now be reported as Not Adapted.
Re-Adaption
Warning - General - Confined Area Engine Running
To re-adapt the shift force sensor:
- Ensure the transmission is in neutral.
- Start the engine.
- The shift force sensor will adapt shortly after engine start provided the above conditions are met.
- The adaption status can be confirmed by selecting TRIUMPH SHIFT ASSIST ADAPTION STATUS on the Triumph diagnostic tool.
- Turn the ignition OFF for at least 60 seconds to allow the adaption settings to be stored in ECM memory.
Gear Position Adaption
Gear position adaption is required to allow for manufacturing tolerances of the gearbox and gear position sensor.
If Triumph Shift Assist is fitted as standard, the motorcycle is delivered from the factory with each gear position fully adapted.
If the Triumph Shift Assist has been fitted as an accessory, each gear position must be fully adapted as part of the accessory kit installation process.
Gear position adaption must be reset and re-adapted under the following conditions:
If a gear position sensor malfunction occurs (DTC P0914 and P0917, see P0914, P0917 - Gear Position Sensor).
The gear position sensor has been removed or disconnected for any reason.
Adaption Reset
The Gear Position/Neutral Position Adaption Reset function provided in the Triumph diagnostic tool will erase all previous Gear Position/Neutral Position Adaptions.
To reset the Gear Position/Neutral Position adaptions:
- Connect the Triumph diagnostic tool and turn the ignition ON.
- Select ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS.
- Check and erase any stored DTCs.
- Select ADJUST TUNE then select Gear Position/Neutral Position Adaption Reset.
- Click Start.
- The software will confirm that the adaption has been successfully reset.
- The neutral position and each gear position will now be reported as Not Adapted.
Re-Adaption
Warning - General - Confined Area Engine Running
To re-adapt the gear positions:
- Ensure the transmission is in neutral.
- Start the engine and allow the neutral position to adapt (see Neutral Position Adaption).
- Road test the motorcycle as follows:
Engine ECM Calibration Download Flow Chart
Key ignition download flow chart
Replacement Engine ECM Setup
Immobiliser System
Immobiliser System
System Description
This model is fitted with an electronic immobiliser system to help protect it against theft. This system has to be paired with the engine ECM and the ignition key which contains a transponder chip. If all the components are correctly paired, the immobiliser will allow the engine to start. The Triumph diagnostic tool is the only way these components can be paired.
In addition, the system has an on-board diagnostic function. This ensures that, should a malfunction occur in the immobiliser system, a malfunction code is stored in the chassis ECM memory. This stored data can then be recovered using the Triumph diagnostic tool (see Systems Diagnostics).
System Components and Operation
Transponder chip - situated inside the ignition key. The chip is activated by the antenna coil when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
Antenna coil - situated around the ignition switch. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and the transponder chip is activated, the signal from the chip is sent to the immobiliser/TPMS control module.
Immobilise/TPMS Control Module - situated on the right hand side of the frame. This control module communicates with the transponder chip in the key and the engine ECM and will only allow the engine to start if a matching signal is received.
Alarm/immobiliser warning indicator light - situated in the instrument pack. The light will flash on and off for 24 hours to show that the engine immobiliser is on. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the immobiliser and the indicator light will be off. If the indicator light remains on it indicates that the immobiliser has a malfunction that requires investigation. If an accessory alarm is fitted, the immobiliser indicator light will only illuminate when the conditions described in the accessory alarm instructions are met.
Keys
When the motorcycle is delivered from the factory it is supplied with two keys. Keys can be deleted or added to the immobiliser system using the Triumph diagnostic tool. A maximum of four keys can be added to the system.
To ensure the immobiliser system functions correctly note the following:
Do not put any magnetic materials on the same key ring as the motorcycle key.
Do not put any other ignition key with a transponder chip fitted near the motorcycle key when in use.
Do not modify the immobiliser system.
Do not submerge the key in water or any other fluid.
Do not drop or strike the key against hard material.
Diagnostics
To fully diagnose the immobiliser system it is necessary to check for fault codes in the immobiliser control module using the Triumph diagnostic tool (see Systems Diagnostics).
Further Diagnosis
The diagnostic trouble code tables, if used correctly, help to pinpoint a fault in the system once a diagnostic trouble code has been stored (see Systems Diagnostics).
Immobiliser Components Overview
Immobiliser Overview LG1; LGX
|
Immobiliser System Components Location
ABS Management System
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
System Description
This model is fitted with an electronic anti-lock brake system which is designed to prevent the wheels from locking or skidding by reducing braking effort to the front or rear brake caliper as required.
The system consists of a hydraulic modulator and ECM assembly mounted to a bracket beneath the fuel tank, a front wheel speed sensor mounted to the front fork, and a rear wheel speed sensor mounted to the rear brake caliper carrier.
Both front and rear wheels have a pulser ring mounted on to the brake discs.
The front and rear master cylinders are connected via lines to the modulator and from the modulator the lines connect to the brake calipers.
The front and rear brake circuits operate as separate systems. The front and rear brakes are not connected in any way inside the modulator.
The ABS modulator ECM continuously calculates the front and rear wheel speeds, and from these inputs the ECM calculates the estimated motorcycle speed, wheel deceleration/acceleration, the wheel speed difference and the wheel slip (skid) rate. This is calculated by comparing the calculated wheel speeds with the calculated vehicle speed, so that if one wheel speed deviates significantly from the other two readings, this wheel is calculated to be slipping (skidding).
Under braking, if the modulator detects that either wheel is about to slip, due to the brake force exceeding the available traction between the tyre and road surface (the wheel will begin to slip or 'skid'), the ECM very rapidly releases and reapplies the brake pressure to prevent the wheel from slipping.
This is felt through the brake pedal or lever as a rapid 'pulsing'.
If the rider reduces braking effort, or traction increases (so that traction exceeds braking force, the wheel will rotate once more) the wheel will no longer lock up. The ABS system will detect this and stop controlling brake pressure, and return to its monitoring state.
ABS Management Components Overview
ABS Mngt Components Overview LG1; LGX
|
ABS Component Locations
Starter and Charger Diagnostics
Starting Circuit
All Triumph models are equipped with an electric start system.
This system consists of a starter relay, starter motor, starter switch, side stand switch, engine stop switch, clutch switch and the sprag clutch.
The starter motor is connected to the starter relay and the battery by heavy duty cables in order to supply the large currents required by the motor to start the engine.
When the starter button is pressed, the relay is energised, which then allows current to the starter motor.
The starter motor will not operate unless the clutch lever is pulled in. Also, the starter will not operate if the side stand is down, unless the transmission is in neutral. If the starter motor does not operate, the following basic checks must be carried out before further diagnosis is performed:
Check the engine stop switch is in the 'RUN' position.
Check the battery terminals are clean and tight.
Check the frame and engine ground connections are clean, tight and free from corrosion.
Make sure the battery is fully charged and in good condition.
Check that any fuse in the circuit is not blown and is of the correct rating.
Using the Triumph Diagnostic Tool, check the operation of the neutral switch or gear position sensor (if fitted), side stand and clutch switches.
Rectify any defects as necessary.
General Fault Finding – Starter Motor and Relay
Symptom | Possible cause(s) |
---|---|
Starter relay does not click, starter motor does not turn | Battery discharged or defective |
Blown main or starter relay fuse | |
Defective starter relay wiring or starter switch | |
Check that the side stand, transmission and clutch lever are positioned for engine starting i.e. transmission in neutral, clutch lever pulled in and the side stand down | |
Defective alarm system - ensure any alarm fitted is working correctly | |
Starter motor turns slowly | Battery discharged or defective |
Loose, corroded or dirty battery connections | |
Loose, corroded or dirty starter motor or starter relay connections | |
Defective starter motor | |
Loose, corroded or dirty battery ground connections | |
Starter relay clicks but engine does not turn over | Battery discharged or defective |
Crankshaft does not turn due to engine defect | |
Defective starter motor | |
Starter cable open circuit | |
Defective starter relay | |
Starter motor turns but engine does not turn over | Starter motor or starter ring gear |
Diagnosis – Starter Circuit
Diagnosis - Alternator/Charging Circuit
The charging system consists of an alternator, a rectifier/regulator assembly and the battery.
The alternator is made up of two parts, the stator, which is mounted to the crankcase or the engine cover, and the rotor, mounted to the end of the crankshaft.
The stator is an assembly of 18 coils, arranged into 3 phases. The rotor is a series of magnets mounted in the engine flywheel, which are arranged so as to be positioned around the outside of the stator coils.
As the engine rotates the alternator produces an AC (alternating current) voltage in each of the three phases of the alternator, typically of around 35 to 40 volts AC at 4,000 - 5,000 rpm, although this figure varies between models.
As the battery requires DC (direct current) voltage for correct charging, this AC voltage must be first rectified to DC current, and then regulated to the correct voltage for the battery of 14.5 +/- 0.5 volts.
This is done by the rectifier/regulator, which uses diodes to convert the alternator output to DC Volts and limits the resulting output to the correct figure required for optimal battery charging.
If the charging circuit does not operate correctly, the following basic checks must be carried out before further diagnosis is performed:
Check the battery terminals are clean and tight.
Check the frame and engine earth connections are clean, tight and free from corrosion.
Ensure the battery is fully charged and in good condition.
Check that any fuse in the circuit is not blown and is of the correct rating.
Rectify any defects as necessary.
Diagnosis – Charging Circuit
Alternator Stator
Alternator Stator - Introduction - Generic
The alternator stator is an assembly of 18 coils, arranged into three phases. It is possible to check for continuity and short circuits through the coils and to ground.
Alternator Stator - Fault
Fault | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
Battery not charging | Main fuse | Check the condition of the fuse. |
Battery | Check the condition of the battery. Refer to the instructions supplied with recommended battery charger to make sure the battery is serviceable. | |
Alternator | Proceed to pinpoint test 1: | |
Regulator/Rectifier | Test the regulator/rectifier (see Regulator/Rectifier) |
Pinpoint Tests
Alternator Stator - Pinpoint Test
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Battery positive (+) - Battery negative (-) - Rectifier/regulator to main wiring harness connector pin 1 - Rectifier/regulator to main wiring harness connector pin 2 - Rectifier/regulator to main wiring harness connector pin 3 - Rectifier/regulator to main wiring harness connector pin 4 | OK | Proceed to test 2 |
Faulty | Rectify fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
2 | Check cable and terminal integrity: - Rectifier/regulator to alternator harness connector pin 1 - Rectifier/regulator to alternator harness connector pin 2 - Rectifier/regulator to alternator harness connector pin 3 | OK | Disconnect the battery leads, negative (black) lead first. Disconnect rectifier/regulator to main wiring harness connector (4 pin). Proceed to test 3 |
Faulty | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
3 | Check cable continuity: - Rectifier/regulator main harness connector pin 1 to battery lead negative - Rectifier/regulator main harness connector pin 2 to battery lead negative - Rectifier/regulator main harness connector pin 3 to battery lead positive - Rectifier/regulator main harness connector pin 4 to battery lead positive | OK | Reconnect the battery leads, positive (red) lead first. Reconnect the rectifier/regulator to main wiring harness connector (4 pin). Disconnect the rectifier/regulator to alternator harness connector (3 pin). Proceed to test 4 |
Open circuit | Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6 | ||
4 | Check resistance through the coils: - Alternator harness pin 1 to 2 - Alternator harness pin 2 to 3 - Alternator harness pin 3 to 1 | 0.2 Ohms to 3 KOhms | Proceed to test 5 |
<0.2 Ohms - Short circuit >3 KOhms - Open circuit | If the fault is between the connector and the crankcase, repair the harness. proceed to test 6 If the fault is after the crankcase, replace the unit. Proceed to test 6 | ||
5 | Check for short to earth: - Alternator harness pin 1 to metal frame - Alternator harness pin 2 to metal frame - Alternator harness pin 3 to metal frame | Open circuit | Proceed to test 6 |
Short circuit | Replace unit. Proceed to test 6 | ||
6 | Reconnect the harness and run the engine. Check the charging voltage at 2,000 rpm: | 13.5 V - 15 V | Action complete - quit test Test rectifier/regulator (see Regulator/Rectifier). If rectifier/regulator is serviceable, contact Triumph service |
Fault still present |
Circuit Diagram
Regulator/Rectifier
Regulator/Rectifier - Introduction
Internally the rectifier/regulator consists of three diodes, one between each input and the positive terminal, and three Field Effect Transistors (FETs), one between each input and the ground terminal.
As the voltage of the AC signal from the alternator rises, the voltage controller switches the FETs to avoid over voltage on the output.
The diodes and FETs can be checked using a multimeter on DIODE setting. Disconnect the two electrical connectors from the rectifier/regulator and check the readings as indicated below.
Regulator/Rectifier - Fault
Fault | Possible cause | Action |
---|---|---|
Battery not charging | Main Fuse | Check the condition of the main 30A fuse: |
Battery | Check the condition of the battery. Refer to the instructions supplied with recommended battery charger to make sure the battery is serviceable. | |
Regulator/Rectifier | Disconnect the black and the grey connectors from the rectifier/regulator and proceed to pinpoint test 1: | |
Alternator | Test the alternator stator (see Alternator Stator). |
Pinpoint Tests
Regulator/Rectifier - Pinpoint Test
Test | Result | Action | |
---|---|---|---|
1 | Check FET forward bias: Positive (+) probe to rectifier black socket pin 1 to: - Negative (-) probe to rectifier grey socket pin 1 - Negative (-) probe to rectifier grey socket pin 2 - Negative (-) probe to rectifier grey socket pin 3 | 0.4 V to 0.7 V | Proceed to test 2 |
Open circuit or short circuit | Replace the unit. Proceed to test 4 | ||
2 | Check diodes function forward bias: Negative (-) probe to rectifier black socket pin 3 to: - Positive (+) probe to rectifier grey socket pin 1 - Positive (+) probe to rectifier grey socket pin 2 - Positive (+) probe to rectifier grey socket pin 3 | 0.1 V to 0.3 V | Proceed to test 3 |
Open circuit or short circuit | Replace the unit. Proceed to test 4 | ||
3 | Check diodes reverse bias: Negative (-) probe to rectifier black socket pin 1 to: - Positive (+) probe to rectifier grey socket pin 1 - Positive (+) probe to rectifier grey socket pin 2 - Positive (+) probe to rectifier grey socket pin 3 Positive (+) probe to rectifier black socket pin 3 to: - Negative (-) probe to rectifier grey socket pin 1 - Negative (-) probe to rectifier grey socket pin 2 - Negative (-) probe to rectifier grey socket pin 3 | More than 1.4 V or OL on meter | Proceed to test 4 |
Less than 1.4 V or short circuit | Replace the unit. Proceed to test 4 | ||
4 | Reconnect the harness and run the engine. Check the charging voltage at 2,000 rpm: | 13 V - 15 V | Action complete - quit test |
Fault still present | Test alternator stator (see Alternator Stator) | ||
If alternator stator is serviceable, contact Triumph service |